Executive Order On Messages From The Danish Maritime Authority E, Technical Regulation On Fishing Ships Building And Equipment, Etc.

Original Language Title: Bekendtgørelse om Meddelelser fra Søfartsstyrelsen E, Teknisk forskrift om fiskeskibes bygning og udstyr m.v.

Subscribe to a Global-Regulation Premium Membership Today!

Key Benefits:

Subscribe Now for only USD$20 per month, or Get a Day Pass for only USD$4.99.
Overview (table of contents) Annex 1



Chapter I



Chapter II



Chapter III



Chapter IV



Chapter V



Chapter VI



Chapter VII



Chapter VIII



Chapter IX



Chapter X



Chapter XI



Chapter XII



Chapter XIII



Chapter XIV



Chapter XV



Chapter XVI



Chapter XVII



Chapter XVIII



Chapter IX



Chapter XX



Chapter XXI



Chapter XXII



Chapter XXIII



Chapter XXIV



Chapter XXV



Chapter XXVI



Annex Appendix 1



Annex 2



Annex 3 Appendix 1



Annex 3 Appendix 2



Annex 3 Appendix 3 The full text of the Executive order on Messages from the Danish maritime authority E, technical regulation on fishing vessels and equipment, etc., 1 building)

Under section 1, paragraph 2, sections 3-5, section 17 (2) and (5) section 28 and section 32, paragraph 8, of the law on safety at sea, see. lovbekendtgørelse nr. 654 of 15. June 2010, and Decree No. 882 of 25. August 2008 on the entry into force for Greenland of the Act on safety at sea, after consultation with Greenland's autonomy and under the authority fixed: § 1. The regulation applies to fishing vessels with a længde2) at 15 metres in length and over, as well as for fishing vessels with a dimension number at 100 or more. The regulation also applies to persons or businesses in Denmark, which reconditions fishing boats.

(2). Dimension figure is calculated by multiplying the length over all, which is the distance in a straight line between the foremost point of the bow to the aft point at the stern, with the largest width, as these objectives is demonstrated by the fishing ship's tonnage certificate.

§ 2. The detailed rules on fishing ships building and equipment, etc. are reprinted as annex to this document.

(2). Annexes annexes to chapters and appendices are: Annex 1









Provisions concerning fishing vessels construction and equipment, etc.









Chapter E In





General requirements, dated 15. December 2008.







Chapter E II





Construction, watertight integrity and equipment, dated 1. January 2003.







Chapter E III





Stability and seaworthiness, dated July 14. December 2010.







Chapter E IV





Machinery and electrical installations and periodically unattended machinery spaces, dated 1. January 2003.







Chapter E V 1 2





Fire protection, fire detection and extinguishing the fire, dated 15. December 2008.







Chapter E WE (A) (B) (C)





Protection of the crew (occupational health and safety, etc.), dated 15. December 2008.







Chapter E VII 1 2





Life-saving appliances and arrangements, dated 15. December 2008.







Chapter E VIII





Measures in the event of an emergency, Musters and drills, dated 1. February 1999.







Chapter E IX





Radio communication, dated 1. January 2005.







Chapter E X





The reassurance, dated 1. January 2005.







Chapter E XI





Regional and local provisions (annex III), dated 1. February 1999.







Chapter E XII





Living room, etc., dated 1. May 2007







Chapter E XIII





Reserved







Chapter E XIV





Reserved







Chapter E XV





Reserved







Chapter E (XVI)





Reserved







Chapter E XVII





Reserved







Chapter E XVIII





Reserved







Chapter E XIX





Reserved







Chapter E XX





Reserved







Chapter E XXI





Prevention of oil pollution from ships, dated July 14. December 2010.







Chapter E XXII





Reserved







Chapter E XXIII





Reserved







Chapter E (XXIV)





Prevention of pollution by sewage from ships, dated July 14. December 2010.







Chapter E XXV





Prevention against pollution with waste, dated July 14. December 2010.







Chapter E (XXVI)





Prevention of air pollution from ships, dated July 14. December 2010.







Appendix





Certificates, forms and equipment listings, dated 1. February 1999.





 

 







Annex 2









Council Directive 97/70/EC of 11. December 1997 on setting up a harmonized safety regime for fishing vessels with a length of 24 metres in length and over, dated 1. February 1999.







 

 







Annex 3









Torremolinos Protocol of 1993 relating to the International Conference on safety of fishing vessels, 1977, dated 1. February 1999.







 

 





Appendix 1





Annex 3, Appendix 1 are identical with Annex 1 and therefore not included here.







Appendix 2





the 1993 Protocol to the Torremolinos Convention, Appendix 2, resolutions of the Conference, dated 1. February 1999.







Appendix 3





the 1993 Protocol to the Torremolinos Convention, Appendix 3, the Conference's recommendations, dated 1. February 1999.





 

 









§ 3. Equipment for fishing vessels specified in the annexes to the regulation may be replaced by equipment conformity mark pursuant to bekendtgørelse nr. 197 of 5. March 2010 on technical regulation of equipment on ships.

§ 4. Companies or persons in Denmark, making rebuilding on Danish ships according to Chapter 1, rule 5.3, shall notify this to the Danish maritime authority.

§ 5. Violation of this Regulation shall be punished by a fine or imprisonment for up to 1 year.

(2). The penalty can rise to imprisonment for up to 2 years, if there
1) in the infringement is done harm to life or health or caused danger for them, 2) previously delivered a prohibition or injunction for the same or similar conditions, or 3) in the infringement is intentional or obtained a financial benefit for the person himself or others.

(3). It should be regarded as a specific aggravating circumstance that for young people under the age of 18 is done harm to life or health or caused danger for them, see. (2). 1. the provisions in paragraph 4. Happens not confiscation of proceeds, as is gained by the infringement, when calculating the fine, including additional fines special consideration to the size of an achieved or intended economic advantage.

(5). That can be imposed on companies, etc. (legal persons) criminal liability in accordance with the provisions of the criminal code 5. Chapter.

§ 6. If the relationship is governed by the Decree on the entry into force for Greenland of the Act on safety at sea, measures may be laid down in accordance with the criminal law for Greenland.

(2). In section 5, paragraphs 2 and 3, said conditions should be regarded as aggravating circumstances.

(3). Happens not confiscation of proceeds, cf. kriminallovens § 116, paragraph 1, which is gained by the infringement, when calculating the fine, including additional fines special consideration to the size of an achieved or intended economic advantage.

(4). Is a violation committed by companies, etc. (legal persons) may be subject to the legal person as such fine responsibility. Is the infringement committed by the State, Greenland Home rule, a municipality, a municipal community covered by § 64 in Landstingslov on municipal councils and local boards, etc., or a local Board of Directors, he or she may be subject to public authority as such fine responsibility.

(5). If the person does not reside in Greenland, or his association with the Greenlandic society, moreover, have such a looser nature, that the conditions for application of the measures is not here, can I apply or referred for prosecution in Denmark.

§ 7. The regulation shall enter into force on the 1. March 2011. Chapter XXVI shall enter into force, however, 1. January 2011.

The Danish maritime authority, the 14. December 2010 Per Sønderstrup/Søren Enemark



Annex 1 provisions concerning fishing vessels construction and equipment, etc.

Briefing on the acquis

The acquis consists of a short technical regulation and three annexes.

The regulation provides, apply, a list of contents, annexes punishment and effective date. The annexes are divided into chapters.

Unless otherwise specified in the individual chapter, to existing fishing vessels alone meet the requirements for the construction, which existed at the time of construction of the ship. Exceptions may, however, be noted in later issued the rules. Replaced booklets should therefore not be discarded.

The regulation implements in Denmark and in Greenland Council Directive 97/70/EC setting up a harmonized safety regime for fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and above, as amended by Commission Directive 2002/35/EC, as well as parts of Council Directive No. 93/103/EC concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for work on board fishing vessels.

It will in most cases suffice to read annex 1, which contains the technical requirements for fishing vessels.

Annex 1 is targeted at design engineers, shipbuilders and shipping companies and others. and includes the following: 1) Chapters I to V and VII-IX contains provisions concerning fishery ship building and equipment and are designed on the basis of Appendix 1 to Protocol to the Torremolinos Convention 1977, 1993, as amended by Council Directive 97/70/EC.



2) Chapter VI contains provisions designed on the basis of parts of Council Directive No. 93/103/EEC concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for work on board fishing vessels.



3) Chapter X is based on SOLAS, chapter V, for the reassurance.



4) Chapter XI and the appendix contains supplementary requirements for ships sailing in the northern part of Europe, and are designed on the basis of Council Directive 97/70/EC setting up a harmonized safety regime for fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and over.



5) Chapter XII contain provisions for rest rooms and drinking water installations and are designed on the basis of the ILO Convention on accommodations in fishing vessels.



6) Chapter XXI, XXIV, XXV and XXVI contains provisions concerning pollution prevention measures and is designed on the basis of the International Convention for the prevention of pollution of the Sea (MARPOL).



7) Chapters XIII-XX, XXII and XXIII is not used.



In annex 1, the Danish rules which fill or augment international rules, printed in italic font. In each case, the international provisions deleted in order to clarify the difference. [Text is derived from the directive, are written in square brackets.]

New rules are marked with underlined text.

Annex 2 is a version of Council Directive 97/70/EC of 11. December 1997 on setting up a harmonized safety regime for fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and over. The directive contains 5 Annex in the form of amendments and supplements to the 1993 Protocol to the Torremolinos Convention 1977. The annex to the directive is contained in annex 1 to the regulation.

Annex 3 is a version of the 1993 Protocol to the Torremolinos Convention 1977, including appendices 2 and 3.



1) Protocol Appendix 2 contains the Conference resolutions, addressed to Governments.



2) Protocol Appendix 3 contains a number of significant recommendations of a technical nature, some of which made compulsory in annex 1 to the regulation.

Council Directive 96/98/EC of 20. December 1996 on marine equipment is in Denmark carried out by technical regulation of equipment on ships. Directive and, consequently, the regulation applies to equipment required in 1) The International Convention for the safety of life at sea (SOLAS),



2) International lasteliniekonvention, 1966 (LL66),



3) The international regulations 1972 (COLREG),



4) the International Convention for the prevention of pollution of the sea 1973 (MARPOL).

The conventions shall apply only to a limited extent on fishing vessels. These are covered by the 1993 Protocol to the Torremolinos Convention 1977 containing independent standards for equipment for fishing vessels. Where relevant, equipment for fishing vessels, however, will be replaced by equipment which is EU conformity mark.

Amended chapters

Technical regulation

There are in § 4 introduced a requirement that companies and individuals in Denmark, which reconditions Danish fishing vessels must report this to the Danish maritime authority.

Chapter III. Stability and seaworthiness

Provisions have been introduced to fishing vessels must be equipped with a label that shows the deepest permissible draught during operation.

Chapter XXI. Prevention of oil pollution from ships

In this section implemented editorial changes as a result of a change in the definition of oil residues (sludge).

Chapter XXIV. Prevention of pollution by sewage from ships

In this section implemented minor editorial change that clarifies that sewer spildevandet from animals are also covered by these provisions.

Chapter XXV. Prevention of pollution by garbage from ships

Editorial changes have been made in this chapter.

Chapter XXVI. Prevention of air pollution from ships

The main changes to chapter has stricter requirements for discharges of SOx and NOx. These requirements are incremental improvements. The first new stricter requirements for SOx emissions enters into force 1. July 2010 in the specific emission control areas, while the first stricter requirements for NOx emissions enters into force 1. January 2011. IAPP certificate is also amended accordingly.

In addition, there are introduced the reduced requirements for the designation of the specific emission control areas, which means that in the future is expected to get more of these areas.

Further, it should be added that the NOx technical code (which is not a part of Messages B) also is revised. EIAPP certificate has similarly changed.







 

 





Messages from the Danish maritime authority (E)



 





Chapter hæfternes dating in 2005, releases 1/2 1999



 



 

 







Date for under-written









15-12-98









24/9-01









27/12/02









8/12/04









1/5-05









20/9-06









24/4-07









15/12/08
14-12-10











Annex 1





 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





E I





1/2-99





1/2-02





1/1-03



 

 

 

 



15/12/08



 





(E) (II)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 

 





E III





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 



14-12-10







(E) (IV)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 

 





E V 1)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 



15/12/08



 





E V 2)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 

 





E WE A





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 



1/10/06



 



15/12/08



 





E WE B



 

 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 

 





E WE C



 

 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 

 





E VII 1)





1/2-99





1/2-02





1/1-03



 

 

 

 



15/12/08



 





E VII 2)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 

 

 

 





(E) (VIII)





1/2-99



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





E IX





1/2-99



 

 



1/1-05



 

 

 

 

 





E X





1/2-99



 

 



1/1-05



 

 

 

 

 





(E) (XI)





1/2-99





1/1-02



 

 

 

 

 

 

 





(E) (XII)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 

 



1/5-07



 

 





E XIII – XX





Reserveret



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





E XXI 3)





1/2-99



 



1/1-03



 

 



1/10/06





1/5-07



 



14-12-10







E XXII-XXIII Reserved



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





E XXIV





1/2 to 99 1)



 



1/1-03 1)





1/1-05



 

 

 

 



14-12-10







E XXV





1/2-99 2)



 



1/1-03-2)





1/1-05



 

 

 

 



14-12-10







E XXVI 4)



 

 

 

 



1/5-05





1/10/06
1/5-07



 



14-12-10







Appendix





1/2-99



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 







Annex 2







1/2-99



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 







Annex 3







1/2-99



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





Appendix 1





Identical to the Appendix of annex 1, and therefore not included here



 





Appendix 2





1/2-99



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





Appendix 3





1/2-99



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 









1) Chapter booklet listed as E XX 2) Chapter booklet listed as E XXIV 3) the booklet, announcements (D) and (E) 4) Common booklet, announcements (B), (D) and (E) Chapter in



CHAPTER I General provisions Rule 1





The scope of the









Rule 1a









Application of recognised organisations (classification societies)









Rule 2





Definitions







Rule 3





Waivers







Rule 4





Equivalence







Rule 5





Repairs, modifications and changes







Rule 6





Vision







Rule 7





Issuing or endorsement on the certificates for ships of 24 metres in length and over









Rule 7a









Issuing or endorsement on the certificates for vessels under 24 m











Rule 7b









Logbook









Rule 8





The issue of and endorsement on the certificates by another Government







Rule 9





Those certificates and equipment listing form







Rule 10





Availability of certificates







Rule 11





Certificates, and speed the validity











Rule 1 scope (1)

In each rule, it specified the extent to which the rule applies to both new and existing fishing vessels. Unless otherwise expressly specified, find the requirements applicable to new ships, see. rule 2, no. (1). Rule 1a application of recognised organisations (classification societies)



(1)

Where the Administration is not in this acquis has set national standards for an area, to new fishing vessels be designed, built and maintained in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation with account of hull structure, strength, material, dimensions, anchors, chains, windlass and tow ropes, machinery, boiler plants, all other technical installations and electrical installations.



(2) [For existing fishing vessels shall apply the standards for design, construction and maintenance of hull, main and auxiliary machinery, electrical and automatic plants shall be the rules that applied at the time of their building. These rules must be specified for classification by a recognized organization or used by an administration that can be equated with an EU administration.]

(3) where in this regulatory framework is required, to fishing vessels must meet the requirements to the satisfaction of the Administration, the fishing ship in each case comply with the Administration's national standard or interpretation of the relevant provision. In the absence of this acquis exist national standards for the area in question, or the Administration has not laid down any interpretation of that rule, the rules of a recognised organisation must be used where they exist.

(4)

Where a fishing vessel in its design or use deviating from the principles taken into account for the drafting of this legislation, or if the number of persons working on board the ship, exceeds the crew responsible for the ship's normal navigation, ongoing maintenance, operation of machinery, the capture of fish and dietary meals, etc. with more than 12 persons, who at the time of the ship's construction, equipment and operation are taken into account, in order to ensure that the ship conforms to the provisions of § 2 of the law on safety at sea. The Danish maritime authority can in conjunction therewith the issuance of a clearance certificate conditional permission of that ship in whole or in part to live up to the rules that apply to passenger ships.

Regulation 2 Definitions ' fishing vessel ' means any vessel used for commercial catch of fish, whales, seals, walruses, shellfish or other living resources from the sea, including ships fitted as fishing vessels and can process the catch, or if the nationality certificate is provided with letters and number.



(1) ' new [fish] ship ' means a vessel for which: (1) (a) the contract for new construction or major renovation is entered into the 1. January 1999 or later;

(1) (b) the contract for new construction or major renovation is concluded before den1. January 1999, and which is delivered three years or more after that date; or (1) (c) in the absence of a building contract;

the keel is laid; or

construction identifiable with a specific ship begins; or

Assembly has commenced comprising at least 50 tonnes or 1% of the total estimated weight, if the latter is less

the 1. February 1999 or later.

(1a)

' Ship ' means a fishing vessel built for which



(1a) (a)

the contract for the construction or major renovation is entered into before, on or after the specified time,



(1a) (b) in the absence of a building contract,



the keel is laid; or



construction identifiable with a specific ship begins; or



Assembly has commenced comprising at least 50 tonnes or 1% of the total estimated weight, if the latter is less at the specified time.



(2) ' existing ship ' means a fishing vessel which is not a new ship.

(2a)

» All fishing vessels ' means that both new and existing fishing vessels regardless of build time is governed by the relevant provision.



(3) ' approved ' means approved by the administration.
(4) ' Herd ' means the master and any person who is employed or engaged in any capacity on board a ship in connection with the ship's company.

(5) ' Length (L) ' should be calculated as 96% of the total length on a waterline at 85% of the minimum depth (moulded) measured from the køllinien or as the length from the front end of the bow to the rorstammens axis, calculated at that waterline if that length is the largest. In ships with a rake of keel, the waterline on which the length is measured shall be parallel to the konstruktionsvandlinien.

(6) ' the front and aft perpendikulærer ' must go through the front and aft extremes of the length (L). The forward perpendicular shall pass through the intersection of the front edge of the bow and the waterline on which the length is taken.

(7) ' width (w) ' is the ship's maximum width measured amidships to the outer edge of the frame in a ship with garment of metal and to the outer edge of the garment in a ship with an outer garment of other material.

(8) (a) ' snagless molded ' Depth is the vertical distance measured amidships from the køllinien to the edge of the deck beams on the working deck in tables.

(8) (b) in ships where the connection between the ship's side and deck is rounded, moulded depth shall be measured to the intersection between the tyre and klædningens extension, since the lines extended, as if the tire and garment was made of straight lines.

(8) (c) If the working deck is furnished with steps, and the lifted part of the deck extends over the point where the moulded depth shall be measured to moulded depth must a line that extended from the lowest part of the deck in parallel with the lifted part.

(9) ' Depth ' (D) is depth moulded measured amidships.

(10) ' Deepest nedlastningsvandlinie ' is the waterline corresponding to the maximum allowable draught during use.

(11) ' amidships ' is the midpoint of the length (L).

(12) ' Middle frame ' is the cross-section of the hull, which goes through the midship and is determined by the skæringslinien between konstruktionslinie and a vertical plane at right angles to the hull at the waterline and centerlinieplanerne.

(13) ' Køllinie ' is the line parallel to the keel slope, as midship runs through: (13) (a) over the edge of the keel or skæringslinien between the inside of the shell plating and keel, if a skinnekøl stepping forward of this line in a ship with an outer garment of metal; or (13) (b) the outer edge of spund nobody knows the keel of a ship with the outer garment of wood or composite hulls; or (13) (c) intersection between a smooth continuation of the outer klædningens outer surface at the bottom and the centerline of a ship with a plating of materials other than wood and metal.

(14) ' Baseline ' is a horizontal line that amidships intersects køllinien.

(15) ' working deck ' is usually the lowest complete tire over the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie, from which fishing takes place. In ships with two or more complete decks can the Administration approve a lower deck as the working deck, provided that the deck is situated above the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie.

(16) ' poop ' is the covered building on the working deck which extends from side to side of the ship, or if the pages are not more than 0, 04B within the shell plating.

(17) ' Closed ' is a superstructure superstructure, which comply with the following: (17) (a) The aflukkende constraint bulkheads shall be of sound construction.

(17) (b) Any access openings in these bulkheads shall be provided with permanently attached means weathertight doors of a magnitude similar to the unpierced part of construction; the doors must be operable from both sides; and (17) (c) Other openings in the superstructure sides or ends shall be fitted with efficient, weathertight means of closure.

A bridge or poop must not be regarded as closed, unless it provides access for the crew to reach machinery and other jobs within such buildings along alternative routes, which are available at any time, when skotåbningerne is closed.

(18) ' Overbygningsdæk ' is the full or partial decks that make up the bodice of a superstructure, a deckhouse or other structure that is placed at a height of not less than 1.8 meters above the working deck. If this height is less than 1.8 metres, over half of such deckhouses or other structures shall be treated in the same way as the working deck.

(19) ' the height of a building or other construction ' is the smallest vertical distance, measured in tables from over the edge of a building or a building deck beams to the top of the tyre working beams.

(20)» Weathertight "means that water is not under any sea and weather conditions must be able to penetrate into the ship.

(21) ' Waterproof ' means being able to prevent water penetrating through the structure in any direction under a water pressure equivalent to the surrounding structure is intended.

(22) ' Collision bulkhead watertight bulkhead, there is a ' go up to the working deck in the front part of the ship, and which satisfies the following conditions: (22) (a) the bulkhead shall be located at a distance from the forward perpendicular: (22) (a) (i) of not less than 0, 05 l and not more than 0, 08L on the ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over;

(22) (a) (ii) of not less than 0, 05 l and not more than 0, 05 l plus 1.35 meters on ships less than 45 metres in length, unless otherwise permitted by the administration. [In ships over 24 metres in length, but less than 45, built after 1 January 2003, the bulkhead be positioned at a distance from the forward perpendicular of not less than 0, 05 l and not more than 0.05 L plus 1.35 m.]

(22) (a) (iii) in no event less than 2.0 metres; on ships less than 24 metres in length but not less than 1.0 metres.

(22) (b) if the answer to any part of the underwater hull extends beyond the forward perpendicular, URf.eks. a bulbstævn, in point (a) provided distance shall be measured from a point mid-way of the length that extends beyond the forward perpendicular, or 0.05 L from a point forward of the forward perpendicular, whichever that may be at least ...

(22) (c) the bulkhead may have shifts and recesses, provided that these are within the limits prescribed in paragraph (a).

(23)

' Organization ' means the International Maritime Organization (IMO).



(24) ' Administration ' means the Government of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly. For Danish ships means the Administration Maritime Agency, unless otherwise specified.

(25)

' Recognized organization ' is one of the Danish maritime authority approved classification society in accordance with the provisions of Council Directive No. 94/57/EC, as amended by Commission Directive No. 97/58/EC, which performs tasks relating to the assessment of safety on behalf of the Danish maritime authority.



(26)

' ISO ' means the International Standard Organisation

1).

Rule 3 Waivers (1) the Administration may exempt a vessel which is equipped with brand new appliances, from the provisions of chapters II, III, IV, V, VI and VII, when the application of these provisions can be a serious obstacle to the research work with regard to the development of these devices and their installation in ships. Any such ship shall, however, comply with the safety requirements which, in the Administration's estimates are sufficient for the voyages, the ship is intended, and which can guarantee the ship's general security.

(2) Derogations from the provisions of chapter IX shall be dealt with in rule IX/3, and derogations from chapter X shall be dealt with in rule X/2.

(3) the Administration may exempt a ship solely engaged in fishing near by its home country's coast, from the provisions of this annex, if it considers that its use of an unfair and impractical, taking into account the distance between the ship's workspace and its base port in its own country, type of vessel, the weather conditions and the navigational risks everything on condition that it complies with the safety requirements which, in the Administration's opinion is adequate for the service for which the ship is intended, and which is of such a nature that the ship's general security is safeguarded.

(4) an Administration, which grant a waiver pursuant to this rule [for a fishing vessel covered by Council Directive No. 97/70/EC] shall transmit [the Commission] the details of this to the extent necessary to justify the level of safety is maintained in an appropriate way, and [the Commission shall then act in accordance with the procedure referred to in article 4 of Council Directive 97/70/EC;]

Equivalence rule 4 (1) Where these regulations require that a particular accessory, material, device or apparatus, or type thereof, shall be fitted or fitted in a ship, or to take a particular measure or provision of specific requirements for building and construction, the Administration may allow that there be placed or fitted another accessory, material, device or apparatus or type thereof or to take another measure in the ship, or the ship is built or constructed in some other way, if the tests thereof or otherwise, is satisfied that such accessories, material, device or apparatus or type thereof or measure or building and construction is at least as effective as that required by legislation.
(2) Any Administration as compensation allows another accessory, material, device or apparatus or type thereof or measure [for a fishing vessel covered by Council Directive No. 97/70/EC] shall transmit [Commission] details, accompanied by a report on any made testing, [and the Commission must then act in accordance with the procedure referred to in article 4 of Council Directive No. 97/70/EC;]

Rule 5 Repairs, alterations and modifications of a (1) a ship that is the subject of repairs, modifications or alterations and fitting out of context thus, must continue to fulfil at least the requirements already in force for the ship.

(2) Repairs, modifications and alterations of larger scale and equipment in connection must only comply with the requirements for new ships as far as the of the repair, change and change is included, and to the extent that the Administration believes that it is reasonable and practical.

(3)

A ship which has been changed main engine or undergone major repairs, modifications or alterations, such as change, which causes changes in the ship's tonnage certificate referred to in kendingsmål or significant changes to the ship's centre of gravity or of the ship's layout, must, before the ship goes into vessels, have drawn up new stability information and undergo vision. A ship that undergoes a change or modification that entails that the ship no longer covered by the existing length limits , shall apply to the new part of the ship and the operational and equipment requirements meet the requirements for a new ship. To the extent that the Danish maritime authority considers it reasonable and practical, the existing part of the ship comply with the provisions, as the ship was supposed to have been met if it originally had its new size, when it was built.

Rule 6 Syn2) (1) every ship shall be subject to surveys as specified below: (1) (a) an initial survey before the ship is put in service or before the certificate prescribed in rule 7 shall be issued for the first time. The vision must include a full examination of the ship's construction, stability, machinery, events and materials, including the outside of the hull and the inner and outer side of boilers and equipment, in so far as the ship is covered by this annex. This vision must be carried out in such a way that it gives assurance that the construction, material and material dimensions of hull, boilers and other pressure vessels with accessories, main and auxiliary machinery, electrical installations, radio installations, including those used in life-saving, fire protection, fire detection and fire-fighting systems, life-saving appliances and arrangements, the ship's navigation equipment, nautical publications and other equipment fully complies with the requirements of this annex. The sight must also provide an assurance that the workmanship of all parts of the ship and its equipment is in all respects satisfactory and that the ship is equipped with the lanterns, funds for the emission of sound signals and distress signals required by this annex and the applicable international regulations. Where the arrangements for the transfer of pilot fitted, they must also appear in order to ensure that they are in safe working order and meet the concerned provisions in the applicable international Convention for the safety of life at sea.

(1) (b) periodical survey at intervals as specified below: (1) (b) (i) four years with respect to the ship's structure, including the exterior of the ship's hull and machinery as specified in chapters II, III, IV, V and VI. In ships with a length of less than 24 metres, this vision also includes the ship's radio installations, including those used in rescue funds as referred to in chapters VII and IX. As mentioned in regulation 11 (1) can the period be extended by one year, provided that the ship seems on the outside and inside, in so far as is reasonable and practicable;

(1) (b) (ii) two years in terms of ship's equipment, as referred to in chapters II, III, IV, V, VI, VII and X; and (1) (b) (iii) a year with regard to the ship's radio installations in ships with a length of 24 metres in length and over, including those used in rescue funds as referred to in chapters VII and IX.

Periodical survey must be carried out in such a way as to ensure that the topics referred to in paragraph (a), comply fully with the concerned provisions in this annex, that the said equipment is in good working order, and the stability information is readily available on board.

If the validity of it pursuant to rule 7 or 8 issued certificate can be extended as specified in rule 11 (2) or (4), the interval between the periodic survey shall be extended accordingly.

(1) (c) in addition to the periodical survey required in paragraph (b) (i), ships, [which are built of materials other than wood], be subjected to intermediate vision with regard to the ship's construction and machinery at intervals of two years [plus/minus three months. For ships of wood sets the Administration intervals for intermediate surveys.] The sight must be carried out in such a way as to ensure that no changes have been made, which would have impaired the safety of the ship or crew.

(1) (d) periodical survey as required by paragraph (b) (ii) and (iii) and intermediate vision as prescribed in paragraph (c) shall be endorsed the certificates prescribed in rule 7 or 8.

(1) (e)

Vision prescribed in (b) (i) may be held up to three months before the date of the certificate of conformity specified in the vision. Vision prescribed in (b) (ii) and (b) (iii) may be held within a period of three months before or after the certificate of conformity specified in the viewing date.

(1) (f)

For a great fishing vessel Danish maritime authority may allow a prescribed vision in whole or in part may be omitted, as long as the fishing ship remains obvious.



(2) (a) the inspection and survey of ships shall, in respect of the enforcement of the provisions of these regulations, as well as the granting of exceptions to that rule, is carried out by Administration officials. However, the Administration may entrust inspections and surveys to the designated supervisor or to recognised organisations.

(2) (b) The Administration shall appoint the supervisor or recognised organisations to carry out inspections and surveys as referred to in point (a), shall, as a minimum, empower any nominated supervisor or recognized organization to: (2) (b) (i) to require made repairs to a ship; and (2) (b) (ii) to carry out surveys and inspections at the request of the appropriate authorities of a port State.

The Administration must notify [the Commission in accordance with article 4 of Council Directive 94/57/EC, as amended most recently by the European Parliament and of the Council Directive 2001/105/EC], concerning the designated supervisor or recognised organisations.

(2) (c) When a designated supervisor or recognized organization determines that the ship or its equipment does not correspond substantially to the information contained in the certificate, or that the ship is in such a condition that it is not suitable to go to sea without danger to the ship or persons on board, that supervisor or organization immediately ensure that steps are taken to a rectification of the situation and notify the Administration in a timely manner. If not taken such steps to a rectification of the situation, should the relevant certificate shall be withdrawn, and the Administration must be informed immediately; are the ship in a port belonging to another party, the competent authorities of the port State must also be informed immediately. When an official of the administration or a designated supervisor or a recognized organization has notified the appropriate authorities of the port State, the Government of the port State concerned shall provide the concerned officer, supervisor or organization all the necessary assistance for the performance of their duties under this regulation. The Government of the port State concerned shall, where appropriate, ensure that the ship does not proceed to sea until it can go to sea or leave the port to sail to the appropriate repair yard without danger to the ship or persons on board.

(2) (d) the administration shall in all cases fully guarantee that the inspection and the sight is carried out effectively and carefully, and must ensure that the necessary measures are taken for the fulfilment of this duty.

(3) (a) in order to ensure that the ship is in all respects will remain fit to proceed to sea without danger to the ship or persons on board the ship and its equipment shall be maintained so as to comply with the provisions of these regulations.

(3) (b) after the completion of a vision in accordance with these rules shall not without the permission of the Administration made no change in the constructional conditions, machinery, equipment or other circumstances that are covered by the sight.

(3) (c) When the ship is hit by an accident, or a defect is detected, and the accident or defect affects the safety of the ship or its rescue funds or other equipment efficiency or complete mode, the master or owner as soon as possible make notification to the Administration, the designated supervisor or the recognised organisation responsible for issuing the relevant certificate, which must ensure that investigations are undertaken in order to ascertain whether it is necessary to organise a survey as required by these rules. If the ship is in a port of another Contracting Government, the master or owner shall also report immediately to the relationship to the competent authorities of the port State, the designated supervisor or recognized organization must satisfy itself that such reporting is done.

Rule 7 Issuance of or endorsement on the certificates for ships of 24 metres in length and over
(1) (a) a certificate referred to as a [certificate] for fishing vessels must be made sight is issued to a ship which complies with the relevant requirements of this annex. [Certificate must be supplemented by a record of equipment]. In addition, a clearance certificate is issued after made sight permit.

(1) (b) When a ship is granted a waiver pursuant to and in accordance with the provisions of this annex, who – in addition to the certificate referred to in point (a) and record of equipment – issued a certificate called an exemption certificate for fishing vessels.

(2) The certificates referred to in paragraph (1) shall be issued or endorsed either by the administration or by any person or organization duly authorized for this purpose by the administration. In all cases the Administration accepts full responsibility for the certificate.

(3)

Ships covered by these rules, after a concrete assessment of the Danish maritime authority be provided with signs, spread, labelling and marking to an extent that is tailored to the individual ship size and shipping area.



Rule 7 (a) issuing or endorsement on the certificates for vessels under 24 m



(1)

For fishing vessels under 24 metres in length, which complies with the relevant requirements of this annex, shall be issued after made a clearance certificate permit vision boxes for endorsement of periodic surveys, etc.

Rule 7 b Logbook (1)

Fishing vessels covered by these regulations must have a Logbook with the Appendix. Supervisory book, published by the Danish maritime authority, must be carried out in accordance with the instructions in the book printed and stored on board.

(2) waivers and equivalencies granted from the requirements of this law shall be entered in the ship's logbook or stored in the appendix to this.

Rule 8 the issuance of and endorsement on the certificates by another Government (1) A party may, at the request of the other party to let a ship sight and, if it is satisfied that the requirements pursuant to the requirements of this annex are fulfilled, issue or cause to issue certificates to the ship and, if necessary, endorse or authorize the endorsement on the ship's certificates in accordance with the provisions of this annex.

(2) a copy of the certificate and of vision as soon as possible, the report shall be sent to the Administration, which has made the request.

(3) Any thus issued certificate must contain a statement that it is issued at the request of the other Administration, and it must have the same validity and recognised in the same way as certificates issued pursuant to rule 7.

Rule 9 of those certificates and equipment listing form

Conformity certificates and equipment records shall be drawn up in a form corresponding to the models contained in the appendix to this annex. If the language used is neither English or French, should the wording include a translation into one of these languages, unless the Administration considers it unnecessary taking into account the ship's navigation area. Aviation authorisation for vessels with a length of less than 24 metres is not included in the Appendix.

Rule 10 Certificates availability

Certificates issued in accordance with regulation 7 or 8 must at all times be immediately available for viewing on board.

Regulation 11 Certificate and validity of authorisations (1) A vessel [certificate] for fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and above and an Aviation licence for vessels with a length of less than 24 metres shall be issued for a maximum period of four years and shall not be extended by more than a year depending on the periodic and interim surveys required held pursuant to rule 6 (1) (b) and (c) with the exception of What is prescribed in paragraph (2), (3) and (4). An exemption certificate for fishing vessels shall not be valid for longer than the period of validity of the certificate of conformity for fishing vessels. Where a survey is carried out within the in regulation 6 (2) (e) the period referred to, can new certificate and new aviation authorization is issued with a validity from the date of issue for four years after the expiration of the certificate or the navigability licence which the new certificate or the new aviation authorization replaces. Where a sight as prescribed in rule 6 (b) (1) is made after the expiry of the permit, or certificate of conformity if the airline can a new certificate of compliance or a new Fartsstilladelse only in exceptional circumstances be issued with a length of more than four years from the expiration date of the certificate of conformity or the Navigability licence which it replaces.

(2) If a ship, at the time when its certificate expires or is terminated, is not in a port in the country whose flag the ship is entitled to fly the flag State concerned, may extend the period of validity of the certificate but this extension shall be granted only to make it possible for the ship to complete its voyage to a port, or to the flag State of a port where it should appear, and then only in cases where it seems right and proper.

(3) no certificate shall be extended for this reason with no longer than five months, and a ship for which the certificate has been given such an extension, is not upon arrival at a port in the country whose flag the ship is entitled to fly, or to the port where it must seem, entitled by virtue of such extension to leave that port without having obtained a new certificate.

(4) a certificate, the validity of which has not been extended under the provisions of paragraph (2) may be extended by the Administration for a grace period of up to one month from the expiry date indicated on the certificate.

(5) the validity of a certificate issued in accordance with regulation 7 or 8 shall cease in any of the following cases: (5) (a) if the prescribed survey has not been completed within the time limits specified in regulation 6;

(5) (b) if the certificate is not endorsed in accordance with these rules;

(5) (c) at the ship's transfer to a different state flag. A new certificate shall only be issued when the Government for issuing the new certificate, are satisfied that the ship complies with the requirements referred to in rule 6 (3) (a) and (b). In the case of transfer between Contracting Governments should the Government of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly, had earlier if there is a request to that effect within three months after the transfer has taken place, as soon as possible send the Administration copies of the certificates that ship had before the transfer, as well as copies of the relevant survey reports, where available.



Chapter II



CHAPTER II construction, watertight integrity and EQUIPMENT Rule 1





Construction







Rule 2





Watertight doors







Rule 3





The hull watertight integrity (integrity)







Rule 4





Weather-tight doors







Rule 5





Hatch openings covered with trædæksler







Rule 6





Hatch openings covered with covers of other than wood







Rule 7





Machinery space openings







Rule 8





Other deck openings







Rule 9





Fans







Rule 10





Trachea







Rule 11





Homing devices







Rule 12





Sidescuttles and Windows







Rule 13





Inlet and outlet ports as well as chutes Rule 14





Wash ports







Rule 15





Anchor and mooring equipment







[Rule 16





Working deck under an enclosed superstructure







Rule 17





Draught marks







Rule 18





Tanks for fish in refrigerated (RSW) or chilled (CSW) sea water]
Rule 1 Construction (1) Strength and construction of the hull, superstructures, deckhouses, maskinrumscasing, recessions and all other structures and marine equipment must be sufficient to withstand all foreseeable conditions during the ship's intended destination and [must be in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation,] see. Chapter I, rule 1A.

The draft

1) for dimensioning of the hull strength, etc. must be set equal to ' Depth moulded ', as defined in I/2 (8). For a ship with several decks can the Administration approve a lower deck as the basis for calculation the maximum draught. Where a lower working deck not extending over the whole length of the ship, shall be laid down in the draft, however, selection to the upper deck.

(2) the hull of ships, which are intended to be used during icy conditions, must be enhanced in accordance with the expected sailing conditions and work area according to the following guidelines: (2) (a)

All new fishing vessels with voyages to Greenland should be isforstærket.



(2) (b) For fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later, this must be in accordance with a recognized organization's isklasse, which are at least equivalent to the Det Norske Veritas ' isklasse Ice-1B or equivalent isklasse depending on the application. A higher isklasse should be considered if the ship has to sail, where severe ice occurs, or fish in isområder. The severity of isklassen and reinforcements shall be determined in each case in cooperation between the Danish maritime authority and the recognised organisation, where the ship is klasset, as well as the company.

(2) (c)

Fishing vessels built on or after 1. August 1990 or later, but before 1. January 2003, with voyages to Greenland should be isforstærket in relation to the ship's use. Fishing vessels built of steel or equivalent must as a minimum have the hull construction, rudder, screw, etc. reinforced in accordance with a recognised organisation isklasse, which corresponds to the Det Norske Veritas ' isklasse ICE-C or a similar isklasse with a recognised organisation. Who can determine the severity of the isklassen and the reinforcements in each case take into account the local geographical limitations and icy conditions and any seasonal limitations.

(2) (d)

Existing fishing vessels originally not built for speed on Greenland, but later moved (switching navigation area) to Greenland from somewhere else in the Commonwealth, isforstærkes in relation to the ship's future use as set out above in points (a) to (c).



(3) Bulkheads, closing devices and means of closure for the openings in such bulkheads as well as methods for testing thereof must be in accordance with the Administration's demands. All tanks, watertight bulkheads, water-and weather-tight doors as well as rudder and screw the nozzles etc. must pressure or density shall be tested according to the applicable norms and practices of a recognized organization. Ships constructed of material other than wood must have a collision bulkhead and, as a minimum, have waterproof bulkheads bounding main gear compartment. Such bulkheads shall be carried to the working deck. In ships, which are built of wood, which also incorporated such bulkheads, which, as far as practicable, shall be watertight.

(4) Pipe which passes through the collision bulkhead shall be fitted with suitable valves operable from a position above the working deck, and the valve housing must be fitted to the collision bulkhead inside the forepeak on. There must not be designed doors, manholes, vents or other openings in the collision bulkhead below the working deck. Where pipes, scuppers, electric cables, etc. pass through watertight subdivision bulkheads, measures must be taken to ensure the watertight integrity of the maintained. Valves which do not form part of a piping system shall not be found in watertight subdivision bulkheads.

(5) If there is placed a long superstructure ahead, should be placed on the collision bulkhead weathertight up to the deck almost above the working deck. The extension of the bulkhead need not be fitted directly above the bulkhead below, provided it is placed within the regulation I/2 (22) limits, and the part of the tyre that represents the offset is made effectively weathertight.

(6) the number of openings in the collision bulkhead above the working deck shall be limited to the minimum compatible with the ship's purpose and normal use. Such openings shall be able to be closed weathertight and to be on fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later be hinged on the cutting edge, so they open against the order.

(7) in vessels of 75 m in length and above shall as far as possible, incorporated a watertight double bottom between the collision bulkhead and the afterpeak bulkhead.

Rule 2 watertight doors (1) the number of openings in watertight bulkheads, as required in regulation 1 (3), shall be limited to the minimum compatible with the ship's general layout and operational needs; the openings shall be fitted with watertight closures, which meets the [requirements of a recognized organization.] Watertight doors shall have equivalent strength as the adjacent unpierced structure.

(2) in ships with a length of less than 45 metres can such doors be of the hinged type, which must be operable from both sides of the door, and should normally be kept closed at sea. A notice on the door must be kept closed at sea, shall be placed on each side of the door.

(3) in ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over shall be watertight doors sliding doors: (3) (a) in premises where it is intended to be able to open them at sea, and if they are fitted with a threshold below the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie, unless the Administration considers it to be impracticable or unnecessary taking into account the ship type and use. [Exceptions to this rule, as allowed by a Member State, shall be subject to approval in accordance with the procedures contained in article 4 of this directive; and]

(3) (b) in the lower part of a machinery space from which there is access to a shaft tunnel. In other cases, watertight doors shall be of the hinged type.

(4) sliding watertight doors must be operable by a heeling the ship at 15 degrees to each side.

(5) sliding watertight doors shall, whether operated by hand or otherwise, be operable from each side of the door; in ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over shall be such doors also could be operated by remote control from an accessible position above the working deck, with the exception of doors fitted in crew spaces.

(6) There shall be at all remote control seats be placed indicators showing whether a sliding door is open or closed.

Rule 3 the hull watertight integrity (integrity) (1) Exterior openings need to be closed, so that water is prevented from entering into the ship. Deck openings, which must be open during fishing, should normally be positioned near the ship's centreline. However, the Administration may approve other events, if it considers that the safety of the ship is not thereby impaired.

(2) Fishing freezer trawlers shall be power-operated on and trapdoors could be checked (controlled/opens/closes) from a position that allows unobstructed view over lemmenes function.

Rule 4 weathertight doors (1) All access openings in bulkheads in enclosed superstructures and other exterior structures, through which water could penetrate and bring the ship in danger, must be fitted with doors that are permanently connected to the bulkhead, framed and braced, so that the whole structure has the same strength as the unpierced structure and maintain adequate watertight integrity, when it is closed. The means to ensure that these means of closure is weathertight shall consist of packs and amplification devices, or other similar means and must be permanently affixed to the bulkhead or the doors and must be positioned in such a way that they can be operated from either side of the bulkhead. The Administration can, when this happens without thereby jeopardizing the crew's safety, allow the doors to the freezer compartment can be opened only from one side, provided that an appropriate alarm system is fitted to prevent persons will be enclosed in these spaces.

(2) the height above deck of the thresholds in such doors, in downturns, builds and maskinrumscasinger, which provides direct access to parts of it for the weather and sea exposed deck shall be at least 600 mm on the working deck and at least 300 mm on the superstructure deck. Where practical experience has shown that it is entitled, and the Administration agrees, may these heights, except in doorways, giving direct access to machinery spaces shall be reduced to not less than 380 mm and 150 mm, respectively.

Rule 5 Hatch openings covered with trædæksler (1) the height above deck of the hatch coaming must be at least 600 mm on exposed parts of the working deck and at least 300 mm on the superstructure deck.

(2) Wood dækslers thickness must have a margin for wear due to tough treatment. In any case, the thickness of these covers must be at least 4 mm for each 100 mm supported span, however, at least 40 mm, and the width of the load-bearing surface must be not less than 65 mm.

(3) measures to ensure dækslers weather wood density must be taken after [the provisions specified in annex I, regulation 14 and 15, in the international lasteliniekonvention, 1966.2)]

Rule 6 Hatch openings covered with covers of other than wood
(1) the height above deck of the hatch coamings shall be as specified in regulation 5 (1). Where practical experience has shown that it is justified, and if the Administration agrees, can these karmes height is reduced, or sills can be completely omitted, provided that the safety of the ship is not thereby impaired. In this case, hatch openings are kept as small as is practicable and the covers are placed permanently attached by means of hinges or similar and could quickly be closed and skalkes by equally effective arrangements to the satisfaction of the administration.

(2) calculation of strength to be taken into account that the hatch covers are subjected to the weight of the load, it is intended to carry on them, or the following static load, what may be the greatest: (2) (a) 10.0 kN/m2 in ships with a length of 24 metres and less, (2) (b) 17.0 kN/m2 in ships with a length of 100 m in length and over.

For intermediate lengths shall loads shall be determined by linear interpolation. The Administration may reduce the calculated loads to not less than 75% of the above figures for covers to the hatch openings located on the superstructure deck on a place that is located aft of a point located 0, 25 l from the forward perpendicular.

(3) where the covers are made of mild steel, the maximum load, calculated in accordance with paragraph (2) multiplied by 4.25 not exceed minimum tensile strength of the material. This load must not exceed 0.0028 nedbøjningen times the breadth.

(4) Covers made of materials other than mild steel shall have at least one corresponding strength which covers made of mild steel, and their design must be sufficiently rigid to ensure weathertight at the in point (2) specified loads.

(5) all covers must be fitted with feed rates and packages that are sufficient to ensure weathertight, or with other equivalent arrangements which meet the Administration's demands.

Rule 7 machinery space openings (1) machinery space openings shall be enclosed and sealed by casings of a magnitude similar to the outside of the building. Exterior access openings therein must have doors that comply with the requirements of rule 4.

(2) Other apertures than the access openings shall have covers of a magnitude similar to the unpierced structure, which is permanently affixed thereon with the opportunity to be able to be closed weathertight.

Rule 8 Other deck openings (1) Where it is of major importance for the mechanical operation, can place a luger smooth with covered by screw, bayonet or similar type and manholes provided that they can be closed watertight, and such attachments are placed permanently at that location. Having regard to the size and distribution of the openings and close the metal against metal reflectors art can closures are used, provided that the Administration may accept that they are effectively watertight.

(2) Other apertures than hatchways, machinery space openings, manholes and smooth deck openings in work or superstructure deck shall be protected by closed superstructures fitted with weathertight doors, or what corresponds to it. The location shall be located as close to the ship's centreline as practicable.

There are fribords and/or overbygningsdæk of a fish-and/or iselevator, these lifts through a deck pass transferred up at a height of at least 900 mm above the working deck and superstructure deck and end with a satisfactory seal around the lift. Penetrations must be braced and dimensioned as a hatch coaming. Iselevatorer must be at the top is supplied with a reasonable close hinged flap, if under the edge of at least 1200 mm above the deck.

Rule 9 Fans (1) in ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over shall be the height above deck of ventilator coamings, except machinery space ventilator coamings shall be at least 900 mm on the working deck and at least 760 mm on the superstructure deck. In ships with a length of less than 45 m, height 760 mm respectively, these karmes and 450 mm. Height above deck of the machinery space ventilator openings, [needed for constant air supply to the engine room and by the needs of immediate supply of generator room, must generally be in accordance with regulation II/9 (3). When this due to the ship's size and layout is not feasible, can however be accepted less sill heights but in any case not less than 900 mm above the working deck and overbygningsdæk, provided uninterrupted air supply to the relevant compartment is secured by weathertight means of closure, which is in accordance with regulation II/9 (2), and is combined with other appropriate device to ensure an uninterrupted adequate supply of air to rooms.]

(2) the Ventilator coamings shall be of a magnitude similar to the adjacent structure and must be able to be closed weathertight with closing devices are fixed on the fan or the adjacent structure. If a ventilator coaming is more than 900 mm high, it must be independently stiffened.

(3) in ships with a length of 45 m or more is closing devices are not required for the fans, if the sills are higher than 4.5 metres above the working deck or 2.3 m above the superstructure deck, unless it is expressly required by the administration. In ships with a length of less than 45 m is the closing devices are not required for the fans, if the sills are higher than 3.4 m above the working deck or more than 1.7 m above the superstructure deck. If the Administration considers it unlikely that water could penetrate into the vessel through the engine-room ventilators, sealing system for such fans can be omitted.

Rule 10 (1) Where the windpipe trachea to tanks and empty space extends above the working deck or superstructure deck shall the exposed parts of the pipes be of a magnitude similar to the adjacent structure, and be fitted with suitable protection. Air pipes shall be provided with means of closure that is permanently placed on the tube or on the adjacent structure.

(2) Air tube height from the deck up to the point from which water can penetrate down, must be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450 mm on the superstructure deck. The Administration may allow a reduction of an air tube height to avoid obstructing fisheries operation.

Rule 11 Locator devices (1) Locator devices meeting the Administration's requirements, shall be provided for: (1) (a) bilge wells/gutter in spaces that are not readily available at all times during the voyage; and (1) (b) to all tanks and koffer ponds.

(2) Where pejlerør exist, their upper ends be led up to an easily accessible place, which, if it is practicable, is situated above the working deck. Pipe openings shall be provided with permanently attached means means of closure. Pejlerør, which is not carried above the working deck shall be fitted with automatically-acting self-closing devices.

Rule 12 Sidescuttles and Windows (1) Sidescuttles to spaces below the working deck and to spaces in the closed builds on this tires must be fitted with hinged deadlights, which can be closed weathertight. There must also be for the front Windows in the other floors of the building are at least two blændplader of sufficient strength, but not less than 5.0 mm steel plate or 7.5 mm aluminium plate, per window type. However, a maximum of one Bill per window. Blændpladerne to easily and probably could be placed for damaged Windows.

(2) No side scuttles shall be so placed as to their lower edge is less than 500 mm above the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie.

(3) side scuttles fitted less than 1000 mm above the deepest nedlastnings water line must be of a type that cannot be opened.

(4) Sidescuttles, their glass and deadlights shall be of an approved design. 3) Sidescuttles which are exposed to damage from fishing gear, shall be suitably protected.

(5) Tempered safety glass, or equivalent thereto, to be applied to the wheelhouse Windows.

(6) the Administration may accept side scuttles and Windows without stormklapper4) in page-and agterskotter in deckhouses located on or above the working deck if it considers that the safety of the ship is not thereby impaired, [taking into account the rules laid down by recognised organisations based on the relevant ISO standards.]

Rule 13 inlet and outlet ports as well as chutes (1) outlet ports, who led through the shell plating from spaces below the working deck or from closed superstructures or deckhouses on the working deck with doors that comply with the provisions of rule 4, shall be provided with available devices to prevent the ingress of water into the ship. Normally, each outlet have an automatically-acting check valve equipped with a secure closure system that can be operated from an available position. Such valves are not necessary, if the Administration considers it unlikely that the ingress of water through the opening will lead to dangerous flooding, and to service the thickness is sufficient. The operation of the valve must be fitted with an indicator showing whether the valve is open or closed. This shall also apply to chutes, which led through the shell plating. Skaktens Interior openings in the space on the working deck must be positioned as high as possible, taking into account trim and deepest nedlastningsvandlinie, however a minimum of 800 mm above the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie. The Interior opening shall be provided with a weathertight påfyldningslem with gasket and feed rates. The shaft and the trapdoor must have at least the same thickness as the bulwark or bulwarks in which it sits, however, minimum 10 mm. every shaft and lem must be approved by the Administration, which may impose additional requirements on the basis of the concrete construction.
(2) in manned machinery spaces may it be accepted that the valves for the main-and hjælpesøforbindelser and outlet ports, which are essential for the operation of the machinery, operated locally. Control must be available and fitted with indicators showing whether the valve is open or closed.

(3) Equipment placed on the plating and the valves required by this Regulation shall be of steel, bronze or other approved ductile material. All pipes between the outer garment and valves shall be of steel, except that spaces other than machinery spaces in administration for ships constructed of materials other than steel can approve the use of other materials.

Rule 14 wash ports (1) provided that the entrenchment plating on the exposed parts of the working deck form wells, bilge portes minimum area (A) calculated in square metres on each side of the ship for each well on the working deck shall be fixed in relation to the length (1) and the height of the entrenchment plating in the well, as follows: (1) (a) (A) = 0.07 x l

(l need not be counted as greater than 0.7 L)

(1) (b) (i) If redoubt plating is more than 1200 mm in average height, the required surface area increased by 0.004 m 2 per metre length of the well for each 100 mm difference in height.

(1) (b) (ii) where the Redoubt plating is less than 900 mm in average height, can the required surface area reduced by 0.004 m 2 per metre length of the well for each 100 mm difference in height.

(2) Lænseportsarealet as calculated in accordance with paragraph (1) shall be increased, if the Administration considers that the leap is not sufficient to ensure that the deck quickly and efficiently emptied of water.

(3) Unless the Administration agrees, must at least lænseportsareal for each well on superstructure deck shall not be less than half of the surface area (A) as provided for in paragraph (1).

(4) wash ports must be sited along the entrenchment plating, to ensure that the deck be emptied for the water as quickly and efficiently as possible. Bilge Gates lowest edges should be as close to the deck as practicable.

(5) Paunbrædder and furnishings to the stowage of fishing gear must be placed such that the bilge port efficiency is not compromised. Paunbrædder must be so designed that they can be locked in position, when they are in use, and they must not prevent the end of the intake water.

(6) the bilge pumping ports, there are over 300 mm deep, to be equipped with bars, placed with a distance of no more than 230 and at least 150 mm from each other, or with other appropriate protective measures. Lænseportlemme, if they are placed, must be of an approved design. If it is considered necessary to have arrangements for locking of lænseportlemme during fishing, they must meet the Administration's demands and could easily be operated from a readily accessible position.

(7) in ships intended for use in areas where there is a possibility of icing, trapdoors and other protective arrangements for draining ports could easily be removed in order to limit icing. The size of the openings and the means to remove the aforementioned protective measures must meet the Administration's demands.

Rule 15 anchor and mooring equipment (1) Anchor equipment designed for quick and safe use shall be provided and shall consist of anchor equipment, anchor chains or steel cables, Stoppers and a game or other arrangements for the laying or ophale anchor and to keep the ship anchored under all foreseeable operating conditions. Ships must also be provided with adequate mooring equipment for safe mooring under all conditions. Anchor and mooring equipment must meet the Administration's demands. 5) [On fishing vessels] with a length of 24 metres and above [built the 1 January 2003 or later must anchor and mooring equipment in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation.] CF. point 8 for fishing vessels have aviation area ' vessels by Greenland '.

(2)

Anchor equipment, etc. in uklassede fishing vessels with an overall length of 15 metres or more, but less than 24 metres, shall comply with the following provisions, as the ship's overall length is used as a parameter. Classed ships may follow the same rules, where the ship's classification society accepts this.

(3)

The total weight of the anchor shall be determined in accordance with curve 1 in accordance with table or curve magazine, since the listed weight is based on the traditional anchor types. The total weight of the anchor should be divided on two or more anchors; the largest must at least have a weight as specified in table/curve 2. There must also be provided for the possibility of the interconnection of two or more anchors. Where special anchors (' High Holding Power Anchors ') approved and supplied with certificate from a recognised organisation, can anchor the weight is reduced by up to 25%.

(4)

If the superstructures, deckhouses, whaleback or shelter (shelter) in whole or in part, closed version with a width greater than B/4 extends throughout the fishing ship's length, must anchor weight, as it is listed in the table or curve 1 and 2, in both cases increased by 20% per floor beyond what is specified in accordance with paragraph (3). Frontends, etc. shorter than the ship's overall length, shall be increased proportionally thereto. weight anchor If the ship is assigned fishing ' vessels by Greenland ', must anchor weight, as it is listed in the table or curve 1 and 2, in both cases is increased with 20% beyond what is specified in paragraph (3) and (4).

(5)

Anchors with a weight of 150 kg or more shall be placed in lights, chute or similar event, which makes it possible to throw the anchor immediately. If the weight of each of the two main anchors are under 300 kg, it is acceptable to only one anchor is placed in lights or similar arrangement. The anchor must also be ensured in his mingled position by a locking arrangement.

(6)

If a ship has lost its anchors, and it not immediately possible to replace these, can the Administration after an assessment of the situation for this particular ship, for a period of time to allow trawling buckets with at least the same weight ækvivalerer one or more anchors with associated chain. However, it is a prerequisite that the ship's anchor varp are always available on board and is ready for release. The authorization and its duration shall be entered in the monitoring book.

(7) as a starting point to be fishing vessels equipped with two anchor chains, since length and dimension of each anchor chain shall be determined in accordance with table or curve 3 in subsequent curve magazine. If the superstructures, deckhouses, whaleback or shelter in whole or in part, closed version with a width greater than B/4 extends throughout the length of the ship, the length of each anchor chain shall be increased by 20% per floor beyond what is specified in the table or curve 3 in curve magazine. Is the superstructure, etc. shorter than the ship's overall length, the length of the anchor chain shall be increased proportionally. If the ship is assigned to ' speed by Greenland ', chain length is increased by 100% beyond what is specified in the table or curve 3 in curve magazine.

(8)

Both anchor chains can, however, with the exception of the anchor chains on ships assigned to ' speed by Greenland ', shall be replaced with the anchor wire with a tensile strength in accordance with table 4 in accordance with table/curve/curve magazine. In ships, which are allocated ' vessels by Greenland ', can one anchor chain shall be replaced by the wire with a tensile strength in accordance with table 4 in subsequent curve or curve magazine.

(9)

Trawl wire can be used as the anchor wire, if this wire at least has a corresponding tensile strength as indicated in the table or curve 4. It can be accepted that trawl the wire passed through gallows block. If anchor chains are replaced with wire, the length of this be at least 2.5 times the required chain length. To be between anchor and wire is a chain snood with a diameter as the anchor chain and with a length of at least 12.5 m.

(10)

Fishing vessels equipped with anchor chain/wire as indicated or with anchors at 150 kg or more shall be fitted with a windlass. This must be equipped with a kabelarskive or drum for each anchor, which are housed in lights or similar arrangement, and a linkage to the triggering of each kabelarskive or drum. Links/wirerne must not be conducted until klysset or equivalent arrangement outside the game's kabelarskiver or drums.

(11)

Anchor the game, its supports and its games brake shall be capable of recording a traction of at least 45% of anchor chain/bending fatigue fracture strength, without the emergence of permanent deformations, and without the brake release. If there are no mounted a chain stops/wire squints, see. paragraph (10), the above factor not less than 80%. In addition, for each anchor chain/wire placed a chain/wire squints between windlass stops and lights or the like, which can keep the ship while it is at anchor. Chain stops/wire squints and its support must be able to incorporate a traction of at least 80% of the anchor chain/bending fatigue fracture strength without permanent deformations, and without stops/squints release. If trawl the game is equipped with kabelarskive, etc. as indicated in paragraph (10), can this game be used as windlass.

(12)

Fishing vessels, which, according to paragraph (9) applies their trawl wire as anchor wire, can use their trawl winch as windlass, where trawls the wire is coiled on a games drum with brake device. At this event there will not be called for kabelarskive on the game to chain Tippet.

(13)

The ship shall be equipped with at least four moorings, each with a length and tensile strength in accordance with table or curve 5 and 6 in subsequent curve magazine.



(14)
The ship shall be equipped with at least one lug trosse with a length and tensile strength in accordance with table or curve 7 and 8 in subsequent curve magazine. This must be suitably located, so it is possible to make it ready for use at sea. Hawser may be replaced by one of the fishing vessel's trawling cables and ropes, provided that this at least has a corresponding length and tensile strength. If the wire is used, there must be a tovværks in addition, snood of at least 12.5 metres with a breaking strength as specified for the towing wire.

(15)

The ship shall be fitted with appropriate cleats or bollards and lights in order to be able to berth the ship securely and opankre. The number of bollards, etc. shall be determined in each case depending on the ship's size and deck arrangement. There must be a number, so that in each side fore and aft is possible to fasten boats mooring and jumps on each bollard. There must at least be placed three bollards and two aft. Cleats and bollards should have such a size that it is possible to put at least four clashing of ship's mooring or towing trosse under cross-stick on the upper edge on udspringende or klampen pullerten. To perform a sound reinforcement of the area where the cleats and bollards to be fixed.

(16)

The ship shall be fitted with lights of appropriate size and quantity in order to ensure that ankertov, moorings and lug trosse, etc. not chafing.



Only ships built before 1. January 2003







 



 





Curve 1: total anchor weight in kg according to column A





Curve 2: min. weight of main anchor in kilograms, according to column A





Curve 3: Length of each chain in metres according to column (B)





Curve 4: tensile strength of anchor wire in kN according to column C





Line 5: Length of each mooring in metres according to Column (B)





Line 6: tensile strength of mooring of the CN according to column C





Line 7: Length of tow trosse in metres according to column (B)





Line 8: tensile strength of coupling trosse of CN according to column C







 

 



 





See rule 15 paragraph (1) should all fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and above, constructed on or after 1. January 2003 or later meet a recognized organization's rules for anchor equipment.

















 







Tables for anchor equipment for fishing vessels with a length of 15-24 m











Length





LOA









Total





anchor weight









Largest





anchor









Anchor-chain-





length









Chain-





dimension









Anchor-wire-





length









Tensile-strength











M









kg









kg









m









mm









"









M









kN











15









70









53









71









13 mm









½"









213









70











16









88









63









80









13 mm









½"









217









76











17









106









78









85









13 mm









½"









221









83











18









124









92









90









14 mm









9/16 "









225
89











19









142









106









91









14 mm









9/16 "









229









96











20









160









120









93









14 mm









9/16 "









233









102











21









178









134









95









14 mm









9/16 "









237









108











22









196









148









96









16 mm









5/8 "









241









115











23









214









162









98









16 mm









5/8 "









245









121











24









230









176









99









16 mm









5/8 "









249









128











At intermediate values for the length of the ship shall be interpolated in the table values.







 



 

















Lug trosse and moorings for fishing vessels with a length of 15-24 m











The length of the ship (Loa)









Lug trosse





length









Lug trosse





tensile strength









Length of each mooring









Tensile strength of each mooring











M









m









kN









m









KN











15









105









62









30









30











16









108









65









32









32











17









110
67









34









33











18









113









70









36









34











19









115









73









38









35











20









118









76









40









36











21









121









79









42









38











22









123









82









44









39











23









126









84









46









40











24









128









87









48









41











At intermediate values for the length of the ship shall be interpolated in the table values.











[Rule 16 working deck under an enclosed superstructure (1) Such decks shall be fitted with an efficient drainage system with an appropriate drainage capacity to divert the washing water and fish waste.] The following are considered appropriate drainage capacity: (1) (a)

Drainage system (bilge pumping arrangement)



(1) (a) (1)

An efficient drainage system for the drainage from the working deck to be used in cases where there may be water from washing, fish processing or from the Lake through the openings, which must be open during fishing.



(1) (a) (2)

Bilge pumping arrangement shall consist of the bilge wells, pumps, bilge alarms, wires and nødlænsesystem.



(1) (a) (3)

The event must be executed as a separate system with one or more pumps in each bilge well.



(1) (a) (4)

Bilge wells shall be placed in tables or in places to which the water on deck have free access, so that covered under all conditions is kept free of water.



(1) (a) (5)

Bilge wells shall be performed by steel and shall have the same force as the tire or the adjacent garment, in which it is fitted, with an addendum for the corrosion of at least 1 mm. Minimum thickness 10 mm.

(1) (a) (6)

There shall be at least one bilge wells in each page on agterkant of the deck, positioned in accordance with the guidelines in paragraph 4.



(1) (a) (7)

On ships where the deck is longer than nine metres, shall in addition be provided a bilge well in each page in the front part of the deck, taking into account the ship's position by the spring. Bilge wells shall be placed as specified in paragraph 4.

(1) (a) (8)

On ships where deck is longer than 18 metres, number of bilge wells will be assessed in each case, but there must be at least three bilge wells in each page.



(1) (a) (9)

Each bilge wells shall have a volume of not less than 0.15 m

3

. On vessels with a length of less than 24 metres, this volume after an assessment in each case be reduced, except for less than 0.06 m3. The depth of bilge wells shall be at least 350 mm.

(1) (a) (10)

Above each bilge wells shall be fitted to a 300 mm high removable grate. Ristens effective area must be at least ten times that of the bilge wire Interior cross-sectional area. The distance between the vertical ribs must be a maximum of 50 mm, and where there are both vertical as horizontal ribs, should the distance be a maximum 70 x 70 mm.

(1) (a) (11)

Where the working deck can be divided with pauner in smaller spaces without permanent openings, will the Administration, in each case to assess whether the number of bilge wells shall be increased, or about to be mounted in the groupings of influent to the grates required bilge wells.



(1) (b)

Pumps and capacity.



(1) (b) (1)

There must be mounted at least one pump per bilge wells. Bilge pump capacity Q in m3/h in each bilge wells shall not be less than: the pumps in aft bilge wells port and starboard:



Q

1

= 1.5 times the total capacity of the spray pumps plus the total water capacity of the fish canning process on the deck; (m

3

/h); or



Q

2

= 3 * (B) * As (m

3

/h)



where B = the breadth in metres; and As = total area in m

2

of ports and hatches, there must be open during fishing, or intake of catch or fishing gear.



The highest value of Q must be used.



Where, on account of the employer tyre length required two or three bilge wells in each page, the capacity of the pumps in these is calculated as, respectively, Q/Q/3, and 2 if it is likely that there will be no trim during the operation forward. However, the capacity of the aft bilge wells shall at least be equal to the fixed Q.

(2)

Each pump shall be of a type which is able to run in ' dry ' mode, they must be self priming, and they can be found. The pumps must be separately could be started/initiated manually as well as automatically.

(3)

To install a level alarm in each page in the front and aft bilge wells. The alarm system shall come into operation when there is water on the deck. The alarm must be included in the ship's alarm system in the wheelhouse, and there shall be both audible as a visual alarm on the working deck, as well as in possibly a machinery control room, where it clearly must be explained what is alerted.

(4)

Control cabinet for each pump shall be provided on the working deck amidships with lower edge positioned 1.50 m above the deck. The Administration can, after a concrete assessment accept that the bottom edge is positioned lower.

(5)
Ejectors can be used, provided that they are fitted with a separate pump with a sufficient capacity for continuous operation of all connected ejectors or at least all ejectors, which are connected on one side. To be fitted with a screw-non-return valve on the suction side of the each ejector.

(6)

By the use of submersible pumps must be fit for purpose and fitted with blades, grinders or equivalent arrangement as URf.eks. sneglhjul, where waste is of a certain size can pass out. The pump must be secured against accidental that people can come into contact with the rotor. At the pump must be set up a sign with the following text: ' Repair, disassembly or similar of the pump must not commence until, when there are disconnected for energy supply and secured against accidentally being switched '.



(1) (c)

Bilge pipes



(1) (c) (1)

Rørdimensionen of bilge pipes shall be determined in accordance with the pump manufacturer's instructions.



(1) (c) (2)

The wires should be carried out by the seamless, heavy steam pipe. The collections are executed as welded or flanged joints. Use of approved rørkoblinger may be permitted outside the machinery space and on the tube that does not lead through tanks.

(3)

The pump's output cord should lead at least 1300 mm above the working deck and a minimum 800 mm above the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie in accordance with the ship's stability information. To be directly on the plating placed a screw-non-return valve.

(1) (d)

Nødlænsning



(1) (d) (1)

Emergency system should be able to replace the primary pump/pumps. There is no requirement to reserve for the power supply to the pump/pumps.

(1) (d) (2) emergency system can be connected to the ship's hovedlænsesystem in the engine room, where there is a filter and a valve that separates the two systems. This valve must be able to be operated from the deck.

(1) (d) (3)

If tilstrømnings conditions from a pump that fails, to the other wells are satisfactory, the emergency system in this case be a portable pump, provided that it has an adequate capacity and is suitable for the purpose (knives or filter).



(1) (d) (4)

Nødlænsesystemets pipe sizes must not be less than main bilge, rørføringen must be as straightforward as possible, and it must not be equipped with shut-off valves that cannot be operated from the free deck.

[(2) all openings necessary for fishing operations shall be fitted with closing devices, which quickly and efficiently can be operated by one person.]

(2) (a)

Hatches directly to cargo holds or cargo tanks shall be located so high and so near the ship's centreline, as the ship's operation allows (see rule 3). The hatch should be weather tight and with coaming height in accordance with rule 6. The location of the hatch shall comply with regulation III/3 on that there should be progressive flooding under 20 ° heeling, unless it can be calculated that stability is sufficient to ensure that cargo space can be filled with water. Taking into account the free surface. By intake of industrial fish for so-called environmental plants should the connection to the hatch be waterproof.

(2) (b) Ports in the ship's side to a closed working deck assumes that space is equipped with a drainage system/bilge pumping system as specified in rule 16, paragraph (1). Bilge pumping capacity shall at least be proportionate to Gates/hatch area. The location must comply with the requirements of regulation III/3 on that there should be progressive flooding under 20 ° heeling, unless it can be calculated that stability is sufficient to ensure that the working deck can be filled with water. (This is rarely possible without a limiting bulkhead within port). Ports in the ship's side and in the hedge (see also rule 3) should be limited in size and number to a minimum, and threshold height shall not normally be less than 1000 mm. Ports must be weather-tight, and they, together with their front-and means of closure have the same strength as the bulwark or bulwarks, which they are built. They must be able to be maintained in the open position. The hatch or gate must be able to be closed weathertight by a man in 20 seconds without the use of tools. Nødlukning for use in the failure of the power supply should be established. If the hatches or doors are equipped with remote control from URf.eks. the wheelhouse, there is a warning light and an audible alarm that automatically alerts during opening and closing. By remote control of gates or hatches, these could be seen from the control site either directly or with the TV monitor. The gate must be provided with a sign with the following text: the GATE MUST BE CLOSED when not in use DURING FISHING. WHEN THE GATE IS OPEN, IT MUST BE UNDER THE SUPERVISION AND COULD BE CLOSED QUICKLY.

[(3) where the catch is brought to such decks for handling or processing, it must be placed in a paune. Such pauner shall comply with regulation 11 of chapter III. They must be equipped with an efficient drainage system. There must be a satisfactory protection against accidental water influx to the working deck.]

(3) (a)

Where there are hatches for modtagepaune/binge assumes that paunen is limited in size with watertight restrictions (bulkheads) against the working deck and in such a way that the stability criteria is met with paunen filled with catch with a density of 1. Hatches in catered to working deck under an enclosed superstructure shall meet the same requirements as a port on the side. Indtaklingslugen must be placed so high and so near the ship's centreline, as the ship's operation allows (see rule 3). Indtaklingslugen on the exposed deck and exit the hatch to the closed working deck must be weather-tight. Indtaklingslugen must be fitted with stand for retention in the open position. Indtaklingslugen shall be provided with a stone grate to cull of stone in the catch. Where the hatch is hydraulically operated, the system must be equipped with rørbruds valve. If the hatch is flush, there must be grating to prevent people from falling down. Sampling the hatch must be able to be closed reasonably quickly and bear a sign with the text: the HATCH MUST BE OPENED ONLY when the HATCH FOR INDTAKLING is CLOSED.



[(4) there must be at least two exits from such decks.] See also the provisions of Chapter VI, regulation 2.

[(5) the free height by jobs must be at least 2 m.

(6) There shall be a fixed ventilation system with at least six air change per hour.

Rule 17 draught marks (1) All ships shall be provided with draught marks in decimetres at bow and stern on both sides.

(2) Such markings shall be placed as close to the perpendiculars as possible.

Rule 18 tanks for fish in refrigerated (RSW) or chilled (CSW) sea water (1) when using RSW tanks or CSW-tanks or similar tank systems with chilled seawater, such tanks shall be equipped with a separate, fixed arrangement for filling and discharge of seawater.

(2) If such tanks can also be used for dry cargo transport, must be fitted with a bilge system and with appropriate means to prevent the water from the bilge system into the idea.]



Chapter III



CHAPTER III STABILITY and SEAWORTHINESS of the Rule 1





General provisions







Rule 2





Stability criteria







Rule 3





Filling of fish holds







Rule 4





Special fishing methods







Rule 5





Fierce wind and rolling







Rule 6





Water on the deck







Rule 7





Operating conditions







Rule 8





Ice accretion







Rule 9





Heeling test









Rule 10









Stability information









Rule 11





Portable fish hold splits







Rule 12





Bow height







Rule 13





Maximum allowable draught during operation







Rule 14





Subdivision and damage stability









Rule 15
Marking of the maximum allowable draught during operation













Unless otherwise expressly specified, this chapter shall apply to new vessels, as defined in chapter I, rule 2 (1).

Rule 1 General provisions

Vessels must be designed and constructed so that the requirements of this chapter may be satisfied in the operating conditions described in rule 7. Calculations of the righting arm curves to be performed [in accordance with the ' Code on Intact Stability ', IMO Resolution a.749 (18), as amended by Resolution MSC. 75 (69).] In addition, please refer to the DMA's most recent guidance on approval of stability.

Rule 2 the stability criteria (1) the following minimum stability criteria must be met unless the Administration finds that erfaringer1) from the ship's use justify deviations from here. [For fishing vessels] of 24 metres in length or more, [built on January 1, 2003 or later, any exceptions to this rule, as granted by the Administration, will be treated in accordance with the procedure laid down in the fishing ship article 4.]

(1) (a) the area under the righting arm (GZ curve) shall not be less than 0.055 metre-radians up to an angle of heel of 30 ° and 0.09 metre-radians up to no less than an angle of 40 ° or the angle of flooding if this angle Θf is less than 40 °. In addition, the area under the righting arm (GZ curve) between the heeling angles 30 ° and 40 ° or between 30 ° and Θf, if this angle is less than 40 °, shall not be less than 0.030 metre-radians. Θf is the angle by which openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses, which cannot quickly be closed weathertight, are starting to be under water. For the purposes of the application of these criteria to be small openings through which progressive flooding cannot take place, is not regarded as open.

(1) (b) The righting arm GZ shall be at least 200 mm at an angle that is greater than or equal to 30 °. For vessels with a length of less than 24 metres in length can be reduced with this requirements for GZ 2 x (24-L)%.

(1) (c) the maximum righting arm shall occur at an angle of GZmax, who at any time is greater than 30 °, but not less than 25 °.

(1) (d) the metacentric height GM shall not be less than 350 mm.

(2) where other means than sway cooling is available to limit the roll angles, it must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Administration, that they are in regulation 2 (1) required stability criteria are still met in all operating conditions.

(3) Where ballast is used to meet the stability criteria listed in regulation 2 (1), its nature and the fitting to be to the satisfaction of the administration. [In ships built on January 1, 2003 or later, with a length of less than 45 m, this ballast be fixed. Fixed ballast must be of solid and securely attached in the ship. The Administration may accept liquid ballast, if it carried either in tanks specifically designed for this purpose or in completely filled tanks not connected to any pump system on the ship. Water ballast is used as permanent ballast in order to ensure compliance with rule 2 (1), shall be set out in more detail about this conformity certificate and in the stability information. Fixed ballast shall not be removed from the ship, or moved without the Administration's approval.]

Rule 3 filling of fish holds

The angle at which progressive flooding of the fish holds can occur through hatch openings, open during fishing and cannot quickly be closed, must be at least 20 °, unless the stability criteria listed in regulation 2 (1) can be met with the appropriate fish holds partially or completely filled.

Rule 4 Special fishing methods (1) Ships, which use special fishing methods, in which the ship is exposed to increased external influences during fishing, shall meet the stability criteria listed in regulation 2 (1) to the satisfaction of the Administration, if necessary, with increased demands.

[(2) Ships, fishing with beam trawls shall meet the following requirements: increased (2) (a) the metacentric height shall not be less than 500 mm.]

(2) (b)

For new ships, fishing with beam trawls, built before the 1. January 2003, which has a maximum bollard pull on L2 x 0.015 tonnes or more, where the stakes can be measured directly by physical drive test at the main engine's full power, the requirements for the area under the righting arm GZ and for the righting arm GZ in rule 2 (1) (a) and 2 (1) (b) shall be multiplied by 1.2.



[(2) (c) For new ships, fishing with beam trawls, built on January 1, 2003 or later, the requirements for the area under the righting arm GZ and for the righting arm GZ in rule 2 (1) (a) and 2 (1) (b) shall be multiplied: 1.2





,hvis P ≤ kL2





 

 





1,2 P/kL2





,hvis P > kL2





 

 





,hvor:



 



 

 





k = 0,6 kW/m2





,hvis L ≤ 35 m





 

 





k = 0.05 kW/m3 L – 1.15 kW/m2, if 35 m 37 m < L <





 

 





k = 0,7 kW/m2





,hvis L ≥ 37 m





 





L is the length everywhere under the ship's tonnage measured in metres.







P is the installed propulsion power measured in kW.











(2) (d)) the above increased stability criteria for beam trawlers must be complied with in the operating conditions mentioned in rule 7 (1) of this chapter. These barriers for you must be assumed to be at an angle of 45º in relation to horizontal.]

(3)

New and existing ships, fishing with an event, as in a turn automatically moves the gear drag point to the side to which the ship is, or involves a risk for doing so, if the tools get the bottom team (German drag), must meet the following requirements:



(3) (a)

The tools must be from control square could quickly be released.



(3) (b)

Gear drag point should be placed as low as possible and never higher than coaming.



(3) (c)

Ships built before 1. June 2002 shall comply with rule 3 (a) not later than 1 July. December 2002 and rule 3 (b) not later than 1 July. June 2003.

Rule 5 Hard wind and rolling

Ships of 24 metres in length or over shall be able to withstand the impact of fierce winds and scrolling in the corresponding associated sea conditions, taking into account the seasonal weather conditions, the Sea States, as the ship will work in, the type of vessel and its use. [The relevant calculations shall be performed in accordance with the ' Code on Intact Stability ', IMO Resolution a.749 (18), as amended by Resolution MSC. 75 (69).]

Rule 6 Water on deck

Ships of 24 metres in length or over shall, in accordance with the Administration's krav2) be able to withstand the impact of water on the deck, taking into account the seasonal weather conditions, the Sea States, as the ship will work in, the type of vessel and its use.

Rule 7 operating conditions (1) the number and type of the operating conditions to be taken into account, must meet the Administration's demands and must, where appropriate, include the following: 3) (1) (a) Departure towards fishing ground with 100% bunkers, stores, ice fishing gear, etc.

(1) (b) the departure from the fishing ground with full catch.

(1) (c) Arrival to port with a full catch and 10% stores, bunkers etc.

(1) (d) Arrival to port with 10% stores, bunkers, etc. without catching.

(2) in addition to those referred to in regulation 7 (1) specified special operating conditions should the Administration be convinced that the stability criteria listed in regulation 2, also is met in all other operating conditions occurring in practice, including those that provide the lowest values of the stability parameters contained in the criteria, including letskibs cardiovascular fitness. The Administration must also be convinced that the special relationship, which is due to a change in the ship's use or navigability area and which affect the stability requirements provided for in this chapter, are taken into account.

(3) With regard to those in regulation 7 (1) operating conditions referred to calculations include the following: (3) (a) Allowance for the weight of wet fishing nets, nets on deck.

(3) (b) Allowance for ice accretion, if this is provided in accordance with the provisions of rule 8.

(3) (c) uniform distribution of the catch, unless this does not correspond to the practice.

(3) (d) the catch on deck, if this is provided in the operational conditions in paragraph (1) (b) and (c) and in point (2).

(3) (e) if the water ballast carried either in tanks specifically designed for this purpose or in other tanks, which also is equipped for the carriage of water ballast.

(3) (f) correction for free liquid surfaces as well as, if applicable, for the free surfaces of the catch.

Rule 8 ice accretion
(1) For seagoing ships authorized in områder4) where icing often occurs in the stability calculations included the following supplements for ice cream. [For the purposes of this rule shall be permitted no change of the Appendix of ice accretion, as it can happen after the Administration's estimates according to recommendation 2 in the footnote:]

(1) (a) 30 kg per square metre on exposed weather decks and serial bridges.

(1) (b) 7.5 kg/m2 on the projected lateral area of waterline in both sides of the ship.

(1) (c) The projected lateral areas of diskontinuerte surfaces by hand rails, spars (except master) and rigging on ships which do not carry sails, and the projected lateral area of other smaller items to be factored by increasing the total projected lateral area of continuous surfaces with 5% and this area static torque by 10%.

(2) ships which have aviation permission in areas where ice accretion may occur, must be: (2) (a) so designed as to ice accretion is minimized.

(2) (b) Equipped with such means for removal of ice, as the Administration may require. 5)

Rule 9 inclined (1) every ship shall, when it is completed, must be subjected to an inclining test, 6) and the actual displacement and the location of the Centre of gravity shall be determined for letskibs condition.

(2) If a ship made changes that affect its letskibs condition or the location of the center of gravity, the ship shall, if the Administration [, taking into account its stability margins] deems it necessary, shall be subjected to a new inclined, and the stability information revised. [If letvægten differs by more than 2% from the original lightweight and it doesn't in the calculation can be displayed, the ship continues to fulfil the stability criteria, it must in any case be subject to a new inclined.]

(3) the Administration may allow the inclining test of a particular ship may be omitted when there is stability information from a heeling test conducted with a sister ship and it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration, that reliable stability information for the exempted ship can be derived from this information.

[(4) Inclining test and determination of the level of fitness required pursuant to rule 9 (1), shall be carried out at least every ten years.]

Rule 10 stability information (1) Appropriate stability data should be elaborated to enable the master to easily and securely to assess the ship's stability in different operating conditions. 7) the information must include specific instructions to the master, who warns of the operating conditions, which perversely may affect the ship's stability or trim. A copy of the stability information should be forwarded to the Administration for approval. 8) (2)

For all fishing vessels subject to rule 15 applies, the stability information must also contain an outline, which clearly shows the correct placement of the markers that indicate down-lastningsvandlinien corresponding to the maximum permissible draught, during operation.



(3) the approved stability information shall be kept on board. They must at all times be readily available, and they must be inspected by the periodical survey of ship in order to ensure that they are approved for the actual use of the ship.

(4) If changes are made by a vessel affecting its stability, revised stability calculations are carried out and shall be forwarded to the Administration for approval. 9) If the Administration considers that the stability data should be revised, the new information shall be supplied to the master, and the previous information is removed.

Rule 11 portable fish hold splits

The catch must be carefully secured against displacement, which can give the ship a dangerous trim or heel. Any portable fish hold opdelingers material dimensions must meet the Administration's demands. 10)

Rule 12 bow height (1) bow height must be sufficient to prevent the ship taking water over very unreasonable.

(1)

(a)

For vessels under 24 m [as well as for ships of 24 metres in length or over, if the shipping area not stretching more than 10 nautical miles from the coast, the minimumsbovhøjden shall be calculated in accordance with] method described in recommendation 4 of attachment 3 to the Torremolinos Protocol.

[(1) (b) For ships of 24 metres in length or more, if aviation area extends more than 10 nautical miles from the coast, and where the fish caught during fishing must be stowed in the holds via hatchways in an exposed working deck forward of deckhouses or superstructures, minimumsbovhøjden shall be calculated in accordance with the method set out in recommendation 4 of attachment 3 to the Torremolinos Protocol.

(1) (c) For ships of 24 metres in length or more, if aviation area extends more than 10 nautical miles from the coast, and where the catch has to be stowed in the holds via hatchways in an exposed working deck, protected by deckhouses or superstructures, minimumsbovhøjden shall be calculated in accordance with regulation 39 of Annex i to the international load line Convention 1966, but it must not, however, be less than 2000 mm. In this connection, the maximum allowable draught during operation is used instead of a possible Summer freeboard.]

Rule 13 maximum allowable draught during operation

The maximum allowable draught during operation must be approved by the Administration, and the corresponding operating condition shall meet the stability criteria laid down in this chapter, as well as the requirements laid down in chapters II and VI.

Rule 14 subdivision and damage stability

Ships with a length of 100 m or more, where the number of persons on board is 100 or more, must be able to keep afloat with positive stability, after flooding of any compartment assumed damaged, all taking into account the ship type, the intended use and shipping area. Calculations must be carried out in accordance with the instructions provided in recommendation 5 of attachment 3 to the final Protocol of the Conference.

Rule 15 labelling of maximum allowable draught during operation (1)

This rule applies to all fishing vessels that are reviewing the first sight the 1st March 2011 or later as well as fishing vessels whose dimensions are changed or its bruttonnage or lightweight increases by more than 10%. The rule does not apply for Greenlandic ships (2)

On either the side of the ship, there shall be placed a mark

Specifies the nedlastningsvandlinien corresponding to the largest

,

permissible draught during operation

.



(3)

Each brand must consist of a horizontal line, 300 mm long and 25 mm wide, devoted midship such that the bottom edge is flush with deepest nedlastningsvandlinie.



(4)

Marks must be clearly visible and painted with white or yellow color on dark grounds or with black on light ground. They must be welded, scratched or otherwise be fixed permanently on the ship's sides.

(5)

The ship is always loaded in accordance with the approved loading conditions according to the stability book.



Chapter IV



CHAPTER IV



MACHINERY, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND PERIODICALLY UNATTENDED MACHINERY SPACES



Subparagraph (A)









General provisions









Rule 1





Use







Rule 2





Definitions







Rule 3





General provisions









Subparagraph (B)









Machinery









Rule 4





Machinery







Rule 5





Astern power







Rule 6





Steam boilers, fødevands systems and steam tube plant







Rule 7





Communication between the wheelhouse and the engine room







Rule 8





Control of propulsion machinery from the wheelhouse







Rule 9





Compressed air systems







Rule 10





Measures concerning fuel oil, lubricating oil and other flammable oils







Rule 11





Draining devices







Rule 12





Protection against noise







Rule 13
Steering gear







Rule 14





Engineers ' alarm







Rule 15





Cooling systems for the preservation of the catch









Subparagraph (C)









Electrical installations









Rule 16





Electric power







Rule 17





Electric power







Rule 18





Precautions against shock, fire and other hazards of electrical art









Subparagraph (D)









Periodically unattended machinery spaces









Rule 19





Prevention of fire







Rule 20





Protection against flooding







Rule 21





Communication







Rule 22





Alarm systems







Rule 23





Specific requirements applicable to machinery, boilers and electrical installations







Rule 24





Specific requirements applicable to machinery, boilers and electrical installations









Subparagraph (E)









Other technical installations











Rule 25









Hydraulic plants













Section A-general provisions

Rule 1 Application

[This chapter shall apply to new fishing vessels with a length of 15 m or more, unless otherwise indicated.]

Regulation 2 Definitions (1)» steering system ' is the machinery, the power unit in the system, if they exist, the associated equipment and the means to transmit the necessary torque to the rudder stock (URf.eks. tiller or quadrant) necessary for efficient movement of the rudder for the purpose of steering the ship under normal service conditions.

(2)» auxiliary steering gear ' is the equipment that is necessary for efficient movement of the rudder in order to steer the ship in the event of failure of the main steering gear.

(3) ' Driving device for steering gear ' is: (3) (a) in the case of electric steering gear, an electric motor and its associated electrical equipment;

(3) (b) in the case of electrohydraulic steering gear, an electric motor and its associated electrical equipment and connected pump;

(3) (c) in the case of other hydraulic steering gear, a driving engine with attached pump.

(4) ' maximum speed in the future ' is the speed which the ship is designed to maintain at sea at maximum draught.

(5) ' maximum speed bak ' is the speed which the ship is estimated to be able to achieve with the maximum astern power at maximum draught, which the ship is designed for.

(6) ' oil fuel unit ' is the equipment used for the preparation of oil fuel for delivery to an oil-fired boiler, or equipment used for the preparation of oil for delivery to an internal combustion engine, and includes any oil fuel pump, filter and heating equipment, which has to do with oil at a pressure greater than 0.18 N/mm2.

(7) ' normal operational and habitable conditions ' are the conditions under which the ship as a whole, the machinery, installations, apparatus and devices for ensuring progress, steering, safe navigation, fire and flooding, safeguards against internal and external communications and signals, means of escape and games to lifeboats as well as décor of comfortable rest areas, are in working order and functioning normally.

(8) ' dead ship "is a situation in which the main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliaries are inoperative due to lack of power.

(9) ' Main Switchboard is a switchboard which is directly supplied by the main source of electrical power, and which must distribute electrical energy to the ship's facilities.

(10) ' periodically unmanned engine-room ' means the space that contains propulsion and associated machinery and all sources to the main power supply, which is not staffed at all times under all operating conditions, including manoeuvring.

Rule 3 common provisions

Machinery (1) Main propulsion, control, steam pipe, fuel oil, compressed air, electrical and refrigeration systems; auxiliary machinery; boilers and other pressure vessels; pipes and pumping facilities; steering gear and gear, shafts and couplings for power transmission shall be planned, designed, tested, installed and operated in such a way as to [comply with the rules of a recognised organisation.] This machinery and this equipment as well as lifting gear, games, equipment for handling and processing of fish shall be protected so that any danger for the persons on Board shall be reduced to the minimum. There should be particular attention to moving parts, hot surfaces and other hazards.

(2) machinery spaces shall be scheduled in such a way as to provide safe, secure and free access to all machinery and associated recording equipment as well as to all other parts which may require control. Such spaces shall be adequately ventilated.

(3) (a) There shall be provided means by which operationally scavenging can be maintained or restored even though one of the essential auxiliaries becomes inapplicable. There should be particular emphasis on the following functions: (3) (a) (i) the devices, which ensures the maintenance of oil fuel pressure to the main propulsion machinery;

(3) (a) (ii) the normal sources, which ensures lubrication olietrykket;

(3) (a) (iii) the hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical products for control of main propulsion machinery including controllable propeller;

(3) (a) (iv) the sources of water pressure to the main systems; and (3) (a) (v) air compressors and air receivers for starting or control purposes;

provided that the Administration, having regard to the General safety concerns again to approve a partial reduction of the requirements instead of totally normal function.

(3) (b) means shall be provided, whereby the machinery can be started from stationary State without outside help.

(4) the main propulsion machinery and all auxiliary machinery relevant to the ship's propulsion and security must, as it is installed, be able to function, whether the ship is in create mode or has a thrust of up to 15 degrees to one side or the other under static conditions and up to 22 ½ ° under dynamic conditions, IE. When the rolls for both sides and throw themselves at the same time (dynamic heeling) up to 7 ½ ° by bow or stern. The Administration may permit derogations from these angles taking into account the ship type, size and usage conditions.

(5) the drawing, design and installation of propulsion systems special consideration to any kind of vibrations do not cause unnecessary loads of such mechanical systems during normal operation.

Electrical installations (6) Construction and execution of electrical installations shall be such that the following shall be ensured: (6) (a) the operation of the plant, who is required to keep the ship in normal operational and habitable condition without taking power in use;

(6) (b) the operation of the plants, which are essential for safety, where the main source of electrical power failure; and (6) (c) the protection of the crew and vessel from electrical risks.

(7) It must be established for the administration of the provisions of rule 16 to 18 is implemented and applied in a uniform manner [in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation 1)]

Periodically unattended machinery spaces (8) in addition to rule 3 to 18 to rule 19 to 24 and, V/1 to V/44 apply to ships with a periodically unattended machinery space.
(9) to be after the Administration's demands have taken steps to ensure that all equipment is functioning in a reliable manner under all working conditions, including manoeuvring, and that, in accordance with the [rules of a recognised organisation] take measures to hold regular vision and functional tests to ensure continuous reliable operation.

(10) Ships shall, in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation be provided with evidence that they are able to operate with periodically unattended machinery spaces.

Subparagraph (B) Machinery

(See also rule 3)

Rule 4 Machinery (1) main and auxiliary machinery essential for the propulsion and safety of the ship, shall be provided with effective means of control.

(2) internal combustion engines of a cylinder diameter of more than 200 mm or a crankcase volume of 0.6 m3 with a must be equipped with blow-off valves of the type approved with sufficient udslipsareal.

(3) Where main or auxiliary machinery, including pressure chambers or other parts of such machinery are subject to internal pressure and may be subject to dangerous overpressure, raised funds, if it is possible, which can protect against such pressure.

(4) All gears, shafts and couplings used for transfer of power to the machinery essential for the propulsion and safety of the ship or of persons on Board of persons, shall be so designed and constructed as to withstand the highest work loads, which they may then be subjected under all working conditions. There must be duly taken into account the type of machinery, by which it is operated or forming a part.

(5) the main propulsion machinery and auxiliary machinery, as appropriate, shall be equipped with automatic stop devices, capable of operating at errors as URf.eks. the failure of oil supply, which could quickly lead to damage, complete breakdown or explosion. A prior alarm shall also be provided, so that the warning is given before the automatic interruption, but the Administration may allow installation of broad automatic disconnection handling devices. The Administration may also exempt ships from the provisions of this paragraph, taking into account the ship type or its special use.

Rule 5 astern power (1) ships shall have enough astern power to ensure proper manoeuvrability under all normal conditions.

(2) the ability of the machinery to changing propeller direction at sufficiently short time and thus bring the ship over a reasonable distance to lie still after the largest vessels in the future must be demonstrated at sea.

Rule 6 Steam Boilers, fødevands systems and steam tube plant (1) Every steam boiler and any non-opfyret steam generator shall be provided with not less than two safety valves of adequate size. The Administration may, however, taking into account the outflow or other conditions in connection with a steam boiler or non-opfyret generator permit only one safety valve, if it is established that there is thus guaranteed adequate protection against overpressure [in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation.]

(2) Any oil fired steam boiler, which is designed to work without manual supervision, must have safety equipment, which interrupts the flow of fuel and emits alarm in case of low water levels, loss of air supply or failure of flame.

(3) the administration shall, with respect to the steam boiler plants specifically monitor, if it is ensured that fødevands systems, control devices and safety regulations in all respects are sufficient to ensure that boilers, steam and steam trykkamre tube installations are safe.

Rule 7 communication between the wheelhouse and the engine room

There should be two separate means of communication between the wheelhouse and the propulsion machinery control position, one of which must be a machine Telegraph; [However the Administration may accept means of communication other than mechanical Telegraph in ships with a length of less than 45 m where the propulsion machinery is controlled directly from the wheelhouse.]

In ships with a length of less than 24 metres, but over 15 m, there must be a means of communication for Maritime Agency's satisfaction.

Rule 8 Control of propulsion machinery from the wheelhouse (1) where there is remote control of propulsion machinery from the wheelhouse, the following apply: (1) (a) under all working conditions, including manoeuvring, the propeller speed, direction of thrust and, if any increase could fully controlled from the wheelhouse;

(1) (b) in paragraph (a) referred to the remote control should be performed using a control device which meets [eglerne from a recognized organization,] with, where necessary, means of preventing overload of the propulsion machinery;

(1) (c) the main propulsion machinery shall be provided with an emergency shut-down devices in the wheelhouse, independent of the referred to in point (a) wheelhouse control system;

(1) (d) remote control of the propulsion machinery shall be possible only from one station at a time: at each control station can be linked, however, allowed control units. There shall be an indicator at each station that shows the station who has control of the propulsion machinery. Transfer of control between the wheelhouse and machinery spaces shall be possible only in the machinery space or in the control room. [In ships with a length of less than 45 metres can the Administration allow control rather than the engine room only is a nødkontrol place, provided that there is adequate monitoring and control in the wheelhouse;]

(1) (e) indicators must be installed in the wheelhouse for: (1) (e) (i) propeller speed and direction, in the case of fixed pitch propellers;

(1) (e) (ii) propeller speed and pitch, in the case of screws, which you can change the increase; and (1) (e) (iii) advance alarm, as prescribed in rule 4 (5);

(1) (f) it shall be possible to control the propulsion machinery locally, even if any part of the remote control system fails;

(1) (g) unless the Administration considers it impractical, the remote control system must be configured so that if it fails, an alarm is given, and that the assumed speed and direction of thrust maintained until local control comes into operation;

(1) (h) special devices shall be provided to ensure that auto start can't jettison startup opportunities. There must be an alarm indicating low starting air pressure, and it must be set at a level which still permits main machinery starting functions (2) where the main propulsion and associated machinery, including electric energy sources, is equipped with various degrees of automatic or remote control and are under continuous manned supervision from a control room the control room must be so designed, equipped and provided with installations that machinery functions are just as safe and effective as if they were under direct supervision.

(3) in General should be automatic start, operation and control systems comprise means of manually intervention in the automated means, even in cases where any part of the automatic and remote control system fails.

Rule 9 Pneumatic systems (1) means shall be provided to prevent overpressure in any part of compressed air systems and wherever water jackets or casings of air kompressorers and køleres might be subjected to dangerous overpressure due to air leaks into them from the parts under air pressure. You want to find appropriate devices to reduce pressure.

(2) the main compressed air system to starting of combustion engines for main propulsion shall be suitably protected against the effects of backfiring and internal explosion in the starting air pipes.

(3) All discharge pipes from starting air compressors shall lead directly to the starting air receivers, and all starting air receivers to main startrør from-or help the machines should be completely separated from the compressor outlet piping.

(4) measures must be taken to limit the ingress of oil in compressed air systems to a minimum and to drain these systems.

Rule 10 measures concerning fuel oil, lubricating oil and other flammable oils (1) oil fuel having a flash point lower than 60 ° c (sample in a sealed container) as provided for in an approved flashpoint apparatus shall not be used as a fuel, with the exception of emergency generators, in which case the flash point shall not be less than 43 ° c. The Administration may, however, permit the use of fuel oil with a flash point not less than 43 ° c, subject to such additional precautions as it considers necessary, shall be observed, and on condition that the temperature in the space in which such oil fuel is stored or used, not rising to more than 10 ° c below the flashpoint of the oil.

(2) There shall be provided safe and effective means to see oil quantity in any oil tank. If pejlerør is installed, the upper end of the pipe end in a safe place and be provided with an appropriate closing agent. Level meters of glass of substantial thickness and with metal sheath can be used, provided that they are fitted with self-closing valves. Other means of ascertaining the amount of oil in the oil tank may be used provided that there is not going to release the fuel oil out, if the bearing failure, or equipment if the idea was to become crowded.

(3) provision shall be made to prevent overpressure in any oil tank or in any part of the oil fuel system, including the filling pipes. Safety valves and air or overflow pipe must have an outlet in a location and in a manner that is safe.
(4) oil fuel lines, as in damaged condition may cause leak oil out from a tanker or settlingtank højtank, consumption, which is placed above the double bottom, shall be fitted with a cock or valve on the tank, which can be closed from a safe position outside the space concerned in the event of a fire occurring in the space in which such tanks are situated. In the special case where high appeal is located in a shaft or pipe tunnel or similar place, tanks should be equipped with shut-off valves, but control must in the event of a fire could happen by means of an additional valve on the pipeline or pipelines outside the tunnel or similar space. If such additional valve is fitted in the machinery space, shall be operable from outside this room.

(5) Pumps, that is part of the oil fuel system shall be separate from any other system, and links to such pumps shall be fitted with an efficient relief valve which must be in closed circulation. Where fuel oil tanks is alternately used as ballast tanks shall be provided appropriate means to separate the fuel oil from ballast systems.

(6) an oil tank must never be placed in a location where the outflow from the tank or leaks in this can pose a fire hazard if fuel comes into contact with a hot surface. Measures must be taken to prevent the oil spill under pressure from any pump, filter or heater from coming into contact with heated surfaces.

(7) (a) oil fuel pipes and their valves and fittings shall be of steel or other equivalent material except that flexible pipes may be used [in the least possible degree, if it can be reconciled with the ship's function.] Flexible hose connections with fittings shall be of adequate strength and shall be constructed of fire-resistant material or have fireproof coating in accordance with the [rules of a recognised organisation. Such flexible hose connections must be installed in accordance with IMO MSC. Circ. 647,» minimise leakages from flammable two guidelines liquid systems '.]

(7) (b) Where it is deemed necessary, pipelines for fuel oil and lubricating oil be screened or otherwise suitably protected to avoid olieudsprøjtning or udlækning on heated surfaces or machinery air intakes. The number of joints in the pipe systems must be kept to a minimum.

(8) oil fuel tanks shall, as far as possible, be a part of the hull and shall be located outside machinery spaces of category A Where it is necessary to place the fuel oil tanks, except dobbeltbunds tanks, beside or in machinery spaces of category A at least one of their vertical sides bumping up to the machinery space boundaries and preferably have common boundaries with dobbeltbunds tanks, if they exist and the part of their boundary, which is common with the machinery space shall be as small as possible. When such tanks are placed within the boundaries of machinery spaces of category A, they must not contain oil fuel with a flashpoint lower than 60 ° c (sample in a sealed container). In General, one should avoid the use of freestanding oil fuel tanks in flammable areas and in particular in machinery spaces of category a. If freestanding oil fuel tanks shall be permitted, they should be placed in a olietæt waste tray of ample size with a proper drainpipes, leading to a waste oil tank of suitable dimensions.

(9) the ventilation of machinery spaces shall be sufficient under all normal conditions to prevent accumulation of oil vapour.

(10) measures taken for the purpose of storage, distribution and utilisation of oil used in pressure lubrication systems shall comply with [the rules of a recognised organisation.] Such measures in machinery spaces of category A and, where possible, in other machinery spaces shall at least comply with the provisions in points (1), (3), (6) and (7) and, if deemed necessary, points (2) and (4) [in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation.] This does not preclude the use of the oil level glass in lubricating systems provided that it is demonstrated that the tests have an appropriate level of fire safety.

(11) measures taken for the purpose of storage, distribution and use of flammable oils used in power transmission installations under pressure of a different kind than those referred to in point (10), in the steering control and steering systems as well as in heating systems shall comply with the rules of a recognised organisation. In places where there is a possibility of ignition, these installations, as a minimum, comply with the provisions of paragraph (2) and (6) as well as the provisions of paragraph (3) and (7), in respect of strength and construction.

(12) the oil fuel, lubricating oil and other flammable oils in forepeak tanks must not be carried out.

Rule 11 Draining devices (1) there shall be an efficient bilge pumping plant, which in every conceivable case must be capable of pumping from and draining any watertight compartment with the exception of those intended solely for storage of oil or water, regardless of whether the ship is on an even keel or heels. There must be straws in the tables, if this is necessary. Measures must be taken to ensure that water can easily run to the suction pipes. If the Administration considers that the safety of the ship is not thereby impaired, can be refused in exceptional space. devices bilge

(2) (a) there must be at least two independently power bilge pumps, one of which may be driven by the main engine. A ballast pump or other general service pump with sufficient capacity can be used as machine-driven bilge pump.

(2) (b) power bilge pumps shall be capable of giving a speed of water of at least 2 metres per second through hovedlænserøret, which must have an internal diameter of at least

d = 25 + 1.68 √ L (B + D)

where: d is the inner diameter in mm and L, (B) and (D) is in metres.

The actual inside diameter for hovedlænserøret can, however, rounded off to the nearest standard size acceptable to the administration.

(2) (c) Any bilge pump which is required by this regulation, shall be fitted with direct suction lines, of which one works from the engine room port side and the other from the starboard side, except that in ships with a length of less than 75 metres only needs to be installed a suction.

(2) (d) No suction piping must have an inner diameter of less than 50 mm. Bilge pumping plant layout and sizing shall be such that the full calculated capacity of the pump described above can be used in each of the watertight compartments between the collision detection and agterpeakskotterne.

(3) A bilge ejector in connection with an independently powered high pressure seawater pump may be installed in place of an independently powered bilge pump, as prescribed in paragraph (2) (a), provided that such an arrangement satisfies the Administration's requirements.

(4) in ships where the treatment and processing of fish can cause the amount of water collected in the confined space, necessary drains are established.

(5) the bilge pipes shall not pass through fuel, oil, ballast or dobbeltbunds tanks, unless such pipe is of difficult dimensioned steel structure.

(6) the bilge and ballast pumping systems shall be installed in such a way that water is prevented from passing from the sea or from water ballast spaces into the cargo or machinery spaces, or from one watertight compartment to another. The bilge connection to pumps which suck from the lake or from water ballast spaces shall be provided with either a non-return valve or a cock which cannot at the same time can be opened either to the bilge pumping system and to the lake or to the bilge pumping system and water ballast spaces. Valves in the distribution boxes for bilge systems must be of non-return valve type.

(7) every bilge pipes that pass through a collision bulkhead shall be fitted with an efficient closing agent at the bulkhead with remote control from the working deck and with an indicator showing the position of the valve, but with remote control, installation may be omitted if the valve is placed in the agtersiden of the bulkhead and is easily accessible under all working conditions.

Rule 12 protection against noise

Measures must be taken to reduce the effects of noise on staff in the machinery space to the level [prescribed in IMO resolution a. 468 (XII)].

Rule 13 steering gear (1) every ship shall be provided with a main steering gear and auxiliary steering gear that meets [the rules of a recognised organisation.] The main steering gear and auxiliary steering system shall be arranged so that a single failure in one of them, so far as is practical and reasonable, not to be able to bring the other out of function.

(2) where the main steering gear comprises two or more identical power units, it is not necessary to install an auxiliary steering gear, if the main steering gear is capable of maneuvering the rudder, as required in paragraph (10), when one of the devices is out of function. Each of the power unit must be operable from a separate circuit.

(3) the rudder position, if it is mechanically operated, must be specified in the wheelhouse. Rorvinkel the indication of machine-operated steering gear shall be independent of the steering gear control system.

(4) in the event that one of the units fails, a steering gear alarms are indicated in the wheelhouse.
(5) Indicators for ongoing operating control of electric and electro-hydraulic steering gear engines to be installed in the wheelhouse. Protection against short circuit, overload alarm and a nulspændings alarm shall be provided for such circuits and motors. Protection against too high voltage, if it is installed, be at least twice the thus protected motors or circuit full load voltage and must be designed to allow the passage of the necessary start-up current.

(6) the main steering gear shall be of adequate strength and sufficient to steer the ship at maximum power for cruising speed. The main steering gear and rudder stock shall be so designed that they will not be damaged at full speed astern; or by maneuvering during fishing.

(7) the main steering gear shall, when the ship goes forward with a maximum cruising speed and with maximum permissible draught, could put the rudder over from 35 ° on one side to 35 ° on the other side. Helm must under the same conditions could be laid over from 35 ° on one side to 30 ° on the other side in not more than 28 seconds. The main steering gear is operated by power shall, as necessary to meet these requirements.

(8) the main steering gear shall be arranged to start either with the manual resources in the wheelhouse or automatically when the energy comes back after a power interruption.

(9) Reserve steering gear shall be of adequate strength and sufficient to steer the ship when this makes manoeuvring speed, and must be ready for rapid use in emergencies.

(10) the auxiliary steering system shall be capable of putting the rudder over from 15 ° on one side to 15 ° on the other side in not more than 60 seconds with the ship goes forward with half of its maximum speed or 7 knots, whichever might be the highest. Auxiliary steering system must be mechanically driven, provided it is necessary for the fulfilment of these requirements. [If this source of energy is electrical, the electrical power could drive the devices that hold the helm in time, for a period ending at least ten minutes.]

(11) electric and electro-hydraulic steering gear in ships with a length of 75 m in length and over shall be born through at least two circuits fed from the main switchboard, and these circuits shall be placed as far apart as possible.

Rule 14 engineers ' alarm

In ships with a length of 75 m and over there is an engineers ' alarm which can be operated from the engine control room or the manoeuvring platform depending on the what might be appropriate, and shall be clearly audible in living rooms, dining rooms and smoking machinery masters salon (common spaces) and closed working deck.

Rule 15 cooling systems for the preservation of the catch (1) cooling systems must be designed, constructed, tested and deployed, taking appropriate account of systems security and also the release of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and other ozone-depleting substances from the coolant, which is stored in quantities or concentrations which are harmful to human health or to the environment, and shall be to the satisfaction of the administration.

(2) the refrigerants used in refrigeration systems, must meet the Administration's demands. Methylklorid or CFC, if ozone-depleting potential is higher than 5% of CFC-11, should not be used as a refrigerant.

(3) (a) refrigeration facilities shall be suitably protected against vibration, shock, expansions, contractions, etc. and must be equipped with an automatic safety control device which can prevent a dangerous increase in temperature and pressure.

(3) (b) cooling systems, in which toxic or flammable refrigerants shall be provided with drainage devices, leading to a place where the coolant does not present any danger to the ship or persons on board.

(4) (a) Any spaces containing refrigerating machinery, including capacitors and receivers that use toxic refrigerants must be separated from any adjacent spaces by gas-tight bulkheads. Any spaces containing refrigerating machinery, including capacitors and receivers shall be equipped with a system to detect leaks, there must be an indicator outside the room, close to the entrance, and shall be provided with an independent ventilation system and a water sprinkler system.

(4) (b) When such placement is not practical due to the ship's size, the cooling system can be installed in the machinery space, provided that the amount of the used refrigerant not can present a hazard for persons in the engine room, where all the coolant escapes, and provided that there is installed a alarm that can give warning of a dangerous accumulation of fumes if a leak occurs in the room.

(5) in compartment for refrigerating machines and in cold storage to be alarms for the wheelhouse or control stations or for escape exits to ensure that persons are detained. At least one of the outputs from such places should be able to be opened from the inside. Where practicable, must the exits from spaces containing refrigerating machinery, which uses toxic or flammable refrigerant, not lead directly to any living room.

(6) If a refrigerant, which is harmful to humans, used in a refrigeration system, must be at least two sets of breathing apparatus, one of which shall be affixed at a place that in all likelihood will not be out of reach in the event that the coolant leaking out. Breathing appliances, which were acquired as part of the ship's brandbekæmpningsudstyr, can be regarded as fulfilling this or part of this provision, provided that its location meets both objectives. Use self-acting respiratory equipment, extra containers are provided.

(7) Adequate guidance on safe operation of, as well as emergency procedures for the refrigeration unit must be provided by appropriate lookups on board the ship.

(8)

If the refrigerant R 717 (ammonia), which are harmful to humans, used in these plants, see additional requirements laid down in the rules of a recognized class company and the provisions set out below

2) apply from 1. January 2003.

(8) (a)

Pipelines, which contains the refrigerant shall not pass through accommodation spaces, wheelhouse and machinery space.



(8) (b)

If the cooling elements with direct expansion is installed in the room where people usually move about, such as fabriksdæk, closed the working deck, cold room and cargo space, the following equipment must be located immediately outside the all usual means of access to such spaces:



(8) (b) (i)

a water hose with spread the nozzle and constant water supply,



(8) (b) (ii)

a safety shower,



(8) (b) (iii) two paragraph gas masks with appropriate filters placed in sealed enclosure with transparent cover, and



(8) (b) (iv)

two paragraphs eye rinse bottles.

Subparagraph (C) electrical installations

(See also rule 3)

Rule 16 Electrical power (1) (a) if the electrical power is the only way to ensure the operation of the auxiliary, which is essential for the propulsion and safety, there is an electric power comprising at least two generating sets, of which one may be driven by the main engine. Other devices that have similar electrical performance, [and which are in accordance with the rules of a recognised organisation, may be permitted.]

(1) (b) the benefits provided by these sets should be sufficient to ensure the operation of the measures referred to in rule 3 (6) (a) the said facility, with the exception of the energy udkræves for fishing activities and processing and preservation of the catch in the event of one of these generating sets ceases to work. [In ships with a length of less than 45 m, however, it is sufficient for the operation of facilities that are essential for the propulsion and safety, guaranteed by the outcome of a generating sets.]

(1) (c) the design of the ship's main source of electrical power shall be such that in rule 3 (6) (a) the said facility can be kept in time regardless of the number of main propulsion machinery or shaft revolutions.

(1) (d) Where converters form a substantial part of it in this paragraph prescribed supply system, the system must be so arranged as to ensure continuity of supply.

(2) (a) the arrangement of the main lighting system shall be such that a fire or other accidents in the space or spaces containing the main source of electrical power, including any converters, cannot cause the emergency lighting system ceases to function.

(2) (b) the décor of the emergency lighting system shall be such that a fire or other accidents in the space or spaces that contain the source of electrical power, including any converters, can not cause the main lighting system ceases to function.

[(3) Navigation lights, if solely electrical, be supplied with power via their own separate switchboard and adequate means to monitor such light.]

Rule 17 Electric power (1) There shall be provided an electric power positioned over the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie outside the machinery space and so arranged that its functions are guaranteed in the event of a fire, flooding or other causes of the main electric installation systems failure. [Notwithstanding paragraph 2, for vessels with a length of 45 metres in length and over, to the source of electrical power shall be capable of serving the installations referred to in this rule for a period of at least eight hours.]

(2) The source of electrical power shall, having due regard to the starting power and certain source pressures transient nature, be able to for a period of at least three hours at the same time to operate: (2) (a) The VHF radio installations required by regulation IX/6 (1) (a) and (a), and (if applicable): (2) (a) (i) The MF radio installations required by regulation IX/8 (1) (a) and (b) and rule IX/9 (1) (b) and (c);

(2) (a) (ii) the ship-country station, which are required in regulation IX/9 (1) (a); and
(2) (a) (iii) the MF/HF radio installations required by regulation IX/9 (2) (a) and (b) and rule IX/10 (1).

(2) (b) the internal communications equipment, the fire detection systems and signals that are required in an emergency;

(2) (c) the ship's lights, if these are exclusively electrical and nødlysene: (2) (c) (i) by bådudsætnings stations on deck and outboard;

(2) (c) (ii) in all alleyways, stairways and exits;

(2) (c) (iii) in spaces containing machinery or source of power;

(2) (c) (iv) at the control stations; and (2) (c) (v) of space for the treatment and processing of fish; and (2) (c) (d) the operation of any emergency fire pump.

(3) The source of electrical power can be either a generator or an accumulator battery.

(4) (a) Where the source of electrical power is a generator, it must be equipped with both an independent fuel supply and with efficient starting device in accordance with the Administration's demands. Unless there is a second independent means of starting of the emergency generator, the only stored energy source be protected in order to rule out the possibility that the discharged completely by the automatic starting system.

(4) (b) where the source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, it must be able to cover the nødbelastningen without recharging, whilst it maintains battery voltage during the entire period of consumption within plus or minus 12% of its nominal voltage. In the event of failure of the main electrical power source, this accumulator battery automatically connected to the emergency switchboard and instantly operate at least the in point (2) (b) and (c) the said facility. The emergency switchboard shall be equipped with an auxiliary switchboard that allows that the battery be connected manually, if the automatic connection system fails.

(5) the emergency switchboard shall be installed as close as practically possible, by source of power and must be positioned as prescribed in paragraph (1). If the source of power is a generator, the emergency switchboard shall be positioned at the same institution, unless the operation of the emergency switchboard would be thereby impaired.

(6) Accumulator batteries that are installed in accordance with this rule, [except for batteries for radio transmitter and receiver in ships with a length of less than 45 m], shall be located in a ventilated space effectively, there must not be the same compartment, containing the emergency switchboard.

An indicator shall be located in a suitable place on the main switchboard or in the engine control room to show when the battery that constitutes the source of power, discharged. The emergency switchboard shall be supplied during normal operation from the main switchboard through a connection feed line to be protected at the main switchboard against overload and short circuit. The emergency switchboard shall be so arranged that in the event of failure of the main power supply shall be done automatically connection of nødforsyningen. If the system is calculated on the loopback connection supply line must also be protected by the emergency switchboard at least against short circuit.

(7) the emergency generator and its engine, as well as any accumulator battery must be so placed as to ensure that they can operate at full strength when the ship is calculated in create mode, and when it rolls up to an angle of 22 ½ ° each way and at the same time throws up to 10 ° by bow or stern or in any combination of angles within those limits.

(8) The source of electrical power and automatic reset devices shall be so designed and arranged that it is possible for the crew to carry out adequate testing, while the ship is under working conditions.

Rule 18 precautions against shock, fire and other hazards of electrical art3) (1) (a) All fixed, unprotected metal parts of electrical machines or equipment which are not to be live, but which can easily be it due to errors, must be connected to the ship's hull, unless: (1) (a) (i) the forward with a voltage of less than 50 volts DC or 50 volts R.M.S. value calculated middle managers; automatic converters may not be used to achieve this alternative voltage; and (1) (a) (ii) they are fitted with a voltage of less than 250 volts from security isolated converters, which only provides a consuming device; or (1) (a) (iii) they are designed according to the principle of double insulation.

(1) (b) portable electrical equipment must operate at a safe voltage, and unprotected metal parts of such equipment which are not intended to be live but which may be due to error, must be connected to the ship's hull. The Administration may require additional precautions to be observed with regard to portable electric lamps, tools and similar apparatus used in enclosed or particularly damp room where there is a particular risk because of the danger of electric transition.

(1) (c) Electrical apparatus shall be so designed and installed that it cannot cause injury when handled or touched in the normal manner.

(2) the main and emergency power boards must be placed so that there is easy access, as may be needed, for appliances and equipment without risk to personnel. The sides and the rear and, where necessary, the front of the power boards shall be suitably shielded. Unprotected live electrical parts that have voltages to the hull, which exceeds a fixed voltage, the Administration must not be installed on the front of such switchboards. There must, if necessary, be provided for the non-conducting mats or gratings at the front and back.

(3) A distribution system with the hull as a back wire must not be installed.

(4) (a) where a distribution system, primary or secondary, for power, heating or lighting without grounding, there shall be a device which is capable of monitoring the insulation level to Earth.

(4) (b) if the allocation system is in accordance with subsection (a), and the voltage exceeds 50 v direct current or 50 volts RMS between the leaders, there must be a device which is capable of continuously monitoring the insulation level to Earth and giving an audible or visual indication by means of abnormally low insulation values.

(4) (c) accounting systems, which are supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250 volts direct current or 250 volts RMS between the leaders, and which is limited in its extent, may satisfy subsection (a), provided that the Administration allows this.

(5) (a) Unless the Administration in exceptional cases permits otherwise, pair; metal shielding and reinforcement be continuous in the electrical sense and connected to the ship's hull.

(5) (b) All electrical wiring must at least be of a fire retardant type and must be installed in such a way that their original fire retardant properties cannot be reduced. The Administration may allow the use of special wire types, which do not meet the foregoing requirements, when necessary for specific purposes, such as URf.eks. radio frequency cables.

(5) (c) Cables and wiring serving the main or emergency systems for energy, lighting, internal communications or signals shall, so far as is practical, pulled clear of galleys, machinery spaces of category A and other space, offering high fire risk, as well as laundry rooms, rooms for the treatment and processing of fish and other spaces where there is high humidity. Wires connecting fire pumps to the emergency switchboard shall be of a type that resists fire, where they pass through the room, posing great danger of fire. Where it is practical, all such wires are pulled in such a way that it be ruled out that they put out of operation by overheating of bulkheads, caused by a fire in an adjacent space.

(5) (d) where the wires are installed in spaces where there is a danger of fire or explosion in the event of an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken against such risks, in accordance with the Administration's demands.

(5) (e) Wiring must be installed in such a way that really filing or other damage to be avoided.

(5) (f) Ends and joints in all conductors shall be so made that they maintain the wire's original electrical, mechanical, fire resistance and fire resistance properties, if necessary.

(5) (g) Wires installed in cold rooms, must be suitable for low temperatures and high humidity.

(6) (a) circuits shall be protected against short circuit. Circuits must also be protected against overload, except where it relates to the application of the provisions of rule 13, or if the Administration, exceptionally permits otherwise.

(6) (b) Normal value or setting of the device to protect against overloads for each circuit shall be permanently indicated that, when the protective device is placed.

(7) the luminaires must be so arranged as to prevent temperature increases that would be harmful to the wires, as well as for strong heating of the surrounding material.

(8) the lighting and wiring circuits, which terminated in a room where there is a danger of fire or explosion, be fitted with topo guide switches outside the room.

(9) (a) A battery battery compartment must be designed and ventilated in accordance with the Administration's demands.

(9) (b) electrical and other equipment, which is posing a danger of ignition of flammable vapours shall not be permitted in these compartments except as may be permitted under paragraph (10).

(9) (c) An accumulator battery must not be placed in the living room, unless it is installed in a hermetically sealed container.
(10) in space, where there can collect easily flammable mixtures, and in space, which is designed to contain a battery battery, do not install electrical equipment unless the Administration takes the view that it is: (10) (a) essential for operational purposes;

(10) (b) of a type that cannot ignite the mixture concerned;

(10) (c) appropriate for that space; and (10) (d) appropriately approved for safe use under the circumstances with respect to dust, fumes, and gases, as with probability can occur.

(11) the Arrestors must be fitted on all træmaster or mærse rods. In ships constructed of non-conductive materials must lynaflederen be associated with appropriate leaders to a copper plate that is placed on the ship's hull well below the waterline.

Subparagraph (D) periodically unattended machinery spaces

(See also rule 3)

Rule 19 of the Fire Prevention (1) to be taken particularly into account the high-pressure fuel oil pipes. Where practicable, leaks from such pipe systems is collected in a suitable drain tank, which must be fitted with an alarm device for high level.

(2) if the fuel oil tanks for the daily consumption is filled automatically, or by remote control, means shall be provided to prevent spills due to overflow. Equivalent must be observed with regard to the other equipment which treats flammable liquids automatically, URf.eks. fuel oil centrifuge that, where practicable, shall be installed in a special space reserved for purifiers and related opvarmere.

(3) if the fuel oil tanks for daily consumption or clean the tanks are equipped with devices for heating, there is an alarm for high temperature, if fuel oil flash-point may be exceeded.

Fire detection (4) an approved fire detection systems that are based on it though alarming principle and has the option for periodic testing, shall be installed in the machinery space.

(5) the fire detection system shall initiate both audible and visible alarm in the wheelhouse and on a sufficient number of other appropriate places so that it can be heard and noted by persons on board while the ship is in port.

(6) the fire detection system shall automatically be born from an emergency source if the main electrical power source fails.

(7) internal combustion engines at 2500 kilowatts and above shall be provided with crankcase oil mist detectors for or rent temperature detectors or similar devices.

Fire-fighting measures (8) There shall be provided a fixed fire-extinguishing system that meets the Administration's requirements, and is in accordance with the requirements of rule V/22 and V/40.

(9) in ships with a length of 75 m and above must have taken measure to the instant delivery of water from the fire main either by: (9) (a) device for remote starting of one of the main fire pumps in the wheelhouse and by the fire control station, if any; or (9) (b) permanent pressure on the fire main having due regard to the possibility of freeze up. 4) (10) the administration shall be satisfied as to the machinery space fire safety, placement and the centralisation of control of the fire-extinguishing system, in rule 24 referred to disconnection handling systems, URf.eks. with regard to ventilation, fuel pumps, etc., and may require fire extinguishers and other fire-fighting equipment and breathing apparatus in addition to the requirements set out in chapter V.

Rule 20 protection against flooding (1) Kimminger in machinery spaces shall be fitted with an alarm device of high quality, so that the accumulation of liquids is detected at normal angles of trim and heel. The alarm system shall initiate an audible and visible alarm on places where there are kept continuous watch.

(2) control to any valve serving an opening from the Lake, a drain below the waterline or a bilge injection system shall be so arranged that it provides adequate time for operation in case water enters in the room.

Rule 21 Communications

In ships with a length of 75 m or more to be one of the separate means of communication referred to in rule 7 be a reliable oral system. An additional, reliable, oral means of communication shall be provided between the wheelhouse and machinery masters living rooms, dining rooms and smoking lounge (common spaces) and closed working deck.

Rule 22 Alarm systems (1) an alarm system shall be provided indicating any fault requiring attention.

(2) (a) the Alarm system shall be able to in the machinery space to give an audible alarm as well as visually indicate each alarm function at a suitable place. [The Administration may authorise the plant in ships with a length of less than 45 m can only specify each alarm function acoustic and optical in wheelhouse.]

(2) (b) [in ships with a length of 45 m] and over the alarm system have a connection to the machine-masters booths through a switchable contact in order to ensure a connection to one of these booths and for machine masters any recreation room. The Administration may allow alternative events, posing an equivalent level of safety.

(2) (c) [in ships with a length of 45 m] and above should be an alarm for machine masters and an alarm to the control houses for officer in charge of persons be enabled, if an alarm function has not been noticed within a limited period of time, the details of which prescribed by the administration.

(2) (d) Audible and Visual alarms shall be activated in the pilothouse in any situation which requires action by the responsible officer in person or should be brought to his knowledge.

(2) (e) the Alarm system shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, be scheduled after ' fail-safe ' principle.

(3) Alarm system shall: (3) (a) be fitted permanently and with energy with automatic changeover to standby power supply in case of loss of normal power supply; and (3) (b) is activated by the normal power supply failure.

(4) (a) Alarm system shall at the same time be able to specify more than one error, and the acceptance of any alarm shall not inhibit another alarm (4) (b) Receipt of the in point (2) (a) the said place of any alarm message must be indicated at the place in which it was shown. Alarms shall be maintained until they are recognized, and the visual indication shall remain standing until the error is corrected. All alarms shall automatically reinitialised when the error has been corrected.

Rule 23 specific requirements applicable to machinery, boilers and electrical installations (1) in ships with a length of 75 m in length and over shall be the main source of electrical power shall be provided as follows: (1) (a) Where electrical energy normally generated by a generator, there must be adequate protection against overload events to ensure power supply to the features required for propulsion and steering. In the event of failure of the generator during the operation, there shall be made for automatic starting and connecting to the main switchboard of a stand-by generator of sufficient capacity to permit propulsion and steering and automatic restart of the essential help machineries, including, if necessary, successive operations. In accordance with the Administration's demands may provide funds to the remote start (manual start) and connection of the stand-by generator for the main switchboard, as well as funds for repeated remote launch of essential auxiliary machineries; and (1) (b) If electrical energy normally generated by more than one generating sets at the same time, there should be taken measures, URf.eks. by protection against overload, in order to ensure that the remaining generating sets, if one of the sets, fails, can be kept in operation without overload, so that the propulsion and control can take place.

(2) Where it is required, must reserve auxiliary machinery is of importance for the propulsion be equipped with automatic switching devices, which enable the transition to a standby machine. An alarm shall be given by automatically switching.

(3) Automatic control and alarm systems shall be provided in accordance with the following rules: (3) (a) the control system shall be such that the operation of the main propulsion machinery and associated auxiliary machineries necessary services is ensured through the necessary automatic arrangements;

(3) (b) means shall be provided to keep the starting air pressure at the required level where internal combustion engines, used as the main means of propulsion;

(3) (c) an alarm system that complies with rule 22, shall be provided for all important pressures, temperatures and fluid levels, etc.; and (3) (d) where appropriate, an adequate central space must be provided with the necessary alarm panels and Instrumentation indicating any called error.

Rule 24 Security system

To be organised a security system so that serious malfunctions in machinery or boiler plants, which can pose immediate danger, must initiate automatic shut-down of the part of the plant and give an alarm. Shut-down of the propulsion system must however not be done automatically, except in the case, which could lead to serious damage, complete breakdown or explosion. There are installed devices to put the shut-down function out of service, they must be so arranged that they preclude inadvertent activation. There must be Visual means to indicate whether it has been activated or not.

Subparagraph (E) other technical installations



Rule 25 Hydraulic installations



(1)
Hydraulic installations, as well as the associated piping systems and fittings shall be so designed and constructed that they are suitable for the function they are intended for. They shall be arranged and protected in such a way that they pose the least possible danger to persons on board, and under appropriate consideration of moving parts, hot surfaces and other hazards. In component selection and system design must take account of it, the plant will be exposed. The short-term pressure variations (pressure spikes) must not exceed the maximum nominal value of constituents. The entire installation must be carried out in such a way that the noise and vibration from the plant is not transmitted to ship construction (structural noise).

(2)

Where steel used as pressure tubes, these must be constructed of seamless pipes and tubes. Electric resistance welded tubes may be used only in a few cases, after special permission from the Danish maritime authority. Steel pipes shall meet the applicable recognized rørstandard, taking into account the system's maximum pressure. Where flexible hoses are used, these must be of a suitable, recognized approved type, URf.eks. SAE/ISO, and mounted without twisting and crack. Hose couplings must be performed as clutches of a suitable and recognised approved type.

(3)

Collections of rørlængder or collection between pipe and faucet/fittings must be done using the bolted flange joints by welding or by using the collar threaded fittings or other type of cut-off fittings with O-ring. Flange joints and fittings must be adapted to the working pressure. Pipe in hydraulic systems must be treated by D.V.S. nr. 08004 and D.V.S. nr. 08005. If they have been welded or heat bowed, the acid out of metallic purity. The pipes on pumpers output page must be protected from excess pressure that is greater than the calculated working pressure. When to this protection against excess pressure safety valves are used on the pump's output page, should the design be such that the valve output page is fed back to the suction side of the pump or another appropriate place, usually the idea. Safety valves must be open, if the working pressure increases by more than 10%. Pipes placed on the low pressure side of a reducing valve must be secured against excess pressure by means of the safety valves or similar, when these tubes as well as related components thereto is not intended for the pressure on the high pressure side of the reducer. Safety valve flow capacity shall be of such a size that the pressure in the pipes do not at any time exceed by more than 10% the working pressure. Motors must be protected by means of shock valves as close to the engine as is practicable.

(4)

Pressure test must be carried out prior to the entry into service of an installation/a sub-component and witnessed by the approval authority.



(4) (a)

Pressure pipelines and various fixtures must pressure tested with min. 1.5 x working pressure.



(4) (b)

Cylinders shall be pressure tested with a pressure Pe as a function of working pressure P.



PE = 1.5 P, where P < 40 bar.



PE = 1.4 P + 4, where P ≥ 40 bar.



The test pressure shall not be less than 4 bar.



(5)

System pressure for games, nettromler, etc. must not without special permission from the Danish maritime authority exceed 250 bar continuously by the pump.



(6)

Taking into account the maximum permitted noise limits in the ship must flow speeds in the hydraulic fixed pressure pipes shall not exceed 3 m/sec. at fabriksdæk and closed working deck and 4 m/sec. other places, however, a flow rate of up to 5 m/sec. allowed in the plant as a bow thruster and mooring games used briefly. The same considerations are the flow rate in the suctions should not exceed 0.8 m/sec.

(7)

Rørdiagrammer and calculations must be submitted to the approval authority showing that the above provisions are followed.



Chapter V CHAPTER V

FIRE PROTECTION, FIRE DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHING OF FIRE

(See also rule IV/19)







 







Subparagraph (A)









Fire safety regulations









Rule 1





General provisions







Rule 2





Definitions









Subparagraph (B)









The fire safety measures in vessels with a length of 60 m or more









Rule 3





Construction







Rule 4





Bulkheads in accommodation spaces and service spaces







Rule 5





Protection of stairways and elevator shafts in the living-, service-and control stations







Rule 6





Doors in fire resisting divisions







Rule 7





Bulkheads and decks fire safety







Rule 8





Construction details







Rule 9





Ventilation systems







Rule 10





Heating installations







Rule 11





Differently







Rule 12





Gascylindere and storage of hazardous materials







Rule 13





Escape routes







Rule 14





Automatic sprinkler, fire alarm and fire detection systems (Method IIF)







Rule 15





Automatic fire alarm and fire detection systems (Method IIIF)









Rule 15a









Røgmelde plant









Rule 16





Fixed fire-extinguishing medium in cargo spaces of high fire risk







Rule 17





Fire pumps







Rule 18





Fire mains







Rule 19





Hydrants, hoses and nozzles







Rule 20





Portable fire extinguishers







Rule 21





Portable fire extinguishers in control, living and service spaces







Rule 22





Fire-extinguishing installations in engine room







Rule 23





International shore connection







Rule 24





Fireman's equipment







Rule 25





Fire control plan







Rule 26





Option for quick application of fire-fighting equipment







Rule 27





Equivalence
Subparagraph (C)









Fire protection in ships with a length of [24 m] in length and over but less than 60 metres in length









Rule 28





Constructive fire protection







Rule 29





Ventilation systems







Rule 30





Heating installations







Rule 31





Differently







Rule 32





Gascylindere and storage of hazardous materials







Rule 33





Escape Rule 34





Automatic fire alarm and fire detection systems









Rule 34a









Røgmelde plant











Rule 34b









Fixed fire-extinguishing medium in cargo spaces of high fire risk









Rule 35





Fire pumps







Rule 36





Fire mains







Rule 37





Hydrants, hoses and nozzles







Rule 38





Portable fire extinguishers







Rule 39





Portable fire extinguishers in control, living and service spaces







Rule 40





Fire-extinguishing installations in engine room







Rule 41





Fireman's equipment







Rule 42





Fire control plan







Rule 43





Option for quick application of fire-fighting equipment







Rule 44





Equivalence









Subparagraph (D)









Fire protection in vessels under 24 m











Rule 45









Constructive fire protection











Rule 46









Ventilation systems











Rule 47









Heating installations











Rule 48









Differently











Rule 49









Storage of gas cylinders and dangerous materials











Rule 50









Escape routes











Rule 51









Automatic fire alarm system











Rule 51a









Fixed fire-extinguishing medium in cargo spaces of high fire risk











Rule 52









Fire-fighting pumps — the number, capacity and placing











Rule 53









Fire wires











Rule 54









Hydrants, hoses and nozzles











Rule 55









Fire-extinguishing installations











Rule 56









Portable fire extinguishers











Rule 57









Fireman's equipment











Rule 58









Option for quick application of fire-fighting equipment











Rule 59









Equivalence













Unless otherwise expressly specified in the individual rule or piece, this chapter shall apply to new fishing vessels, as defined in chapter I, rule 2 (1).

Subparagraph (A) Fire Safety Regulations

Rule 1 General provisions

One of the following protection methods to be used in accommodation spaces and service spaces: (a)

Method IF – the construction of all interior subdivision bulkheads of non-combustible class ' B ' or ' C ' class divisions in General without the installation of a fire detection or sprinkler system in the accommodation spaces and service spaces; or (b)

Method IIF – Installation of an automatic sprinkler and fire alarm system with a view to detecting and extinguishing a fire in all spaces in which a fire might be expected to occur in General without any limitation with regard to the type of interior subdivision bulkheads; or (c)
Method IIIF – Installation of an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system in all spaces in which a fire might be expected to occur in General without any limitation with regard to the type of interior subdivision bulkheads, except that the surface area of a seating section, which is bounded by the class ' A ' or ' B ' class Division, in no case may exceed 50 m2. The Administration may, however, increase this space [75 m2], in respect of commonly available spaces. The requirements on the use of non-combustible materials in the construction and insulation of containment bulkheads for machinery spaces, control stations, etc. and protection of stairways and corridors must be common to all three methods.

Regulation 2 Definitions (1) "non-combustible material" is a material which neither can burn or give off flammable gases in such quantity that can happen spontaneously when heated to approximately 750 ° C, which must be [determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.] Any other material is a combustible material.

(2) [' standard fire test ' is a test by which samples from the relevant bulkheads or decks in a prøveovn are exposed to temperatures corresponding to the standard curve for the time and temperatures in accordance with the test methods specified in the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(3) ' Class ' A ' class divisions shall consist of the bulkheads and decks which comply with the following: (3) (a) they shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material;

(3) (b) they shall be suitably stiffened;

(3) (c) they must be designed so that they can prevent the passage of smoke and flame to the end of a standard fire test of 1 hour;

(3) (d) they shall be insulated with approved non-combustible materials such that the average temperature on the non exposed side will not rise more than 139 ° C above the initial temperature and the temperature at any point, including a collection, rises more than 180 ° C above the initial temperature, within the time listed below: Class ' A-60 '





60 minutes







Class ' A-30 '





30 minutes







Class ' A-15 '





15 minutes







Class ' A-0 '





0 minutes





 

 









Administration [shall] require that a test of the prototype of a bulkhead or deck to ensure that it meets the above requirements regarding mechanical resistance and temperature increase [in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(4) ' Class ' B ' class divisions shall consist of the bulkheads, decks, ceilings or linings which comply with the following: (4) (a) they shall be designed in such a way as to prevent the passage of flames until the end of the first half hour of the standard fire test;

(4) (b) they must have such isolation ability that the average temperature on the non exposed side will not rise more than 139  C above the initial temperature and the temperature at any point, including a collection, rises more than 225  C above the initial temperature, within the time listed below: Class ' B-15 '





15 minutes







Class ' B-0 '





0 minutes





 

 









(4) (c) they shall be constructed of approved non-combustible materials and all materials that are part of the design and layout of the class ' B ' class divisions shall be non-combustible. The use of combustible veneers may be permitted provided that it meets the other requirements of this chapter.

The administration shall require a test of a prototype of a Division to ensure that it meets the above requirements regarding mechanical resistance and temperature increase [in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(5) ' Class ' C ' class divisions are divisions constructed ' of approved non-combustible materials. They need neither meet the requirements with respect to the passage of smoke and flame or limits of the temperature rise. The use of combustible veneers are, however, permitted, provided that it meets the other requirements of this chapter.

(6) ' Class ' F ' divisions ' are divisions formed by bulkheads, decks, ceilings or linings which comply with the following: (6) (a) they shall be designed in such a way that they are capable of preventing the passage of flames until the end of the first half hour of the standard fire test; and (6) (b) they must have an insulation value such that the average temperature of the unexposed side will not rise more than 139 ° c above the original temperature, and the temperature at any point, including collections, rise more than 225 ° c above the original temperature, within the first half hour of the standard fire test.

Administration [shall] require testing of a prototype of a Division to ensure that it meets the above requirements regarding mechanical resistance and temperature increase [in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(7) continuous ' B ' class ceilings or linings are those which only a terminated by a class ' A ' or ' B ' class division.

(8) ' steel or other equivalent material ' is such material, which in itself or due to the applied insulation possesses properties similar to steel properties in terms of durability and mechanical resistance at the end of the prescribed standard fire test (URf.eks. an appropriate insulated aluminum alloy).

(9) ' low flame spread characteristics "means that the surface thus described (URf.eks. veneer) will adequately restrict the spread of flame, this must be determined [in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(10) ' Accommodation ' is commonly available spaces, corridors, lavatories, cabins, offices, hospitals, cinemas, games and hobbies rooms, pantries containing no cooking appliances and similar spaces. Accommodation includes also stairways, proviantrum and bathroom.

(11) ' common spaces ' is the part of the living quarters, which are used as halls, dining rooms, smoking lounges and similar solid enclosed spaces.

(12) ' service spaces are those spaces used as ' galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers, mail and specie rooms, storerooms,-workshops (apart from workshops in machinery spaces) and similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.

(13) ' control room ' are spaces in which the ship's radio station, main navigation equipment nødenergi plant or central fire recording or installations control (fire extinguisher system) is placed.

(14) ' machinery spaces of category A are those spaces and trunks to such ' space containing internal combustion engines, used either: (14) (a) for main propulsion, or (14) (b) for purposes other than main propulsion where such machinery has an overall performance at least [375 kW].

(15) the ' engine room ' are Other machinery spaces of category A and all other spaces containing propelling machinery, boilers, oil fuel units, steam and internal combustion engines, generators, major electrical machinery, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilising, ventilation and air conditioning machinery, and similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.

Part B fire safety measures in vessels with a length of 60 m or more

Rule 3 Construction (1) the hull, superstructures, load-bearing bulkheads, decks and deckhouses shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material, unless otherwise provided by paragraph (4).

(2) isolation of parts of aluminum alloy in class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions shall, except for the parts, as after the Administration's estimation is not loaded, be such that the temperature of the load-bearing construction cores do not at any time during the prescribed standard fire test rise more than 200 ° c above the ambient temperature.

(3) structural parts made of aluminum alloy in pillars, supports and other design elements that serve to support areas for affixing, disembarkation and launching of survival craft, as well as class ' A ' and ' B ' class divisions shall be isolated particularly carefully in order to ensure that: (3) (a) in paragraph (2) referred to the temperature rise limitation for such structural parts, which serves to support areas for survival craft , as well as class ' A ' class divisions shall be valid after the expiration of one hour; and (3) (b) in paragraph (2) of the temperature rise limitation specified for structural parts that will support class ' B ' class divisions shall apply after the expiry of a half an hour.

(4) Top and casings of machinery spaces of category A shall be of steel, which are adequately insulated and openings therein, shall be suitably arranged and protected to prevent the fire from spreading.

Rule 4 Bulkheads in accommodation spaces and service spaces
(1) in the accommodation spaces and service spaces must all bulkheads required to be ' B ' class divisions, extend from deck to deck and to the shell or other boundaries unless arranged through ceilings or linings of class ' B ', or both, on both sides of the bulkhead, in which case the bulkhead may be terminated by the recurring headliner or garnish.

(2)

Method IF. All bulkheads which are not in accordance with this or other rules in this title shall be class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions shall be at least class ' C ' class divisions.

(3)

IIF Method. There are no limitations with regard to the construction of bulkheads which are not in accordance with this or other rules in this section must be class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions, except for specific cases where class ' C '-bulkheads are required in accordance with table 1 of rule 7.

(4) Method IIIF. There are no limitations with regard to the construction of bulkheads which are not in accordance with this or other rules in this section must be class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions. No living room area or area of a space that is delimited by a coherent class ' A ' or ' B ' class Division, shall in no case exceed 50 m2, except for specific cases where class ' C '-bulkheads are required in accordance with table 1 of rule 7. The Administration may, however, increase this space [75 m2], in respect of commonly available spaces.

Rule 5 Protection of stairways and elevator shafts in the living-, service-and control station (1) Stairways, which only pass through a single deck, at least one level must be protected with a minimum of class ' B-0 ' class divisions and self-closing doors. Elevators, which are only carried through a single deck, should be enclosed in the smallest class ' A-0 ' class divisions and protected by steel doors on both levels. Staircases and elevator shafts, which are carried through more than one single deck must be enclosed at least ' A-0 ' class divisions and protected by self-closing doors on all levels.

(2) All stairways shall be of steel skeleton, unless the Administration allows the use of other equivalent material.

Rule 6 Doors in fire resisting divisions (1) doors shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, be able to withstand fire, depending on in which Division they may be situated. Doors and door frames in class ' A ' class divisions shall be constructed of steel. Doors in class ' B ' class divisions shall be non-combustible. Doors fitted in bulkheads bounding machinery spaces of category A shall be self-closing and reasonably gas-tight. The Administration may allow the use of combustible materials in doors separating the bedroom from the individual Interior sanitary space, such as URf.eks. showers, if they are built in accordance with the method of NS.

(2) doors shall be self-closing, and shall not be fitted with hooks to keep them open. However, it may be permitted to use devices to hold the doors open when they are equipped with remote triggering of a functional safety type.

(3) Ventilation openings may be permitted in and under doors in corridor bulkheads, such openings should not be permitted in and under doors to stairway enclosures. Openings may only be placed in the lower half of a door. Where such opening is placed in or under a door the total net area of any such opening or openings shall not exceed 0.05 m2. Such an opening is cut in a door it shall be fitted with a grating of non-combustible material.

(4) watertight doors don't have to be isolated. 1)

Rule 7 bulkheads and decks fire safety (1) in addition to complying with the specific provisions for fire safety, bulkheads and decks which are provided for elsewhere in this section, fire safety for bulkheads and decks shall be as specified in table 1 and table 2 of this rule.

(2) the following requirements shall govern application of the tables: (2) (a) tables 1 and 2 respectively shall apply to bulkheads and decks separating adjacent spaces; and (2) (b) to determine what fire safety standards to be applied to boundaries between adjacent colliding space, such spaces are classified according to their fire risk as shown in the following: (2) (b) (i) control station (1)

Spaces containing emergency sources of power and lighting.

Wheelhouse and cutlery lukaf.

Spaces containing the ship's radio equipment.

Brandslukningsrum, fire control and fire detection spots.

Control room for propulsion machinery when located outside the machinery space.

Spaces containing centralized fire alarm equipment.

(2) (b) (ii) Times (2)

Times and lobbyrum.

(2) (b) (iii) living room (3)

Space as specified in rule 2 (10) and (11) other than times.

(2) (b) (iv) Stairways (4)

Interior stairways, lifts and escalators with the exception of those in their entirety is within the machinery space and the space, leading to them. In this connection, a stairway which is enclosed only at one deck, are considered part of the space from which it is not separated by a fire door.

(2) (b) (v) service spaces, presenting low fire hazard (5)

Lockers and storerooms with an area of less than 2 square metres, drying rooms and laundries.

(2) (b) (vi) machinery spaces of category A (6)

Spaces as defined in regulation 2 (14).

(2) (b) (vii) Other machinery spaces (7)

Spaces as defined in regulation 2 (15), including space for the production of fish meal, but not machinery spaces of category a.

For fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later also spaces containing cooking appliances to shrimp or equivalent, however, maximum within a distance of 2 metres, when it is part of a fabriksdæk and the like.



(2) (b) (viii) cargo space (8)

All spaces used for cargo, including cargo oil tanks and trunkways and hatchways to such spaces.

(2) (b) (ix) service spaces, offering high fire risk (9)

Galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, paint and lamp rooms, closet, storerooms, which has an area of 2 square metres or more, and workshops other than those forming part of the machinery space.

(2) (b) (x) open decks (10)

Open deck spaces and enclosed promenades, space for the treatment of fish in raw mode, space for washing the fish and similar spaces that do not present a fire hazard.

Deck spaces in the open air outside superstructures and deckhouses.

The name of each category aims to be typical rather than limiting. The number in parentheses after each category refers to the appropriate column or row in the tables.







 







TABLE 1











Fire safety of bulkheads separating adjacent spaces







 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





Space





(1)





(2)





(3)





(4)





(5)





(6)





(7)





(8)





(9)





(10)







Control stations (1)





A-0e





A-0





A-60





A-0





A-15





A-60





A-15





A-60





A-60





*







Times (2)



 



(C)





B-0





B-0

A-0 c





B-0





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Living room (3)



 

 



C a,b





B-0

A-0 c
B-0





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Staircases (4)



 

 

 



B-0

A-0 c





B-0

A-0 c





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Service spaces m. low fire hazard (5)



 

 

 

 



(C)





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Machinery spaces of category A (6)



 

 

 

 

 



*





A-0





A-0 g





A-60





*







Other machinery spaces (7)



 

 

 

 

 

 



A-0d





A-0





A-0





*







Cargo space (8)



 

 

 

 

 

 

 



*





A-0





*







Service spaces m. high fire risk (9)



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



A-0d





*







Open decks (10)



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



-











* Notes, see table 2.







 







TABLE 2











Fire safety for tires, separating adjacent spaces







 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 





Space over →

Spaces below ↓





(1)





(2)





(3)





(4)





(5)





(6)





(7)





(8)





(9)





(10)







Control stations (1)





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Times (2)





A-0





*





*





A-0





*





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Living room (3)





A-60





A-0





*





A-0





*





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Staircases (4)





A-0





A-0





A-0





*





A-0





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*







Service spaces m. low fire hazard (5)





A-15





A-0





A-0





A-0





*





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





*
Machinery spaces of category A (6)





A-60





A-60





A-60





A-60





A-60





*





A-60





A-30g





A-60





*







Other machinery spaces (7)





A-15





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





*





A-0





A-0





*







Cargo space (8)





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





*





A-0





*







Service spaces m. high fire risk (9)





A-60





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0





A-0d





*







Open decks (10)





*





*





*





*





*





*





*





*





*





-











* Which of the tables appear a * (asterisk), the Division is required to be of steel or equivalent material but is not required to be of the class ' A ' standard. [Where a tire however is pierced for the passage of electric cables, pipes and ventilation shafts, such penetrations shall be tight, as flames and smoke cannot pass.]

(a) There are no special requirements for these bulkheads after fire protection methods IIF and IIIF.

(b) for the purposes of method IIIF to class ' B ' class bulkheads of ' B-0 ' is used between rooms or groups of rooms with an area of 50 m2 or more.

(c) For information on what applies, see regulations 4 and 5.

(d) Where spaces are of the same number, category and note d is specified a bulkhead or deck of the required in the tables showed class only when the adjacent spaces are for a variety of purposes, URf.eks. in category (9). A galley next to a galley does not require any bulkhead, but a galley next to a paint room requires an ' A-0 ' bulkhead.

(e) Bulkheads separating the wheelhouse, card room and radio rooms from each other may be ' B-0 ' class.

(f) Fire insulation need not be fitted if the machinery spaces of category (7) after the Administration's view, pose little or no fire risk.

(g)

When cargo space is insulated with polyurethane, styrophorskum and the like, such bulkheads and decks of fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later, in

soleres ' A-60 ' class from machinery spaces of category a.

(3) continuous ' B ' class ceilings or linings, in association with the relevant decks or bulkheads, may be accepted as contributing wholly or in part, to a Department insulation and security.

(4) Windows and skylights to machinery spaces shall be as follows: (4) (a) where the skylights can be opened, must be possible to close them from a position outside the space. Skylights, which includes glass panes shall be equipped with exterior fixed trapdoors of steel or other equivalent material;

(4) (b) glass or similar material shall not be used in machinery space boundaries. This does not preclude the use of skylights and glass trådforstærket glass to the control room in the engine-room; and (4) (c) in paragraph (a) referred to trådforstærket glass skylights are used.

(5) External bulkheads, which according to the requirements of regulation 3 (1) shall be of steel or equivalent material may be pierced for the purpose of fitting of Windows and sidescuttles, provided that there is no elsewhere in this section provides requirements for such boundaries to have ' A ' class security. Similarly, in such boundaries doors, which are not required to be ' A ' class-security, carried out in materials that meet the Administration's demands.

Rule 8 construction details (1) method of NS. In the living-, service-and control stations, all linings, seals by dividing walls (draught stops), ceilings and associated suspension systems be of non-combustible material.

(2) Method IIF and IIIF. In the corridors and stairwells leading to the residence, service spaces and control stations, ceilings, linings, seals by dividing walls (draught stops) and associated suspension systems be of non-combustible material.

(3) Method IF, IIF and IIIF.

(3) (a) except in cargo spaces or refrigerated sections of service spaces insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Vapour barriers and adhesives used in conjunction with insulation, as well as insulation material for cold service systems need not be non-combustible, but they shall be minimised, and their unprotected surfaces shall have [low flame spread characteristics, this being determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code]. In spaces where penetration of oil products is possible, the surface of insulation shall be impervious to oil or oil vapours.

(3) (b) where non-combustible bulkheads, linings and ceilings in living and service spaces are used, they must have a flammable veneering with a thickness not exceeding 2.0 mm in any such space, with the exception of times, stairway enclosures and control stations, where the thickness should not exceed 1.5 mm.

(3) (c) confined spaces behind ceilings, panelling or linings shall be divided by close-fitting graduations (draught stops), if the distance does not exceed 14 metres. In vertical direction to such spaces, including spaces behind garnering by stairways, trunks, etc., be closed at each deck.

Rule 9 ventilation systems (1) (a) ventilation ducts shall be constructed of non-combustible material. However, do short channels, usually not longer than 2 m and has a cross-sectional area not exceeding 0.02 m2, to not be non-combustible, subject to the following conditions: (1) (a) (i) These ducts shall be of a material which has low flame spread characteristics. [For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later should this be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code;]

(1) (a) (ii) they may only be used at the end of the duct;

(1) (a) (iii) they shall not be situated less than 600 mm, measured along the duct, from an opening in a class ' A ' or ' B ' class Division, including continuous ' B ' class ceilings.

(1) (b) where the ventilation ducts with a free-sectional area exceeding 0.02 m2 pass through class ' A ' bulkheads or decks, the opening shall be provided with a through-wiring of steel unless the ducts passing through the bulkheads or decks are of steel in the vicinity of the place where the passes through the bulkhead or deck, and on this piece of the channel meets the following:
(1) (b) (i) in ducts with a free-sectional area exceeding 0.02 m2, penetrations have a thickness of at least 3 mm and a length of at least 900 mm. When they pass through bulkheads, this length as far as possible, be distributed equally on each side of the bulkhead. Ducts with a free-sectional area exceeding 0.02 m2, must be insulated against fire. The insulation must have at least the same fire resistance as the bulkhead or deck, the Canal passes through. Equivalent protection of penetrations may be required to the satisfaction of the Administration; and (1) (b) (ii) the ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding if 0.085 m2 shall be fitted with fire dampers in addition to the in point (b) (i) requirements. Fire damper shall operate automatically but must also be able to be manually closed from each side of the bulkhead or deck. The damper must have an indicator showing whether the damper is open or closed. Fire damper is not required, however, where ducts are led through the facility, which is surrounded by the class ' A ' class divisions, without serving those spaces, provided those ducts have the same fire integrity as the Scots penetrated.

(1) (c) ventilation ducts to machinery spaces of category A or galleys may not normally pass through the living-, service-, or control room. The Administration may, however, permit such an arrangement on condition that the ducts are made of steel or equivalent material and so arranged that inddelingernes fire resistance is maintained.

(1) (d) ventilation ducts for a living, service or control stations shall not pass through machinery spaces of category normally (A) or through the galleys. The Administration may, however, permit such an arrangement on condition that the ducts are made of steel or equivalent material and so arranged that inddelingernes fire resistance is maintained.

(1) (e) where the ventilation ducts with a free-sectional area exceeding 0.02 m2 passing through class ' B ' bulkheads shall be provided with openings penetrations of steel with a length of at least 900 mm, unless the ducts are made of steel in this length through the bulkhead. When it is passed through the class ' B ' bulkheads, this length as far as possible, be distributed equally on each side of the bulkhead.

(1) (f) in respect of control stations outside machinery spaces shall take such measures as may be practicable, in order to ensure that ventilation, visibility and availability of smoke are maintained, so that the machinery and equipment that exists in space, in the event of fire may be supervised and continue to function effectively. There must be alternative and separate means of air supply; the two sources of supply air inlet openings shall be so arranged that the risk of both openings simultaneously attracts smoke, is reduced to a minimum. After the Administration's determination not to apply these requirements need for control room, which is located on and open out to a free deck, or where local closing arrangements are just as effective.

(1) (g) exhaust ducts from galley ranges, where they must pass through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, shall be performed by the class ' A ' class divisions. Each exhaust duct shall be fitted with: (1) (g) (i) a grease trap readily removable for cleaning;

(1) (g) (ii) a fire damper located in the upper and lower end of the Canal (requirement also a fire damper located in the upper end of the duct shall apply to fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later);

(1) (g) (iii) devices that can be operated from inside the galley, to disconnect the exhaust fan; and (1) (g) (iv) fixed means for extinguishing a fire within the duct, except where the Administration considers such attachments for impracticality in ships with a length less than 75 m.

(2) the main inlet and outlet openings in all ventilation systems shall be capable of being closed from outside the spaces being ventilated. Mechanical ventilation of living-, service-, control-and machinery spaces shall be stopped from an easily accessible position outside the space. This place may not easily could be cut off in the event of fire in the operated area. Means to stop the artificial ventilation of machinery spaces shall be entirely separate from the means to stop the ventilation of the other spaces.

(3) means shall be provided for the closure of the annular spaces around funnels from a safe place.

(4) the ventilation systems serving machinery spaces shall be independent of systems serving other spaces.

(5) Oplagsrum (ships ' stores), containing significant amounts of highly combustible products must be equipped with ventilation systems that are separate from other ventilation systems. Ventilation must be provided at the top and bottom, and the inlet and outlet openings must be located in safe areas and equipped with spark catchers.

Rule 10 Heating installations (1) Electric radiators shall be fixed and be so designed that the fire hazard shall be limited to the minimum. No such heater shall be set up with an exposed heating element that clothing, curtains or other similar materials can be scorched or set on fire by heat from the element.

(2) Heating by open flames is not allowed. Heaters and other similar devices should be fixed, and there should be adequate protection and insulation against fire during and around such appliances and their flues. Flues from stoves, which burn solid fuel, must be located and constructed that the possibility that they will be blocked by the flammable substances are reduced to a minimum, and they must have available funds for remediation. Dampers to reduce drag in røgrørene must, when they are in the closed position, still leave a sufficient area open. Space, in which stoves are installed, shall be fitted with fans with sufficient surface area to allow adequate combustion air the stove. These fans must not have means of closure, and their location must be such that closures may not be required pursuant to Regulation II/9.

(3) Apparatus with open gas flame, apart from cookers and water heaters, are not allowed. Spaces containing such furnaces or water heaters must have adequate ventilation to remove fumes and possible gasudlækninger to a safe place. All pipes, who directs the gas from the tank to the furnace or water heater shall be of steel or other approved material. There should be automatic gasafbrydnings devices that work by drop in gas pressure in the gashovedledningen or failure of flame in any machine.

(4) where the fuel is used for household purposes, ment to be the décor, storage, distribution and use of fuel meet the Administration's demands, in accordance with rule 12.

Rule 11 Forskelligt2) (1) All exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway enclosures and surfaces, including opspantnings materials in covered and inaccessible spaces in accommodation and service spaces and control stations and residence shall have low flame-spread characteristics for fishing vessels, which built the 1. January 2003 or later must be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code3). Exposed surfaces in ceilings in living and service spaces and control stations shall have low flame-spread characteristics for fishing vessels, which built the 1. January 2003 or later must be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.

(2) Paints, varnishes and other materials used on exposed interior surfaces shall not be able to develop significant amounts of smoke or toxic gases or vapours, [which shall be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(3) the lower layer deck coating in living and service spaces and control stations shall be of an approved material which will not readily ignite or give rise to toxic or explosive hazards at elevated temperatures. For fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later should this be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code. 4) (4) where class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions are penetrated for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks, ducts etc., or where such divisions are penetrated for the purpose of placing of ventilating pipes, lighting fixtures and similar devices, measures must be taken to ensure that inddelingens fire safety is not impaired.

(5) (a) in living and service spaces and control stations pipes that pass through class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions shall be of approved material, having regard to the temperature such divisions shall be able to withstand. If the Administration allows the oil and combustible liquids through accommodation and service spaces, the pipes that lead oil or combustible liquids, be of approved materials having regard to fire danger.

(5) (b) Materials that easily degrade due to heat shall not be used for over Board scuppers, sanitary drains and other drainage, which is close to the waterline, where the material's failure in the event of fire could cause danger of flooding.

(6) Cellulose-nitrate film shall not be used in film projection installations.

(7) all waste containers other than those used in connection with the processing of fish shall be constructed of non-combustible materials with no openings in the sides or bottom.

(8) Machinery that drives oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps must be remote controlled, so that in the event of a fire in the room where they are placed, can be stopped from a place outside that space.

(9) there shall be a waste hills, where it is necessary, in order to prevent oil leaking into the bilges.

(10) in spaces that are used for the stowage of fish, flammable insulation protected with tight-fitting clothing.
Rule 12 gascylindere and storage of hazardous materials (1) receptacles for compressed, liquefied or dissolved gases must be clearly marked using the prescribed identity colors, have a clearly legible identification of content's name and chemical formula and be carefully secured.

(2) Containers containing flammable or other dangerous gases, as well as used containers must be stored, properly secured, on the open deck, and all valves, pressure regulators and pipes leading from such containers shall be protected from damage. Containers must be protected against excessive changes in temperature, direct sunrays and the accumulation of snow. The Administration may authorise such containers must be stored in the room in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (3) to (5).

(3) spaces containing easy flammable fluids, such as volatile species paint, wax, benzene, etc., and if it is allowed, liquid gas, must only have direct access from the open deck. Pressure control devices and nødventiler to be discharged within the room. If such space adjacent to bulkheads bounding other enclosed spaces shall be gas-tight.

(4) except as may be necessary for the performance of service in that space, electrical wiring and devices not allowed in spaces that are used for the storage of flammable liquids or liquefied gases. Where such electrical devices are installed, they shall satisfy the Administration's requirements for use in a inflammable atmosphere. [In fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later, they must be of a certified safe type and comply with the relevant requirements of the International Standard IEC Publication 79, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.] Heat sources must be kept clear of such spaces, and there must be prominently placed on the opening of ' non-smoking ' and ' open flames shall be prohibited '.

(5) there must be specific to each type of compressed gas storage room. Space used for storage of such gases, must not be used for the storage of flammable substances or by other tools or objects, which do not form part of the gasfordelings system. The Administration may, however, deviate from these requirements, taking into account the nature, scale and the intended use of such compressed gases.

Rule 13 escape routes (1) stairways and ladders leading to and from all seating areas, and in spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other than machinery spaces shall be located in such a way that they offer easy access to the open deck and thence to rescue vessels. In particular, it must respect these spaces: (1) (a) that from all seating areas shall be provided at least two separate means of escape, which may include the normal route for each delimited space or group of spaces;

(1) (b) (i) that under weather covered as the main escape route must be a staircase, while the other output can be a trunk or a staircase; and (1) (b) (ii) the evacuation routes across the weather deck shall be stairways or doors to an open deck or a combination thereof;

(1) (c) the Administration may exceptionally allow only one escape route, with due regard to the nature and location of spaces and the number of people who normally can during transmission or employed in the spaces;

(1) (d) a time or part of a corridor from which there is only one escape route, must not be more than 7 metres long; and (1) (e) the continuity of the evacuation route must meet the Administration's demands.

[In fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later must staircases and corridors are used as means of escape/escape routes, have a clear width of not less than 700 mm and at least one handrail on one side. Doors, which give access to a stairway shall have a clear width of not less than 700 mm.]

(2) From any machinery spaces of category A shall be provided two means of escape/escape routes, do one of the following: (2) (a) two sets of steel ladders as far apart as possible, which leads up to doors in the upper part of the room with the equivalent distance from which there is access to the open deck. Usually one of these ladders shall provide continuous fire shelter from the lower part of the space to a safe position outside the space. However, the Administration may waive the requirement for such protection, if there exists a safe escape route from the lower part of the space due to a specific organisation or machinery space dimensions. This protection shall be of steel, insulated and provided with a self-closing steel door at the lower end. [In fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later should this protection be of steel, insulated to ' A-60 ' class standard and fitted with an ' A-60 ' class self-closing steel door at the lower end;] or (2) (b) one steel ladder leading to a door in the upper part of the space from which access is provided to the open deck, and also a steel door in the lower part of the space in a place that is well separated from the ladder referred to above, which can be opened and closed from each side and which provides access to a safe escape route from the lower part of the space to the open deck.

(3) From machinery spaces which do not belong to category A, there must be means of escape that meets the Administration's requirements, taking into account the relevant space art and its location and whether or not there is normally employed persons in the room.

(4) Lifts shall not be considered to constitute one of the required means of escape.

Rule 14 automatic sprinkler, fire alarm and fire detection systems (Method IIF) (1) in ships which use method IIF, an automatic sprinkler and fire alarm system of an approved type complying with the provisions of this rule, be installed. [Alternatively, sprinkler and fire alarm installations which do not comply with this rule shall be accepted, provided that these installations comply with the requirements of IMO resolution a.800 (19), Revised guidelines for approval of sprinkler systems equivalent two that referred two in SOLAS regulation II-2/12.] All installations should be configured so that they protects the living and service spaces, except spaces which do not present any significant fire hazard, such as empty spaces and sanitary spaces.

(2) (a) the system shall at all times be ready for immediate use, without the crew having to do anything to put it at the time. The plant must be of the type, where the pipeline is usually filled with water, but less exposed sections may be of type without water, if this Administration believes is a necessary precaution. Parts of the plant, as during the voyage may be exposed to freezing temperatures, to be adequately protected against them. 5) the plant must be kept below the necessary pressure, and there must be ensured a steady supply of water, as provided for in paragraph 6 (b).

(2) (b) each section of the sprinkler system shall be provided with means for automatic placement of visible and audible alarm signal on one or more appliances when a sprinkler comes into business. These appliances must show, in which section there has arisen the fire, and must be centralized in the wheelhouse, and in addition, visible and audible alarms from the plant be situated in a place outside the wheelhouse in order to ensure that the indication of fire immediately received by the crew. The alarm system shall be designed in such a way that it shows any errors that might occur in the plant.

(3) (a) sprinklers shall be grouped in separate sections, each of which contain more than 200 sprinklers.

(3) (b) each section of sprinklers shall be capable of disconnected by simply one stop valve. Stop valve in each section must be easily accessible, and it must constantly be clearly indicated where it exists. Measures must be taken to prevent the stop valves operated by unauthorized persons.

(3) (c) a pressure gauge that shows the pressure in the system, shall be located at each stop valve and at a central station.

(3) (d) the sprinklers shall be resistant against corrosion. In the seating and service spaces must sprinklers come in business within a scale of temperature between 68 ° and 79 ° c. At places like URf.eks. drying rooms, where high temperatures are to be expected, the temperature that triggers the sprinklers, however, be increased by not more than 30 ° c above the maximum temperature up below deck.

(3) (e) at each alarm appliance shall be posted at a list or chart showing the spaces served by the plant, and the zone location in relation to each section. Shall be provided appropriate instructions for testing and maintenance.

(4) Sprinklers shall be placed over head height with such space, to maintain an average water supply of at least 5 litres/m2 per minute over the area covered by the system. Instead, the Administration may allow the use of sprinklers, which provides an appropriate distributed other water quantity when it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that this is no less effective.

(5) (a) There shall be provided a pressure tank having a volume equal to at least twice the water filling, which is specified in this paragraph. The tank should be continuously contain a filling of fresh water, equivalent to the amount of water, as at one minute discharged by it in paragraph (6) (b) referred to pump. Measures must be taken to maintain such an air pressure in the tank, the pressure when the fresh water, which originally was in the tank is exhausted, no less than sprinkle's working pressure plus the pressure corresponding to the height measured from the water tank bottom to the highest sprinkler in the system. Appropriate means shall be provided for the renewal of the air under pressure and renewal of freshwater quantity on hand in the tank. There must be a measuring glass that properly shows the water level in the tank.
(5) (b) means shall be provided to prevent flowing lake water into the tank.

(6) (a) there shall be an autonomous machine driven pump whose sole task shall be automatically and continuously to ensure the supply of water to the sprinklers. The pump should be automatically started by the pressure drop in the plant before filling in fresh water pressure tank is completely exhausted.

(6) (b) the pump and the piping system shall be capable of maintaining the necessary pressure at the level of the highest sprinkler to ensure a continuous water supply, which is sufficient to cover the maximum area which is separated by fire resisting bulkheads of class ' A ' and ' B ' class divisions, or an area of 280 m2, whatever might be the smallest, with the in point (4) referred to delivery speed.

(6) (c) On the pump's delivery side a test valve shall be provided with a map, open test tubes. The effective area through the valve and the pipe must be sufficiently large for the amount of water that the pump must be able to deliver with the maintenance of it in paragraph (5) (a) referred to the pressure in the installation.

(6) (d) the intake of seawater to the pump shall if possible be in the space where the pump is fitted, and shall be carried out in such a way that, when the ship is floating, it will not be necessary to shut off the supply of seawater to the pump for reasons other than the inspection or repair of the pump.

(7) the pump and tank for sprinkler system shall be located within a reasonable distance from machinery spaces of category A and must not be placed in a room that must be protected by the sprinkler system.

(8) (a) there must be at least two energy sources to the seawater pump and automatic fire alarm and fire detection system. If the pump is operated electrically, it must be connected to the main source of electrical power which shall be capable of being supplied by at least two generators.

(8) (b) the cables shall be so arranged that they do not go through galleys, machinery spaces and other enclosed spaces of high fire risk except where this is necessary in order to achieve the appropriate switchboards. One of the energy sources of the fire alarm and fire detection system shall be an emergency source. Where one of the energy sources for the pump is an internal combustion engine, this in addition to the provisions of paragraph (7) be so situated that a fire in a protected space will not affect the air supply to the engine.

(9) the Sprinkler system must be connected with the ship's fire main by way of a lockable, adjustable non-return valve, which will prevent a backflow from the sprinkler system to the fire main.

(10) (a) a test valve shall be provided for testing the automatic alarm for each section of sprinklers by discharge of water equivalent to triggering of one sprinkler. Test valve for each section shall be located near the stop valve for that section.

(10) (b) means shall be provided to control the automatic operation of the pump by reduction of pressure in the system.

(10) (c) one of the inspection posts referred to in paragraph (2) (b), shall be equipped with switches, which will make it possible to test the alarm and the indicators for each section of sprinklers.

(11) For each section of sprinklers shall there are spare sprinkler heads.

[Spare sprinkler heads shall include all types and capacities, which are installed on the ship, and must be in the following number:

Less than 100 sprinkler heads: 3 spare sprinkler heads

Less than 300 sprinkler heads: 6 spare sprinkler heads

300 to 1000 sprinkler heads: 12 spare sprinkler heads]

Rule 15 automatic fire alarm and fire detection systems (Method IIIF) (1) in ships in which method IIIF applies, an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system of an approved type complying with the provisions of this rule, be installed and so arranged that the occurrence of fire in all living and service spaces, except spaces which do not present any significant fire hazard, such as empty spaces and sanitary spaces , can be detected.

(2) (a) the system shall at any time be able to act immediately, without the crew having to do anything to put it at the time.

(2) (b) each section of detectors shall be provided with means for automatic placement of visible and audible alarm signals on one or more alarm panels, when a detector enters into business. These panels should indicate in which section covered by the system fire has occurred, and should be centralized in the wheelhouse and at such other places as may ensure that any alarm from the system instantaneously received by the crew. Further, there should be taken measures to ensure that there will be turned on the deck, where the fire alarm has been detected. Alarm and fire detection system shall be designed in such a way that it shows any errors that might occur in the plant.

(3) the detectors must be assembled in differentiated sections, each of which covers a maximum of 50 spaces served by such a plant, and that where no more than 100 detectors. The detectors must be grouped into zones to display, on which tires a fire has occurred.

(4) the plant to come into operation by an abnormal air temperature, an abnormal concentration of smoke or other factors, which are signs of incipient fire in one of the spaces to be protected. Installations which react to air temperatures, will come into operation at a temperature of not less than 54 ° c and a maximum of 78 ° c, when the temperature increase to those degrees does not exceed 1 ° c per minute. The Administration may determine that the maximum temperature to switch the system to function may be increased to 30 ° c above the maximum temperature up below deck in drying rooms or similar locations where the normal ambient temperature is high. Installations that respond to the concentration of smoke, must enter into business, when the intensity of a lysstråles examination is reduced in a defined extent, be determined by the administration. [On fishing ships built on 1 January 2003 or later must smoke detectors be certified to operate before the smoke density exceeds 12.5% obscuration per metre, but not until the smoke density exceeds 2% obscuration per metre.] The Administration may accept other methods for the system's launch, if it considers that these are just as effective. Detector system must not be used for purposes other than fire detection.

(5) the detectors can be designed to put the alarm in time for opening or closing of contacts or by other appropriate methods. They must be placed above head height and be suitably protected against shocks and damage. They must be suitable for use at sea. They must be placed in an open place, clear of beams and other objects, which can impede the flow of hot gases or smoke to the sensitive element. Detectors, which work by the end of the contacts must be of the type with protected contact, and must be constantly monitoring of electrical circuit, so that any errors can be detected.

(6) at least one detector must be installed in each room where detectors are mandatory, and there must be at least one detector for each 37 m2 deck area. In the larger space must be arranged in such a way that the detectors never is more than 9 metres between the two detectors, and so that no detector is more than 4.5 metres from a bulkhead.

(7) There shall be provided at least two energy sources for the electrical equipment used for the operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system, and one must be a nødkilde. Supply must be done through separate cables, used exclusively for this purpose. These cables must be connected to a switch that is located in the control room for the fire detection system. Wiring system shall be so arranged that the wires do not go through galleys, machinery spaces and other enclosed spaces of high fire risk except where this is necessary to ensure fire detection in such spaces or to reach the respective switchboard.

(8) (a) By each control board must be posted at a list or chart showing the spaces served by the plant, and the zone location in relation to each system. Shall be provided appropriate instructions for testing and maintenance.

(8) (b) provision shall be made for testing whether the detectors and control the boards works, as they must, by providing funds for supply of warm air or smoke at detector stations.

(9) For each section of the detectors should there exist spare detector heads in a quantity that meets the Administration's requirements.

Rule 15a Røgmelde plant



In ships constructed on or after 1. January 2003 or later must be installed an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system with smoke detectors in corridors, stairwells and escape routes, which comply with the provisions of rule 15.

Rule 16 Fixed fire-extinguishing devices in the cargo spaces of high fire risk (1) cargo spaces of high fire risk must be protected with a fixed fire-extinguishing installations for gases or with a fire-extinguishing system providing equivalent protection in accordance with the Administration's demands.

(2)

Cargo space, as well as other spaces that are temporarily used for the storage of large amounts of flammable packaging and the like must, as a minimum, be provided with an open sprinkler systems. (This rule applies to new and existing ships. For existing ships should this requirement be met no later than the 15. December 2010)

Rule 17 Fire pumps (1) There shall be provided at least two fire pumps.
(2) If a fire in any one compartment could put all the fire pumps out of action, there shall be an alternative way in which there can be obtained water for fire fighting. In ships with a length of 75 m or more to such an alternative way consist of a fixed independently operated emergency fire pump. This emergency fire pump shall be capable of providing two water jets [with a minimum pressure of 0.25 N/mm2.]

(3) (a) apart from the emergency pump, fire pumps could make a quantity of water to fight the fire, which at a minimum pressure of 0.25 N/mm2 gives a total quantity (Q) of at least:

[Q = (0.15 √ L (B + D) + 2.25) 2m3/hour]

where L, (B) and (D) are in meters.

However, fire pumps ' need required capacity not to exceed 180 m3/hour.

(3) (b) Each of the required fire pumps, apart from a possible nødpumpe, must have a capacity of at least 40% of the in point (a) the total capacity of the fire pumps required and must at least be able to at least to provide in regulation 19 (2) (a) required jets of water. These fire pumps shall be capable of supplying the main fire system under the prescribed conditions. If you have installed more than two pumps, the capacity of such additional pumps meet the Administration's demands.

(4) (a) the Fire pumps must be independently driven, power-driven pumps. Sanitary, ballast, bilge and general service pumps may be accepted as fire pumps, provided that they are not normally used for pumping oil and that if they occasionally used for pumping of oil fuel, suitable change-over switch devices.

(4) (b) safety valves shall be provided in conjunction with all fire pumps if the pumps can develop a pressure that exceeds the pressure piping, hydrants and fire hoses are designed for. These valves shall be so arranged and set that they prevent damaging excess pressure in any of the main fire wires.

(4) (c) Mechanically operated emergency fire pumps must be independently-run, autonomous pumps either with their own diesel power engine and fuel supply is placed in an accessible position outside the spaces containing the main fire pumps, or shall be operated by an independent generator, which can be referred to in rule IV/17 emergency generator, if it has sufficient capacity, and if it is placed in a safe position outside the machinery space and as far as possible, the working deck. Emergency fire pump shall be capable of operating for a period of at least 3 hours.

(4) (d) emergency fire pumps, søventiler and other necessary valves shall be operable from a position outside the spaces containing the main fire pumps, which are not likely to be cut off by a fire in these spaces.

Rule 18 fire mains (1) (a) Where more than one hydrant is required in order to obtain it in regulation 19 (2) (a) the specified number of jets of water shall be provided a fire main.

(1) (b) fire mains shall have no other connections than the fire fight necessary, except for being able to spray deck and anchor chains or operate bilge ejectors, provided that the effectiveness of the fire-extinguishing system shall be maintained.

(1) (c) if the fire mains are not even exhaustive, should there be placed appropriate drain cocks, where frost damage can be expected. 6) (2) (a) the fire main and branch overhead contact wire diameter must be sufficient to ensure effective distribution of the maximum quantity of water, which is prescribed for two fire pumps are in operation at the same time, or of 140 m3/hour, what may be the smallest.

(2) (b) once the two pumps at the same time through the in rule 19 (5) referred to the nozzles in point (a) of this article indicated quantity of water from the hydrants, colliding minimum pressure on 0.25 N maintained at all hydrants.

Rule 19 hydrants, hoses and nozzles (1) (a) the number of fire hoses shall be equal to the number of hydrants that are installed in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (2), plus an extra hose. In this number is not including fire hoses, which are required for machine-, or boiler rooms. The Administration may raise the required number of fire hoses to make sure that the hoses in sufficient numbers at any time is available and accessible, taking account of the ship's size.

(1) (b) fire hoses shall be of an approved material and sufficiently long for, that may be a jet of water to any place where fire hoses can be used. Their maximum length shall be 20 m. Each fire hose shall be provided with a nozzle and the necessary couplings. Fire hoses shall together with any necessary accessories and tools be installed ready for use in conspicuous places near the hydrants or connections.

(2) (a) the number and distribution of the hydrants shall be such that at least two jets of water which do not emanate from the same hydrant, one of which must be from a single length of hose, may reach any place of the ship normally accessible to the crew while the ship is at sea.

(2) (b) all required hydrants shall be provided with fire hoses with combined Jet type, as prescribed in paragraph (5).

A hydrant shall be located near the entrance to the space to be protected.

(3) Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used for fire mains and hydrants unless adequately protected. Fire pipes and hydrants shall be so placed that the fire hoses may be easily coupled. In ships, which are designed to lead to deck cargo shall be stowed the hydrants in such a way that they are always readily available, and fire the wires must as far as possible be so arranged that there is no risk of damage from such cargo. If there does not exist a fire hose and nozzle for each fire hydrant on board, all hose couplings and nozzles must be interchangeable.

(4) there shall be a faucet or valve for each fire hose so that any fire hose may be removed while the fire pumps are in operation.

(5) (a) Default sizes for beam tip diameter should be 12 mm, 16 mm and 19 mm or as near as possible in doing so. After the Administration's estimates may be allowed a larger diameter.

(5) (b) in the seating and service spaces, it is not necessary to use nozzles with diameter greater than 12 mm.

(5) (c) for machinery spaces and exterior locations the diameter nozzles must be such that, when it in rule 18 (2) (b) the said pressure from the smallest pump is achieved the maximum possible amount of water from the two jets. However, it is not necessary to use nozzles with larger diameter than 19 mm.

Rule 20 portable fire extinguishers (1) portable fire extinguishers shall be of an approved type. Required portable fluid ildslukkeres capacity shall be not more than 13.5 litres and not less than 9 litres. Other fire extinguishers may not be more difficult to transport than a fluid extinguisher with a capacity of 14 litres and must have at least the same turn off ability as a fluid extinguisher with a capacity of 9 litres. The administration shall establish equivalences for portable fire extinguishers.

(2) to be mobilized spare charges in accordance with requirements specified by the administration.

[For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later are subject to the following: (2) 1. For each type of fire extinguisher carried and can be recharged on board, 100% spare charges shall be provided for the first 10 extinguishers and 50% for the remaining extinguishers but not more than 60.

(2) 2. For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, there shall be at least 50% additional fire extinguishers of same type and capacity in lieu of spare charges.

(2) 3. Instructions for recharging shall be carried on board. Only refills approved for the fire extinguishers in question may be used for recharging.]

(3) fire extinguishers which contains a off means that after the Administration's discretion, either spontaneously or under the expected conditions of use gives off toxic gases in such quantities that they endanger the occupants persons is not permitted.

(4) [fire extinguishers must be inspected annually by a competent person who has been approved by the administration. Each extinguisher must be equipped with a sign indicating that it has been inspected. All containers for extinguishers with permanent pressure and propellant bottles for fire extinguishers which do not stand under pressure, shall be subjected to the hydraulic pressure test every 10 minutes. year.]

(5) will normally be one of the portable fire extinguishers intended for use in a specific space, placed near the entrance of that space.

Rule 21 portable fire extinguishers in control, living and service spaces (1) in the control, living and service spaces shall be provided at least five approved portable fire extinguishers that meet the Administration's demands.

(2) to be mobilized spare charges in accordance with requirements specified by the administration.

[For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later are subject to the following: (2) 1. For fire extinguishers which can recharged on board, 100% spare charges shall be provided for the first 10 extinguishers and 50% for the remaining extinguishers but not more than 60.

(2) 2. For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, there shall be at least 50% additional fire extinguishers of same type and capacity in lieu of spare charges.

(3) 3. Instructions for recharging shall be carried on board. Only refills approved for the fire extinguishers in question may be used for recharging.]

Rule 22 fire-extinguishing installations in engine room
(1) (a) spaces containing oil-fired boilers or oil fuel units, as well as machinery spaces of category A shall be provided with one of the following fixed fire closing systems that meet the Administration's demands: (1) (a) (i) A water-spraying fire-extinguishing systems;

(1) (a) (ii) a facility to fire closure with gases;

(1) (a) (iii) a plant for the fire closure with fumes from the evaporating liquids with low toxicity; and (1) (a) (iv) a fire-extinguishing installations using high-expansion foam. If the engine and boiler rooms are not entirely separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the boiler room into the engine room, the combined engine and boiler rooms shall be regarded as a single space.

(1) (b) new installations with halogenated hydrocarbons are used as fire-extinguishing medium, shall be prohibited on new and existing ships (1) (c) Any boiler rooms shall be equipped with at least one set of portable luftskumsudstyr that meet the Administration's demands.

(1) (d) Each fyrplads in boiler rooms and any space in which any part of the oil fuel installation is located, shall be provided with at least two approved, portable fire extinguishers, which emits a foam or equivalent extinguishing media. At least one approved foam extinguisher with a capacity of at least 135 litres capacity, or equivalent thereof, are to be found in each boiler rooms. These fire extinguishers must be fitted with hoses on reels that can reach any part of the boiler room. The Administration may exempt from the requirements of this paragraph, taking into account the size and nature of the spaces to be protected.

(1) (e) At each fyrplads, there must be a container with sand, sawdust, impregnated with soda or other approved dry material in such quantity as may be required by the administration. Alternatively, the space shall be equipped with an approved portable fire extinguisher.

(2) spaces containing internal combustion engines, used either as main propulsion machinery or for other purposes, and which has a total energy of not less than 750 kilowatt, must be fitted with the following devices: (2) (a) one of the fire extinguishing systems required by paragraph (1) (a);

(2) (b) at least one set of portable luftskumsudstyr that meet the Administration's demands; and (2) (c) in any such space, approved foam brandslukkere, each with a capacity of at least 45 litres capacity, or equivalent thereof, sufficient in number to the foam or its equivalent can be directed towards any part of the fuel and lubricating oil pressure systems, gear system and other inflammable places. In addition, there are a sufficient number of portable foam extinguishers or equivalent, which must be arranged in such a way that a foam extinguisher is not more than 10 metres walking distance from any point in space; In addition, it is a prerequisite that there must be at least two such foam extinguishers in any such space. In the case of smaller spaces, the Administration may grant a derogation from these requirements.

(3) spaces containing steam turbines or enclosed steam engines, which are used as either propulsion or for any other purpose, if the machine has a total energy of not less than 750 kilowatt, be fitted with the following devices: (3) (a) foam extinguishers, each with a capacity of at least 45 litres capacity, or equivalent thereof, sufficient in number to the foam or its equivalent can be directed towards any part of lube oil pressure system , against any part of the casings enclosing pressure lubricated parts of the turbines, engines and associated gear systems, as well as against all other inflammable places. Such fire extinguishers are not necessary if protection at least equivalent to what is provided for in this paragraph, is provided in such spaces by a fixed fire extinguishing system installed in accordance with paragraph (1) (a); and (3) (b) a sufficient number of portable foam extinguishers or equivalent thereto shall be so arranged that a foam extinguisher is not more than 10 metres walking distance from any point in space; In addition, it is a prerequisite that there must be at least two such extinguishers in each such space foam, foam extinguishers and that such should not be required in addition to those referred to in paragraph (2) (c) prescribed.

(4) where, after the Administration's estimate consists in a machinery space fire hazards, for which there are special rules about fire-fighting equipment in the manner prescribed in paragraph (1), (2) and (3) must be provided in that space or in an adjacent to it, a number of approved portable fire extinguishers or other fire fighting products, which meet the Administration's demands.

(5) If there is installed fixed fire-fighting systems, which are not required by this section, such systems must meet the Administration's demands.

(6) in any machinery spaces of category A, to which there is access at a low level from an adjacent shaft tunnel, there shall, in addition to a watertight door and on the side that is farthest from the machinery, a light steel fire-screen door which shall be operable from both sides of the door.

Rule 23 International shore connection (1) There must exist at least one international shore connection which satisfies the provisions of paragraph (2).

(2) the Standard dimensions of flanges for international country connection must be in accordance with the following table: Description









Dimension









External diameter





178 mm







Inside diameter





64 mm







Bolts circle diameter





132 mm







Stomata in flange





4 holes with a diameter of 19 mm placed at equal distance on a bolt circle of that diameter and opslidset for flange edge







Flange thickness





At least 14.5 mm







Bolts and nuts





4, each with a diameter of 16 mm and a length of 50 mm











(3) the connection shall be constructed of material that is designed for a working pressure of 1.0 N/mm.

(4) the flange must have a flat surface on one side and on the other hand, must have a fixed coupling, which fits to the ship's fire hydrant and hose. The connection provided shall be kept on board the ship, together with a gasket of a material which is designed for a working pressure of 1.0 N/mm2, as well as four bolts with a diameter of 16 mm and a length of 50 mm and eight washers.

(5) There should be taken measures to enable such a connection can be used on both sides of the ship.

Rule 24 Fireman's outfit (1) There shall be provided at least two Firefighter's outfits on Board that meet the Administration's demands. [On fishing ships built on 1 January 2003 or later must be in accordance with the IMO's Fireman's Fire Safety Systems Code, chapter III, rule 2.1, 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. For each required breathing apparatus to two spare charges shall be provided.]

(2) Firefighters's must be stored in such a way that they are easily accessible and ready for use, and they must be placed in locations that are far from each other.

Rule 25 Fire control plan

There shall be a continuously posted fire control plan that meets the requirements of the administration. [On fishing ships built on 1 January 2003 or later, the content of the plan shall be in accordance with IMO resolution a. 654 (16) – Graphical symbols for fire control plans – and the IMO resolution a. 756 (18) – guidelines on the information to be provided with fire control plans.]

Rule 26 Option for quick application of fire-fighting equipment

Fire-fighting equipment must be maintained in a sound condition and be ready at any time for immediate use.

Rule 27 Equivalence

Where in this section is provided for a device, an appliance, an extinguishing agent or a device of a particular type, may be used by any other type of equipment, provided that the Administration considers that this equipment is not less effective.

Subparagraph (C) fire safety in ships with a length of [24 m] or more but less than 60 metres in length

Rule 28 Constructive fire protection (1) the hull, superstructures, load-bearing bulkheads, decks and deckhouses shall be constructed of non-combustible material. The Administration may, however, permit the use of combustible constructions, subject to the requirements of this rule and the additional fire protection requirements laid down in rule 40 (3) are met.

(2) (a) in ships, whose hull is constructed of non-combustible material, decks and bulkheads separating machinery spaces of category A from the living-, service-, or control stations be designed to ' A-60 ' class standard, if the machinery spaces of category A are not equipped with a fixed fire-extinguishing system, and for class ' A-30 '-standard, where such a system is installed. Decks and bulkheads separating other machinery spaces from living, service and control stations shall be constructed to class ' A-0 ' standard.
Decks and bulkheads separating control stations from accommodation and service spaces shall be constructed of ' A ' class-default [in accordance with tables 1 and 2 in regulation 7 of this chapter]. An Administration may, however, permit the use of class ' B ' class divisions to 15 separation of spaces such as the master's sleeping-and living room from the wheelhouse, [when these spaces are considered to be part of the wheelhouse].

(2) (b) in ships, whose hull is constructed of combustible material, decks and bulkheads separating machinery spaces from the living-, service-, or control stations be constructed to class ' F '-or ' B-15 '-standard. In addition, the machinery space boundaries as far as practicable to prevent smoke gets through. Decks and bulkheads separating control stations from accommodation and service spaces shall be constructed to class ' F '-standard.

(3) (a) in ships, whose hull is constructed of non-combustible material, bulkheads in times, leading to the residence, service spaces and control stations, shall be of the class ' B ' class divisions-l5.

(3) (b) in ships, whose hull is constructed of combustible material, the bulkheads in the times, leading to the residence, service spaces and control stations, shall be of the class ' F ' class divisions.

(3) (c) Any of those referred to in paragraph (a) or (b) prescribed bulkheads shall extend from deck to deck, unless a single ceiling of the same class as the bulkhead is built on both sides of the bulkhead, in which case the bulkhead may end by the common ceiling.

(4) Interior staircases leading to the residence, service or control stations, shall be of steel or other equivalent material. Such stairways shall be in closed spaces that are constructed of class ' F ' class divisions in ships, whose hull is constructed of combustible material, or of class ' B ' class divisions in ships-l5, whose hull is constructed of non-combustible materials, except that a staircase that only is carried through a tire, don't need to be closed on more than one level.

(5) Doors and other means of closure for the openings in the provided for in paragraph (2) and (3) referred to bulkheads and decks, doors to the mentioned in paragraph (4) stairways and doors for machine-and kedelcasinger shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, have similar resistance to fire as the divisions in which they are placed. Doors to machinery spaces of category A shall be self-closing.

(6) Elevator shafts, which pass through accommodation and service spaces shall be constructed of steel or equivalent material and shall be provided with means of closure that allows control with drag and smoke.

(7) (a) in ships, whose hull is constructed of combustible material, the enclosing bulkheads and decks in spaces containing a source of emergency power, and bulkheads and decks between galleys, paint room, lamp rooms or storerooms, which contains significant quantities of highly flammable materials, as well as seating, service or control stations be constructed of class ' F ' or class ' B-15 ' class divisions.

(7) (b) in ships, whose hull is constructed of non-combustible material, referred to in paragraph (a) referred to decks and bulkheads must be of class ' A ' class divisions, which have been isolated after the Administration's requirements, having regard to the fire risk. The Administration may, however, permit the use of class ' B ' class divisions between 15 a galley and accommodation, service spaces and control stations when the galley contains only electrically heated furnaces, electrically heated water heaters or other electrically heated appliances.

(7) (c) Flammable substances must be stored in appropriate sealed containers.

(8) if the bulkheads or decks, as under paragraph (2), (3), (5) or (7) must be of class ' A ', ' B ' or ' F ' class divisions penetrated to allow the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks, ducts etc., there should be taken measures to ensure that the fire resistance is not impaired inddelingens.

(9) Enclosed behind ceilings, panelling or Sky linings in the seating, service and control stations shall be divided by close-fitting partitions (draught stops), if the distance does not exceed 7 m.

(10) Windows and skylights to machinery spaces shall be as follows: (10) (a) where the skylights can be opened, must be possible to close them from a position outside the space. Skylights, which includes glass panes shall be equipped with exterior, fixed trapdoors of steel or other equivalent material;

(10) (b) glass or similar material shall not be used in machinery space boundaries. However, this should not exclude the use of skylights and glass trådforstærket glass to the control room in the engine room; and (10) (c) in paragraph (a) referred to trådforstærket glass skylights are used.

(11) insulation materials in lounges, service spaces, control stations, with the exception of built-in cold room and machinery spaces shall be non-combustible. The surface of the insulation on the inner limits of machinery spaces of category A shall be impervious to oil or oil vapours.

(12) in the space that is used for the storage of fish, flammable insulation be protected by tight-fitting clothing.

(13) Notwithstanding the requirements of this rule, the Administration may accept class ' A-0 ' class divisions instead of class» B-15 '-or ' F ' class divisions, taking into account the amount of flammable materials used in adjacent spaces.

Rule 29 ventilation systems (1) except as may result from the rule 30 (2), there shall be means to stop the fans and close the main openings for ventilation system from a position outside the sergeants spaces.

(2) means shall be provided for from a safe place to be able to close the annular spaces around funnels.

(3) Ventilation openings in and under doors in bulkheads to the times, however, such openings may be not be allowed in and under doors to stairway enclosures. The openings must only be installed in a door bottom half. Where such an opening is found in or under a door the total net area of, opening or openings shall not exceed 0.05 m2. Such an opening is cut in a door it shall be fitted with a grating of non-combustible material.

(4) ventilation ducts to machinery spaces of category A or galleys may not normally pass through the living-, service-, or control room. The Administration may, however, permit such an arrangement on condition that the ducts are made of steel or equivalent material and so installed that inddelingernes fire safety is preserved.

(5) ventilation ducts for a living, service or control stations shall not pass through machinery spaces of category normally (A) or through the galleys. The Administration may, however, permit such an arrangement on condition that the ducts are made of steel or equivalent material and so installed that inddelingernes fire safety is preserved.

(6) Oplagsrum (ships ' stores), containing significant amounts of highly combustible products must be equipped with ventilation systems that are separate from other ventilation systems. Ventilation must be provided, as well as at the bottom in the space at the top and the inlet and outlet openings must be located in safe areas. Appropriate wire wire mesh to withhold sparks must be fitted above the ventilation holes intake and output.

(7) the ventilation systems serving machinery spaces shall be independent of systems serving other spaces.

(8) where the shafts or ducts serving spaces on both sides of the class ' A ' bulkheads or decks, fire dampers must be positioned to prevent fire and smoke spread between the spaces. Manually operated dampers must be able to be handled from both sides of the bulkhead or deck. If the shafts or ducts with a free-sectional area exceeding 0.02 m2 pass through class ' A ' bulkheads or decks, there must be placed automatically-acting self-closing damper. Shafts, serving spaces that are only located on one side of such bulkheads shall comply with the provisions of rule 9 (1) (b).

Rule 30 Heating installations (1) Electric radiators shall be placed and be so designed that the fire hazard shall be limited to the minimum. No such heater shall be set up with an exposed heating element that clothing, curtains or other similar materials can be scorched or set on fire by heat from the element.

(2) Heating with open flames is not allowed. Heaters and other similar devices shall be permanently installed, and there should be adequate protection and insulation against fire during and around such appliances and their flues. Flues from stoves, which burn solid fuel, must be located and constructed that the possibility that they will be blocked by the flammable substances are reduced to a minimum, and they must have available funds for remediation. Dampers to reduce drag in røgrørene must, when they are in the closed position, still leave a sufficient area open. Space, in which stoves are installed, shall be fitted with fans with sufficient surface area to allow adequate combustion air the stove. These fans must not have means of closure, and their location must be such that closures may not be required pursuant to Regulation II/9.

(3) Apparatus with open gas flame, apart from cookers and water heaters, are not allowed. Spaces containing such cookers or water heaters must have adequate ventilation to remove fumes and possible gas-udlækninger to a safe place. All pipes, who directs the gas from the tank to the furnace or water heater shall be of steel or other approved material. There should be automatic gasafbrydnings devices that work if gas pressure in gashovedledningen falls, or if the flame in an appliance fails.

Rule 31 Forskelligt7)
(1) Unprotected surfaces in living, service spaces and control stations, corridors and stairways and covered surfaces behind bulkheads, ceilings, panels and linings in the seating, service and control stations shall have low flame spread characteristics, which must be determined [in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(2) All exposed surfaces of glass reinforced plastic construction in residence, service spaces and control stations, machinery spaces of category A and other machinery space with the corresponding brand risk must have a final layer of polyester with approved fire-retardant properties, or covered by an approved fire-retardant paint or be protected by non-combustible materials.

(3) Paints, varnishes and other materials used on exposed interior surfaces shall not be capable of developing for large amounts of smoke or toxic gases or steam. It must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Administration, that they are not of a nature that pose unreasonable fire risk. [In fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later should this be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.]

(4) the lower layer deck coating in the seating, service and control stations shall be of an approved material which will not readily ignite or give rise to toxic or explosive hazards at elevated temperatures. 8) (5) (a) service spaces and control stations shall be in rest areas, pipes that pass through class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions shall be of approved material, having regard to the temperature such divisions shall be able to withstand. If the Administration allows the oil and combustible liquids through accommodation and service spaces, the pipes that lead oil or combustible liquids, be of approved materials having regard to fire danger.

(5) (b) Materials that easily degrade due to heat shall not be used for over Board scuppers, sanitary drains and other drainage, which is close to the waterline, where the material's failure in the event of fire could cause danger of flooding.

(6) all waste containers other than those used in connection with the processing of fish shall be constructed of non-combustible materials with no openings in the sides or bottom.

(7) Machinery that drives oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps must be remote controlled, so that in the event of a fire in the room where they are placed, can be stopped from a place outside that space.

(8) There shall be provided waste hills where it is necessary, in order to prevent oil leaking into the bilges.

Rule 32 gascylindere and storage of hazardous materials (1) receptacles for compressed, liquefied or dissolved gases must be clearly marked using the prescribed identity colors, have a clearly legible identification of content's name and chemical formula and be carefully secured.

(2) Containers containing flammable or other dangerous gases, as well as used containers must be stored, properly secured, on the open deck, and all valves, pressure regulators and pipes leading from such containers shall be protected from damage. Containers must be protected against excessive changes in temperature, direct sunrays and the accumulation of snow. The Administration may authorise such containers must be stored in the room in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (3) to (5).

(3) spaces containing easy flammable fluids, such as volatile species paint, wax, benzene, etc. and, if it is allowed, liquid gas, must only have direct access from the open deck. Pressure control devices and safety valves must be exhausted (lead) within the space. If such space adjacent to bulkheads bounding other enclosed spaces shall be gas-tight.

(4) except as may be necessary for the performance of service in that space, electrical wiring and devices not allowed in spaces that are used for the storage of flammable liquids or liquefied gases. Where such electrical devices are installed, they shall satisfy the Administration's requirements for use in a inflammable atmosphere. [On fishing ships built on 1 January 2003 or later, these must be certified by an approved type and comply with the relevant provisions of the International Standard IEC Publication 79 (Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres).] Heat sources must be kept clear of such spaces, and there must be prominently placed on the opening of ' non-smoking ' and ' open flames shall be prohibited '.

(5) there must be specific storage room (storerooms) for each type of compressed gas. Space used for storage of such gases, must not be used for the storage of flammable substances or by other tools or objects, which do not form part of the gasfordelings system. The Administration may, however, grant a derogation from these requirements, taking into account the nature, scale and the intended use of such compressed gases.

Rule 33 Evacuation roads (1) stairways and ladders leading to and from all seating areas, and in spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other than machinery spaces shall be located in such a way that they offer easy access to the open deck and from there to the rescue funds. In particular, it must respect these spaces: (1) (a) that from all seating areas shall be provided at least two separate means of escape, which may include the normal route for each delimited space or group of spaces;

(1) (b) (i) that under weather covered as the main escape route must be a staircase, while the other output can be a trunk or a staircase;

(1) (b) (ii) the evacuation routes across the weather deck shall be stairways or doors to an open deck or a combination thereof. Where it is impracticable to affix the stairways or doors, can be one of these escape routes be through openings in the ship's side or hatch openings of sufficient size, if necessary, protected against icing;

(1) (c) the Administration may exceptionally allow only one escape route, with due regard to the nature and location of spaces and the number of people who normally can during transmission or employed in the spaces;

(1) (d) a time or part of a corridor from which there is only one escape route, preferably should not be more than 2.5 m long and under no circumstances must be longer than 5.0 m;

(1) (e) to the width and the consistency of the evacuation route must meet the Administration's demands.

(2) There shall be provided two means of escape from any machinery spaces of category A, which is placed as far apart as possible. Vertical exits should be in the form of steel ladders. If the machine room's size makes it impractical, can one of these escape routes may be omitted. In such cases, particular care must be exercised with regard to the arrangement of the remaining output.

(3) Lifts shall not be considered to constitute one of the required means of escape.

Rule 34 automatic fire alarm and fire detection systems

Where the Administration pursuant to rule 28 (1) have allowed a combustible construction, or which is otherwise used significant amounts of combustible material to the décor of the residence, service spaces and control stations, shall be carefully considered whether it should install an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system in these spaces, taking into account the size of the compartments, their arrangement and location in relation to the control room, as well as where it may be relevant, the installed furniture flame spreading properties.

Rule 34a Røgmelde plant



In ships constructed on or after 1. January 2003 or later must be installed an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system with smoke detectors in corridors, stairwells and escape routes, which comply with the provisions of rule 15.



Rule 34b Fixed fire-extinguishing devices in the cargo spaces of high fire risk



(1)

Cargo space with high fire risk must be protected with a fixed fire-extinguishing installations for gases or with a fire-extinguishing system providing equivalent protection in accordance with the Administration's demands. (This rule applies to new and existing ships. For existing ships should this requirement be met no later than the 15. December 2010) (2)

Cargo space, as well as other spaces that are temporarily used for the storage of large amounts of flammable packaging and the like must, as a minimum, be provided with an open sprinkler systems. (This rule applies to new and existing ships. For existing ships should this requirement be met no later than the 15. December 2010)

Rule 35 Fire pumps (1) the minimum number and types of fire pumps, shall be available, is as follows: (1) (a) one mechanically driven pump that is not dependent on the main machine for its operation; or (1) (b) one mechanically driven pump that is connected to the main machinery, provided that the screw shaft can easily be disconnected, or the existence of a control label adjustable screw, and (1) (c)

an emergency fire pump, which is self powered, must be installed in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (5). In ships with a length of less than 45 m emergency fire pump can be a portable diesel driven pump.

(2) sanitary, ballast, bilge, general service pumps or any other pumps can be used as fire pumps, provided that they fulfil the requirements of this chapter, and it does not affect their ability to be used as bilge pumps. Fire pumps must be connected in such a way that they cannot be used to pump oil or other flammable liquids.

(3) Centrifugal pumps or other to the fire main ended pumps, through which the water can run back, must be fitted with non-return valves.
(4) in ships not fitted with a mechanically operated emergency fire pump and a fixed fire-extinguishing systems in machinery spaces shall have additional fire-fighting products that meet the Administration's demands. (This paragraph does not apply to the Danish ships).

(5) Any machine-driven emergency fire pumps must be independently-run, autonomous pumps either with their own power engine and fuel supply is placed in an accessible position outside the spaces containing the main fire pumps, or shall be operated by an independent generator, which may be an emergency generator of sufficient capacity and placed in a safe position outside the machinery space and as far as possible, the working deck.

(6) any emergency fire pump, its søventiler and other necessary valves shall be operable from a position outside the spaces containing the main fire pumps, which are not likely to be cut off by a fire in these spaces.

(7) Mechanically driven main fire pumpers total capacity (Q) must be at least:

[Q = (0.15 √ L (B + D) + 2.25) 2m3/hour]

where L, (B) and (D) are in meters.

(8) where there are two independent machine-driven fire pumps, each pumped capacity must be at least 40% of the in paragraph (7) required quantity [or 25 m3/h, depending on what is top.]

(9) when the machine-driven main fire pumps shall provide the information referred to in paragraph (7) the required amount of water through the fire main, fire hoses and nozzles, should the pressure be maintained at any hydrant shall not be less than 0.25 N/mm2.

(10) if the machine-driven emergency fire pumps provide the maximum amount of water through it in rule 37 (1) required water jet, the pressure is maintained at every hydrant, meet the Administration's demands.

Rule 36 fire mains (1) Where more than one hydrant is required in order to perform it in rule 37 (1) the prescribed number of jets of water shall be provided a fire main.

(2) Materials that are rapidly becoming inefficient due to heat shall not be used for fire mains unless adequately protected.

(3) Where fire pumpers pressure can exceed the fire wire's scheduled work pressure, there are safety valves.

(4) fire mains shall have no other connections than those required for fire fighting, except for being able to spray deck and anchor chains or drive bilge ejectors to chain locker, provided that the effectiveness of the fire-extinguishing system shall be maintained.

(5) If the fire main is not even exhaustive, should there be placed appropriate drain cocks, where frost damage can be expected. 9)

Rule 37 hydrants, hoses and nozzles (1) hydrants shall be located in such a way as to allow easy and quick connection of fire hoses and such that at least one jet of water can be directed towards any part of the ship, which usually is available during navigation.

(2) in paragraph (1) required the water jet must come from a single length of fire hose.

(3) in addition to the provisions of paragraph (1) required to machinery spaces of category A shall be fitted with at least one fire hydrant, complete with fire hose and combined beam tubes. This hydrant must be located outside the room and near the entrance.

(4) For each prescribed hydrant, there must be one fire hose. At least one extra fire hose shall be provided in addition.

(5) the individual lengths of fire hose must not exceed 20 m.

(6) fire hoses shall be of an approved material. Each fire hose shall be provided with couplings and a combined Jet type.

(7) except in cases where fire hoses are permanently connected to the fire main ledingen, couplings on fire hoses and nozzles to be fully interchangeable.

(8) The prescribed in paragraph (6) nozzles must match the installed fire pumpers performance, but shall in no case have a diameter smaller than 12 mm.

Rule 38 portable fire extinguishers (1) portable fire extinguishers shall be of an approved type. Required portable fluid ildslukkeres capacity shall be not more than 13.5 litres and not less than 9 litres. Other fire extinguishers may not be more difficult to transport than a fluid extinguisher with a capacity of 14 litres and must have at least the same turn off ability as a fluid extinguisher with a capacity of 9 litres. The administration shall establish equivalences portable udslukkere.

(2) to be mobilized spare charges in accordance with requirements specified by the administration.

[For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later are subject to the following: (2) 1. With the exception of the cases referred to in point 2 below shall for each type of fire extinguisher carried and can be recharged on board, 100% spare charges for the first 10 extinguishers and 50% for the remaining extinguishers but not more than 60.

(2) 2. For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, shall be provided at least 50% additional fire extinguishers of same type and capacity in lieu of spare charges.

(2) 3. Instructions for recharging shall be carried on board. Only refills approved for the fire extinguishers in question may be used for recharging.]

(3) fire extinguishers which contains a off means that after the Administration's discretion, either spontaneously or under the expected conditions of use gives off toxic gases in such quantities that they endanger the occupants persons is not permitted.

(4) fire extinguishers shall undergo periodic inspection and tests, such as the Administration may prescribe.

[For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later, the following shall apply:

Fire extinguishers must be inspected annually by a competent person who is authorized by the administration. Each extinguisher shall be provided with a sign showing that it has been inspected. All containers for fire extinguishers that are under permanent pressure, and bottles with propellant on extinguishers that are not under pressure, shall be subjected to the hydraulic pressure test every 10 minutes. year.]

(5) will normally be one of the portable fire extinguishers intended for use in a specific space, placed near the entrance of that space.

Rule 39 portable fire extinguishers in control, living and service spaces (1) approved, a sufficient number of portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in control, living and service spaces in order to ensure that at least one extinguisher of appropriate type is ready for use in any part of such spaces. The total number of fire extinguishers in such spaces shall not be less than three.

(2) to be mobilized spare charges in accordance with requirements specified by the administration.

[For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later are subject to the following: (2) 1. With the exception of the cases referred to in point 2 below shall for each type of fire extinguisher carried and can be recharged on board, 100% spare charges for the first 10 extinguishers and 50% for the remaining extinguishers but not more than 60.

(2) 2. For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, there shall be at least 50% additional fire extinguishers of same type and capacity in lieu of spare charges.

(2) 3. Instructions for recharging shall be carried on board. Only refills approved for the fire extinguishers in question may be used for recharging.]

Rule 40 fire-extinguishing installations in machinery spaces (1) (a) spaces containing oil-fired boilers, oil fuel units, propulsion motors or internal combustion engines, which have a total energy of [not less than 375 kilowatts], shall be equipped with one of the following fixed fire-extinguishing installations that meet the Administration's demands: (1) (a) (i) a water-spraying installation;

(1) (a) (ii) a facility to fire closure with gases;

(1) (a) (iii) a plant for the fire closure with fumes from the evaporated liquids of low toxicity; or (1) (a) (iv) a fire-extinguishing installations using high-expansion foam.

(1) (b) fresh installation of systems with halon-generated hydrocarbons as fire-extinguishing media is prohibited in new and existing ships.

(1) (c) If the engine and boiler rooms are not entirely separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the boiler room into the engine room, the combined engine and boiler rooms shall be regarded as a single space.

(2) in paragraph (1) (a) the said installations shall be operated from easily accessible locations outside such spaces, which are not likely to be cut off by a fire in the protected space. There should be taken measures to ensure that there is adequate supply of energy and water for the operation of the site in the event of a fire in the protected space.

(3) Ships, which are mainly or entirely built of wood or fiber-reinforced plastic and fitted with oil-fired boilers or internal combustion engines, and as in the engine-room area has decks of such material, shall be equipped with one of the mentioned in paragraph (1) fire extinguishing systems.

(4) in all machinery spaces of category A shall be provided at least two portable fire extinguishers of a type suitable for extinguishing fires which includes fuel oil. When such spaces containing machinery, which has a total energy of no less than 250 kilowatt, there are at least three such extinguishers. One of the fire extinguishers shall be situated near to the entrance to the room.

(5) in ships in which the machinery spaces are not protected by a permanent fire closing installations shall be equipped with at least a 45-litre foam brandslukker, or the equivalent thereof, which is suitable for fighting oil fires. Where the machinery space size makes it impossible to apply this provision, the Administration may approve, to place a larger number of portable fire extinguishers.

Rule 41 Fireman's equipment
The number of Firefighter's outfits and their location shall meet the requirements of the administration. [For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later apply that on board ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over shall be carried at least two Firefighter's outfits, which are kept in an easily accessible and far from each other, and which are not easily gets cut off in the event of fire. Firefighters's must meet the IMO Fire Safety Systems Code, chapter III, rule 2.1, 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. For each required breathing apparatus to two spare charges shall be provided.]

Rule 42 Fire control plan

There shall be a continuously posted fire control plan that meets the requirements of the administration. [For fishing vessels built on 1 January 2003 or later, the contents of this plan shall be in accordance with IMO resolution a. 654 (16), Graphical symbols for fire control plans, as well as IMO resolution a. 756 (18), guidelines on the information to be provided with fire control plans.

In ships with a length of less than 45 metres can the Administration make the exception from this requirement] but this will only be possible in exceptional circumstances.

Rule 43 the option for quick application of fire-fighting equipment

Fire-fighting equipment must be maintained in a sound condition and be ready at any time for immediate use.

Rule 44 Equivalence

Where in this section is provided for a device, an appliance, an extinguishing agent or a device of a particular type, may be used by any other type of equipment, provided that the Administration considers that this equipment is not less effective.

Subparagraph (D) fire safety in ships with a length of less than 24 metres



Rule 45 Constructive fire protection



(1)

If ståldæk or steel bulkheads in accommodation spaces form the top or side of a fuel oil tank, these are coated with a non-combustible material with a thickness of at least 40 mm. In rest areas must not be affixed manholes or other openings for fuel oil tanks.

(2)

External bulkheads, decks and ship pages, demarcating the living room, must be insulated with at least 100 mm approved, non-combustible insulation material. Bulkheads between the living room and machinery spaces or cargo spaces shall be of steel ships be of steel or equivalent. In wooden boats can be built by two layers of wood with two layers of felt or similar in between or by 60 mm wood with clothing of insulation panels. The surface of the insulation on the inner limits of machinery spaces of category A and in spaces where penetration of oil products is possible, shall be impervious to oil or oil vapours.

(3) All insulation materials in the accommodation and wheelhouse shall be non-combustible. In space, used for storage or processing of fish, flammable insulation be protected by tight-fitting non-flammable clothing (4)

All exposed surfaces in corridors or stairwells, as well as surfaces of bulkheads and ceiling linings in all accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations and exposed surfaces in a locked or inaccessible spaces (rear bulkheads, ceilings, panels and linings) of the country of stay, service and control stations shall have low flame spread characteristics, which must be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.



(5)

All exposed surfaces of glass reinforced plastic construction in rest areas, service spaces, control stations, machinery spaces of category A and other machinery space with the corresponding brand risk must have a final layer of polyester with approved fire-retardant properties, or covered by an approved fire-retardant paint or be protected by non-combustible materials.



(6)

Where there is a door between the living room and engine room, should this be a self-closing steel door.



(7)

A door between the kabysrum and dining rooms may be allowed, provided that it is executed by fire-retardant material; the same shall apply to a serveringslem.



(8)

Bottom layer deck coating in the seating, service and control stations shall be of an approved material which will not readily ignite or give rise to toxic or explosive hazards at elevated temperatures. On fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later should this be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.

(9)

In the living-, service-and control stations pipes that pass through class ' A ' or ' B ' class divisions shall be of approved material, having regard to the temperature such divisions shall be able to withstand. If the Danish maritime authority permits oil and combustible liquids through accommodation and service spaces, the pipes that lead oil or combustible liquids, be of approved materials having regard to fire danger.

(10) Materials, URf.eks. plastic and similar that easily degrade due to heat shall not be used for over Board scuppers, sanitary drains and other drainage, which is close to the waterline, where the material's failure in the event of fire could cause danger of flooding.

Rule 46 ventilation systems (1)

Apart from what may result from the rule 47, means shall be provided to stop the fans and close the main openings for ventilation system from a position outside the sergeants spaces.



(2)

Ventilation openings in and under doors in bulkheads to times may be authorized; However, such openings shall not be permitted and under doors to stairway enclosures. The openings must only be installed in a door bottom half. Where such an opening is found in or under a door the total net area of, opening or openings shall not exceed 0.05 m2. Such an opening is cut in a door it shall be fitted with a grating of non-combustible material.

(3) ventilation ducts to machinery spaces of category A or galleys may not normally pass through the living-, service-, or control room. The Danish maritime authority may authorize such an arrangement on condition that the ducts are made of steel or equivalent material and so installed that inddelingernes fire safety is preserved.

(4)

Ventilation ducts for a living, service or control stations shall not pass through machinery spaces of category normally (A) or through the galleys. The Danish maritime authority may authorize such an arrangement on condition that the ducts are made of steel or equivalent material and so installed that inddelingernes fire safety is preserved.

(5)

Oplagsrum (ships ' stores), containing significant amounts of highly combustible products must be equipped with ventilation systems that are separate from other ventilation systems. Ventilation must be provided, as well as at the bottom in the space at the top and the inlet and outlet openings must be located in safe areas. Appropriate wire wire mesh to withhold sparks must be fitted above the ventilation holes intake and output.

(6) the ventilation systems serving machinery spaces shall be independent of systems serving other spaces.



Rule 47 Heating installations



(1)

Electric radiators shall be placed and be so designed that the fire hazard shall be limited to the minimum. No such heater shall be fitted with such vulnerable elements that clothing, curtains or other similar materials can be scorched or set on fire by heat from the element.

(2)

Heaters and other similar devices shall be permanently installed, and there should be adequate protection and insulation against fire during and around such appliances and their flues. Flues from stoves, which burn solid fuel, must be located and constructed that the possibility that they will be blocked by the flammable substances are reduced to a minimum, and they must have available funds for remediation. Dampers to reduce drag in røgrørene must, when they are in the closed position, still leave a sufficient area open. Space, in which stoves are installed, shall be fitted with fans with sufficient surface area to allow adequate combustion air the stove.

(3)

Appliances with open gas flame, apart from cookers and water heaters, are not allowed. Spaces containing such cookers or water heaters must have adequate ventilation to remove fumes and possible gas leaks to a safe place. All pipes, who directs the gas from the tank to the furnace or water heater shall be of steel or other approved material. There should be automatic gasafbrydnings devices that work if gas pressure in gashovedledningen falls, or if the flame in an appliance fails.

Rule 48 Differently



(1)

Paints, varnishes and other materials used on exposed interior surfaces shall not be capable of developing for large amounts of smoke or toxic gases or steam, which must be determined in accordance with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code.



(2)

All waste containers other than those used in connection with the processing of fish shall be constructed of non-combustible materials with no openings in the sides or bottom.



(3)

Machinery that drives oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps must be remote controlled, so that in the event of a fire in the room where they are placed, can be stopped from a place outside that space.



(4) There shall be provided waste hills where it is necessary, in order to prevent oil leaking into the bilges.

Rule 49 storage of gas cylinders and dangerous materials (1) receptacles for compressed, liquefied or dissolved gases must be clearly marked using the prescribed identity colors, must have a legible identification of content's name and chemical formula and be carefully secured.
(2) Containers containing flammable or other dangerous gases, as well as used containers must be stored, properly secured, on the open deck, and all valves, pressure regulators and pipes leading from such containers shall be protected from damage. Containers must be protected against excessive changes in temperature, direct sunrays and the accumulation of snow. The Danish maritime authority may authorize such containers must be stored in the room in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (3) to (5).

(3) spaces containing easy flammable fluids, such as volatile species paint, wax, benzene, etc. and, if it is allowed, liquid gas, must only have direct access from the open deck. Pressure control devices and nødventiler to be discharged within the room. If such space adjacent to bulkheads bounding other enclosed spaces shall be gas-tight.

(4) except as may be necessary for the performance of service in that space, electrical wiring and devices not allowed in spaces that are used for the storage of flammable liquids or liquefied gases. Where such electrical devices are installed, they must comply with the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative requirements with regard to use in an inflammable atmosphere. On fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later, these must be certified by an approved type and comply with the relevant provisions of the International Standard IEC Publication 79 (Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres). Heat sources must be kept clear of such spaces, and there must be prominently placed on the opening of ' non-smoking ' and ' open flames shall be prohibited '.

(5) there must be specific storage room (storerooms) for each type of compressed gas. Space used for storage of such gases, must not be used for the storage of flammable substances or by other tools or objects, which do not form part of the gasfordelings system. The Danish maritime authority may, however, grant a derogation from these requirements, taking into account the nature, scale and the intended use of such compressed gases.

Rule 50 Evacuation routes



(1)

All crew spaces and from spaces in which the crew is normally employed, stairways and ladders shall be so arranged that there is convenient access to the port of unloading covered.



(2)

There should be two means of escape shall be provided from every machinery spaces of category A placed as far apart as possible. Vertical exits should be in the form of steel ladders. If the machine room size makes this impossible, can be one of these escape routes may be omitted. In such cases, particular care must be exercised with regard to the arrangement of the remaining output.

(3)

From all floors of living quarters must be from each of the major space or group of spaces shall be at least two starting opportunities, located as far apart as possible.



(4)

Below the weather deck shall head the end be a staircase, and the second output can be performed as an emergency exit. Above the weather deck shall be stairways or doors to exits free tires or combination thereof.

(5)

In special cases, the Danish maritime authority may grant derogations for one output, taking into account the location and length of the room, as well as the number of people who would normally be located therein. Outputs the width and gradient must be approved.

(6)

Lifts may not be recognized as escape route.

Rule 51 Automatic fire alarm system



In fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later, which is performed in a combustible construction or where there are used significant amounts of combustible material to the décor of the place of stay, service and control stations shall be installed an automatic fire alarm installations in these spaces, taking into account the size of the compartments, their arrangement and location in relation to the control station as well as, where appropriate, the installed furniture flame spreading properties.



Rule 51a Fixed fire-extinguishing devices in the cargo spaces of high fire risk



(1)

Cargo space with high fire risk must be protected with a fixed fire-extinguishing installations for gases or with a fire-extinguishing system providing equivalent protection in accordance with the Administration's demands. (This rule applies to new and existing ships. For existing ships should this requirement be met no later than the 15. December 2010) (2)

Cargo space, as well as other spaces that are temporarily used for the storage of large amounts of flammable packaging and the like must, as a minimum, be provided with an open sprinkler systems. (This rule applies to new and existing ships. For existing ships should this requirement be met no later than the 15. December 2010) Rule 52 fire-fighting pumps — the number, capacity and placing



(1)

Fishing vessels shall be equipped with at least one machine-driven fire pump. Depending on the shipping area can the Danish maritime authority, however, require an emergency fire pump. 10) (2)

Where the requirements for maximum permissible suction lift may be satisfied, can the emergency pump consists of a portable diesel driven pump with independent oil fuel supply for three hours of operation. The necessary tool for startup, ansugning, connection of hoses, etc. must be placed in the vicinity of the pump. Pumps that require spædning, shall be fitted with Hopper and shut off valve.

(3)

Sanitary, ballast and general service pumps may be accepted as fire pumps, provided that they are not normally used for pumping oil and that if they occasionally used for pumping of oil, suitable changing devices, so that the pumps even by negligence cannot be able to suck from the tanks, which can be used for anything other than ballast water, and/or from the ship's bilge system and at the same time press to the ship's fire wire. Security equipment based on blanking of certain pipelines using blind flanges may not be approved.

(4)

When the pumps are used as fire pumps, they must only be able to supply the fire main.



(5)

The required fire pumps can consist of multiple pumps, provided that they can function satisfactorily in parallel operation and maintain the specified capacity under the conditions referred to in (6).



(6)

The prescribed fire pump shall with the two hydrants in the operation, which is furthest from the pump, each fitted with a single hose length with a 12 mm nozzle, could sustain a pressure of at least 0.25 N/mm

2

by hydrants.



(7)

Portable pumps must know the specified in paragraph (8) capacity to maintain a pressure at pump studs at least 0.25 N/mm

2

.



(8)

Capacity Q of each of the required fire pumps shall at least comply with the following calculation method, however, is not less than 16 m

3

/time.



where L, (B) and (D) are in meters.



The total capacity for each fire pump need not, however, exceed 30 m

3

/time.



(9)

Fire pumps, including portable emergency fire pumps shall not be placed or stored in front of the forepeak bulkhead.



(10)

Fire pumps ' søventiler and other necessary valves shall be located so that a fire elsewhere than in the room where the pump is located, will not hinder the use of the pump.



(11

) A pumped total suction lift must not exceed 4.5 m (suction lift + rørmodstand) under all heeling-and trimforhold, as the ship is likely to encounter during sailing.



(12)

All fixed fire pumps to be on outlet side be equipped with a check valve.



(13) If the fire pumps capable of developing a pressure exceeding the duct, fire studsenes and fire the constancy of the maximum permissible working pressure of the pumps must be fitted with safety valves to prevent damaging excess pressure.



Rule 53 Fire wires



(1)

The ship shall be provided with fire wire, in order to ensure an efficient allocation of the required water quantity.



(2)

The maximum pressure at any hydrant shall not exceed that which the effective handling of a fire hose can be demonstrated.



(3)

Fire wires shall be constructed of steel or other material that does not readily rendered ineffective by heat.



(4)

Fire wires must be installed so that there is minimal risk of mechanical damage to the pipes.



(5)

Where there is risk of damage due to frost, precautions must be taken to avoid such damage.



Rule 54 hydrants, hoses and nozzles



(1)

Hydrants shall be located in such a way as to allow easy and quick connection of fire hoses and such that at least one jet of water can be directed towards any part of the ship, which usually is available during navigation.



(2) in paragraph (1) required the water jet must come from a single length of fire hose.



(3)

In addition to the information referred to in paragraph (1) required hydrant must be accompanied to machinery spaces of category A shall be arranged a hydrant outside space and near the entrance.



(4)

For each prescribed hydrant, there must be one fire hose. At least one extra fire hose shall be provided in addition.

(5)

The individual lengths of fire hose must not exceed 20 m.



(6)

Fire hoses shall be of an approved material. Each fire hose shall be provided with couplings and a combined Jet type.

(7)

Except in cases where fire hoses are permanently connected to the fire main, the couplings on the fire hoses and nozzles to be fully interchangeable.



(8)

They prescribed in paragraph (6) nozzles must match the installed fire pumpers performance, but shall in no case have a diameter smaller than 12 mm.



Rule 55 fire-extinguishing installations



(1) the ship shall be provided with adequate installations and equipment for detection and extinguishing the fire.



(2)
Spaces containing main propulsion machinery, internal combustion engines with an output of 375 kW or more, oil fired boilers, including central heating boilers, incinerators and fuel oil burners, shall be fitted with one of the following fixed fire-extinguishing system complying DMA requirements:



(2) (i) a water-spraying installation;



(2) (ii)

a plant for's closure with gases;



(2) (iii) a fire-extinguishing installations using high-expansion foam.



Fresh install of systems with halogenated hydrocarbons as fire-extinguishing media are prohibited on new and existing ships.



If the engine and boiler rooms are not entirely separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the boiler room into the engine room, the combined engine and boiler rooms shall be regarded as a single space.



(3)

In paragraph (1) the said installations shall be operable from easily accessible locations outside such spaces, which are not likely to be cut off by a fire in the protected space. There should be taken measures to ensure that there is adequate supply of energy and water for the operation of the site in the event of a fire in the protected space.

(4)

Cargo space with high fire risk must be protected with a fixed carbon dioxide fire-extinguishing systems as well as being fitted with a fixed fire detection system.



(5)

Transport of dangerous goods, as covered by the IMO International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code), is generally not allowed. This provision shall not apply to ship's stores and equipment.

Rule 56 portable fire extinguishers



(1)

All fire extinguishers shall be of an approved type and design. Fire extinguishers, containing a off means that the Danish maritime authority opinion either spontaneously or under the expected conditions of use gives off toxic gases in such quantities that they present a danger for the persons on Board shall not be used. Required portable fluid ildslukkeres capacity shall be not more than 13.5 litres and not less than 9 litres. Other extinguishers shall be at least as easy to carry as liquid fire extinguisher with a capacity of 13.5 litres and must have at least the same turn off ability as a fire extinguisher with a capacity of 9 litres. You mentioned liquid extinguishers may be replaced by other approved types, and turn off the following equivalences can be used: Water-foam in the ratio 1/1 liter/litre.



Foam-multi powder compared 2/1 litre/kg.



CO

2

-multi powder in ratio 1/1 kg/kg.



(2)

Shall be provided at the appropriate places in and/or by control, living and service spaces exist approved portable fire extinguishers. There must at least be provided three such extinguishers; This includes not extinguishers required for machinery spaces. In ships with a maximum of two spaces can number if applicable. be reduced.

(3)

In all machinery spaces of category A shall be provided at least two portable fire extinguishers (1 paragraph on 12 kg and 1.5 kg) of a type suitable for extinguishing fires which includes fuel oil. When such spaces containing machinery, which has a total energy of no less than 250 kilowatt, there are at least three such extinguishers. The largest of the fire extinguishers shall be located near the entrance to the room.

(4)

For fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later, the following shall apply:



(4) (a)

Except in the case referred to under (b) for each type of fire extinguisher carried, and that can be recharged on board, be 50% spare charges.



(4) (b) For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, there must be at least 50% additional fire extinguishers of same type and capacity in lieu of spare charges.



(4) (c) instructions for recharging shall be carried on board. Only cargoes that are approved for the current fire extinguisher, may be used for recharging.

(5)

Fire extinguishers shall undergo periodic inspection and tests, such as the Administration may prescribe.



(6) For fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later: fire extinguishers must be inspected annually by a competent person who is authorized by the administration. Each extinguisher shall be provided with a sign showing that it has been inspected. All containers for fire extinguishers that are under permanent pressure, and bottles with propellant on extinguishers that are not under pressure, shall be subjected to the hydraulic pressure test every 10 minutes. year.

Rule 57 Fireman's equipment



(1) the Danish maritime authority may in exceptional circumstances require Firefighter's outfits complying with the requirements of rule 41.



Rule 58 Option for quick application of fire-fighting equipment



Equipment for detection and extinguishing the fire must be kept in good and operational condition and be in continuous operation or ready for immediate use while the ship is in service. Fire pumps, including any emergency fire pump shall be tested every month.

Rule 59 Equivalence



Where in this section is provided for a device, an appliance, an extinguishing agent or a device of a particular type, may be used by any other type of equipment, provided that the Danish maritime authority considers that this equipment is not less effective.



Chapter VI



CHAPTER VI (A), (B) And (C) PROTECTION Of BESTNINGEN (OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH And SAFETY, Etc.)







 

 







Subparagraph (A)









General









Rule 1





General protective measures







Rule 2





Deck openings







Rule 3





Bulwarks, guard rails and protective measures







Rule 4





Stairways and ladders







Rule 5





Summary relations









Rule 6









Access to the cargo space











Rule 7









Landing conditions











Rule 8









Work at height











Rule 9









Working and crossing conditions











Rule 10









Lighting











Rule 11









Deck machinery in General











Rule 12









Games











Rule 13









Cargo handling











Rule 14









Ishåndtering











Rule 15









Styrestangs event











Rule 16









Nettromler











Rule 17









Trawl shovels











Rule 18
Deck machinery in beam trawlers











Rule 19









Fish processing facility











Rule 20









Measures to deal with the health risks associated with industrial loads











Rule 21









Secure access to the tanks and enclosed spaces











Subparagraph (B)









Central plant for welding with acetylene and oxygen











Rule 1









General provisions











Rule 2









Containers











Rule 3









Location of containers











Rule 4









Piping installations











Rule 5









Control before Assembly











Rule 6









Through blasting and tightness check after mounting











Rule 7









Empowering











Rule 8









Portable equipment for welding with acetylene and oxygen











Subparagraph (C)









Installation and use of machinery and equipment for lysbuesvensning and similar process Viewer











Rule 1









Use











Rule 2









Definitions











Rule 3









Installation











Rule 4









Welding equipment application











Annex









Tensions and relations













The rules in this chapter apply to both new and existing ships, unless otherwise noted.



Subparagraph (A) In General



On all fishing vessels, any working place as well as areas where persons on board move, constructed, so the work can be performed by the safety and health fully justifiable. It shall be ensured that the provisions of this chapter are complied with. This chapter contains additional rules for the application of the rules in force at any time in Messages from the Danish maritime authority (A) on the working environment in ships.

Rule 1 General protective measures (1) There shall be provided a stretch rope system that effectively covers all needs. The necessary wires, ropes, shackles, eyehooks and cleats must be present.

(2) the deck openings with sills or thresholds with a height of less than 600 mm shall be provided with protective measures, such as hinged or portable railing or network with a height of at least 1 metre. The Administration may exempt smaller apertures as URf.eks. fishery openings (isdæksler) from that meet these requirements.

(3) Skylights or other similar openings shall be provided with protective bars with a distance of no more than 350 millimeters apart. The Administration may exempt smaller apertures from meeting this provision.

(4) All deck surfaces shall be so arranged and processed to minimize the risk of persons slipping, be reduced to the minimum. In particular, tires in workspaces, such as in machinery spaces and galleys, at games, vod and nettromler, by selvhalere, and where fish are treated, like at the foot and top of ladders and in front of the doors be fitted with special non-slip surfaces that prevents slippage. 1) (

5)

Where the crew work or move in places where there is an increased risk of falls overboard, must take appropriate security measures when using lifeline, work vest, life jacket or other suitable equipment. The work must not be performed without established fully adequate oversight.

(6)

Where the work is not otherwise can be planned and organized so that it can be performed by the safety and health work must only be carried out fully defensible, if used personal protective equipment referred to in article 6. the applicable at any time Messages from the Danish maritime authority (A) on the working environment on board ships.

Rule 2 Deck openings (1) Hinged hatch covers, manholes and other openings must, using a self-locking device must be protected against accidental closure. Heavy lids on evacuation openings shall be fitted with counterweights or similar and be so designed that they can be opened from both sides of the hatch.

(2) Access lugers dimensions shall not be less than 600 mm or 600 times have a diameter of less than 600 mm. About access to the cargo space view, moreover, the provisions of rule 6.

(3) where practicable, there are handles above the level of the deck over evacuation openings.

Rule 3 bulwarks, guard rails and protective measures (1) the effective bulwarks, rail or railing must be placed on all exposed parts of the working deck and superstructure on the tires, if they're working platforms. Bulwark or rækværkets height above the deck should be at least 1 metre. If this height would interfere with the ship's normal functions, the Administration may accept a lower height. On existing ships to a height of at least 750 mm may accept, if deemed appropriate.
(2) The minimum vertical distance from the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie to the lowest point on the top edge or bulwark to the edge of the working deck if a railing is used, must provide the crew adequate protection against the water that washed over the deck, taking to the waters and weather conditions, in which the vessel will operate, as well as workspaces, the type of vessel and fishing method and must be in the whole meet the Administration's demands. [In ships with a length of more than 24 metres in length built after 1 January 2003, the freeboard measured amidships from the edge of the working deck, from which fishing, shall be at least 300 mm or not less than the freeboard corresponding to the maximum draught] in accordance with the ship's approved stability information. [In all vessels with sheltered working decks, which are so arranged that water cannot get into the protected jobs, required nothing else than the freeboard, which comply with the maximum permissible draught.]

(3) the opening under the lower pole of the railings must not exceed 230 mm. The distance between the other rods shall not exceed 380 mm, and the distance between the Guardrail post sponsors must not be more than 1.5 metres. In a ship with rounded bulwarks must be placed on the flat support Guardrail post part of the deck. Balustrades must be no sharp points, edges and corners and shall be of sufficient strength.

(4) in accordance with the requirements of the Administration must be found resources, such as railings, stræktov, walkways or under deck passages, for protection of the crew during the movement between rest areas, machinery and other places of work. There must, where necessary, be fitted to hand catch on the outside of all deckhouses and casings in order to provide security for the crew's passage or work.

(5) freezer trawlers working from the stern, must be fitted with suitable protection, such as doors, gates or net on top of agterrampen at the same height as the bulwarks or guard rails adjacent. When such protection is not in place, there must be a link or other protection products across the ramp.

(6) For other fishing vessels and bjærger trawl over the stern can be allowed, that there are no bulwarks intends, on condition that the vertical distance from the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie to the edge of the working deck is at least 1800 mm and provides adequate protection for the crews against the water that washed over the deck, and that there is an unbroken gunwale from starboard to port side at a maximum height of 1000 mm and that other safety measures in each case is to the satisfaction of the administration. Such security measures is not limited to, but can URf.eks. be that the distance from nettromlen to the coaming is minimum 1000 mm. Width of the hole in the entrenchment plating is minimized as much as possible by that inserted control rods with a maximum distance of 400 mm or paunebrædder of sufficient strength to withstand the Lake. Know that there is an edge of at least 50 mm in the height of the hole onto the ship's side or equivalent, and that påsvejses herringbone, covering at least 500 mm from the side of the ship aft toward the nettromlerne. By covered between drums and gunwale is skidsikret extra. When there is no set or salvaged grejer through the hole, placed three chains or wire ropes from port to starboard side with solid fortresses in tables and, where there is solid bulwarks, amidships. The opening under the lower chain or wire must not exceed 230 mm, and the distance between the rest of the chains or wire ropes shall not exceed 380 mm. To be used approved Working West or working suit with approved buoyancy means, when working in the area. The event must be pre-approved by the administration. Prior approval, there is written, must be stored in addition to the ship's logbook.

(7)

Where used grate works by coaming, the distance between grating the work's surface and top of the gunwale of not less than 600 mm.

Rule 4 stairways and ladders (1), to ensure the crew must be in accordance with the Administration's demands are stairways and ladders of adequate size and strength with handrails and non-slip steps. [In fishing vessels built after 1 January 2003, such stairs and ladders meet the relevant ISO standards.]

Rule 5 History (1) There must be the opportunity directly from the wheelhouse visibility for all jobs on the weather deck. The wheelhouse shall, where it is necessary in order to ensure such visibility, be fitted with Windows to dørken. The wheelhouse must be placed so high that visibility is not prevented or limited by the equipment, etc., that are mounted on the deck. On existing ships to it from the ship's maneuver space be possible to monitor the places on the ship, where the crew is busy with restocking and indhivning of fishing gear and taking the catch.

(2)

Where it is not technically possible to ensure an unobstructed view from the ship's maneuver room for all jobs on the weather deck, see. rule 5.1, must be fitted with a video surveillance system that is suitable for maritime use, and where the location of the camera and the monitor are approved by the administration.



(3)

Where it is not possible to establish a sound visible and audible communication between the workplace and the bridge, must establish a suitable and reliable communication system.



(4)

Operating levers to the games and other machinery, URf.eks. nettromler shall be so arranged that the serving the games, has sufficient space. The operator must from the maneuver space (control site) have full view of the workspace for that game and machinery.

(5)

Where it is not possible to have direct visibility of these workspaces, it can in some cases be accepted, the use of indirect vision using a video surveillance system that is suitable for maritime use, and where the location of the camera and monitor are approved by the administration.



Rule 6 access to the cargo space



(1)

Access between decks shall be at fixed ladders. If lejderne must be able to be dismantled, they must be carried out with brackets so that they are secure and stable once they are mounted.

(2)

Hatches – where the force required to open the hatch covers are 160 N or more – shall be fitted with a device which can help to open the hatch. All hatches shall be secured in the open position.

(3)

In category space should there be a ladder or solid steps all the way down to the bottom of the load. There must be mounted grab bars, where it is appropriate. Ladders must be secured against slipping and overturning with hangers.

(4)

The steps on ladders or the fixed step must be designed so as to minimize the risk of falls is minimised as much as possible. They must therefore be at least 250 mm in width, and a foothold in all ships built after the 1. January 2003 be at least 150 mm in depth. The foot may not be able to glide to the page outside of the step. Round iron can only after a concrete assessment is accepted as steps.

(5)

Where the ship's personnel are employed in the hold of the sea, cargo holds be equipped with at least one evacuation option. This evacuation option may be the cargo hatch. Such a hatch must be opened and closed from either side. Is the cargo compartment length 20 m or more, must establish two evacuation options that are located as far apart as possible. These hatches shall comply with the provisions of chapter II, rule 5 or 6, and access to them shall comply with the provisions of these rules. The requirement for two hatches shall not apply to ships constructed before 1. August 1990. If the hold is a refrigerator or freezer compartment, hatch or door to this room could be opened from either side, and there must be the possibility for the transmittal of alarm from the room to the wheelhouse.

(6)

Access to the load compartment shall be so designed that it is possible for a person to get down in the rooms wearing breathing equipment. This provision shall not apply to vessels less than 45 m, built before 1 January 1995. August 1990.

(7)

Fishing vessels used for fishing or transporting fish industry, must have at least the following hatches in each cargo space and cargo tanks:



(7) (a)

An unloading hatch with a free access opening of at least 1200 × 1200 mm. On vessels less than 24 metres in length can hatch openings of at least 1000 × 1000 mm are accepted on the basis of a specific assessment of the situation. On vessels under 24 metres in length may be as an alternative to the hatch openings of at least 1000 × 1000 mm are accepted a hatch opening at least 750 × 750 mm, provided that there is an extra title to hold at minimum 600 × 600 mm; This title option shall comply with the provisions of this rule (5), just as it must be documented that a stretcher can come up from the hold. Hatch cover for this title option can be a flush hatch, who in this case must be marked ' do not open in the Lake '. On existing ships can accept a size of at least 800 × 1000 hatch mm when there are two such hatches in each cargo space. On existing wooden ships with a gross tonnage of less than 50, the traditional one hatch is accepted, when the bore is minimum 800 × 1000 mm.

(7) (b) A isdæksel with a free lining diameter 290 mm. Isdækslet should be placed as far as possible from the unloading hatch and used during discharge to place the outdoor air directly on top of the fan. Isdækslet shall be of a type of lock, and where the Administration deems it necessary, the supply air fan is placed on a frame of the same height as the unloading hatch.

(8)
In ships with RSW/CSW-tanks, such tanks a fixed ladder, complying with the provisions of paragraph 4 in the whole depth of thought. By the decline of the idea, there must be a brackets to a drop waist. There must be at least two approved appropriate pulley, and two approved harness belts on board. Drop waist and H-belt to be used by any access to cargo tanks for whatever reason.

(9) in ships built after the 1. January 2003 must be in category space a fixed staircase in the whole cargo compartment depth. The stairs must be fitted with handles on both sides. Is the hold the height less than 3 meters, on the basis of a specific assessment steps can be replaced by a fixed ladder, complying with the provisions of paragraph 4. Where the hold the height is less than 2.2 meters, can a removable ladder with restraint bracket are accepted on the basis of a specific assessment.

Rule 7 Landing conditions



(1)

Landing conditions shall be secured in such a way that access to and from the ship can be security properly.



(2)

The master of a ship to be transited over it, must ensure that the passage can be done securely in safe condition. In ships with a completely or partially overbyggede fribordsdæk there shall be taken such arrangements, that there can be a proper access road to the vessel or to other ships moored side by side in port.

(3)

There must be the necessary skridsikrings and retention events, such as handrails, railings and steps, and establish the necessary lighting of the event.



(4)

Fishing vessels with a length L between 45 m and 85 m must at least be equipped with a landing with fields of application in angles with the horizontal plane at between 0 ° and 45 °.



(5)

Fishing vessels with a length (L) of more than 85 metres must be equipped with at least:



(5) (a)

a faldereb with adjustable step for use in angles with the horizontal plane at between 0 ° and 55 °, or



(5) (b) a landing for use in angles between 0 ° and 55 ° and a faldereb with the fixed step for use in angles with the horizontal plane at between 20 ° and 50 °.



(6)

If it under paragraph (5) (a) faldereb not mentioned can be switched from side to side of the ship's crew, there shall be a faldereb in each page.



(7) New ships with a length (L) of 24 metres or over but less than 45 metres must have inset steps in the ship's side or step welded to the ship's side. The steps should be placed on the vertical part of the ship's side and go from lønningens over the edge to the ship's lightest waterline. Ships resident in Greenland are exempt from the requirement to step on the ship's side when the vessel is equipped with MOB boat. In new ships built after the 1. January 2003, the width of the steps shall be at least 250 mm and tread depth not less than 125 mm.

(8)

In ships where the MOB boat is not required or where there are given an exemption from the requirement for MOB boat, setting up an arrangement that ensures that overboard fallen crew members can be salvaged on board both in port and at sea. In order to find the most suitable product for the concrete ship collection, it is recommended that the owner takes its starting point in the "report on the capture of fallen overboard from fishing vessels". The report can be found at URWWW.F-A.DK.

Rule 8 work at height



(1) Master in which the lifting devices, antennas, lanterns or anything else that might require supervision or repair, are mounted, shall be provided with suitable ladders and possibly. working platforms. Petitioned's extent must be from the deck to the upper lantern or other equipment that may require supervision. This requirement shall not apply to existing ships with træmaster. On fishing vessels built after 1 July. January 2003 must not be carried out of step ladder round iron.

(2)

All ladders have a greater angle with the horizontal plane than 70 degrees and greater height above the deck than 5 metres, from a height of 2.20 m above the deck shall be equipped with approved fall protection systems. Identity protection can be replaced by approved rygbøjler.

(3) On top of A-master, upstairs control houses and other places where work is carried out, or where it may be necessary to carry out repair work, supervision and the like, must establish suitable handrails or banister.



(4)

Fish lifts must be equipped with ladders and rygbøjler from a height of 2.20 m above the deck. Furthermore, it must be at or near the top of the tower is placed an appropriate platform, providing lubrication, maintenance and possible repair may be carried out. The platform shall be provided with guard rails and skirting board or similar sound to the prevention of falls from a height. The individual visible feed pipes from ice cream or fish lift must be ensured between themselves, then accidentally dropped by the individual pipes are prevented. Where pipe length exceeds 2 metres, should the pipes be fixed support or suspension. The movement of visible feed pipes should never be carried out as a single work.

(5)

It must be possible to inspect and maintain block and suspension to the Royal Opera in Copenhagen the wire on a safety and health sound way.



(6)

Approved personal protective equipment (H-harness) shall be carried on board.



Rule 9 working and crossing conditions



(1)

There must be guaranteed free passage in road traffic roads (minimum 600 mm) and good seat at jobs (minimum 600 × 600 mm), URf.eks. in front of nettromler, at the game and by environmental plants. On existing ships free passage must be ensured if it is technically possible. If, after a concrete assessment is not possible to guarantee free passage must be sought made other technical measures in order to reduce or minimize the risk.

(2)

On vessels with a length of 24 metres and above, it must be ensured that the manual handling of fish on the vessel can be carried below deck or bak. There must be full standing height (at least 2 m) and daylight access in the form of URf.eks. portholes. On existing ships, the requirement of full standing height and daylight access as far as possible, be met. On vessels with a length of less than 24 metres in length shall ensure that the handling of fish on the vessel can take place in a protected environment.

(3)

In the machinery space shall be free passage to all essential parts and components for maintenance and repair. There will also be free passage to and from the staircase or emergency exit.

(4)

Where equipment for processing or slidskning of the catch hinder free passage must be equipped to be removable or otherwise flexible, providing free passage in the periods for which there is no processing of the catch.



(5)

In closed and semi-closed workspaces used for indtakling and fish processing, there must be ventilated to the satisfaction of the administration. Where is going on really fish processing (filleting, boiling or similar), storage of fish, as well as the use of chemicals, must be fitted with a fixed installed mechanical ventilation systems to ensure an air switch on at least six times per hour. The Administration may exempt partial closed workspaces from the abovementioned requirements, provided the basis of a specific assessment is estimated, that there is sufficient natural ventilation.

(6)

There shall be safety helmet or other equivalent head protection for all on board, who are exposed to being hit by falling objects.



Rule 10 Lighting



(1)

By all passage ways, in all workspaces and in all workspaces on the ship must have good lighting conditions. Lighting conditions must have a strength and quality, to ensure that work is carried out by the safety and health fully forsvarligt2).

(2)

This value must be adequate to ensure that we can distinguish detail. The light must create suitable contrast ratio and may not dazzle.

(3

) In cargo holds, there must be a stationary lighting which ensures adequate lighting under all conditions – both for orientation and when working in the hold. On existing ships used for catching fish, as well as in industrial ships with cargo tanks may after the Administration's concrete assessment is permitted, to the lighting of the spaces reserved for the load are established on a different, but just as good as with a stationary plant. Such lighting shall be of low-voltage type (24 volt) and explosion-proof.

(4)

The lighting on the deck don't bother visibility from the wheelhouse.



Rule 11 Deck machinery in General



(1)

Games, nettromler, trawl bucket arrangement and other deck machinery shall, with respect to the design, construction, equipment, safety equipment and stability be so arranged that they can be established, under the intended operating conditions, be used, maintained and repaired without risk to health and safety.



(2)

The use of games, nettromler, trawl bucket arrangement and other deck machinery must happen on a safety and health fully sound manner and in accordance with the rules applicable at any time on the application of technical means.



(3)

Games, nettromler and other deck machinery must, if technically possible, be so designed that the engine stops when the safety devices are removed.



(4) Mechanical operated gantries, forming a pinching hazard to persons, must be equipped with a signal unit that warns people in the area when the gallows are moving.



(5) Mechanical operated hatches, forming a pinching hazard to persons, must be equipped with a signal unit that warns people in the area.



Rule 12 Games



(1) Games must as far as possible, be designed and shielded, so moving parts cannot cause injury to persons. All protective devices must be of adequate strength.

(2)
Directory blocks shall be provided with security guard and foreclosure or other equally efficient approved safety measures, which can provide protection against injury.



(3)

If it is technically possible, the cables along the deck be placed in tubes or otherwise identified as safe. The location must be in such a way that the passage on the deck can be made security fully justifiable.

(4) Games should be able to be reversed. The control levers should automatically return to the neutral position when released, and be fitted with locking devices or shielding that prevents uncontrolled starting. Control handle for garnhalere, long-line games and vodtromler can be exempted from the requirement of having to go into neutral position on the basis of a specific assessment in accordance with the Administration at any time applicable instructions and guides.

(5)

Drums shall be equipped with approved measures for the locking of the Dodger.



(6)

If a game can be operated from more than one place, it should be at each control point could be seen from where the game is operated. The game may only be operable from one location at a time.

(7)

Games must be carried out in such a way that the force needed to operate the handwheels, levers, switch rods and the like, do not exceed 160 N and in those cases where fodtryk is used, does not exceed 320 n. Rule does not apply to existing ships built before 1. August 1990.

(8)

Any part of the fishing gear, including wire ropes, chains, blocks and the like, must be of sufficient strength to withstand the stresses to which they may be exposed to. The Administration at any time applicable instructions and guides for the approval and inspection of this equipment shall apply.

(9)

All parts included in the lifting devices and similar equipment, whether they are stationary or moving, as well as equipment used in conjunction therewith, must be of solid construction, constructed of suitable materials with sufficient strength and without error. They must be securely and adequately fastened, supported or suspended, having regard to the purposes for which they are to be used. The Administration at any time applicable instructions and guides for the approval and inspection of this equipment shall apply.

(10)

Repair or replacement of any part of the above equipment may not lead to deterioration of the original strength.



(11)

Games need to be equipped with mechanical brakes that effectively is able to sustain the burden. Brakes must be equipped with simple and easily accessible adjustment schemes. Any games drum, which can be disconnected from the game's driving axle, must be fitted with a brake that is independent of the drive shaft.

(12)

Games must be fitted with means to prevent overload. Failure of the power supply shall not result in uncontrolled lowering of the burden.

(13)

By all games cups must be fitted to foreclosure. The Administration can, after a concrete assessment exempt games cups in order to meet this requirement.

(14) If a game can be operated from the maneuver space (wheelhouse, bridge), in appropriate places (URf.eks. at the time of the game and the other fixed places of work on deck and in the wheelhouse) be provided for the emergency stop. The emergency stop must be able to stop the game's movement, and the game must be maintained, so there will be no uncontrolled expiration of the wire.

(15)

Royal Opera in Copenhagen games may not be able to heave with greater force than the minimum working load in any part of the indtaklingssystemet.



(16)

Trawl winch must be equipped with a mechanical coil system. The Administration can, after a concrete assessment in accordance with the Administration at any time applicable instructions and how-to exempt even crammed games in order to meet this requirement.

(17)

Hanging blocks shall be provided with security chains or wire fuse with at least the double fracture strength of block suspension point.



(18)

Control panels shall be designed so that there can be unintended starting of the games, as a result of, for example, improper designate relay contacts to the control handles.



Regulation 13 cargo handling



(1)

Modtagebinger, which tackles in with freely hanging lift shall be provided with a solid rørgelænder around bingen. On the banister, where necessary, establish a platform in the appropriate height, so that the binding of the bag can be carried out in a good working position.

(2)

Fish processing must be in good working height. Assistive devices and equipment to the extent necessary, be easily adjustable.

(3)

In order to reduce the risk of slippery deck surfaces shall fish waste headed over Board with the help of slides, tapes or similar event.



(4)

Establishment of technical measures ensuring that the handling of fish on deck from the deck to the cargo space or in the cargo hold can be carried out in such a way that unnecessary, physical loads can be avoided or minimised.



Rule 14 Ishåndtering



(1)

Conveyor belts for the transport of ice cream to mix with the fish may not available on board in new ships, in whole or in part are used for transport and fishing by industrial fish. On other fishing vessels must be submitted to the Administration for approval if any istransportarrangementer at the planning stage. There must be attached to separate risk assessment for all job functions in connection with the use of the conveyor belt; There should also be a written instruction for work in connection with the repair of the conveyor belt and isblandesystemet.

(2)

For existing istransportsystemer must also draw up a separate risk assessment for all job functions in connection with the use of the conveyor belt. There should also be a written instruction for work in connection with the repair of the conveyor belt and isblandesystemet. To the existing istransportsystemer in addition, the following requirements: (2) (a)

Istransportsystemer with snails, tape or chain conveyors shall be designed and positioned in such a way that it is impossible to get the arms, legs, etc. trapped in elevators. There shall be a main breaker that interrupts power supply when istransportsystemet is undergoing maintenance. The main switch must be capable of being locked with the lock or other lock and key needs to be released to the repairman. To be in the category space, which istransportørsystemet passes, found an appropriate number of emergency stops, so that from any place near istransportøren is possible immediately to stop this.

(2) (b)

The part of istransportsystemet, which is used to ' feed ', must be protected by a gratings (elephant grate) constructed of minimum 5 mm flat iron with a square opening on maximum 120 × 120 mm and a depth of at least 70 mm. Distance between the lower edge of the gratings and the upper part of the isfrembærende construction or rotating parts must be at least 200 mm.

(2) (c)

Where the feeding of iselevatoren in the hold is done directly through a single opening to the conveyor or snail, this opening is supplied with a built up of minimum 5 mm gratings flat iron with a square opening on maximum 120 × 120 mm and a depth of at least 70 mm. Installation must be approved by the Administration before entry into service and think.

(2) (d) in the case where the supply of ice to the conveyor belt takes place via a corrugated bulkhead, there must be welded to horizontal rods or tubes with a maximum of 300 mm vertical spacing. At the bottom, where the isbåndet flows into the bulkhead, above rods be replaced by a plate at the bottom ends close to the tape, and that is not less than 1200 mm in height.

(2) (e)

Screen plates and gratings must be secured by surfacing.



(2) (f)

Gratings must not removed when iselevatorer with snails or chain conveyors are in operation.



(2) (g)

If the screen plates or gratings have been dismantled, there, indicating the time and place of the master introduced a statement of the reasons therefor in the ship's logbook. Don't take on new cruise ship, before the regulatory arrangement is restored and the sight of the master personally.

(2) (h)

Anyone residing or working in the cargo space with iselevatorer with snails or chain conveyors, must use specially suitable protective footwear.



(2) (1)

Ishåndtering must be carried out without undue strain. In human consumption ships can this URf.eks. be aware that installing an ice-cream maker with sufficient capacity, issilo with hævbar bottoms or other technical devices for handling of ice to avoid heavy lifting and awkward postures when handling ice.

Rule 15 Styrestangs arrangement



(1)

Styrestangs event must be mechanically operated on ships, in whole or in part used for catching fish industry. On ships over 24 metres in length with a long shipping nettromle styrestangs event must be mechanically operated. For the same group of ships with transverse nettromler to it by the Administration in each case must be assessed on the mechanical styrestangs of arrangement is necessary. Holders or carts for control rods, which can be operated mechanically, should be secured in such a way that the crew cannot get trapped. The Administration may at specified conditions after a concrete assessment of the existing ships allow a longitudinal drum used as a spare drum and in connection with konsumfiskeri, without established mechanical styrestangs arrangement, if bad space or other inappropriate consequences of requirement applies.

(2)

Styrestangs event must be designed in such a way that the trawl or liner can not jump over the Steering rods and control rods cannot be ' screw up ' of retainers.



Rule 16 Nettromler
(1)

Nettromler must be positioned in such a way as to prevent pinch injury.



(2)

Passagevej between bulkhead, deckhouse or similar and fully coiled drum with net must as a minimum be 600 mm. On existing vessels, the Administration may, if deemed justifiable, however, allow a less passage.

(3) be operated drum locally by the game, the control lever is positioned in such a way that the danger of pinching accident of the person serving the game is eliminated.

3) Control handles shall automatically return to the neutral position when released, and be fitted with locking devices or shielding that prevents accidental starting.

(4)

Control panels shall be designed so that there can be unintended starting of the drums, as a result of, for example, improper designate relay contacts to the control handles.



Rule 17 Trawl shovels and lump



(1)

Measures must be taken to prevent trawling buckets, conveyor and chain clump clump accidental can swing inboard, URf.eks. by deploying one or more removable protective rods, pipe or similar at the gallows. It must be ensured that your child cannot hives in over the hedge, with less established a slidskearrangement, which maintains its integrity.

(2)

Efficient means shall be provided to maintain trawl shovels, conveyor and chain clump clump during connection and disconnection of agtertræk/inhale, etc.

4)



(3)

Shall be provided appropriate platforms or similar events, so that replacement/protection of wire ropes, shackles, sensors and everything else work in connection with the trawl boards, scroll the root ball and chain the root ball can be carried out safely.



(4) On existing fishing vessels on board which the driver does not have a full overview of the trawl boards by replacement/protection, there must either be used an electronic communication system between the bridge and the working deck or set up video surveillance with a system that is suitable for maritime use, and where the location of the camera is approved by the administration.



Rule 18 Deck machinery in beam trawlers



(1) On beam trawlers must play the event regardless of the stakes involved size be arranged so that the game spin to warps with a single hand grip in the wheelhouse can be linked free under load independent of the hydraulic pump and brakes. There must, however, be maintained sufficient friction braking to avoid uncontrolled coasting. In beam trawlers with a length of 24 metres must be also on deck are an equivalent easily accessible frikob-lingsmulighed.

(2) games with claw clutch operation should not be injected during towing.



(3) All games must be lowered in all conditions.



Rule 19 Fish processing facility



(1) fish processing facility means facilities that are mechanically sorts, cleans, fileterer, boils, preserves, packages, transporting or otherwise deal with the catch.



(2) Fish processing facility must be designed in such a way that persons working or staying at the installation, do not come to harm. The plant must be guaranteed in all situations, URf.eks. in normal operation, under repair, maintenance and cleaning.

(3)

Protective screens must not be removable without the use of tools, unless taken with one of the following special measures:



(3) (a)

Protective screen must not be opened before the engine is turned off, and the plant is stopped. The plant must then could not be started until the protective screens are again placed in space.

(3) (b)

When the guard is opened, the driving force is automatically turned off, and the plant will stop in less time than it takes to lead a limb into the danger zone. The plant must not start before the guard is in place, and should not automatically be able to restart.

(3) (c)

On existing fishing vessels built before 1 January 1995. August 1990 the Administration approve installations which do not comply with the provision, provided that the plant is estimated to be just as safe.



(4)

Fish processing facility to easily, quickly and safely could be stopped with emergency stop, if dangerous situations arise in connection with the operation of the plant. The emergency stop must serve for all operating areas, including when part of the plant is disconnected.

(5)

Installations of work technical reasons cannot be arranged or shielded so that the risk of injury is excluded, must have emergency stop at danger points. By dangerous overrun must be combined with an emergency stop brake. Restart of the plant may only be possible with the normal boot devices, and only when the emergency stop is made manually in the ' clear ' position. The emergency stop must be permanently installed. Where the Administration considers that there is an increased risk that an installation can be started with the accidental risk of injury happens, the Administration may require that the installation must have key Valet break of power connection.

(6) the Repair and cleaning of a facility shall, as far as possible, could be carried out with an effective shielding mounted. If this is not possible, that after the removal of the guard made a key Valet attendant to get the installation to run. The plant may only be able to run under control of the hand-operated switch.

(7)

Plants must, after pressing stop, not stand with an accumulated pressure by repair or intervention can create dangerous machine movement.



(8)

Fish processing plant, conveyor belts, etc. shall comply with the following:



(8) (a)

Emergency stop should be placed in appropriate places.



(8) (b)

These facilities shall, in addition to those referred to in (a) e-stops be equipped with emergency stop devices which automatically comes into operation, if it intervenes in the installations by an accident or by cleaning, inspecting or similar.



(9)

Where several conveyor belts work following on from one another, the emergency stop must be located at intervals of not more than 10 metres. Each emergency stop must stop all conveyor belt in line. If transport båndenes length is 15 metres or more, there must be sound or light signals to warn when the conveyor belt starts.

(10)

There must be safe and free access for inspection, control and cleaning of fish processing plant. Workspaces by such installations must not be less than 750 mm. Width After a concrete assessment, however, the Administration may allow smaller widths, if it is considered justifiable.

(11)

Materials used to insulate fish processing facility, Inc. pipework must be ubrandbare, durable and stable in a vibrating environment and must not have exterior surface temperatures that are harmful or unpleasant for the crew when touched. Insulation materials shall be securely fastened. In ships constructed before 1 January 2007. August 1990 to the aforementioned requirements as far as possible, be met. The materials must also be approved for use in the food industry.

(12) Machinery and installations, working under pressure, must meet the requirements for pressure vessels in chapter IV.



(13) Machinery and other installations from which the development of steam, gas, dust, harmful or annoying substances shall be equipped with extractors. Extraction of fixed sugeåbninger must be placed as close as possible to the source of steam, gas, dust or emissions of the harmful or annoying substances. Rørføringen must be arranged in such a way that they do not adversely affect lapse ventilated products for the crew. Steam or dunst emissions from equipment, such as lobster, crab, shrimp and liver fryers and equipment, which use heated water, must be positioned as high as possible. Exhaust pipes must be at least 50 mm in diameter and be led to the open air. Steam and water mist from emissions must not cover the visibility from the bridge.

(14)

Dampers, valves and other blocking or stopping devices must be placed in such a way that they are easily accessible and safe to operate.



(15)

Machinery and equipment in working areas must be mounted on strong, solid foundations and securely connected to the ship's structure.



(16) the moving parts of machinery and other installations and equipment that can be dangerous, must be effectively shielded.



(17)

Fish processing plants that use water, shall be provided with effective drainage systems that take account of their special susceptibility to blocking.



(18)

Machinery and installations, which requires routine inspection at a height of more than 2 m, must, if technically possible, be supplied with 600 mm wide platforms with handrails that are not less than 1 m high.



(19)

The imposition and removal of fish to the plant shall be carried out in a safe and comfortable working height.



(20) Fill openings to machinery and other installations (URf.eks. liver or fish oil cookers) must be within convenient reach of the crew. Covers on filling openings must have suitable means of closure so that steam, hot water or dunst is prevented from escaping the room. The cover shall be fitted with a counterweight or other safe arrangement to maintain it in the open position, when required.

Rule 20 Measures to counter it with industrial loads connected health hazard



(1)

In this rule, the following definitions shall apply:



(1) (a) ' Formalin ': Liquid formaldehyde HCHO dissolved in water.

(1) (b)

» Breathing apparatus ' means protection product which ensures that a person can be supplied with fresh air from a stationary pneumatic battery, supercharger system with pressure tank or portable pressure bottles.

(1) (c)

» Industrial fish ': fish caught exclusively for use in fish mels fishmeal and fish oil industries.

(1) (d)
» Hydrogen sulfide ': Methane H2S (hydrogen sulphide).

(2)

Vessels used to catch and/or transport of industrial fish shall comply with the provisions laid down in this regulation.



(3) For tackling rot in fish vices and thus development of toxic gases shall be subject to the rules laid down by the Ministry of food. The food Ministry gives permission for the use of new, not previously used preservatives, must so notify the shipowner to the Administration before the relevant preservatives put into service. Funds may not be used, before the Administration's rules for the use of these preservatives available.

(4)

For addressing the health hazards associated with unloading of industrial fish of the labour inspectorate shall be subject to the provisions laid down at any time:» To-manual about working with industrial fish in ships in port ' (current to release no. 4.04.12).

(5)

Formalin must be stored on the free deck in approved containers.



(6)

To the control of the air in the vessel's compartments must be on board are type approved measuring equipment, which must be capable of measuring the content of oxygen, carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide, as well as by formalin, in so far as this can be found on board.



(7)

There must be on board are type approved safety equipment consisting of at least two safety belts with attached lifeline as well as at least one respiratory protective devices. In existing ships, existing equipment already approved shall continue to be accepted.

(8)

When working with formalin must use rubber or plastic gloves and goggles or face shield.



(9)

Access to cargo spaces, storerooms or similar spaces below deck is not allowed before it is through measurements found that the air in the room is not toxic or hazardous.



(10)

After the measurements have found that the air in the room is not toxic or hazardous, as well as to the air has sufficient oxygen content (minimum 21%), the person to be in the hold, jacket placed on seat belt with its lifeline. A line keeps must constantly be at the hatch as a guard.

(11)

The master must keep at appropriate intervals during the journey holds with industry fish under observation with a view to relieving damaging excess pressure.



(12)

On the underside of each hatch cover (except isdæksler) leading down to the cargo space for storage of industrial fish, there shall be placed a warning sign made of durable, seawater-resistant material. Alternatively, putting up sign on the wheelhouse next to the place where you usually border ship.







 





The text on the sign must be:





 



 



DANGER

TOXIC AND ASPHYXIATING GASES

It is forbidden to go down before the measurements are made.

Safety harness and Lifeline must be used.

There must be a guard at the hatch.



 









(13) There must be on Board found a copy of the test specified in paragraph (4) referred To-manual as well as by the Danish working environment service's and the Administration's publication: ' Work with industrial fish, instructions about hazards and safety precautions '.

(14) the master shall ensure that all of him or the shipowner staff persons employed with the loading, stowage and unloading of industrial fish, are familiar with safety regulations and in this rule referred to publications.



(15) Persons involved in the loading, stowage and unloading of industrial fish is to be instructed in the use of it in this rule referred to measurement and safety equipment. To be held exercises with equipped each time signed on by a new crew member on board, to be employed with the loading, stowage and unloading of industrial fish, but at least once every three months. The master to be in supervisory book introduce the time and place for in within the organization.

Rule 21 secure access to tanks and enclosed spaces



(1)

To be on the bridge and in the control room set up a sign that warns of the dangers of going in until you have made sure that the room is sufficiently ventilated.



(2)

The data on the size must be at least A5.



Subparagraph (B) of the Central plant for welding with acetylene and oxygen



Rule 1 General provisions



(1) Acetylene (C

2

(H)

2

) should be stored in special containers (1.5-1.8 N/mm

2 at 15 ˚c).



(2)

Oxygen (O

2

) must be stored in gaseous state at the special containers (15-20 N/mm

2

at 15 ˚c).



(3) Central system shall be provided in a separate beholderrum or in a separate container deposit, see. rule 3, fixed-installed central for each gas – including high pressure manifold with screw-pressure check valve for each connected container, any high pressure hoses, central regulator with pressure gauges for high-and low-pressure Chamber, safety valves, fastening arrangement for container and operating manual.



(4)

A udtagspost must consist of shut-off valves with connections to the low-pressure pipelines, acetylene Kickback protection completed with 3/8 "left threaded, oxygen reduction valve with pressure gauge, oxygen potential Kickback protection completed with 3/8" threaded right as well as for each gas a re-tighten mounted hose spigot.



(5) Burners, valves, controllers and control valves, restrictor fuses and hoses must be accepted by a recognized type. Burners must be of ligetrykstypen.

(6)

There shall be provided for the operating and maintenance instructions for the equipment.

Rule 2 Containers (1) Receptacles shall be approved by a recognized authority/institution or of a recognized classification society.



(2)

Use only containers with a capacity of 50 litres or less.



(3)

Containers must be stamped tare and gross weight, month and year of the last pressure test and test pressure.



(4) Containers, including reserve containers must be placed in the upright position, and they must be attached safely. Mounting arrangement must be done in such a way that quick dismounting of containers can be made.

Rule 3 location of containers



(1)

Regardless of the number of containers must be located above the bulkhead deck outside machinery spaces and hazardous areas, IE. outside of areas where other flammable and/or explosive gases or vapours will be expected to be present.



(2) A beholderrum must be a separate room, as against the ship's Interior must be surrounded by a gas-tight steel bulkheads, ståldæk, etc. That may only be accessed from the free deck, and the door to the room must open outwards.

(1) 1

The room must be isolated, ventilated and arranged so that the room temperature does not usually exceed 40 ˚c. If temperature conditions allow it, the natural ventilation is used.

(3) A container deposit box shall be constructed of steel, and it must be firmly placed on the free deck. Closet doors must open outwards.

(3) 1

Community must be ventilated and are arranged in such a way that the cabinet temperature usually does not exceed 40 ˚c.



(4)

Electric installations and components – including circuit breakers, lighting fixtures, ventilation motors, etc. – in beholderrum/container create must be explosion proof execution.



PRESSURE BOTTLES ARE REMOVED BY FIRE

THE USE OF NAKED FLAMES PROHIBITED



 







(5)

Beholderrum/container to create doors must be fitted on the outside with the following text:



(6) There should be scope for quick and easy access to beholderrum/container creation, irrespective of the fact that the doors are locked, and there must be firmly placed tool for closing the container valves and for dismounting of containers and faucet.



(7)

In beholderrum/container deposit box shall be provided a fast carried out instructions on handling of acetylene and oxygen as well as the plant's operation. The brochure content must be designed in a simple and intuitive way, so incorrect operation can be avoided.

(7) 1

Of the instructions shall contain inter alia indicate that the oil products and fats under no circumstances must be entered in beholderrum/container deposit, and that space/community must not be crossed by people whose skin (hands) or clothing is significantly contaminated by oil or fat, as well as to portable electrical equipment must not be carried in beholderrum or introduced into the container.



Rule 4 pipe installations



(1) the high pressure side for acetylene



(1) 1

Manifold shall be constructed of seamless steel tubes. Pipes and fittings must be sized to 30 N/mm2 and before installation be hydraulic pressure tested with mentioned pressure. Do not use copper and copper alloys with weight of copper at 65 or higher.

(1) 2

If you have connected more containers to assemble the pipe, there must be a shut off valve for each container directly on the Assembly tube.



(2) the high pressure side of the oxygen



(2) 1

Manifold must be carried out by either seamless or seamless steel tubes, copper tube dimensioned and are pressure tested as indicated under paragraph 1.



(2) 2

Shut-off valves shall be provided as set out in paragraph 2.



(3) low pressure side for acetylene and oxygen



(3) 1

Lavtryksrør for acetylene shall be made of seamless steel tubes. The inside diameter must not exceed 30 mm.

(3) 2
Lavtryksrør for oxygen must be carried out by either seamless copper tube or seamless steel tubes.



(3) 3 Low-pressure side of acetylene should be connected to the high pressure side through a reduction valve that reduces acetylene pressure for maximum 0.09 N/mm

2

. Immediately after the reduction valve shall be provided a safety valve that opens between 0.15 N/mm2 and 0.17 N/mm2. The output pipe leading to the open air.

(3) 4 Low-pressure side for oxygen to be connected to the high pressure side through a reduction valve, which reduces the oxygen pressure to a maximum of 1.5 N/mm

2

. Immediately after the reduction valve shall be provided a safety valve to prevent that pressure exceeds 2.25 N/mm2. The output pipe from the safety valve must lead to the open air.

(3) 5.

Low-pressure wires should be routed clear of crew and passenger accommodation spaces, and they must be available for inspection. In addition, the pipelines must be carried out without the non-ventilated spaces and create.

(3) 6

The pipelines must be decommissioned with necessary expansion opportunities and in such a way that they cannot easily be exposed to mechanical overload.



(3) 7.

The number of pipe joints must be as low as possible. Collections shall preferably be made by welding or brazing. Silver soldering may not be used in connection with drain and pipelines for acetylene.

(3) 8.

Where pipelines pass through non-watertight bulkheads and decks, should the wires be protected by protection tubes made by hard plastic fiber or similar. By through-wiring in watertight bulkheads and decks must be waterproof stuffing box mounted.

(3). 9 gasket materials shall be suitable for, respectively, acetylene (aluminium or fibre) and oxygen (copper, aluminium or fibre).



(3) 10.

The seamless steel tubes, which are referred to in this rule shall be tested in accordance with DS/EN 10246.



(4) Udtagsposter



(4) 1

Udtagsposter should normally only be located in the engine-room and/or work spaces.



(4) 2

At each udtagspost there shall be a solidly placed divorced, one of which, among other things. must indicate that the udtagsventiler and the shut-off valves in beholderrum/container deposit must be closed when the welding plant is not in use.



Rule 5 Control before Assembly



(1)

In addition to those referred to in rule 4, paragraphs 1 and 2, referred to press specimens should be performed before installation commences the following on board: Pipelines, joints and fittings, etc. for oxygen must be carefully cleaned of oils and fats. For cleaning can be used triklorethylen or similar cleaning agent – gasoline shall not be used. After cleaning pipes, joints and fittings, etc., are washed with a 10% trisodium phosphate solution in order to remove the cleaning fluid residues, after which the pipes should be blown through with nitrogen.

(2) Written confirmation that the checks referred to in paragraph 1 are carried out, shall be available on board and could be presented on request.



Rule 6 Through blasting and tightness check after mounting



(1) to the passing of pipelines for acetylene, nitrogen must be used while for pipelines for oxygen to be used either nitrogen or non-fat, purified compressed air. The container with the blasting media must be connected to the low-pressure side. Regulators, pressure gauges, etc. must be Kickback fuses and disassembled during the blæsningen, which must continue until the pipes are blown clean.

(1) 1 By passing of pipelines for acetylene, the pressure gradually increases to ca. 0.8 N/mm

2

.



(1) 2

During the passing of pipelines for oxygen, the pressure is gradually increased to approx. 1.5 N/mm

2

.



(2)

Density test with pipelines for acetylene shall be carried out with nitrogen.



During the test, the valves and joints etc. brushed with soapy water and check for any leaks.



(2) 1 High-pressure side must density tested with 6 N/mm

2

and low-pressure side with 0.8-1 N/mm

2

.



(2) 2 After 8 hours on low pressure side pressure drop must not exceed 0.04 N/mm

2

.



(3) Leak test with pipelines for oxygen to be carried out with either nitrogen or non-fat, purified air, and the wires must be swabbed and checked.



(3) 1

High-pressure side must density tested with 20 N/mm

2

and low-pressure side with 2.25 N/mm

2

.



(4) Written confirmation that the under 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3 checks referred to is carried out, must be delivered to the Danish maritime authority in connection with the vision of a new plant.



Rule 7 the authority



(1)

The classification society concerned or the ship's chief engineer is authorized to carry out inspections under regulation 5 and 6 and to issue the necessary written documentation.



Rule 8 portable equipment for welding with acetylene and oxygen



(1)

Burners must be of ligetrykstypen, and there must be mounted Kickback protection for acetylene.



(2)

The provisions of rule 1, paragraphs 1, 2 and 5, and rule 2, paragraph 3, must be fulfilled.



Subparagraph (C) the Installation and use of machinery and equipment for arc welding and similar processes



Introduction



The provisions of this section are in accordance with the equipment the provisions of the international standard IEC/TS 62081 (1999): ' Arc welding equipment-Installation and use '.

Rule 1 Application



(1) These regulations apply to the installation and use of welding power sources, machinery and ancillary equipment for arc welding and similar processes in ships in which the most common are:



-Manual electrode welding (MMA),



-Tungsten electrode with inert shielding gas (TIG),



-metal electrode with inert shielding gas (ME),



-metal electrode with active shielding gas (MAG),



but which also includes:



-Powder welding,



-plasma welding,



-plasma cutting,



-lysbueskæring,



-flame spraying,



-plasma spraying,



-m. fl.



Regulation 2 Definitions



(1)

» Welding circuit means a circuit that includes all conductive material, including the arc, as it is intended that the welding power must scroll through.

(2)

» Foreign leading part ': Senior part, not included in the electrical installation, which may introduce a certain potential, usually Earth potential (the ship is under ordinary circumstances an alien leading part).

(3)

» Work item ' means one or more metal pieces, which have performed welding and similar processes.

(4)

» Personal protective equipment ' shall mean Protective Apparel and accessories (URf.eks. gloves, hand displays, face masks, protective glass), used to reduce the risk of electric shock, to protect against welding fumes and weld spatter and to protect skin and eyes from radiation and heat.

(5)

» Surroundings with increased risk of electric shock ': Environment, where the risk of electric shock by welding is increased compared to welding under normal conditions, as URf.eks. where freedom of movement is restricted, in areas wholly or partially limited by leading parts in wet, humid and warm environment.

(6)

' Qualified person ': a welding operator, which can assess the work entrusted to him or her, and who can predict possible risks on the basis of his professional training, see. the requirement in rule 4.6, his knowledge and experience and his knowledge of the relevant equipment.

Rule 3 Installation (1) General provisions



(1) 1

Welding power sources, equipment, wires and accessories used in installations for electric arc welding, must be CE-marked in accordance with Council Directive 73/23/EEC of 19. February 1973 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, ' low-voltage directive ', with subsequent amendments, see. Executive Order No. 797 of 30. August 1994 concerning the entry into force of the said directives.



(1) 2

During installation, regard shall be had to the requirements for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).



(1) 3

All technical information about welding equipment is to be followed, including the manufacturer's instructions.



(1) 4 if necessary, specific advice be obtained from the manufacturer of welding equipment.



(2) selection of the supply cord and overload protection



(2) 1

Supply wires for welding power sources and their overload protection must be chosen on the basis of information given by the manufacturer of welding equipment.



(2) 2

Supply wires must be positioned or protected so that they cannot be damaged during use. In order to reduce the risk of electric shock in connection with the possibility of damaged cables may be used an RCD with a rated current not exceeding 30 mA triggering.

(3) Supply separates



If the welding equipment is not even equipped with a universal separates, the installing welding equipment, ensure that such separates are mounted at the supply point.



(4) emergency stop



Emergency stop equipment must comply with paragraph 1.1.



(5) Protection against electric shock from the supply attributable to



Equipment must be carried out in accordance with paragraph 1.1.



(6) separation from the supply



The welding circuit and circles, which are electrically connected with the welding circuit must be electrically separated from the supply. This must be verified by arbejdslederen.

(7) the welding voltage



(7) 1

In cases where more than one welding power source is in use at the same time, their idle voltages add together and result in increased risk of electric shock. Welding power sources must be installed in such a way that this risk is reduced to a minimum. Instructions are given in the corresponding annex of voltages and connections.

(7). 2.
Where there is more than one installed welding power source, the individual welding power sources with their separate control equipment and connections be clearly marked to show which parts belong to each welding circuit.



(8) the placing of gas receptacles



Measures must be taken to prevent the containers with shielding gas around the work piece will be a part of the welding circuit.



Rule 4 Welding equipment application



(1) General provisions



(1) 1

Welding equipment and accessories must be CE-marked in accordance with the provisions of rule 3, point 1.1. Before welding equipment put into service, the operator must pay attention to the instructions specified by the manufacturer, and in all other relevant provisions.

(1) 2

Account should be taken of the environment in the welding equipment is used in, as it may be necessary to take special measures.



(2) Connection between multiple welding power sources



(2) 1

If several welding circuits shall be connected in parallel or in series, this must be performed by a qualified person in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the labour leader's verification. The equipment must only be used after a conducted testing, which ensures that the maximum open circuit voltage cannot be exceeded. Furthermore, reference is made to relevant supporting documents about tensions and relations.

(2) 2 When a welding power source connected in parallel or in series, taken out of service, this power source must be disconnected from the supply and welding circuit to rule out any danger that could be caused by reversed tension.



(3) inspection and maintenance of welding installation



(3) 1

Upon installation and thereafter at regular intervals should arbejdslederen check



(3) 1.1

the welding equipment is selected correctly and connected correctly in relation to the work to be performed and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,



(3) .1.2

that all connections are clean and belted, and



(3) 1.3 to weld the stock is in a good condition.



(3) 2

In addition, it must be checked that all protective earthing connections are efficient. All found errors must be rectified. Special attention should be paid to the installation of supply and welding cables, electrode holders and connectivity equipment. The operator should be instructed to check all external connections, every time that happens. Must be reported on any found defective and faulty equipment may not be used. Welding return clamp (ground terminal) must be directly connected to the workpiece as close as possible to the welding spot or for welding bench, in which the work piece is placed, or for handling equipment.

(3) 3 for plasma cutting, where tensions are higher than idle by welding, special care must be exercised when performing inspection and maintenance procedures. Special attention should be paid to water cooling equipment in order to ensure that leaks do not affect the isolation.

(3) 4 Before performing arc welding on the stock, which has associated transformers, such transformers must be disengaged to avoid the risk of shock from induced voltages on transformer attributable to primary page.



(4) switching off the welding power sources and/or welding circles



(4) 1

When operators interrupts their work or leaving the work place, the power supply is interrupted.



(4) 2

There is a risk that the supply cord can be damaged when the welding power source is moved, the welding power source including the feed line disconnect supply before the move.



(4) 3

When performing maintenance work or repair on welding equipment, inlet and outlet since be disconnected.



(5) Enclosures



Guards and detachable parts must be in place before welding equipment will be put under tension.



(6) the Operator training and instructional and accountability



Welding, the operator must at least have reviewed and passed the training module containing requirements concerning welding skill of marine Assistant training, similar other training or have several years of practical experience in the relevant welding technique. Welding operator any help should be directed to the extent necessary, both professionally and security whether the welding task. Other persons working in the vicinity of the welding operation, cautioned against risks and be informed about health products in relation to lysbueprocesser.

Annex

Voltages and connections 1 Tension between electrode holders or burners (more welding power sources)



1.1

When working with multiple welding power sources on a single work item or work items that are in themselves conductive connection can cause a dangerous amount of idling the tension between two electrode holders or burners. This voltage can be twice the maximum open circuit voltage (see also rule 3.7).

1.2

Arbejdslederen must ensure that used a measuring equipment to determine whether there is a risk.



1.3

Operators shall



1.3.1

cautioned against this risk,



1.3.2

never touch the two electrode holders or burners at the same time,



1.3.3 work out of range of each other, if that is possible.



1.3.4 The following examples shows a diagram of the influence that the connection to the supply and polarity in welding can have on the sum of the welding tension between electrode holders and burners. It is assumed that the idle voltage is the same for every welding power source, but in practice they can be different (see following points 5-7).

1.3.5

Direct current



1.3.5.1

Relations to supply has no effect on the sum of open circuit voltages. The voltage U depends on the polarity of the outgoing connections (see fig. A).







 







Fig. A – example of voltage between electrode holders or smooth burners













1.3.5.6

Single phase welding power sources, AC power



1.3.5.6.1

Links for supply and the outgoing links affect the sum U idling tensions (see fig. B).







 







Fig. B – example of AC voltage between electrode holders or burners – Single-phase supply from the same two stages in a three phase supply













1.3.5.6.2 If the connections to a three phase supply connected different pair of phases, the sum U idling tensions always be greater than zero (see fig. C) fig. C – example of AC voltage between electrode holders or burners – Single-phase supply from different stages in a three phase supply













1.3.5.6.3

Increased currency tensions can be avoided by changing the



1.3.5.6.3.1

relations of welding wires, or



1.3.5.6.3.2

relations of supply to the welding power source (see rule 4.2).



1.3.5.7

Three-phase welding transformer for multiple operators



1.3.5.7.1

Relations to supply has no effect on the sum U idling tensions (see fig. D).







 







Fig. D – example of AC voltage between electrode holders connected between various departures













(2)

Connection between the welding power source and work item



(2) 1

When welding the flow not only runs in the welding circuit, seems part of the welding flow as harmonic vibration (stray currents). They can cause injury and must be eliminated with the following products: (2) 1.1

The electrical connection between the welding power source and work piece must be carried out as direct as is practicable by the use of an insulated welding return line (ground connection) with an appropriate power value.



(2) 1.2

Foreign conductive parts such as metal Rails, pipe and frame should not be used as a part of the welding return circuit, unless they form part of the work piece itself.



(2). 1.3

Clamp for welding return flow must be placed as near the welding spot as practicable.



(2). 1.4

Welding circuit must not land is connected (see section 3).



(2) 1.5

Connection of welding return cable to the work piece must be ensured by the use of equipment that has appropriate means of wiring, a fastening system that can not go loose by accident, and a good electrical connection. Magnetic devices provide only good electrical connection if the contact surfaces of the magnetic device and contact surface of the work piece is sufficiently large, flat, well lead and clean (URf.eks. free of rust and primer), and if the contact surface of the work piece is magnetic.

(2.) 1.6

Connection equipment for moving flexible welding wires in the welding circuit must:



(2). 1.6.1

have an appropriate continuous clothing of insulating material to prevent accidental contact with live parts when they are connected (with the exception of return clamp on the work piece),



(2). 1.6.2

be suitable for the used wiring dimensions and welding power



(2). 1.6.3

be effectively connected to the welding wires and have good electrical contact with these.



(2) 2
Both welding wire and connection equipment must be used within their specified rated current. There must not be connected to the wires in connecting devices, which have smaller diameter than indicated by the manufacturer of the connectivity equipment.

(2) 3

If using connectors (cable connectors), they must be in accordance with rule 3, paragraph 1.1.



(3) the earthing of work piece (Former rule 3.9)



(3) 1

Welding circuit must not land connects, as it can increase the risk of harmonic oscillations (stray currents) (see point 2). Earthing of the welding circuit may also increase the area of metal through which a person in contact with the welding circuit, URf.eks. welding electrode, can be exposed to shock.

(3) 2

An assessment of the welding circuit and welding area must ensure that welding the flow will not run through a connection that is intended for earthing of the ground materiel or other grounded objects, but which are not intended for or is able to carry the welding current.



(3) 3

When using electric tools, which may come into contact with the work piece, it must be of



IE. with double or reinforced isolation without protective earth connection.



(3) 4, measures must be taken to isolate the operator from the ground as well as from the work piece.



(4) Welding in environments with increased risk of electric shock



(4) 1

When welding is carried out in an environment with increased risk of electric shock, this should only be allowed operators to weld, when other people, who have been instructed in and is able to provide assistance in an emergency, are in the immediate vicinity. Means shall be provided for quick electrical disconnection of the welding power source or the welding circuit, as these persons must have easy access to.

(4) 2 to be taken the following precautions to reduce the risk of electric shock from the tension between the electrode and the welding ground.



(4) 2.1

Welding power source must be outside of the operator's normal range during welding. Additional protection against shock, caused by power supply in case of error, from can be achieved by using an RCD that trigger by a fault current not exceeding 30 mA, and which gives birth to all equipment in the vicinity, which is connected to the supply.

(4). 2.2 Remote control systems to be covered by the ' protection at extra low voltage ' (self).



(4). 2.3

Only welding power sources and welding equipment intended for use in environments with increased risk of electric shock must be used. Where appropriate, use voltage suppressant equipment. This must be verified by arbejdslederen, unless the welding power source is tagged with: (4) 2.4

Electrode holders must be of type A or B.



(4). 2.5 Insulating platforms or mats must be used wherever possible.



Chapter VII



CHAPTER VII-SAVING APPLIANCES and ARRANGEMENTS section A









General provisions









Rule 1





The scope of the







Regel 2





Definitioner







Rule 3





Evaluation, testing and approval of life-saving appliances and arrangements







Rule 4





Production samples









Subparagraph (B)









Number and type of









Rule 5





The number and types of survival craft and man-overboard-both







Rule 6 Availability and stowage of rescue boats and man-overboard-both







Rule 7





Embarkation in rescue vessels







Rule 8





Life jackets







Regel 9





Redningsdragter







Regel 10





Redningskranse







Rule 11





Line toss sets







Regel 12





Nødsignaler







Rule 13





Radio Life-Saving Appliances GMDSS







Rule 14





Vessel's Radar Transponder (SART)







Rule 15





Retro-reflective material on the life-saving appliances







Rule 16





Readiness, maintenance and inspections









Subparagraph (C)









Requirements for life-saving appliances









Rule 17





General requirements for lifeboats







Rule 18





Self-aligning, partially enclosed lifeboats







Rule 19





Totally enclosed lifeboats







Rule 20





General requirements for life-rafts







Rule 21





Inflatable rafts







Rule 22





Solid rafts







Rule 23





Man-overboard-both







Rule 24





Life jackets







Rule 25





Immersion suits







Rule 26





Thermal protective AIDS







Rule 27





Lifebuoys







Rule 28





Line toss sets







Rule 29





Parachute signals







Rule 30





Hand torches







Rule 31





Smoke signals, which can float on water







Rule 32





Launching and embarkation appliances











Section A-general provisions

Rule 1 scope (1) this chapter shall apply to new vessels with a length of 15 m or more, unless otherwise noted.
(2) Rule 13 and 14 also applies to existing ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over, provided that the Administration may defer the application of the requirements of these regulations until 1. February 1999.

Regulation 2 Definitions (1) ' deliberate release by self ejaculation ' is the method of release of lifeboat and life-raft, whereby these automatically triggered from a sinking ship and is ready for use.

(2) ' deliberate release by freefall ' is the method of release of a lifeboat, whereby the boat with its full complement of persons and equipment on board fires and could fall into the Lake without any means to resist.

(3)» inflatable rescue remedy ' is a rescue remedy, if the buoyancy provided by using non-fixed, air-filled spaces, and which usually kept uoppustet, until needed.

(4) ' Fat ' is a rescue remedy rescue remedy, if the buoyancy provided by using non-fixed, air-filled spaces, and which normally are kept inflated and ready to use always.

(5)» launching appliance or arrangement is a means whereby a lifeboat and Navy or a man-overboard-boat safely transferred from its stowed position to the water.

(6) ' whole new type of rescue remedy or-event ' is a rescue remedy or arrangement, which incorporates new features which are not fully covered by the provisions of this chapter, but which provide an equivalent or higher standard of security.

(7) ' Man-overboard-boat is a boat designed to rescue persons in distress and to assist the lifeboat and life-raft.

(8) ' Retrorefleksivt material "is a material that reflects in the opposite direction of a beam of light directed against it.

(9) ' Rescue vessel ' (survival craft) is a lifeboat or raft that can keep the distressed people alive from the time of abandonment.

Rule 3 Evaluation, testing and approval of life-saving appliances and arrangements (1) With the exception of the provisions of paragraphs (5) and (6) to life-saving appliances and arrangements provided for in this chapter shall be approved by the administration.

(2) Before the Administration accepts the life-saving appliances and arrangements, it must ensure that such life-saving appliances and arrangements when tested are found to comply with the requirements of this chapter in accordance with the requirements of Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine equipment, which includes the IMO Recommendations on Testing of Life-Saving Appliances.

(3) Before the Administration approve all new types of life-saving appliances or arrangements, shall ensure that such funds or arrangements: (3) (a) provides safety standards at least equivalent to the requirements of this chapter and LSA Code, and that they have been evaluated and tested in accordance with the Organization's rekommandationer1), or (3) (b) with good results to the satisfaction of the Administration has reviewed the evaluation and tests, which generally correspond to these recommendations.

(4) The authorisation procedures adopted by the Administration, must also include the conditions under which approval should continue or be revoked.

(5) Before the Administration accepts the life-saving appliances and arrangements that were not previously approved by this, it must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Administration that the rescue funds and arrangements meet the requirements of this chapter and the code.

(6) life-saving appliances prescribed in this chapter, for which there are no detailed specifications contained in part C, shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration, taking into account the detailed requirements for such devices, which are detailed in chapter III of SOLAS 1974, as amended in the IMO International Life-Saving Appliance Code.

Rule 4 Production samples

The Administration must provide for the life-saving appliances shall be subjected to such production tests, which are necessary to ensure that emergency funds are produced to the same standard as the approved prototype.

Section B number and type

Rule 5 the number and types of survival craft and man-overboard-both (1) All ships shall be provided with at least two rescue vessels.

(2) the number, capacity and type of rescue craft and man-overboard-boat in ships with a length of 75 m in length and above shall comply with the following: (2) (a) survival craft shall be provided with sufficient total capacity on each side of the ship to capture at least the total number of persons on board. If the ship complies with the requirements of subdivision, lækstabilitetskriterierne and criteria for increased constructive fire protection in addition to those listed in regulation III/14 and chapter V, and the Administration believes that a reduction in the number of survival craft and their capacity will not affect security, can the Administration allow this reduction provided that the total capacity of the rescue vessels placed on each side of the ship is sufficient to cover at least 50% of the people on board. In addition to the life-rafts shall be provided at least 50% of the total number of persons on board; and (2) (b) there shall be a man-overboard-boat, unless the ship is provided with a lifeboat, which comply with the provisions for a man-overboard-boat, and who is able to be taken aboard after a rescue operation.

(3) Ships with a length of 45 m or more but less than 75 metres shall conform to the following: (3) (a) survival craft shall be provided with sufficient capacity on each page to incorporate at least the total number of persons on board; and (3) (b) there shall be a man-overboard-boat, unless the ship is provided with an appropriate rescue vessel that is able to be taken on board after a rescue operation.

(3a) ships of 24 metres in length and above but less than 45 metres must be equipped with the following: (3a) (a) survival craft of such aggregate capacity that they can absorb 200% of all occupants. To be from each side of the ship could be exposed enough of these vessels to ensure that they can record all occupants.

(3a) (b) a man-overboard-boat, except where the Administration is satisfied that such is not required in view of the ship's size and manoeuvrability, the availability of search and rescue facilities and meteorological warning systems in the vicinity and that the ship's speed is limited to areas where there are rarely seems to hard weather, and specific seasons.

(3b)

Ships with a length of 17 metres or more, but less than 24 metres must be equipped with rescue vessels of such an overall capacity to accommodate 200 per cent of all occupants. To be from each side of the ship could be exposed enough of these vessels to ensure that they can record all occupants.

(3 c)

Ships with a length of 15 m or more but less than 17 metres must be equipped with rescue boats, which can record all on board. The number of persons on board is less than 12, the total capacity, notwithstanding the provision of paragraph (1), is made up of a single rescue vessel with sufficient capacity. Rescue vessel shall, as far as possible, be affixed so that it can be immediately transferred to release from any of the vessel's sides.

(4) in place in order to meet the requirements of paragraph 2 (a)), paragraph 3, subparagraph (a)), and paragraph 3a) (a), may cause one or more lifeboats ships exposed by free-fall over the ship's aft of such aggregate capacity that all occupants can be recorded, and with liferafts of sufficient capacity to record the total number of persons on board.

(5) the number of lifeboats and man-overboard boats, which carried on the ship, must be sufficient to ensure that no more than nine liferafts need to be assisted by each lifeboat or man-overboard-boat, when abandonment of the total number of persons on board.

(6) the rescue craft and man-overboard boats shall comply with the provisions of rules 17 to 23.

Rule 6 Availability and stowage of rescue boats and man-overboard-both (1) Rescue vessels must: (1) (a) (i) be ready for use in an emergency;

(1) (a) (ii) be able to be exposed safely and quickly under the conditions that are required in rule 32 (1) (a); and (1) (a) (iii) be able to quickly could be brought on board if they also must meet the requirements for a man-overboard-boat;

(1) (b) be so arranged that: (1) (b) (i) instructions and record-keeping of persons on the embarkation deck is not hampered;

(1) (b) (ii) rescue vessels fast control not hampered;

(1) (b) (iii) indskibningen can take place quickly and in good order; and (1) (b) (iv) it does not interfere with the application of other rescue vessels.

(2) where the distance from the embarkation deck to the ship's waterline in the lightest seagoing condition exceed 4.5 m, survival craft, except for life-rafts, that are arranged so that they float free if the ship sinks, be of a type that is exposed by david with its full complement of persons or bear a corresponding embarkation arrangement.

(3) the rescue craft and launching the event must be in working order and ready for immediate use before the ship leaves port, and shall at all times be such that when the ship is at sea.

(4) (a) survival craft shall be stowed:

-so that neither the rescue aircraft or equipment into its stowage is in the way of operation of any other survival craft or man-overboard-both at any other launching location;
-so close to the surface of the water, as the safety and the practical opportunities and allows for rescue vessels apart from life-rafts intended for deliberate release by freefall, positioned so that the rescue craft in the embarkation position is not less than 2 m above the waterline when the ship is fully loaded under adverse trimkonditioner of up to 10 ° and measured up to 20 ° either way, up to a maximum to the angle at which the edge of the ship's upper deck comes under water;

-be ready for use in an emergency, so that the crew can make them ready for embarkation or loading in less than 5 minutes;

-fully equipped as required by this chapter.

(b) Every lifeboat shall be attached to a separate set of davits or approved of the release agent.

(c) lifeboats and liferafts shall be located as close as possible to the accommodation and service spaces, contained a suitable place, which ensures safe release, with particular regard to the distance from the ship's screw. Lifeboats to be lowered down the ship's side, must be applied with regard to strong overhanging portions of the hull, so as far as possible to ensure that they can be exposed down the straight part of the ship's side. If located ahead, they must be placed aft of the kollissionsskottet in a protected position, and in such cases, the administration particularly consider the strength of the daviderne.

(d) the method used for restocking and embarkation of man-overboard-boat, to be approved, taking into account the weight of the man-overboard-boat, including its equipment and 50% of the number of persons which it is authorized to cause pursuant to rule 23 (1) (b) and 23 (1) (c), in addition, the design and the size of the man-overboard-boat and the location of its location above the waterline with the ship in the lightest seagoing condition. Any man-overboard-boat which is placed at a height of more than 4.5 metres above the waterline with the ship in the lightest seagoing condition, must, however, be equipped with an approved launching and ombordtagningsarrangement.

(e) launching and embarkation equipment must comply with the requirements of regulation 32.

(f) (i) liferafts shall be placed so that they are ready in an emergency situation in such a way that they float free from their location, inflate and break free from the ship, if it sinks. Davit-launched life-rafts need not, however, float free;

(f) (ii) if used lashings, they must be fitted with an automatic (hydrostatic) trigger system of an approved type.

(g) the Administration may accept concessions from the individual provisions of this rule, if it is satisfied that the ship's structure and fishing method makes it unreasonable or impossible to apply that provision, and assuming that the ship be provided with alternate launching and ombordtagningsmidler, which is suitable for the operation, the ship is intended. An Administration, which thus allows alternate launching and ombordtagningsmidler in accordance with this sub-paragraph, should inform the organization about the details of such an arrangement for the purpose of mass mailing to the parties.

Rule 7 Embarkation in rescue vessels

There must be an appropriate arrangement for the embarkation of rescue vessels. Event must include: (a) at least one ladder, or other approved means at each side of the ship, which provides access to the rescue vessels, when they float on the water, except where the Administration will find that the distance from the boarding point for rescue vessels on the water is in such a way that a ladder is unnecessary;

(b) means to illuminate the space for survival craft and their launching devices while preparing to release and during the actual release and also to illuminate the water in the area, until the release of the release is over, powered from the emergency power source, as required in Regulation IV/17;

(c) arrangement to presage any person on Board that ship are about to exit, and (d) means to prevent any discharge of water into the rescue craft.

Rule 8 life jackets (1) For each person on board must be carried on board a lifejacket of an approved type, complying with the provisions of rule 24.

(2) Rescue persons must be placed in such a way that they are readily available, and their position shall be clearly marked.

Rule 9 immersion suits (1) There shall be provided a rescue suit, complying with the provisions of rule 25, to each person who is appointed to man man-overboard-boat.

(2)

Immersion suits shall be provided complying with the provisions of regulation 25 for every person on board



(3) the requirements of paragraph (2) shall not apply to ships that are constantly engaged in hot climes, where immersion suits after the Administration's view, not necessary.

(4) The immersion suits required in paragraph (2), may be used to satisfy the requirements in paragraph (1).

Rule 10 lifebuoys (1) at least the following number of lifebuoys complying with the requirements of rule 27 (1), shall be on board: (1) (a) eight lifebuoys in vessels with a length of 75 m or more;

(1) (b) six lifebuoys in vessels with a length of 45 m or more but less than 75 m;

(1) (c) four lifebuoys in vessels of 24 metres or more but less than 45 metres;

(

1) (d)

two lifebuoys in vessels with a length of 15 m or more but less than 24 metres.



(2) at least one half of the number of lifebuoys referred to in paragraph (1) shall be equipped with lifebuoys lights, complying with the provisions in rule 27 (2);

(3)

In ships with a length of 24 metres and above must be at least two of the rescue kransene in paragraph (2) be fitted with self actuating smoke signals complying with the requirements of rule 27 (3), and which can be quickly fired from the bridge.

(4) at least one lifebuoy on each side of the ship shall be provided with a rescue line, which can float on the water and comply with the provisions of rule 27 (4), and which in length is not less than the maximum length of two times the height, wherein they are placed above the waterline in the lightest seagoing condition or 30 metres.

(5) All lifebuoys shall be located so that they are immediately accessible to persons on board and shall at all times be able to be quickly loosened and must not be permanently secured in any way.

Rule 11 Line toss sets

Each ship with a length of 24 metres and over shall carry a line down the street apparatus of an approved type complying with the requirements of regulation 28. Driving the charges must be renewed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Rule 12 distress alerts (1) Every ship shall to the satisfaction of the Administration lead resources to effectively deliver distress day and night, including not less than 12 rocket parachute signals complying with the requirements of regulation 29.

(2) distress alerts should be of an approved type. They shall be so located that they are readily available, and their location must be clearly marked.

(3)

Nødsignalerne must be renewed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Rule 13 Radio life-saving appliances GMDSS (1) at least three portable VHF radio installations shall be carried on board in new ships of 24 metres in length and over and to existing vessels of 45 metres in length and over. Such appliances must meet functional standards, which is not lower than the standards adopted by the IMO2). If a portable VHF radio installations are installed in a rescue vessel, it must meet the functional standards, which is not lower than the standards adopted by the IMO2).

(2) For new ships of 24 metres in length and above but less than 45 metres number of portable VHF radio installations can be reduced to two, if, after the Administration's estimates are not required to carry three such apparatus in the light of ship's navigation area, and the number of persons employed on board.

(3) For existing ships of 24 metres in length and above but less than 45 metres can the number of portable VHF radio installations shall be reduced to one.



(4) in ships with a length of less than 24 metres is exempted from the requirement for portable VHF radio installations. The Danish maritime authority recommends these ships also to carry a portable VHF-radio works hung in the wheelhouse ready to bring together with spare battery in the raft in a possibly. emergency.

Rule 14 vessel's radar transponder (SART) (1) at least a SART shall be carried on each side of both new and existing ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over. Such SART'er shall comply with the functional standards, which are not lower than those adopted by Organisationen3).

(2) New and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres must carry at least a SART.

(3) SART'er4) must be stored in such a way that they can quickly be placed in any rescue vessel. As an alternative, a SART shall be placed in each rescue vessel.

(4)

Existing ships with a length of less than 24 metres with a shipping area in sea area A1 is exempted from the requirement of SART. SART'en is recommended, however, also in these ships hung in the wheelhouse ready to bring in the life raft for location determination in a possibly. emergency.

Rule 15 Retro-reflective material on the life-saving appliances

All rescue craft man-overboard boats, life jackets and lifebuoys shall be fitted with retro-reflective material in accordance with your organization's anbefalinger5).

Rule 16 Readiness, maintenance and inspections (1) Preparedness

Before the ship departs from a port and at all times during the voyage all life-saving appliances shall be in working order and ready for immediate use.

(2) Maintenance

(2) (a) there shall be instructions for maintenance of the rescue funds on board, approved by the Administration, and maintenance must be carried out accordingly.
(2) (b) the Administration may instead of those prescribed in paragraph (a) instructions to approve a maintenance program that is compiled for the ship.

(3) Maintenance of runners

The runners used by release of lifeboats, rafts and man-overboard-both, must endevendes with space of no more than 30 months and be renewed, when this is necessary due to deterioration, or at intervals of not more than 5 years, whichever is the earliest.

(4) parts and repair equipment

There shall be provided for spare parts and repair equipment for rescue funds and their components, which are exposed to hard wear or consumption, and where regular replacement is necessary.

(5) Weekly checkups

The following tests and inspections shall be carried out every week: (5) (a) all survival craft, man-overboard-boats and launching appliances must be inspected visually to ensure that they are ready for use;

(5) (b) all engines in lifeboats and man-overboard-both must run forward and reverse into a single space of at least 3 minutes, if the ambient temperature is above the minimum temperature that is needed to be able to start the engine;

(5) (c) the main alarm signal system shall be tested.

(6) Monthly checkups

To be carried out inspections of rescue funds each month, including redningsbåds equipment, making use of a checklist in order to ensure that they are complete and in good order. An inspection report must be introduced in the monitoring book or in the owner's manual in the maintenance of life-saving appliances» '.

(7) servicing of inflatable liferafts, inflatable lifejackets, marine evacuation systems and man-overboard-inflated boats (7) (a) All inflatable liferafts, inflatable lifejackets and evacuation chute systems must be inspected: (7) (a) (i) at intervals of not more than 12 months, provided that where that is not practicable, the Administration may extend this period for 17 months;

(7) (a) (ii) at an approved service station, there is jurisdiction to inspect them, as they have for the inspection necessary facilities, and that only properly trained using personale6).

(8) periodic inspection of hydrostatic trigger apparatus (8) (a) one-time hydrostatic trigger apparatus must be replaced when the date of their validity is crossed. Other hydrostatic trigger apparatus must be inspected: (8) (a) (i) at intervals of not more than 12 months. However, the Administration may extend this period for 17 months, if in some cases it is impractical;

(8) (a) (ii) at a service station, which is competent to inspect them, as they have for the inspection necessary facilities, and that only use appropriately trained personnel.

(9) in the case of ships where the nature of the fisheries sector can make it difficult to comply with the requirements of (7) and (8), the Administration may allow an extension of the service intervals for 24 months, provided that the Administration considers that such equipment is constructed and arranged in such a way that it will remain in a satisfactory condition until the next periodic servicing.

Subparagraph (C) requirements for life-saving appliances

Rule 17 General requirements for lifeboats (1) Rescue boats ' design (1) (a) All lifeboats shall be well designed and have such form and such dimensions that they have adequate stability in the Seaway and sufficient freeboard, with their full complement of persons and equipment. All lifeboats shall have solid hull and must be able to maintain positive stability when they are in upright position in calm water and is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment and with leakage at any location below the waterline, without the loss of buoyancy material or suffer other damage.

(1) (b) All lifeboats and rescue boats shall be of sufficient strength to safely lowered down on the water with their full complement of persons and equipment.

(1) (c) Hull and fixed shelters must be fire-retardant or non-combustible.

(1) (d) the seating shall be provided on thwarts, benches or fixed chairs fitted as low as possible in the lifeboat and is designed in such a way that they can wear the number of persons, each with a weight of 100 kg, for which there is space in accordance with paragraph (2) (b) (ii).

(1) (e) Every lifeboat shall be of sufficient strength to withstand a load without permanent change, when the load is removed: (1) (e) (i) when it comes to boats with metal hulls, a load of 1.25 times the total weight of the lifeboat with its full complement of persons and equipment; or (1) (e) (ii) in the case of the other boats, a load of two times the total weight of the lifeboat with its full complement of persons and equipment.

(1) (f) Each lifeboat shall be of sufficient strength to, when it is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment and, as appropriate, with skid-mounted or fenders that could resist a lateral blow to the ship's side with a speed of at least 3.5 m/s and a drop into the water from a height of at least 3 metres.

(1) (g) the vertical distance from the surface of the dørkens to the inner side of stuffy or flysheet over 50% of the floor area must be: (1) (g) (i) at least 1.3 metres for a lifeboat approved to admit nine persons or less;

(1) (g) (ii) at least 1.7 metres for a lifeboat approved to record 24 persons or more;

(1) (g) (iii) not less than the distance that can be obtained by linear interpolation between 1.3 m and 1.7 metres, for a lifeboat approved to record from nine to 24 persons.

(2) the rescue boats ' carrying capacity (2) (a) No lifeboat shall be authorized to record more than 150 people.

(2) (b) the number of persons which a lifeboat to be authorised to record, must be equal to the lesser of the following numbers: (2) (b) (i) the number of persons with an average weight of 75 kg and all wearing lifejackets, that can get seating in a normal position without disturbing the propulsion means or the operation of some of the rescue boat's equipment; or (2) (b) (ii) the number of seats that can be obtained on the seating arrangements in accordance with Figure 1. Outlines may overlap, as shown, if any footrests, there is sufficient legroom, and the vertical distance between the upper and lower seat is at least 350 mm.

(2) (c) Each seat in the lifeboat should be clearly marked.



(3) access to lifeboats (3) (a) Every lifeboat shall be so designed that it can be boarded by its full complement of persons in not more than 3 minutes from the time when given instructions to go on board. Rapid disembarkation shall also be possible.

(3) (b) lifeboats shall have a boarding ladder that can be used on both sides of the lifeboat to enable persons in the water tables can rescue the boat. Petitioned's bottom step must be at least 0.4 m below the rescue boat's lightest waterline.

(3) (c) the rescue boat shall be so designed that the helpless persons can be brought on board either from the sea or on stretchers.

(3) (d) All surfaces that will be used to go on, must be non-slip.

(4) Rescue boats buoyancy

All lifeboats shall in itself have sufficient buoyancy or shall be provided with a material that itself has sufficient buoyancy and which is not affected by seawater, oil or harmful oil products, to keep the rescue boat with equipment, when the liquid is water filled and in connection with the Lake. In addition, there shall be material, which in themselves have buoyancy, equivalent to 280 N buoyancy per person for the number of persons the lifeboat is authorized to record.

Buoyancy material, unless it is in addition to the prescribed above, must not be placed outside of the rescue boat's hull.

(5) the rescue boats ' freeboard and stability

All lifeboats shall, when they are loaded with 50% of the number of persons the lifeboat is authorized to record, and those sitting on their normal seats on one side of the centerline, have a freeboard measured from the waterline to the lowest opening through which the lifeboat may be water filled at least 1.5% of the rescue boat's length or 100 millimetres, whichever is the greatest.

(6) the rescue boats ' propulsion (6) (a) Every lifeboat shall be operated by a compression-ignition engine. Must not in any lifeboat used an engine if fuel has a flashpoint of 43 ° c or less (closed cup test).

(6) (b) the engine shall be provided with either a manual starting system, or an energy-driven start system with two independent power sources, which can be recharged. There must also be provided any starting AIDS. The engine starting systems and starting aids shall at an ambient temperature of-15 ° c start the engine within 2 minutes from the time the starting procedure will commence, unless the Administration considers that a different temperature is appropriate, taking into account the special voyages, the ship, resulting in the rescue boats, used. Start systems function should not be impeded by the engine box, thwarts or other obstructions.

(6) (c) the engine must be able to be in operation for at least 5 minutes after the start from cold condition, and the lifeboat is not in the water.

(6) (d) the engine must be able to be in operation when the lifeboat is filled with water up to the krumtapakslens centerline.

(6) (e) propeller shaft must be designed in such a way that the screw can be linked to and from the engine. Rescue boat must be able to run forward and reverse.

(6) (f) Udstødsrøret must be designed in such a way that no water can penetrate into the engine during normal operation.
(6) (g) All lifeboats shall be designed in such a way as to take sufficient account of the safety of persons in the water and to the risk of damage to the propulsion system caused by material that floats on the water.

(6) (h) the rescue boat's speed in calm water with its full complement of persons and equipment and with all engine driven auxiliary equipment in use must be at least 6 knots and at least 2 knots, when the bugserer a 25-person life raft with its full complement of persons and equipment, or equivalent. There must be sufficient fuel, which is suitable for use within the temperature range that can be expected in the area in which the ship is used for at least 24 hours of operation at 6 knots, when the rescue boat is fully loaded.

(6) (i) Rescue boat's engine, transmission and engine accessories shall be enclosed in a fire-resistant box or other suitable arrangement, providing equivalent protection. Such arrangements shall also protect persons against accidentally come into contact with hot or moving parts and must protect the motor against the weather and the sea's influence. Shall be provided adequate resources to reduce engine noise. The noise level in the boat must not hinder the safe use of the boat in distress-and practice situations. This noise level however, never exceed 90 dB (A). Starter batteries must be fitted with boxes, forming a waterproof enclosure around the bottom and sides. The boxes must have a tight-fitting top, which gives the necessary ventilation.

(6) (j) the rescue boat's engine with accessories should be designed in such a way that electromagnetic discharges should be restricted, so that engine operation does not interfere with the use of the radio life-saving appliances used in the lifeboat.

(6) (k) means shall be provided for recharging of all batteries for starting the engine, to the radio installation and to the eye. Batteries for radio installations shall not be used as a source of energy for the engine to start. Means shall be provided for recharging rescue boat's batteries from the ship's energy supply by a supply voltage not exceeding 55 V, and which can be interrupted by rescue boat embarkation point.

(6) (l) instructions that are resistant to water, in the home and the use of the engine shall be provided and shall be affixed in a conspicuous place near the engine starting system.

(7) accessories for rescue boats (7) (a) All lifeboats shall be provided with at least one bilge valve fitted near the lowest point of the hull, and which automatically opens and empties the hull for water when the lifeboat is not in the water, and which automatically closes to prevent the ingress of water when the boat is in the water. Each bilge valve for closing valve must be equipped with a hood or a clot that is attached to the lifeboat with a line, a chain, or other suitable means. Bilge valves shall be easily accessible from the rescue boat's single, and their position shall be clearly marked.

(7) (b) All lifeboats and rescue boats shall be fitted with a rudder and a tiller. There also exists a steering wheel or other remote control mechanism must be able to check the rudder tiller, where management mechanism fails. The rudder shall be permanently attached to the lifeboat. The tiller shall be permanently installed on or linked to the rudder stock; However, tiller, if the lifeboat has a remote control mechanism be removable and securely stowed near the rudder stock. Rudder and tiller shall be so designed that they will not be damaged during use of the trigger mechanism or the propeller.

(7) (c) Except in the vicinity of the rudder and screw to a rescue line, which can float on the water, be attached all around outboard on the lifeboat.

(7) (d) survival craft which are not self-righting by capsizing must have suitable handrails on the underside of the hull, making it possible for people to stick firmly to the rescue boat. Hand lists must be fixed to the rescue boat in such a way that they, if they are exposed to blows of such strength that the lifeboat breaks off, will break off without damaging the lifeboat.

(7) (e) All lifeboats shall be provided with sufficient watertight lockers or compartments for storing small equipment items, water and supplies provided for in paragraph 8. Means shall be provided for the storage of collected rainwater.

(7) (f) Any lifeboat to be exposed by wire or wire runs runners, must be fitted with a trigger mechanism that meets the following requirements: (7) (f) (i) the mechanism shall be so designed that all hooks are triggered simultaneously.

(7) (f) (ii) the mechanism will have two options for triggering, as follows: (7) (f) (ii) (1) a normal trigger by manual activation frees the lifeboat, when lying in the water, or when there is no load on the hooks;

(7) (f) (ii) (2) A load triggers, that frees the lifeboat, when there is a load on the hooks. This trigger must be so designed that it frees the lifeboat under all load conditions from no load when the lifeboat is in the water, to a load at 1.1 times the rescue boat's total weight, when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment. This trigger option must be adequately protected so that it cannot be triggered accidentally or prematurely.

(7) (f) (iii) Trigger controls should be clearly marked with a contrasting colour in relation to its surroundings.

(7) (f) (iv) the mechanism shall be designed with a safety factor of 6 based on the applied material's maximum strength, assuming, to rescue the boat's weight is evenly split between wire runners.

(7) (g) All lifeboats and rescue boats shall be fitted with a release mechanism that allows the front catch line is triggered under load.

(7) (h) All lifeboats and rescue boats that are equipped with a fixed installed, two-way VHF radiotelephone with a separate antenna must be fitted with an arrangement for fitting and effective fastening the antenna, when this is used.

(7) (i) lifeboats intended for restocking along the ship's side must have skid-mounted and fenders to the extent necessary to facilitate launching and prevent damage to the lifeboat.

(7) (j) on top of the above coverage or stuffy there shall be a manually operated lamp, a dark night with a clear air can be seen at a distance of at least 2 nautical miles over a period of at least 12 hours. Is the lamp a flashing light, to it to begin with blinking at a rate of not less than 50 flashes per minute in the first two hours of a usage time of 12 hours.

(7) (k) on the inside of the lifeboat shall be provided with a lamp or a light source that can give light for at least 12 hours in such a way that it is possible to read the survival-and equipment manual; oil lamps can not be approved for this purpose.

(7) (l) Unless otherwise expressly specified, shall be provided with efficient bilge lifeboat any devices or be automatically self-draining.

(7) (m) Each lifeboat shall be so designed that there is a distinctive vision forefter, aft and to both sides from the control and steering position for the safe release and maneuvering.

(8) the rescue boats ' equipment

With the exception of boat hooks, which should be ready for use, all rescue boat equipment objects, whether they are prescribed pursuant to this section or elsewhere in this chapter, be secured inside the lifeboat using lashings, storage in lockers or compartments, storage in brackets or similar mounting arrangements, or other suitable ways. Equipment must be secured in such a way that it does not impede any procedures in connection with the ship leaving. All rescue boat equipment items should be as small and as light as possible and shall be packed in suitable and compact form. Unless otherwise specified, each rescue boat normal equipment consist of: (8) (i) an adequate number of veins which must be able to float on the water, to move the rescue boat in calm water in the future. There shall be åretolde, åregafler or similar events for each oar on board. Åretolde or åregafler must be attached to both by using lines or chains;

(8) (ii) two boat hooks;

(8) (iii) a øsekar, which must be able to float on water, and two pøse;

(8) (iv) a overlevelseshåndbog7);

(8) (v) a binnacle containing a useful compass which is luminous or provided with suitable means of illumination. In a totally enclosed lifeboat shall nathuset be permanently mounted at the steering position; in any other lifeboat shall be fitted with suitable mounting arrangements;

(8) (vi) a drift anchor of sufficient size, fitted with an elastic rope and a indhaler line, which gives firm grip in wet condition. Drift anchor, rope and indhaler line shall be of sufficient strength under all conditions on the sea;

(8) (vii) two usable fang liner of a length equal to at least twice the distance from the rescue boat's stowed position to the waterline when the ship is in its lightest seagoing condition or 15 metres, whichever is longer. The one catch the line that is attached to it in rule (7) (g) prescribed triggering device must be placed forefter in the lifeboat, and the other must be securely fastened at or near the rescue boat's bow ready to use;

(8) (viii) two kapøkser, one at each end of the lifeboat;

(8) (ix) watertight receptacles containing a total of 3 litres of fresh water for each person, as the lifeboat is authorized to record, including 1 liter per person may be replaced by a afsaltningsapparat that can produce an equivalent amount of fresh water in 2 days;
(8) (x) a stainless goal with line;

(8) (xi) a stainless, by drinking cup;

(8) (xii) a food ration, which in total contains at least 10000 kilojoules for each person the lifeboat is authorized to print; these rations shall be kept in airtight packaging and be placed in a waterproof container;

(8) (xiii) four parachute signals, which satisfies the requirements laid down in rule 29;

(8) (xiv) six hand flares, complying with the requirements of rule 30;

(8) (xv) two smoke signals, which can float on the water, and which satisfy the requirements set out in rule 31;

(8) (xvi) a waterproof electric torch suitable for morse signalling, as well as a set of spare elements and a spare bulb in a waterproof container;

(8) (xvii) a signal mirror to use per day with instructions on use for signalling to ships and aircraft;

(8) (xviii) a copy of the rule V/16 prescribed rescue signals on a waterproof card or in a waterproof container;

(8) (xix) a whistle or equivalent sound signal;

(8) (xx) a first aid kit in a watertight box, which can be closed tightly after use;

(8) (xxi) six doses anti seasickness medication and one seasickness bag for each person;

(8) (xxii) a folding knife attached to the boat with a line;

(8) (xxiii) three Tin openers;

(8) (xxiv) two rescue throw rings that can float on the water, attached to not less than 30 m of line that can float on the water;

(8) (xxv) a manual pump;

(8) (xxvi) a set of fishing gear;

(8) (xxvii) sufficient tools to make minor adjustments to the engine and its accessories;

(8) (xxviii) portable fire extinguishers suitable for extinguishing oil fires, (8) (xxix) a spotlight, which at night can effectively inform a brightly coloured object by a width of 18 metres at a distance of 180 m in a total of 6 hours, and that can be used continuously for at least 3 hours;

(8) (xxx) an efficient radar reflector, unless there is placed an approved vessel's radar transponder in the rescue fleet;

(8) (xxxi) thermal protection products, which comply with the provisions of rule 34 and is sufficient for 10% of the number of persons the lifeboat is authorized to record or two, whichever is greatest;

(8) (xxxii) regarding ships in speed of such a nature and duration, that the Administration estimates that as indicated in paragraph (xii) and (xxvi) stated objects are unnecessary, the Administration may allow exemption from here.

(9) the labelling of lifeboats (9) (a) Rescue boat shall be marked dimensions as well as the number of persons, it is authorized to record, with clear indelible characters.

(9) (b) the rescue boat shall be marked name and registered office of the ship to which it belongs, on each side of the bow with large block letters in the Latin alphabet.

(9) (c) means for identification of the ship to which the lifeboat belongs, and the rescue boat's number shall be marked in such a way that it is visible from above.

Rule 18 self-righting, partially enclosed lifeboats (1) self-aligning, partially enclosed lifeboats shall meet the requirements of rule 17 and must in addition comply with the provisions of this rule.

(2) Enclosure (2) (a) there shall be permanently fixed, permanent shelters, which extends over at least 20% of the rescue boat's length from bow and at least 20% of the rescue boat's length from the rescue boat's aft portion.

(2) (b) the permanent shelters will provide two shelter. Have havens bulkheads, they shall have openings of sufficient size to provide easy access for persons wearing rescue suit or warm clothing and a lifejacket. Lyenes interior height must be sufficient to give people access to seating positions of the rescue boat's prow and stern.

(2) (c) the permanent shelters must be designed with Windows or translucent panels which allows sufficient daylight drop into the lifeboat, when openings or over the sails are closed, so that artificial light is unnecessary.

(2) (d) the permanent shelters must have handrails, that provides a secure grip for persons moving outside of the lifeboat.

(2) (e) Open parts of the lifeboat shall be fitted with a permanently attached foldable of sails that are designed in such a way that: (2) (e) (i) it can easily be raised by only two people at a maximum of 2 minutes;

(2) (e) (ii) it is insulated to protect the occupants against cold by means of at least two layers of material separated by an air space or other similarly effective means.

(2) (f) The enclosure formed by the fixed shelters and the dodger, must be designed in such a way that: (2) (f) (i) launching and ombordtagningsoperationer can take place without any occupants must leave the stuffy;

(2) (f) (ii) it has entrances at both ends and on each page, which is provided with efficient adjustable closing arrangements which easily and quickly can be opened from inside and outside so that ventilation is possible without the intrusion of sea water, wind and cold; means shall be provided to keep these close events either in the open or closed position;

(2) (f) (iii) when the sail is raised, and all entrances closed, there are at all times adequate air supply for occupants;

(2) (f) (iv) it has means of rainwater harvesting;

(2) (f) (v) the outer side of the fixed shelters and the Dodger and the inner surface of the portion of the lifeboat, which is covered by the dodger, is of a strong visible color. Lyenes interior color must be such that it does not cause the occupants discomfort;

(2) (f) (vi) it is possible to calm the lifeboat.

(3) Capsizing and restoration (3) (a) There shall be provided at each indicated seating position and a seat belt. The safety belt shall be so designed that it can keep a person at 100 kilograms securely in place when the lifeboat is in a capsized position.

(3) (b) the rescue boat's stability shall be such that it in itself or automatically self-righting with full or partial complement of persons and equipment and with characters attached using safety belts.

(4) propulsion (4) (a) the engine and transmission to be controlled from rorsmandens space.

(4) (b) the engine and engine installation must be able to work in any position during capsize and must continue to work when the lifeboat is back on an even keel, or must stop automatically at kæntringen and be easy to start again when the lifeboat is once again on an even keel, and the lifeboat is emptied of water. Fuel-and lubricating systems must be such that, during capsizing no spillage of fuel takes place and that there is a maximum of 250 ml lubricant oil spilled from the engine.

(4) (c) air-cooled engines must have a piping system that absorbs and emits from the cooling air on rescue boat's outer side. Manually operated dampers shall be provided, through which cooling air can be sucked off and marginalised in the rescue boat's interior.

(5) Construction and fender system (5) (a) Notwithstanding rule 17 (1) (f) should a self-righting, partially enclosed lifeboat have such construction and such a fender system that rescue boat provides its occupants with protection against harmful accelerations resulting from the lifeboat with its full complement of persons and equipment turns against the ship's side with a speed of at least 3.5 m/s.

(5) (b) the rescue boat shall be automatic self-draining.

Rule 19 Totally enclosed lifeboats (1) Totally enclosed lifeboats shall meet the requirements of rule 17, and in addition, they must comply with the provisions of this rule.

(2) Over coverage

Any totally enclosed lifeboat shall be provided with a permanent waterproof covering that completely closes the rescue boat. Of coverage must be so constructed that: (2) (i) it protects the occupants against heat and cold;

(2) (ii) it provides access to the lifeboat using the hatches, closing to make the lifeboat watertight;

(2) (iii) hatches are placed in such a way that the launching and ombordtagningsoperationer can take place without any occupants must leave the stuffy;

(2) (iv) access hatches can be opened and closed from inside and outside and shall be provided with the means to keep them stuck in the open position;

(2) (v) it is possible to calm the lifeboat;

(2) (vi) when the lifeboat is in a capsized position with closed hatches and without leakage of importance, can carry the entire rescue boat's weight, including all equipment, machinery and its full complement of persons;

(2) (vii) it has Windows or translucent panels on both sides, which allows sufficient daylight drop into the lifeboat when the hatches are closed, that the artificial light is unnecessary;

(2) (viii) its outer side has a highly eye-catching color, and its inner side has a color that is not causing the occupants discomfort;

(2) (ix) there are handrails, which provides a secure grip for persons moving outside of the lifeboat, and facilitates the entry and disembarking;

(2) (x) people have access to seating positions from an entry without having to climb over thwarts or other obstructions;

(2) (xi) the occupants are protected against the effects of subatmosfæriske pressure that may arise due to rescue the boat's engine;

(3) Capsizing and restoration (3) (a) There shall be provided at each indicated seating position and a seat belt. The safety belt shall be so designed that it can keep a person at 100 kilograms securely in place when the lifeboat is in a capsized position.

(3) (b) the rescue boat's stability shall be such that it is built-in or automatically self-righting when loaded with full and partial complement of persons and equipment, and all entrances and openings are closed watertight, and the characters are attached using safety belts.
(3) (c) the rescue boat shall be capable of carrying the full load of persons and equipment when the lifeboat is in the in rule 17 (1) (a) referred to in the damaged condition, and its stability shall be such that in the event of capsizing automatically will be located in a position that makes it possible for the occupants to escape through an opening that is above the water.

(3) (d) the engine exhaust pipes, air ducts and other openings must be designed in such a way that no water can penetrate into the engine when the lifeboat capsizes and dishes it up again.

(4) propulsion (4) (a) the engine and transmission to be controlled from rorsmandens space.

(4) (b) the engine and engine installation must be able to work in any position during capsize and must continue to work when the lifeboat is back on an even keel, or automatically stop at kæntringen and must be easy to start again when the lifeboat is once again on an even keel. Fuel-and lubricating systems must be such that, during capsizing no spillage of fuel takes place and that there is a maximum of 250 ml lubricant oil spilled from the engine.

(4) (c) air-cooled engines must have a piping system that absorbs and emits from the cooling air on rescue boat's outer side. Manually operated dampers shall be provided, through which cooling air sucked from and are excluded in the rescue boat's interior.

(5) Construction and fender system

Regardless of rule 17 (1) (f) should a completely enclosed lifeboat have such construction and such a fender system that rescue boat provides its occupants with protection against harmful accelerations resulting from the lifeboat with its full complement of persons and equipment turns against the ship's side with a speed of at least 3.5 m/s.

(6) the lifeboat for free-fall

A lifeboat, which is intended for release by freefall, shall be so designed that it can provide protection against harmful accelerations resulting from the release of its full complement of persons and equipment from at least the maximum height, in which it is intended for fitting over the waterline when the ship is in its lightest seagoing condition under adverse conditions in terms of trim of up to 10 ° and with a list of at least 20 ° to either side.

Rule 20 General requirements for life-rafts (1) Rescue fleets construction (1) (a) Every liferaft shall be so constructed that it can withstand the weather's impact in 30 days in operation at sea under all conditions.

(1) (b) the rescue fleet must be designed in such a way that the rescue fleet and its equipment operates satisfactorily, although the cast into the water from a height of 18 metres. If the rescue fleet must be placed at a height of more than 18 metres above the waterline when the ship is at its minimum draught in the Lake, it must be of a type which, with favourable results, has undergone a drop test from at least this height.

(1) (c) the floating liferaft shall be capable of withstanding repeated jumps down from a height of not less than 4.5 metres above the floor with and without raised over cover.

(1) (d) Rescue fleet and its accessories should be designed in such a way that the rescue fleet can be towed at a speed of 3 knots in calm water with its full complement of persons and equipment and with a drift anchors sat.

(1) (e) the rescue fleet must have a cover to protect the occupants against inclement weather, and which automatically raised when rescue fleet exposed and is located on the water. Above the deck shall comply with the following: (1) (e) (i) It must provide insulation against heat and cold by means of either two layers of material separated by an air space or other equally effective means. There shall be a means to prevent the collected water in air space;

(1) (e) (ii) it must internally have a color that is not causing the occupants discomfort;

(1) (e) (iii) each input must be clearly marked and be provided with efficient adjustable closing arrangements which easily and quickly can be opened from inside and outside so that ventilation is possible without the intrusion of sea water, wind and cold. Life-rafts, which occupies more than eight people, must have at least two diametrically opposite entrances; Life-rafts, which occupies more than 25 persons, must have at least three entries;

(1) (e) (iv) there shall at all times be sufficient air for the occupants, even when the inputs are closed;

(1) (e) (v) it must be fitted with at least one observation opening. Life-rafts, which occupies more than 25 persons, shall be equipped with at least two lookout openings so arranged that the total field of view is as close as possible to the 360 °, (1) (e) (vi) it must be fitted with means of rainwater harvesting;

(1) (e) (vii) there shall in all parts of the covered be sufficient headroom for occupants in a sitting position.

(2) Rescue fleets minimum bæreevne and weight (2) (a) No life raft may be approved, provided it has a carrying capacity of less than six persons calculated in accordance with the requirements of rule 21 (3) or respectively 22 (3).

(2) (b) unless the rescue fleet exposed with an approved launching appliance, which satisfies the requirements laid down in rule 32, and rescue fleet are not required to be portable, the total weight of the rescue fleet, its container and equipment exceed 185 kg.

(3) Accessories to rafts (3) (a) Rescue fleet must have rescue liner securely attached all the way around and inside the outboard fleet.

(3) (b) the rescue fleet must be fitted with an effective catch line of a length equal to at least twice the distance from the stowed position to the waterline when the ship is at its minimum draught in the lake or 15 m, whichever is longer.

(4) davit-launched life-rafts (4) (a) in addition to the above requirements must be a life raft for use with an approved launching appliance: (4) (a) (i) when the rescue fleet is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment, be capable of withstanding a lateral blow to the ship's side with a speed of at least 3.5 m/s and a drop into the water from a height of not less than 3 metres without damage that will affect its function;

(4) (a) (ii) be provided with a means whereby rescue fleet brought into to the ship's side and kept under indskibningen.

(4) (b) Any nedfirbar raft shall be stowed in such a way that it can be boarded by its full complement of persons in not more than 3 minutes from the time when given instructions to tables.

(5) Equipment (5) (a) Each rescue fleet's normal outfit shall consist of: (5) (a) (i) a cast ring that can float on the water, attached to not less than 30 m of line that can float on the water;

(5) (a) (ii) a knife that is not a folding knife, which has a shaft that can float on water and the leash attached to and stored in a pocket on the outside of the deck near the point where fang leash is attached to the rescue fleet. In addition, a life raft, which is approved to record 13 persons or more, be equipped with a second knife, as well can be a folding knife;

(5) (a) (iii) for a raft, which is authorized to accept a maximum of 12 persons, a øsekar who can float on the water. For a life raft, which is approved to record 13 persons or more, two øsekar, which can float on the water;

(5) (a) (iv) two sponges;

(5) (a) (v) two sea anchors, each with an elastic line and a indhaler line, one driving the anchor is a spare anchor, and the other is permanently attached to the rescue fleet in such a way that when the rescue fleet inflates, and is located on the water, it will keep the rescue fleet up against the wind in such a way that it is most stable. Each drift anchor and line and indhaler line must be of a strength that is sufficient in all conditions at sea. Drift anchors must be fitted with a swivel at each end of the line and must be of a type that does not tend to turn inside out between faucet feet;

(5) (a) (vi) two paddles, which can float on the water;

(5) (a) (vii) three openers. Safety knives with special dåseåbner leaves can meet this requirement;

(5) (a) (viii) a first aid kit in a watertight box, which can be closed tightly after use;

(5) (a) (ix) a whistle or equivalent sound signal;

(5) (a) (x) four parachute signals, which satisfies the requirements laid down in rule 29;

(5) (a) (xi) six hand flares, complying with the requirements of rule 30;

(5) (a) (xii) two smoke signals, which can float on the water, and which satisfy the requirements set out in rule 31;

(5) (a) (xiii) a waterproof electric torch suitable for morse signalling together with one spare set of elements and a spare bulb in a waterproof container;

(5) (a) (xiv) an efficient radar reflector, unless there is placed an approved vessel's radar transponder in the rescue fleet;

(5) (a) (xv) a signal mirror to use per day with instructions on use for signalling to ships and aircraft;

(5) (a) (xvi) a copy of any of chapter V, rule 16, of the International Convention for the safety of life at sea, 1974 (SOLAS) referred to rescue signals on a waterproof card or in a waterproof container;

(5) (a) (xvii) a set of fishing gear;

(5) (a) (xviii) a food ration, which in total contains at least 10000 kilojoules for each person the rescue fleet is authorized to print; these rations shall be kept in airtight packaging and be placed in a waterproof container;

(5) (a) (xix) watertight receptacles containing a total of 1.5 litres of fresh water for each person, as the rescue fleet is authorized to record, of which 0.5 l per person may be replaced by a afsaltningsapparat that can produce an equivalent amount of fresh water in 2 days;

(5) (a) (xx) a stainless, by drinking cup;

(5) (a) (xxi) six doses anti seasickness medication and one seasickness bag for each person, as the rescue fleet is authorized to print;

(5) (a) (xxii) guidance on how to keep themselves in live8);
(5) (a) (xxiii) instructions for immediate foranstaltning9);

(5) (a) (xxiv) the thermal protective AIDS, which satisfies the requirements laid down in rule 26 and is sufficient for 10% of the number of people who rescue fleet is authorized to record or two, whichever is greatest.

(5) (b) the marking prescribed in rule 21 (7) (c) (v) and 22 (7) (vii) on liferafts equipped in accordance with point (a), must be ' SOLAS A PACK ' with large block letters in the Latin alphabet.

(6) Self-timer arrangements for liferafts (6) (a) Fangline system (trigger line system)

Rescue fleet fangline system to form a connection between the ship and the rescue fleet and must be designed in such a way as to ensure that the rescue fleet when it is released, and with regard to an inflatable life raft when the inflated, not be dragged down by a sinking ship.

(6) (b) weak link

Used in self-timer event a weak link, it must: (6) (b) (i) be able to withstand the force required to pull the catch line out from the rescue fleet container without breaking;

(6) (b) (ii) have sufficient strength to allow for inflation of the rescue fleet;

(6) (b) (iii) burst by a load of 2.2 kN ± 0.4 kN.

(6) (c) hydrostatic trigger apparatus

Used in self-timer arrangements a hydrostatic trigger device, it must: (6) (c) (i) be constructed of materials that can work together in such a way that the malfunction of the appliances can be avoided. Electroplating or other forms of metallic coating on the hydrostatic trigger appliance parts may not be approved;

(6) (c) (ii) automatically trigger the rescue fleet at a depth of not more than 4 metres;

(6) (c) (iii) be fitted with drain, which prevents the collection of water in the hydrostatic Chamber when the unit is in its normal position;

(6) (c) (iv) be so designed that the triggering is prevented when Lakes overwhelms the device;

(6) (c) (v) be permanently marked on the outside with the type and serial number;

(6) (c) (vi) be provided with a document or an identification plate which indicates the manufacturing date, type and serial number;

(6) (c) (vii) be such that each part that is connected to the fangline system, has a strength which are at least equivalent to the for fang linen provided.

(6) (c) (viii) if the disposable type, have instructions so that the expiration date can be determined, and a way in which the date can be felt on the shutter unit.

Rule 21 inflatable liferafts (1) inflatable liferafts shall comply with the requirements of rule 20 and in addition, the requirements of this rule.

(2) inflatable rescue fleets construction (2) (a) the main buoyancy compartment shall be divided into at least two separate rooms, each inflated through a non-return valve on each room. Buoyancy compartments shall be so designed that, if one compartment is damaged, or inflating is not possible, they must be intact spaces with positive freeboard over the rescue fleet's girth could wear the number of people who rescue fleet is authorized to record, and each of which has a weight of 75 kg and sitting in the normal position.

(2) (b) the rescue fleet floor must be waterproof and sufficiently could be insulated against the cold, either: (2) (b) (i) by means of one or more spaces, as the occupants can inflate, or which inflate automatically and can be emptied and inflates again by the occupants; or (2) (b) (ii) by means of other equally efficient means that are not provided by inflating.

(2) (c) the rescue fleet to be inflated by a non-toxic gas. Inflation must be completed within a period of 1 minute at an ambient temperature from 18 ° c to 20 ° c and within a period of 3 minutes at an ambient temperature of-30 ° c. After inflating the rescue fleet must retain its form when it is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment.

(2) (d) Each inflatable compartment shall be capable of withstanding a pressure of at least 3 times the working pressure and must be using either pressure relief valves or restricted air supply be prevented from reaching up at a pressure exceeding twice the working pressure. Means shall be provided for the fitting of the in paragraph (10) (a) (ii) the prescribed air pump or bellows so that the working pressure can be maintained.

(3) inflatable rescue fleets carrying capacity

The number of persons which a liferaft shall be approved for that record, must be equal to the lesser of the following numbers: (3) (i) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing the volume of the main buoyancy snakes (exclusive bows and any thwarts), measured in cubic metres, with 0.096 when they are inflated; or (3) (ii) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing the rescue fleet inner horizontal cross-sectional area, measured in square metres with 0.372 (including possible t or thwarts) to the inner edge of the buoyancy snakes; or (3) (iii) the number of persons, with an average weight of 75 kilograms all wearing lifejackets, that can get a seat with sufficient comfort and ceiling height without having to complicate the operation of some of the rescue fleet equipment.

(4) access to the inflatable life-rafts (4) (a) at least one entrance must be fitted with a semi-solid boarding ramp, which makes it possible for people to board the rescue fleet from the Lake, and which is designed in such a way that there is no significant air discharge from the rescue fleet, if the ramp is damaged. In terms of a nedfirbar raft with more than one entrance, the boarding ramp shall be fitted at the entrance facing indhalingslinierne and embarkation facilities.

(4) (b) Entries that are not fitted with a boarding ramp shall have a boarding ladder, if lower steps shall be at least 0.4 m below the rescue fleet's light waterline. Also entrances fitted with a boarding ramp shall have a boarding ladder. Boarding lejdernes bottom steps must be loaded so that it sinks.

(4) (c) means shall be provided inside the rescue fleet, whereby individuals can pull themselves into the rescue fleet from the boarding ladder.

(5) inflatable rescue fleets stability (5) (a) Every inflatable liferaft shall be so constructed that it is stable in the Seaway, when fully inflated and floating with covered up.

(5) (b) the rescue fleet stability, when the fleet is facing the bottom of the weather, shall be such that the fleet in the Seaway and in calm waters can be put on an even keel by one person.

(5) (c) the rescue fleet stability must, when life-saving fleet is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment must be such that it can be towed at a speed of 3 knots in calm water.

(6) accessories for inflatable liferafts (6) (a) Fangline system (trigger line system), including its attachment means for rescue fleet apart from it in rule 20 (6) (6) prescribed weak link shall have a breaking strength of not less than 10.0 kN in rafts that are authorized to record nine persons or more, and at least 7.5 kN in any other life raft. Rescue fleet should be able to be triggered by one person.

(6) (b) on top of the rescue fleet of cover shall be provided a manually operated lamp, a dark night with a clear air can be seen at a distance of at least 2 nautical miles over a period of at least 12 hours. Is the lamp a flashing lamp, the Flash at a rate of not less than 50 flashes per minute in the first two hours of a usage time of 12 hours. The lamp must get its energy from a battery or from an activated seawater chemical tørelement and should be lit automatically when the rescue fleet inflates. Item must be of a type that does not degrade due to wetness or moisture inside the packed life raft.

(6) (c) inside the rescue fleet there shall be a manually operated lamp that can be bright in all in a period of at least 12 hours. It should be lit automatically when the rescue fleet inflates and have sufficient strength to enable reading of survival-and equipment Guide.

(7) containers for inflatable liferafts (7) (a) Rescue fleet must be placed in a container that is: (7) (a) (i) is designed in such a way that it is able to withstand strong wear and tear during the at sea occurring conditions;

(7) (a) (ii) have a sufficient built-in buoyancy, when it is packed with rescue fleet and its equipment, pulling fang linen (trigger line) from the inside and activating the inflator mechanism, if the ship were to sink;

(7) (a) (iii) as far as practicable, with the exception of drain holes is waterproof on the bottom of the container.

(7) (b) the rescue fleet must be packed in the container in such a way as to ensure, as far as possible to the rescue fleet when it is on the water, inflate up to upright position when it comes free of the container.

(7) (c) the container shall be marked: (7) (c) (i) the manufacturer's name or trade mark;

(7) (c) (ii) serial number;

(7) (c) (iii) name of the regulatory authority and the number of people who rescue fleet is authorized to print;

(7) (c) (iv) SFV10);

(7) (c) (v) type on the emergency package contained;

(7) (c) (vi) date of last inspection;

(7) (c) (vii) length of fang line (trigger line);

(7) (c) (viii) maximum permissible mounting height above waterline (depending on drop test and length of fang linen);

(7) (c) (ix) launching instructions.

(8) the labelling of inflatable liferafts

Rescue fleet must be marked: (8) (i) the manufacturer's name or trade mark;

(8) (ii) serial number;

(8) (iii) the date (month and year) of manufacture;

(8) (iv) the name of the approving authority;

(8) (v) the name and location of the service station, where the last inspection took place;
(8) (vi) number of persons which it is authorized to record, above each entrance with signs, there are at least 100 mm high and has a contrasting colour compared to the rescue fleet color.

(9), davit-launched inflatable liferafts (9) (a) in addition to meeting the above requirements must a raft, used in conjunction with an approved launching appliance when it is hung in the lifting hook or multi-legged sling, be able to withstand a load of: (9) (a) (i) 4 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature and a stabilized temperature of 20 ± 3 ° c redningsflåde with all pressure relief valves inoperative;

(9) (a) (ii) 1.1 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature of-30 ° c with all pressure relief valves in function.

(9) (b) Fixed containers for liferafts to release using a launching appliance shall be fastened in such a way that the container or parts thereof can not fall into the sea during and after inflating and restocking of the enclosed life raft.

(10) Additional equipment for inflatable liferafts (10) (a) in addition to the prescribed in rule 20 (5) every inflatable liferaft outfit shall be fitted with: (10) (a) (i) a repair kit for repairing leaks in the buoyancy compartments;

(10) (a) (ii) an air pump or bellows.

(10) (b) in rule 20 (5) (a) (ii) required knives must be safety knives.

Rule 22 Permanent rafts (1) Fixed rafts shall meet the requirements of rule 20 and in addition, the requirements of this rule.

(2) Permanent rescue fleets construction (1) (a) Rescue fleet buoyancy to be provided by approved material which by itself can float on the water, and it must be located as close to the rescue fleet circumference as possible. Buoyancy material must be fire-retardant or be protected by a fire-retardant layer.

(1) (b) the rescue fleet floor to prevent the ingress of water and it shall effectively hold the occupants out of the water and protect them from the cold.

(3) Permanent rescue fleets carrying capacity

The number of persons which a liferaft shall be approved for that record, must be equal to the lesser of the following numbers: (3) (i) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing the cubic content of buoyancy material measured in cubic meters with 0.096 and multiplied by a factor of 1 minus the material's density; or (3) (ii) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing the horizontal cross-sectional area of the rescue fleet floor measured in square metres with 0.372; or (3) (iii) the number of persons with an average weight of 75 kilograms all wearing lifejackets, that can get a seat with sufficient comfort and ceiling height without having to complicate the operation of some of the rescue fleet equipment.

(4) access to permanent rafts (4) (a) at least one entrance must be fitted with a fixed boarding ramp, so that people can rescue fleet tables from the Lake. In terms of a nedfirbar raft with more than one entrance, the boarding ramp shall be fitted at the entrance facing indhalingslinierne and embarkation facilities.

(4) (b) Entries that are not fitted with a boarding ramp shall have a boarding ladder, if lower steps shall be at least 0.40 m during rescue fleet's light waterline.

(4) (c) means shall be provided inside the rescue fleet, whereby individuals can pull themselves into the rescue fleet from the boarding ladder.

(5) Permanent rescue fleets stability (5) (a) unless the rescue fleet can operate safely, whether it flows with the one or the other side up, its strength and stability must be such that it is either self-righting or can easily be placed on an even keel by a person in the Seaway and in calm water.

(5) (b) the rescue fleet stability must, when life-saving fleet is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment must be such that it can be towed at a speed of 3 knots in calm water.

(6) accessories for permanent rafts (6) (a) Rescue fleet must be fitted with an effective Catcher line. Fangline system, including securing funds to rescue the fleet, apart from it in rule 20 (6) (6) prescribed weak link shall have a breaking strength of not less than 10.0 kN in rafts that are authorized to record nine persons or more, and at least 7.5 kN in any other life raft.

(6) (b) on top of the rescue fleet of cover shall be provided a manually operated lamp, a dark night with a clear air can be seen at a distance of at least 2 nautical miles over a period of at least 12 hours. Is the lamp a flashing lamp, the Flash at a rate of not less than 50 flashes per minute in the first 2 hours of a usage time of 12 hours. The lamp must get its energy from a component that plugs into the function of sea water, or from a chemical tørelement and should be lit automatically when the rescue fleet of cover is in place. Item must be of a type that does not degrade due to wetness or moisture inside the mingled raft.

(6) (c) inside the rescue fleet there shall be a manually operated lamp that can be bright in all in a period of at least 12 hours. It should be lit automatically when the flysheet is in place, and have sufficient strength to enable reading of survival-and equipment Guide.

(7) the labelling of fixed rafts

Rescue fleet must be marked: (7) (i) the name and Head Office of the ship, it belongs to;

(7) (ii) the manufacturer's name or trade mark;

(7) (iii) serial number;

(7) (iv) the name of the approval authority;

(7) (v) number of persons which it is authorized to record, above each entrance with signs, there are at least 100 mm high and has a contrasting colour compared to the rescue fleet color;

(7) (vi) SFV11);

(7) (vii) type on the emergency package contained;

(7) (viii) length of fang line;

(7) (ix) maximum stowage height above waterline (drop test height) (7) (x) the release Guide.

(8) fixed davit-launched life-rafts

In addition to the above requirements, a solid raft for use with an approved launching appliance when it is hung in the lifting hook or multi-legged sling, be able to withstand a load of 4 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment.

Rule 23 Man-overboard-both (1) General provisions (1) (a) of this rule the exception to all man-overboard-both meet the requirements set out in rules 17 (1) to 17 (7) (d), inclusive, and 17 (7) (f), 17 (7) (g), 17 (7) (i), 17 (7) (l) and 17 (9).

(1) (b) Man-overboard-both can be either a fixed or inflated construction or combination thereof and must: (1) (b) (i) be not less than 3.8 m and not more than 8.5 m in length, however, the Administration may, when equipment with such boats due to the ship's size or for other reasons deemed unreasonable or impossible to accept a man-overboard-boat with less length, but not less than 3.3 m.

(1) (b) (ii) be able to carry at least five seated persons and a lying person or, in the case of ships of less than 45 m in length and a man-overboard-boat less than 3.8 metres in length, at least four persons seated and a lying person.

(1) (c) the number of persons allowed resulted in a boat, to be determined by the administration by means of a practical test. The smallest load capacity must be as stated in rule 23, paragraph 1 (b)), second subparagraph. Seating positions can, except for the helmsman, be at the bottom of the boat. No of seats must be on the gunwale, transom, or an air chamber along the boat's sides.

(1) (d) Man-overboard-both, which is a combination of a fixed and inflated construction, shall comply with the relevant requirements of this rule to the satisfaction of the administration.

(1) (e) unless the man-overboard-the boat has adequate sheer, it shall be provided with a cover in the bow that stretches over at least 15% of the length.

(1) (f) the Man-overboard-both should be able to move at speeds of up to 6 knots and should be able to hold that speed for a period of at least 4 hours.

(1) (g) Man-overboard-both must have sufficient mobility and manoeuvrability of the Seaway is possible to recover people out of the water, to accompany the liferafts and tow the largest liferaft, ship leads, with the full complement of persons and equipment, or equivalent, with a speed of at least 2 knots.

(1) (h) a man-overboard-boat shall be equipped with an inboard or outboard motor a. Is the outboard engine, fitted with a rudder and tiller can be part of the engine. Notwithstanding the requirements set out in rule 17 (6) (a) man-overboard-both can be fitted with outboard benzinmotorer with an approved fuel system, where the fuel tanks are specially protected against fire and explosion.

(1) (i) Arrangements for towing shall be permanently attached in the man-overboard-both and must be sufficiently strong to accompany or tow liferafts as prescribed in paragraph (1) (g).

(1) (j) to be in the man-overboard-both as available funds for waterproof storage of small equipment items.

(2) Man-overboard-boats ' equipment (2) (a) With the exception of boat hooks, which must be kept ready for use, all man-overboard-the boat's equipment items be secured inside the man-overboard-the boat by lashings, storage in lockers using or compartments, storage in enclosures or similar mounting arrangements, or other suitable means. Equipment must be secured in such a way that it does not impede any launching or ombordtagningsprocedure. All man-overboard-the boat's equipment items should be as small and as light as possible and shall be packed in suitable and compact form.

(2) (b) every man-overboard-boat normal outfit shall consist of:
(2) (b) (i) an adequate number of oars or paddles, there must be able to float on the water, to move the boat in calm water. There shall be åretolde, åregafler or similar events for each oar. Åretolde or åregafler must be attached to the boat by using lines or chains;

(2) (b) (ii) a øsekar that can float on the water;

(2) (b) (iii) a binnacle containing a useful compass which is luminous or provided with suitable means of illumination;

(2) (b) (iv) a drift anchor and indhaler line with a rope of adequate strength and at least 10 metres long;

(2) (b) (v) a catch line of sufficient length and strength, attached to trigger the décor, which satisfies the requirements laid down in rule 17 (7) (g) and placed at the front of the man-overboard-boat;

(2) (b) (vi) a line that can float on water, which is at least 50 metres long and of sufficient strength to the towing of a life raft as prescribed in paragraph (1) (g);

(2) (b) (vii) a waterproof electric torch suitable for morse signalling together with one spare set of elements and a spare bulb in a waterproof container;

(2) (b) (viii) one whistle or equivalent sound signal;

(2) (b) (ix) a first aid kit in a watertight box, which can be closed tightly after use;

(2) (b) (x) two rescue throw rings that can float on the water, attached to not less than 30 m of line that can float on the water;

(2) (b) (xi) a spotlight, which at night can effectively inform a faintly colored thing from a width of 18 metres at a distance of 180 m in a total of 6 hours, and can be used continuously for at least 3 hours;

(2) (b) (xii) an efficient radar reflector;

(2) (b) (xiii) the thermal protective AIDS, which satisfies the requirements laid down in rule 26 and is sufficient for 10% of the number of persons, as man-overboard-boat is authorized to record or two, whichever is greatest;

(2) (c) in addition to the information referred to in paragraph (2) (b) the prescribed equipment, every real man-overboard-boat normal equipment include: (2) (c) (i) a boat Chin;

(2) (c) (ii) a drench;

(2) (c) (iii) a knife or kapøkse.

(2) (d) in addition to the information referred to in paragraph (2) (b) the prescribed equipment, every fat man-overboard-boat normal equipment consist of: (2) (d) (i) a safety blade that can float on the water;

(2) (d) (ii) two sponges;

(2) (d) (iii) an efficient manually operated bellows or pump;

(2) (d) (iv) a repair kit in a suitable container for reparering of punctures;

(2) (d) (v) a security bådshage.

(3) Additional requirements for the puffy man-overboard-both (3) (a) the requirements set out in rule 17 (1) (c) and 17 (1) (e) shall not apply to puffy man-overboard-both.

(3) (b) A fat man-overboard-boat shall be constructed in such a way that when it is hung in the faucet foot or lifting hook: (3) (b) (i) has the sufficient strength and firmness to be lowered and taken on board with the full load of persons and equipment;

(3) (b) (ii) has the sufficient strength to withstand a load of 4 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature of 20 ° ± 3 ° c with all safety valves inoperative;

(3) (b) (iii) has the sufficient strength to withstand a load of 1.1 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature of-30 ° c with all safety valves in function.

(3) (c) Puffy man-overboard-both must be designed in such a way that they can withstand weather's influences: (3) (c) (i) when placed on the open deck of a ship at sea;

(3) (c) (ii) for 30 days during operation at sea under all conditions.

(3) (d) in addition to meeting the requirements set out in rule 17 (9) to puffy man-overboard-both be marked serial number, the manufacturer's name or trademark as well as manufactured.

(3) (e) The puffy man-overboard-boat's buoyancy must be provided by either a single tube that is divided into at least five separate compartments of approximately equal volume or two separate tubes, none of which exceeds 60% of the total volume. Buoyancy hose shall be so designed that, in the event that one of the spaces is damaged, the intact compartments with positive freeboard over the boat's girth could wear the number of persons, as man-overboard-boat is authorized to record, and each of which has a weight of 75 kg and sitting in the normal position.

(3) (f) The buoyancy tubes that make up the puffy man-overboard-boat border, when inflated, give a volume at least 0.17 m³ for each person, man-overboard-boat is authorized to record.

(3) (g) Each opdriftsrum must be fitted with a non-return valve for manual inflation and means of emptying. There must also be provided a safety valve, unless the Administration is satisfied that such a device is unnecessary.

(3) (h) Under the bottom and on the exposed places on the outside of the puffy man-overboard-boat fender lists shall be provided to the satisfaction of the administration.

(3) (i) where a transom is fitted, it must be inserted with a maximum of 20% of man-overboard-the boat's overall length.

(3) (j) they must have suitable fixings for catch lines fore and aft and the rescue lanyards attached outboard and inside the boat.

(3) (k) The man-overboard-inflated boat shall at all times be kept in the inflated condition.

Rule 24 lifejackets (1) General requirements for lifejackets (1) (a) A lifejacket shall not close a fire or continue melting after being totally engulfed in flames in 2 seconds.

(1) (b) A lifejacket shall be so constructed that: (1) (b) (i) a person after a demonstration without assistance can take it correctly on during 1 minute;

(1) (b) (ii) it can be used with inside out or clear can only be used on one way and as far as possible cannot be taken wrong on;

(1) (b) (iii) it is comfortable to wear;

(1) (b) (iv) the user can jump from a height of at least 4.5 metres into the water without getting injured, and without redningsvesten loosens or becomes corrupted.

(1) (c) A lifejacket shall be of sufficient buoyancy and stability in quiet fresh water to: (1) (c) (i) lifting an exhausted or unconscious person's mouth at least 120 mm clear of the water and keep the body inclined backwards at an angle of at least 20 ° and 50 ° from the vertical position;

(1) (c) (ii) turn an unconscious person's body from any position in the water to a position where the mouth is clear of the water at a maximum of 5 seconds.

(1) (d) A life jacket must have a buoyancy that cannot be reduced by more than 5% after 24 hours of immersion in fresh water.

(1) (e) A lifejacket shall allow the user to swim a short distance and tables a lifeboat or fleet.

(1) (f) Each lifejacket shall be fitted with a whistle firmly secured by a line.

(2) Inflatable lifejackets

A lifejacket, if the buoyancy provided by inflating, must have at least two separate spaces and must meet the requirements in paragraph (1) and (2) shall be: (i) inflate automatically by immersion and be provided with a means for enabling inflating by a single manual motion, as well as be able to inflate by mouth;

(2) (ii) in the case of loss of buoyancy in one of the spaces could comply with the requirements of paragraph (1) (b), (c) and (e);

(2) (iii) comply with the requirements of paragraph (1) (d) after inflation using the automatic mechanism.

(3) light on lifejackets (3) (a) Each life jacket must have a light there: (3) (a) (i) has a brightness of at least 0.75 candela;

(3) (a) (ii) have an energy source that can provide a brightness of at least 0.75 candela for at least 8 hours;

(3) (a) (iii) is visible over such a large part of the upper hemisphere as is reasonably practicable, where it is attached to a lifejacket.

(3) (b) in paragraph (3) (a) referred to light a flashing light, it must in addition: (3) (b) (i) be provided with a contact for manual operation;

(3) (b) (ii) not be fitted with a lens or curved reflector for collection of the light beam;

(3) (b) (iii) blinking at a rate of not less than 50 flashes per minute with an effective luminous intensity of at least 0.75 candela.

Rule 25 immersion suits (1) General requirements for immersion suits (1) (a) the suit must be made of waterproof materials, so that: (1) (a) (i) the outside assistance can be unpacked and put on during the 2 minutes, including any associated clothing and a lifejacket, if the suit must be used in conjunction with a lifejacket;

(1) (a) (ii) it does not have a fire or continue melting after being totally engulfed in flames for 2 seconds;

(1) (a) (iii) it covers the whole body except the face. The hands should also be covered, unless the suit is fitted with permanently attached gloves;

(1) (a) (iv) it is equipped with the means to restrict or reduce free air in the suit leg;

(1) (a) (v) after a jump from a height of at least 4.5 metres into the water do not appear unreasonable intrusion of water into the suit.

(1) (b) a suit which also complies with the provisions of rule 24, can be classified as a lifejacket.

(1) (c) A person wearing the costume as well as lifejacket, if the suit must be used in conjunction with a lifejacket, shall be able to: (1) (c) (i) climb up and down a vertical ladder at least 5 metres long;

(1) (c) (ii) perform normal tasks associated with that abandonment;

(1) (c) (iii) jump from a height of at least 4.5 metres into the water without damaging or dislocate the suit or get hurt; and (1) (c) (iv) swimming a short distance through the water and tables a lifeboat or fleet.

(1) (d) a suit that has buoyancy and which is intended to be used without a lifejacket, shall be fitted with a light complying with the requirements of rule 24 (3), and in rule 24 (1) (f) prescribed flute.
(1) (e) Should the suit be used in conjunction with a lifejacket, shall redningsvesten be worn over the suit. A person wearing such a costume should without assistance could take a life jacket on.

(2) requirements for dragters thermal properties (2) (a) A rescue suit made of material without built-in isolation must be: (2) (a) (i) marked with the instruction that it should be used in conjunction with warm clothing;

(2) (a) (ii) so designed that when used in conjunction with warm clothing and a lifejacket, if the suit must be used in conjunction with a lifejacket, suit must continue to provide adequate thermal protection, after the user has jumped into the water from a height of 4.5 m, to ensure that the user's internal body temperature does not fall more than 2 ° c after an hour's stay in calm circulating water at a temperature of 5 ° c.

(2) (b) A rescue suit made of material with built-in isolation must, when used alone or in conjunction with a lifejacket, if rescue suit must be used in conjunction with a lifejacket, provide the user adequate thermal isolation, after they have jumped into the water from a height of 4.5 m, to ensure that the user's internal body temperature does not fall more than 2 ° c after 6 hours of stay in quiet circulating water at a temperature from 0 ° c to 2 ° c.

(2) (c) A person wearing a suit with his hands covered could pick up a pencil and write after an hour's stay in water at 5 ° c.

(3) requirements for buoyancy

A person who lives in fresh water and is wearing a suit that meets the requirements set out in rule 24, or a suit with a lifejacket, shall be able to turn from a position with the face downwards to a position with the face upwards on a maximum of 5 seconds.

Rule 26 thermal protective AIDS (1) A thermal protection product shall be made of waterproof material having a thermal conductivity of not more than 0.25 W/(m K), and must be designed in such a way that when it is used to enclose a person, it must reduce the user's loss of body temperature due to convection as well as evaporation.

(2) the thermal protection product shall: (2) (i) cover the body except the face for a person wearing a lifejacket. The hands should also be covered, unless protection product is equipped with permanently attached gloves;

(2) (ii) without assistance could be unpacked and easily be taken on in a lifeboat, life raft or a man-overboard-boat;

(2) (iii) if it impairs the swimming ability, could be taken up in the water at a maximum of 2 minutes;

(3) the thermal protection product shall function properly within an ambient temperature range from-30 ° c to + 20 ° c.

Rule 27 lifebuoys (1) specification for lifebuoys

Every lifebuoy shall: (1) (i) have an outside diameter of not more than 800 mm and an inside diameter of at least 400 mm;

(1) (ii) be constructed of a material which by itself can float on the water; rescue the buoyancy shall not depend on plant unravel, Cork shavings or granulated Cork, something else loose granulated material or any airspace, if the buoyancy provided by inflation;

(1) (iii) be able to float in fresh water for 24 hours with a weight of at least 14.5 kg iron;

(1) (iv) have a weight of at least 2.5 kg;

(1) (v) not near a fire or continue melting after being totally engulfed in flames for 2 seconds;

(1) (vi) be designed so that it can withstand a drop into the water from the height at which it is stowed above the waterline when the ship is in its lightest seagoing condition or 30 metres, whichever is the highest, without either the rescue or his pinned partly functional ability decline;

(1) (vii) where, it must be able to operate the quick release arrangement for the self-acting smoke signals and lifebuoys lights, have a weight that is sufficient for the operation of the arrangement for quick release or a weight of 4 kg, whichever is the greatest;

(1) (viii) shall be fitted with a hand line, there is a minimum of 9.5 mm in diameter and at least 4 times the outer diameter of the circle in length. Hand line must be secured at four points with equal intervals around the circumference so as to form four equal bays.

(2) lifebuoys light for lifebuoys

Lifebuoys lights prescribed in rule 10 (2): (2) must (i) be so arranged that they are not quenched in water;

(2) (ii) be able to burn either constant with a brightness of at least 2 candela in all directions of the upper hemisphere or flashing (eject flashes) at a rate of not less than 50 flashes per minute with a minimum equivalent effective brightness;

(2) (iii) be equipped with an energy source that can meet the requirements of paragraph (ii) for a period of at least 2 hours;

(2) (iv) be able to cope with the information referred to in paragraph (1) (vi) prescribed drop test.

(3) the self-acting smoke signals for lifebuoys

Self-acting smoke signals prescribed in rule 10 (3): (3) (i) emit smoke of a highly visible colour at a uniform flow for a period of at least 15 minutes, when the floating on calm water;

(3) (ii) does not turn on or eject any explosive flame throughout the period during which the signal emitting smoke;

(3) (iii) not be water filled in the Seaway;

(3) (iv) continue to emit smoke after having been fully immersed in water for a period of at least 10 seconds;

(3) (v) be able to cope with the information referred to in paragraph (1) (vi) prescribed drop test.

(4) Rescue lanyards that can float on water

Rescue liner, which can float on the water, and which are prescribed in rule 10 (4): (4) (i) be non-kinkende;

(4) (ii) have a diameter of at least 8 mm;

(4) (iii) have a breaking strength of not less than 5 kN.

Rule 28 Line toss apparatus (1) Any line toss machine must: (1) (i) could cast a line with reasonable accuracy;

(1) (ii) be provided with at least four projectiles that each can lead the line at least 230 metres away in calm weather;

(1) (iii) be provided with a minimum of four lines, each of which has a breaking strength of at least 2 kN;

(1) (iv) be provided with brief instructions or pictograms, which clearly illustrates the use of the line down the appliance.

(2) the rocket, in the case of a pistol fired rocket, or the total set, in the case of integral rocket and line, must be stored in a package that is resistant to water. In the case of a pistol fired rocket, rockets, as well as the start-up date and the funds be placed in a container that provides protection against the weather.

Rule 29 Parachute signals (1) Parachute signal shall: (1) (i) be stored in watertight gasket;

(1) (ii) on the package be provided with brief instructions or pictograms, which clearly illustrates the use of parachute signal;

(1) (iii) have integrated ignition product;

(1) (iv) be designed so that it does not cause discomfort to the person who keeps the signal when it is used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for use.

(2) the signal shall, when it fired vertically, reach a height of at least 300 m. At or near the top of its trajectory must send out a signal light to be: (2) (i) burn with a bright red color;

(2) (ii) burn uniformly with an average luminous intensity of at least 30000 candela;

(2) (iii) have a burning time of at least 40 seconds;

(2) (iv) have a decrease speed of not more than 5 m/s;

(2) (v) do not damage the parachute or accessories, while the burner.

Rule 30 Hand torch (1) Hand flared must: (1) (i) be stored in watertight gasket;

(1) (ii) on the package be provided with brief instructions or pictograms, which clearly illustrates the use of hand flared;

(1) (iii) have independent means of ignition;

(1) (iv) be designed so that it does not cause discomfort to the person who keeps the signal, and not postpone rescue remedy for danger due burning or glowing residues when used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for use.

(2) Hand flared must: (2) (i) burn with a bright red color;

(2) (ii) burn uniformly with an average luminous intensity of not less than 15000 candela;

(2) (iii) have a minimum burning period of not less than 1 minute;

(2) (iv) continue to burn after it has been immersed in 100 mm of water in 10 seconds.

Rule 31 smoke signals, which can float on water (1) A røgsignal that can float on the water, must: (1) (i) be stored in watertight gasket;

(1) (ii) ignite without detonating effect, when used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions;

(1) (iii) on the package be provided with brief instructions or pictograms, which clearly illustrates the use of røgsignalet.

(2) A røgsignal that can float on the water, to be: (2) (i) emit smoke of a strong visible color with smooth smoke for a period of at least 3 minutes, when the floating on calm water;

(2) (ii) do not emit any flame throughout the period during which the signal is developing smoke;

(2) (iii) not be inundated in the Seaway;

(2) (iv) continue to emit smoke when it is immersed in 100 mm of water in 10 seconds.

Rule 32 launching and embarkation appliances (1) General provisions (1) (a) Every launching appliance and all its affirings and ombordtagningsudstyr must be so designed that the lifeboat fully equipped, man-overboard-boat or raft, as operated, can safely lowered against a trim of up to 10 ° and list up to 20 ° to one side or the other: (1) (a) (i) with the full load of persons on board;

(1) (a) (ii) without people in the rescue vessel or man-overboard-boat.
(1) (b) A launching appliance shall not depend on other means than gravity or stored mechanical energy, which is independent of the ship's energy supply, for the release of the boat or the man-overboard-boat operated in fully loaded and equipped condition and in a light condition.

(1) (c) A launching appliance shall be so constructed that it can be initiated by a person from a position on the ship's deck and from a position inside the lifeboat, rescue fleet or man-overboard-boat; boat or fleet should be able to be seen by the person on deck, serving the release device.

(1) (d) Each launching appliance shall be so designed that it requires minimal routine maintenance. All parts requiring regular maintenance of the ship's crew, shall be readily accessible and easy to maintain.

(1) (e) Game the brakes in a launching appliance shall be of sufficient strength to withstand: (1) (e) (i) a static test with a test load of at least 1.5 times the maximum working load; and (1) (e) (ii) a dynamic test with a test load of at least 1.1 times the maximum working load at maximum affiringshastighed.

(1) (f) Launching the device and its accessories apart from the game the brakes must be of sufficient strength to withstand a static test load of at least 2.2 times the maximum working load.

(1) (g) structural parts and all blocks, runners, øjebeslag, led, attachment parts and all other accessories used in conjunction with the launching equipment must be designed with at least a minimum safety factor on the basis of the maximum working load and tensile strength of the material used for construction. A minimum safety factor of 4.5 must apply to all of david-and games construction parts, and a minimum safety factor of 6 should apply to runners, suspension chains, joints and blocks.

(1) (h) Each launching appliance shall, in so far as is practicable, continue to be usable in conditions of ice accretion.

(1) (i) A rescue boat launching appliance shall be by means of a motor driven game could take the lifeboat on Board again with equipment and its crew.

(1) (j) the release device must be such that it allows for the safe embarkation in the lifeboat and fleet in accordance with the provisions laid down in rule 20 (4) (b) and 17 (3) (a).

(2) launching appliances with rugs and games (2) (a) Runners shall be of steel wire that is resistant to rotation and corrosion.

(2) (b) in the case of a multi railroaded games, runners, unless there is mounted a compensatory device, be so designed that the reels by lowering runs at the same speed, and drums by hoisting påvikles evenly at the same speed.

(2) (c) Any launching appliance for man-overboard-boats must be equipped with a motor-driven game of such capacity, to man-overboard-the boat can be lifted from the water with its full complement of persons and equipment.

(2) (d) efficient means shall be provided for by hand to take on board each boat, raft and man-overboard-boat. Handle or wheel for manual control must not be turned around by the game's moving parts when the lifeboat, Navy or man-overboard rescue boat lowered or hoisted by means of energy.

(2) (e) Where david's arms are put in place using energy, in order to avoid overloading of the runners or davits fitted safety devices which automatically disconnects the energy before david arms goes against stop blocks, unless the engine is designed to prevent such an overload.

(2) (f) the speed at which the lifeboat, rescue fleet or man-overboard-boat fires into the water, must at least be the one obtained by the following formula:

S = 0.4 + 0, 02 h

where

S = affiringshastighed in metres per second

H = height in metres from david head to the waterline when the ship is in its lightest seagoing condition.

(2) (g) the maximum affiringshastighed to be determined by the Administration, taking into account the rescue boat, rescue fleet or man-overboard-the boat's construction, protection of occupants against excessive forces and launching their strength, since the inertia forces during an emergency stop is taken into account. To be built into the device as available funds prevents this speed is exceeded.

(2) (h) Any launching appliance for man-overboard-both should be able to hoist the man-overboard-boat when it is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment at a speed of at least 0.3 m/sec.

(2) (i) Any launching appliance shall be equipped with brakes that can halt the rescue boat, rescue fleet or man-overboard-boat lowering and hold it firmly, when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment. The brake lining must, where necessary, be protected against water and oil.

(2) (j) Manual brakes shall be so constructed that the brake is always enabled unless the person operating the brake or a mechanism activated by this person keeps braking control in ' off ' position.

(3) Release by self ejaculation

If for a lifeboat or fleet required launching, and at the same time is designed to self release, self-timer of the rescue boat or fleet from the stowed position be automatically.

(4) Release by freefall

Any launching of free-fall, which used an oblique plane, in addition to complying with the relevant requirements set out in paragraph (1) meet the following requirements: (4) (i) the release device must be so designed that the occupants of the lifeboat is not subjected to excessive loads during the release.

(4) (ii) the release device must be of a fixed structure with a ramp angle and length, which is sufficient to ensure that the lifeboat goes completely clear of the ship.

(4) (iii) the release device must be effectively protected against corrosion and be so constructed as to prevent flammable friction or blow sparks during the release of the lifeboat.

(5) the Evacuation chutes for use in restocking and embarkation

Any evacuation wear every launching appliance shall, in addition to complying with the relevant requirements set out in paragraph (1) also meet the following requirements: (5) (i) Evakueringsslidsken must be able to be used by one person at embarkation.

(5) (ii) Evakueringsslidsken must be able to be used in the stiff Gale and heavy sea.

(6) for liferafts launching appliances

Any launching of liferafts shall comply with the requirements set out in paragraphs 1 and 2, except as regards the use of gravity by uddrejning of the device and loading in the stowed position and taking the loaded raft. The release device must be so designed that the premature release under affiringen be avoided, and the udhugge must rescue fleet when this is on the water.

(7) the embarkation ladders (7) (a) Handrails shall be provided to allow safe transfer from the deck to the top of the ladder and vice versa.

(7) (b) Conduct's steps should be: (7) (b) (i) made of hard wood without knots or other irregularities, smoothly machined and without sharp edges or splinters, or made of suitable material of equivalent properties;

(7) (b) (ii) provided with efficient, non-slip surface either by using the grooves lengthwise or by the application of an approved non-slip layer;

(7) (b) (iii) not less than 480 mm long, 115 mm wide and 25 mm thick, excluding any non-slip surface or any slip-resistant layers;

(7) (b) (iv) placed at equal intervals of not less than 300 mm or more than 380 mm and secured in such a way that they will remain horizontal.

(7) (c) Conduct's sidereb must consist of two uklædte manilareb on each side of not less than 65 mm in circumference. Each rope shall be one length without joints below the top step. Other materials may be used, provided that their properties in terms of dimensions, tensile deformation, weather resistance, stretch and grabbed at least equal to a manila accommodation properties. All rebender must be bændslede in order to prevent unraveling.



Chapter VIII



CHAPTER VIII MEASURES in EMERGENCIES, MUSTERS and DRILLS Rule 1





Use







Rule 2





Main alarm, muster rolls and nødinstruktioner







Rule 3





Evacuation training and drills







Rule 4





Training in emergency procedures











Rule 1 Application

The provisions of this chapter shall apply to new and existing vessels of 15 m in length and over.

Rule 2 the main alarm system, muster rolls and nødinstruktioner (1) Main alarm signal system must be able to obtain the main alarmsignalet to sound; This must consist of a series of seven or more short notes followed by a long tone, delivered with the whistle or siren and additionally from an electric Bell, horn or similar signal unit, which must get its energy from the ship's main supply and the source of electrical power required by Regulation IV/17.
(2) All ships shall be provided with clear instructions about what each of the occupants should do in an emergency.

(3) Muster rolls and nødinstruktioner must be advertised at conspicuous places on board the ship, including on the bridge, the engine room and crew accommodations and must contain the information specified in the following paragraphs.

(4) the muster list must specify details about the main alarm signal prescribed in rule 50 and also the measures to be taken by the crew and passengers, when the alarm sounds. Muster must also specify how the order to abandon ship will be given.

(5) the muster list must specify the tasks of the various crew members, including: (5) (a) closing of watertight doors, fire doors, valves, scuppers, side hatches, skylights, portholes and other similar openings in the ship;

(5) (b) the equipment of the lifeboat and life-raft and other life-saving appliances;

(5) (c) the preparation and release of lifeboat and life-raft;

(5) (d) common provisioning of other life-saving appliances;

(5) (e) use of communications equipment; and (5) (f) manning of fire fighting team appointed to take care of the fires.

(6) in ships that are less than 45 metres in length the Administration may allow a relaxation of the provisions of paragraph (5) if it finds that muster rolls are not necessary due to the small number of crew members.

(7) the muster list must indicate what officers, it is the responsibility to ensure that rescue and fire equipment is kept in good condition and ready for immediate use.

(8) the muster list must specify delegates of key individuals who might be utjenstdygtige, taking into account that different emergencies may require different measures.

(9) the muster list must be drawn up before the ship departs. There is a change in the crew, which necessitates a modification of the muster list, the master must either revise the roll or draw up a new roll.

Rule 3 Evacuation training and exercises (1) Mønstringer and exercises (1) (a) each Member of the crew must participate in at least one abandon ship drill and fire drill every month. However, the Administration may modify this requirement for ships less than 45 metres in length, provided that at least one evacuation drill and a fire drill is held at least once every three months. If more than 25% of the crew have not participated in the boat and fire drill on board the vessel during the preceding month, a drill crew take place within 24 hours after the departure of the vessel from the port. When a ship goes in speed for the first time, after a major renovation, or when a new crew is unberthing, these exercises are held before departure. For classes of ships, where this is not possible, other schemes at least equivalent thereto, shall be approved by the administration.

(1) (b) Each drill must include: (1) (b) (i) crew members may be summoned to Assembly stations using the main alarmsignalet and ensure that they are

made aware of the order to abandon ship specified in the muster list;

(1) (b) (ii) all arrive at the stations and making it ready for the tasks that are described in the muster list;

(1) (b) (iii) control of that crew is appropriately clothed;

(1) (b) (iv) control of, to rescue persons are taken correctly;

(1) (b) (v) the lowering of at least one lifeboat after any necessary preparation for launching;

(1) (b) (vi) the rescue boat's engine is started and operated;

(1) (b) (vii) operating the davits used for launching of liferafts.

(1) (c) Each fire drill must include: (1) (c) (i) all the volunteers at the fire stations and get ready for the tasks that are described in the fire the rollers;

(1) (c) (ii) the start of a fire pump and using at least two jets of water to show that the system is in proper working order;

(1) (c) (iii) control of the Firefighter's outfits and other personal rescue equipment;

(1) (c) (iv) control of relevant communication equipment;

(1) (c) (v) verification of the function of watertight doors, fire doors, fire dampers and evacuation resources, and (1) (c) (vi) control of events that are necessary for a subsequent evacuation of the ship.

(1) (d) During the consecutive bådøvelser be lowered various lifeboats in accordance with the provisions in point (b) (v), in so far as is reasonably practicable.

(1) (e) Exercises should as far as possible be carried out, as if there was a real emergency.

(1) (f) Each lifeboat shall be exposed with the crew on board, which is appointed to operate the boat, and it has to be finessed on the water at least once every 3. month during an abandon ship drill.

(1) (g) in so far as is reasonable and practicable, man-overboard-both with the exception of the lifeboat, which is also the man-overboard boats, exposed each month with the designated crew aboard and manoeuvred in the water. In any case, this requirement is met at least once every 3. month.

(1) (h) the release is performed exercises with lifeboat and man-overboard-boat, while the ship is proceeding through the water, must such exercises, for reasons of risk, only carried out in protected waters, and they must be supervised by an officer who is experienced in such drills.

(1) (i) emergency lighting for assembling and evacuation shall be tested at every evacuation exercise.

(1) (j) the exercises can be adjusted in accordance with the relevant equipment required by these regulations. If the equipment carried on a voluntary basis, it must be used during the exercises, and exercises must be adjusted accordingly.

(2) Training and instruction on Board (2) (a) Training in the use of on board the ship's life-saving appliances, including lifeboat and rescue fleets including specialty equipment, and in the use of the ship's fire-fighting equipment shall take place as soon as possible, and no later than 2 weeks after a crew member to sign on the ship. If the crew member is on a planned regular service on Board of the ship, such training, however, is given no later than 2 weeks after the crew member for the first time joins the service on the ship.

(2) (b) Instruction in the use of the ship's life-saving equipment and in rescue at sea must be provided with the same interval as the exercises. The individual instruction may include various parts of the ship's life-saving equipment, but all of the ship's life-saving appliances and equipment must be covered within a period of 2 months. Each Member of the crew must be given instructions, which shall include, but are not necessarily limited to: (2) (b) (i) the operation and use of the ship's inflatable rafts, (2) (b) (ii) problems with during cooling (hypothermia), first-aid treatment of people, which is supercooled (hypothermia) and other appropriate first aid procedures, (2) (b) (iii) special instructions necessary for use of the ship's life-saving appliances in conditions of severe weather and heavy seas and (2) (c) on Board of ships equipped with davit-launched life-rafts shall be trained in the use of these take place at intervals of not more than 4 months. When practicable, the training include inflating and lowering of a liferaft. This can be a special raft raft designed exclusively for training purposes, and which is not used in the ship's rescue remedy equipment; such a special liferaft shall be marked in a conspicuous way.

(3) Records

Date of mønstringers holding, and details of boat and fire drills, exercises with other rescue resources and training on Board shall be recorded in the ' book ' or ' Supervisory instruction manual in the maintenance of life-saving appliances '. Not a complete musters are held, exercise or workout at the prescribed time, the regulatory paper explaining the circumstances and extent of the past musters, exercise or workout.

(4) the practice instruction manual (4) (a) there shall be an owner's manual in each of the crew's messes and recreation room or in each crew Chamber. The training manual, which may comprise several volumes, shall on an easy-to-understand language and where possible with illustrations provide instructions and information about the life-saving appliances, shall be provided on the ship and on the best methods of survival. Instead of the owner's manual can any part of such information is given in the form of audiovisual products. The following shall be explained in detail: (4) (a) (i) the donning of lifejackets and immersion suits, where appropriate;

(4) (a) (ii) musters at the prescribed places;

(4) (a) (iii) entring, restocking and releasing of lifeboats, liferafts, and man-overboard-both;

(4) (a) (iv) launching method from inside the lifeboats or

fleets;

(4) (a) (v) releasing from launching devices;

(4) (a) (vi) methods and the use of funds for protection in launching areas, where relevant;

(4) (a) (vii) lighting of the launching sites;

(4) (a) (viii) the use of all rescue equipment;

(4) (a) (ix) the use of detection equipment;

(4) (a) (x) with the assistance of illustrations, the use of radio life-saving appliances;

(4) (a) (xi) the use of sea anchors;

(4) (a) (xii) the use of engine with accessories;

(4) (a) (xiii) taking rescue vessels and man-overboard boats including stowage and lashing;

(4) (a) (xiv) the hazards of weather's impact and the need for warm clothing;

(4) (a) (xv) best use of lifeboats and naval facilities in order to be saved;

(4) (a) (xvi) recovery methods, including the use of helicopter rescue equipment (slings, baskets, stretchers), rescue chairs and coastal rescue equipment as well as the ship's line toss machine;

(4) (a) (xvii) all other features in muster and nødinstrukserne;
(4) (a) (xviii) instructions for emergency repair of the rescue funds.

(4) (b) On ships of less than 45 metres in length the Administration may allow a relaxation of the requirements of paragraph (a). However, the appropriate safety information always carried on board.

Rule 4 Training in emergency procedures

The Administration must take such measures as it may find necessary to ensure that crews are adequately trained in their duties in the event of an emergency. Such training shall include, where appropriate: (a) the types of emergency situations that may arise, such as collisions, fire and swallowing;

(b) types of life-saving appliances normally carried on board ships;

(c) the need to follow the principles of survival;

(d) the value of training and exercises;

(e) the need to be prepared for any emergency and be constantly aware of:

(e) (i) the information in the muster lists, in particular: – each crew member special duties in a nødsitu-ation;

– Each crew member's own rescue station; and

– the signal that calls the crew to their rescue vessels or fire stations;

(e) (ii) the location of each crew member's own life vest and spare redningsveste;

(e) (iii) the location of the fire alarm controls;

(e) (iv) escape routes;

(e) (v) the consequences of panic;

(f) actions to be performed with regard to helicopter picking up by someone from the ships and rescue boats;

(g) actions that should be taken when that gets called to rescue stations, including: (g) (i) the wearing of appropriate clothing;

(g) (ii) the donning of lifejackets; and (g) (iii) the collection of additional protection such as carpets, if time permits;

(h) actions that should be taken, when there will be given the order to abandon ship, such as: (h) (i) how to entrer rescue boats from the ship and the water; and (h) (ii) how to jump into the water from a height and reduces the risk of damage when they hit the water;

(i) the actions to be performed in the water, such as: (i) (i) how to survive under conditions such as:

– fire or oil on the water;

– cold conditions; and

– shark-infested waters;

(i) (ii) how to undelete a capsized rescue vessel;

(j) actions that should be taken on board a rescue vessel, such as: (j) (i) to get survival craft quickly away from the ship;

(j) (ii) protection against cold and extreme heat;

(j) (iii) use of drift anchor;

(j) (iv) keep looking;

(j) (v) salvage and treatment of survivors;

(j) (vi) improve the ability to be seen by others;

(j) (vii) control of equipment is in redningfartøjer and the correct use of the equipment; and (j) (viii), as far as possible to keep it near the sinking site;

(k) the most important dangers which threaten survivors and the General principles of survival, including: (k) (i) precautions to be taken in cold climates;

(k) (ii) measures to be taken in tropical climates;

(k) (iii) exposure to Sun, wind, rain and seas;

(k) (iv) the importance of wearing suitable clothing;

(k) (v) protective measures in the survival craft;

(k) (vi) the effects of water immersion and of hyperthermi;

(k) (vii) the importance of maintaining body fluids;

(k) (viii) protection against sea-sickness;

(k) (ix) the proper use of fresh water and food;

(k) (x) the effects of drinking sea water;

(k) (xi) funds available in order to improve the possibility of being seen by others; and (k) (xii) the importance of maintaining morale;

(l) actions that must be performed in the event of firefighting: (l) (i) the use of fire hoses with different nozzles;

(l) (ii) the use of portable fire extinguishers;

(l) (iii) knowledge of the location of fire doors; and (l) (iv) the use of outdoor air appliances.



Chapter IX



CHAPTER IX RADIO COMMUNICATION

GMDSS







 

 







Afsnit A









Scope and definitions









Rule 1





The scope of the







Rule 2





Terms and definitions







Rule 3





Exceptions







Rule 4





Functional requirements





 

 







Subparagraph (B)









Requirements for ships









Rule 5





Functional requirements







Rule 6





Radio equipment-General







Rule 7





Radio equipment-sea area A1







Rule 8





Radio equipment-sea areas A1 and A2







Rule 9





Radio equipment-sea areas A1, A2 and A3







Rule 10





Radio equipment-sea area A1, A2, A3 and A4







Rule 11





Guard team







Rule 12





Energy sources







Rule 13





Functional standards







Rule 14





Maintenance







Rule 15





Radio staff







Rule 16





Radio records









Annex 19





 









Section A-scope and definitions

Rule 1 scope (1) this chapter shall apply to new fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and over and to existing vessels of 45 metres in length and over, unless otherwise noted.

(2) the provisions applicable from 1. February 2002 for all new and existing fishing vessels subject to the provisions of this acquis. Fishing ships that have limited their shipping area for sea area A1 may nevertheless postpone the fulfilment of the requirements for the 1. February 2005. Any exceptions are listed at the end of each rule. An overview of the requirements for equipment in these ships is shown in an annex.

(3)

For Greenland subject to the following exception:



Fishing boats with navigability licence within VHF coverage of the Greenlandic coastal radio stations don't have to meet the requirements of regulation VII/13-14 and rule IX/6-8, if the vessel is within the 1. February 2005 is equipped with



a) VHF radio installations.







 





b) Float-free EPIRB 406 MHz.







 





(c) the vessel's radar transponder)













The requirement for VHF radio installations in subparagraph (a) may be met with a traditional VHF radio system (without DSC) or with a combined VHF-DSC radio system.



(4) the provisions of this chapter shall not prejudice the right of a ship, survival craft or person in an emergency is using any means at its disposal, to attract the attention, make its position known and to obtain help.

Rule 2 terms and definitions (1) for the purposes of this chapter the following expressions have the meaning defined below: (1) (a) ' bridge-to-bridge communication ' means safety communications between ships from the position from which the ship is normally navigated, on board.
(1) (b)» Continuous guard ' means that the radio guard only be interrupted for short periods, where the ship's receiving ability is impaired or obstructed by its own communication or if the equipment is during periodic maintenance or overhaul.

(1) (c) ' Digital selective calling (DSC) ' means a technique with the use of digital codes, which puts a radio station able to establish contact with and transfer the information to another station or group of stations, and complying with the relevant recommendations of the international radio Committee (ITU-R).

(1) (d)

» EPIRB (Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon) is a satellite nødradiopejlsender.



(1) (e)

» MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity) is a 9-digit number that identifies the ship in, among other things. DSC equipment and EPIRB.

(1) (f)» Float-free EPIRB "means an EPIRB placed in a holder decorated in such a way that EPIRB'en are automatically activated and floats free of the vessel, if this sink.

(1) (g) ' Radio telex ' means automated radio telegraph transmissions, which complies with the relevant recommendations of the international radio Committee (ITU-R).

(1) (h) ' General radio communication ' means an operational and public radio communications, which does not include emergency, il and security reports.

(1) (i) ' INMARSAT ' means the organization established pursuant to the Convention on the International Maritime Satellite Organization (INMARSAT) adopted on 3 July. September 1976.

(1) (j) ' International NAVTEX service "means the coordinated narrowband radio telex broadcast of maritime safety information in English on 518 kHz and automatically receiving these udsendelser1).

(1) (k) ' Localization ' means to find ships, aircraft, units or persons in distress.

(1) (l) ' Maritime safety information (MSI) means ' navigation information or meteorological warnings, meteorological forecasts and other urgent messages that have significance and broadcast to ships.

(1) (m) ' Polar satellite system ' means a system of polar encircling satellites for receiving and forwarding of emergency alarms from satellite EPIRB's and determination of their geographical position.

(1) (n) ' Radio Regulations ' means the radio regulations, which is attached to, or which are considered to be linked to the recent International Telecommunication Convention (ITU), which may be in force at any time.

(1) (o) ' sea area A1 ' means an area defined as such by a Contracting Government within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one VHF coast station in which continuous alerting is possible via DSC2).

(1) (p) ' sea area A2 ' means an area outside sea area A1, defined as such by a Contracting Government within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one MF coast station in which continuous alerting is possible through DSC.

(1) (q) ' sea area A3 ' means an area outside sea areas A1 and A2, within the coverage of an INMARSAT satellite orbital which continuously is the option of alerting.

(1) (r) ' sea area A4 ' means an area outside sea areas A1, A2 and A3.

(2) All other terms and abbreviations used in this chapter, and which is also defined in the radio regulations, have the meanings specified in the said regulation.

Rule 3 Exceptions (1) the parties consider it greatly desirable that the provisions of this chapter are not waived. However, the Administration may, subject to certain conditions, partial or exempt certain ships from compliance with the requirements of rule 6 to 10 and rule 14 (7), provided that: (1) (a) such ships meets the functional requirements specified in regulation 4; and (1) (b) the Administration has taken into account the consequences which such exceptions may have for the effectiveness of security services for all ships.

(2) an exemption may only be granted in accordance with paragraph (1): (2) (a) if the security conditions are such that it would be unreasonable or unnecessary to require the provisions of regulations 6 to 10 and 14 (7) fully complied with; or (2) (b) If a ship under exceptional circumstances have to make a single journey outside the maritime area or the sea areas, the ship is equipped for.

(3) Any administration should as soon as possible after 1. January each year send the Organization a report containing all exemptions granted in accordance with paragraph (1) and (2) in the preceding calendar year. The report shall include the reasons for the given exceptions.

Rule 4 functional requirements

Every ship shall, when it is in the Lake, be able to: (a) sending ship-to-coast emergency alarms by means of at least two separate and independent methods, anvendende different radio communication systems, with the exception of the methods referred to in regulation 7 (1) (a) (VHF DSC) and rule 9 (1) (d) (iii) (INMARSAT);

(b) to receive the coast-to-ship emergency alarms;

(c) sending and receiving ship-to-ship emergency alarms;

(d) to send and receive communications in connection with co-ordinating search and rescue operations;

(e) to send and receive communications on-the-spot for a rescue operation;

(f) to forward and, as required by regulation X/3 (6), to receive signals for lokalisering3);

(g) to send and modtage4) maritime safety information (MSI);

(h) sending and receiving general radiocommunications to and from land-based radio systems or networks, however, under restriction in accordance with rule 14 (8); and (i) sending and receiving bridge-to-bridge communications.

Section B – requirements for ship

Rule 5 Radio installations (1) every ship shall be fitted with radio installations, which throughout its planned travel is able to meet the functional requirements set out in rule 4. Unless the ship is exempt, pursuant to rule 3, the radio installations comply with the requirements of rule 6 and, according to the marine waters, the ship is expected to pass through on the trip, also the requirements of either rule 7, 8, 9 or 10.

(2) Any radio installation shall: (2) (a) be located so that no harmful noise of mechanical, electrical or other origin interferes with its proper use. The location must also ensure electromagnetic compatibility and avoidance of harmful mutual interference between radio installation and other equipment or systems;

(2) (b) be located so that the greatest possible level of security and availability ensured betjeningsmæssig;

(2) (c) be protected from harmful effects of water, large temperature fluctuations and other adverse environmental conditions;

(2) (d) be provided with reliable, permanent installed electric lighting, which gives enough light for radio installation operating facilities. The lighting system must be independent of the ship power and power; and (2) (e) be clearly marked with the ship's name, call sign, MMSI number and any Inmarsat numbers.

(2) (f)

be provided with a spread by radio installation that allows inexpert guide in during an emergency to start the radio system and send out emergency calls.



(3) operation of the VHF radio telephone channels, which is necessary for safe navigation, must be readily available at the ship's navigating bridge on a convenient place, and space command who must, if necessary, be made for radio connection from brovingerne. Portable VHF equipment may be used for this latter purpose.

(4)

All relevant radio equipment (DSC and Inmarsat) must continuously and automatically be provided with information on the ship's position. The aim is that the position information to be included in the nødalarmeringen when the button or buttons on the nødpanelet is activated.

Rule 6 Radio equipment – General (1) except as specified in rule 8 (4) and rule 9 (4) every ship shall be fitted with: (1) (a) a VHF radio installation capable of both sending which to receive: (1) (a) (i) DSC on frequency 156,525 MHz (channel 70). It must be possible to make removal of the panic alarm on channel 70 from the place from which the ship is normally navigated; and (1) (a) (ii) radiotelephony on the frequencies 156,300 MHz (Channel 6), 156,650 MHz (Channel 13) and 156,800 MHz (channel 16);

(1) (b) a radio installation capable of maintaining a continuous DSC watch on channel 70. This installation can be either separately or be combined with it in paragraph (a) (i) required;

(1) (c) a vessel's radar transponder (SART), who can work in the 9 GHz band, and which: (1) (c) (i) shall be fitted in such a way that it can easily be put into service; and (1) (c) (ii) may be one of the radar transponders that are required for a lifeboat or fleet in accordance with regulation VII/14;

Existing ships with a length of less than 24 metres with a shipping area in sea area A1 is exempted from the requirement for vessel's radar transponder.



(1) (d) a receiver, which is capable of receiving broadcasts in the international NAVTEX service, if the ship is engaged in areas where such service is available;

New ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres in length with speed range in sea area A1 and A2 within the lines East of 6 degrees East longitude in the North Sea and South of 58 degrees north latitude in the Baltic Sea are so far exempt from the requirement of NAVTEX receiver.



(1) (e) a radio system for reception of maritime safety information via INMARSAT's enhanced group call (EGC) system, if the ship is in service within the INMARSAT's catchment area, and an international NAVTEX service is not available. Ships exclusively engaged in areas where a maritime safety information service via HF radio telex is available, and which is equipped with radio equipment capable of receiving such information, may be exempted from the requirement of EGC.

(1) (f) a satellitnødradiopejlsender (satellite EPIRB), which must:
(1) (f) (i) be able to emit a panic alarm either via the polar satellite system operating in the 406 MHz band, or, where the ship exclusively engaged in the INMARSAT-covered area, through the geostationary INMARSAT satellite system operating in 1.6 GHz band;

(1) (f) (ii) be installed in an easily accessible place;

(1) (f) (iii) be ready to be released manually and be so designed that it can be transported by one person to a life raft or boat and placed in this;

(1) (f) (iv) be able to float free of the ship if this sink and could be activated automatically when it flows; and (1) (f) (v) could be activated manually.

Rule 7 Radio equipment-sea area A1.

(1) in addition to the requirements under rule 6 to new vessels of 24 metres in length and over and to existing vessels of 45 metres in length and over, solely engaged in voyages within sea area A1, be fitted with a radio installation that is able to initiate the transmission of ship-to-coast panic alarm from the position from which the ship is normally navigated (secondary alerting method). This radio installation must use either: (1) (a) VHF using DSC; or (1) (b) the polar satellite system on 406 MHz; This requirement can be met by using it in accordance with rule 6 (1) (f) satellite EPIRB, required either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated; or (1) (c) MF using DSC, if the ship is engaged in voyages within coverage of MF coast stations equipped with DSC; or (1) (d) HF using DSC; or (1) (e) INMARSAT's geostationary satellite system; This requirement may be satisfied by equipment with: (1) (e) (i) an INMARSAT ship earth station; or (1) (e) (ii) the satellite EPIRB, required pursuant to rule 6 (1) (f), either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

(2) in accordance with rule 6 (1) (a) required VHF radio installation must also be capable of transmitting and receiving general radiocommunications in the form of radio telephony.

(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of rule 4 (a), however, the Administration may exempt new fishing vessels with a length of 24 metres in length and over but less than 45 metres, in areas within sea area A1 from the requirements of rule 6 (1) (f), provided that they are equipped with a VHF radio installation as described in rule 6 (1) (a) and in addition, a VHF radio installations with DSC for the transmission of ship-to-coast panic alarm as required by regulation 7 (1) (a).

Rule 8 Radio equipment-sea areas A1 and A2 (1), in addition to fulfilling the requirements laid down in rule 6, any ship engaged in voyages outside sea area A1, but that remains within sea area A2, be equipped with: (1) (a) an MF radio installation capable of transmitting and receiving on frequencies: (1) (a) (i) 2187.5 kHz using DSC; and (1) (a) (ii) 2182 kHz using radiotelephony, the safeguarding of distress and safety purposes;

(1) (b) a radio installation capable of maintaining a continuous DSC watch on the frequency 2187.5 kHz; This installation can be separate or grouped with the information referred to in paragraph (a) (i) required; and (1) (c) equipment to initiate the transmission of ship-to-coast panic alarm via another radio system other than MF (secondary alerting method); This equipment must use either: (1) (c) (i) the polar satellite system on 406 MHz; This requirement can be met by using it in rule 6 (1) (f) satellite EPIRB, required either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated; or (1) (c) (ii) HF using DSC; or (1) (c) (iii) INMARSAT's geostationary satellite system; This requirement may be satisfied by equipment with an INMARSAT ship earth station, or with the satellite EPIRB, required in rule 6 (1) (f), either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

New ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres is exempt from the requirement laid down in rule 8 (1) (c) on secondary alerting methods.



(2) It shall be possible to initiate the sending of emergency alarms using the provided for in paragraph (1) (a) and (1) (c) specified radio installations from the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

(3) the ship shall further be able to send and receive general radio communication in the form of radio-telephony or radio telex; the requirement can be fulfilled by equipment with either: (3) (a) a radio installation, using working frequencies in the bands between 1605 kHz and 4000 kHz or 4000 kHz and 27500 kHz between. This requirement may be fulfilled by the equipment, which is required in accordance with paragraph (1) (a), be provided with this option; or (3) (b) an INMARSAT ship earth station.

(4) the Administration may exempt ships constructed before 1. February 1997, which solely engaged in voyages within sea area A2, from the requirements pursuant to rule 6 (1) (a) (i) and 6 (1) (b) on the condition that such ships maintain, when practicable, a continuous lyttevagt on VHF channel 16. This lyttevagt must be kept on the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

Rule 9 Radio equipment-sea areas A1, A2 and A3.

Alternative 1 (1) in addition to satisfy the requirements laid down in rule 6, any ship engaged in voyages outside sea areas A1 and A2 but within sea area A3, if it does not comply with the requirements of paragraph (2), be equipped with: (1) (a) an INMARSAT ship earth station capable of: (1) (a) (i) sending and receiving distress and safety communications using nbdp;

(1) (a) (ii) initiating and receiving panic alarm;

(1) (a) (iii) to maintain watch for coast-to-ship emergency messages, including also such, as shall be directed to specifically defined geographical areas;

(1) (a) (iv) sending and receiving general radiocommunications using either radiotelephony or radio telex; and (1) (b) an MF radio installation capable of transmitting and receiving on frequencies: (1) (b) (i) 2187.5 kHz using DSC; and (1) (b) (ii) 2182 kHz using radiotelephony, the safeguarding of distress and safety purposes;

(1) (c) a radio installation capable of maintaining a continuous DSC watch on the frequency 2187.5 kHz; This installation can be separate or grouped with the information referred to in paragraph (b) (i) required; and (1) (d) equipment to initiate the transmission of ship-to-coast panic alarm via a radio service (secondary alerting method) that you want to use either: (1) (d) (i) the polar satellite system on 406 MHz; This requirement can be met by using it in rule 6 (1) (f) satellite EPIRB, required either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated; or (1) (d) (ii) HF using DSC; or (1) (d) (iii) INMARSAT's geostationary satellite system; This requirement may be met either by equipping with an additional ship earth station or by using the satellite EPIRB required pursuant to rule 6 (1) (f), either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

New ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres is exempt from the requirement laid down in rule 9 (1) (d) on secondary alerting method.

Alternative 2 (2) in addition to the requirements under rule 6, any ship engaged in voyages outside sea areas A1 and A2 but within sea area A3, if it does not comply with the requirements of paragraph 1 shall be equipped with: (2) (a) an MF/HF radio installation capable of transmitting and receiving on all distress and safety frequencies in the bands between 1605 and 4000 kHz and between 4000 and 27500 kHz for distress and safety purposes;

(2) (a) (i) using DSC;

(2) (a) (ii) using radiotelephony; and (2) (a) (iii) using radio telex; and (2) (b) equipment that is able to maintain continuous DSC watch on 2187.5 kHz, 8414.5 kHz, and on at least one of the distress and safety DSC frequencies: 4207.5 kHz, 6312 kHz, 12577 kHz or 16804.5 kHz; It shall at any time be possible to select any of these distress and safety frequencies. This equipment may be separate or combined with the equipment that is required by paragraph (a); and (2) (c) equipment to initiate the transmission of ship-to-coast emergency alarms using a different radio system than HF (secondary alerting method); This equipment must either use: (2) (c) (i) the polar satellite system on 406 MHz; This requirement can be met by using it in rule 6 (1) (f) satellite EPIRB, required either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated; or (2) (c) (ii) INMARSAT's geostationary satellite system; This requirement may be satisfied by equipment with INMARSAT ship earth station either: a; or the satellite EPIRB, required in rule 6 (1) (f), either by remote control by this from, or by installing this close, the position from which the ship is normally navigated; and (2) (d) the ship shall further be capable of sending and receiving general radiocommunications using radiotelephony or radio telex via an MF/HF radio installation, using working frequencies in the bands between 1605 and 4000 kHz and between 4000 kHz and 27500 kHz. This requirement may be satisfied by it in paragraph (a) prescribed equipment supplied with this option.

New ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres is exempt from the requirement laid down in rule 9 (2) (a) (iii) on radio telex equipment and from the requirement laid down in rule 9 (2) (c) on secondary alerting method.
(3) It shall be possible to initiate the broadcasting of panic alarm via the provided for in paragraph (1) (a), (1) (b) (1) (d) (2) (a) and (2) (c) specified equipment from the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

(4) the Administration may exempt ships constructed before 1. February 1997, when they are engaged in voyages exclusively within sea areas A2 and A3, from the requirements pursuant to rule 6 (1) (a) (i) and 6 (1) (b) on the condition that such ships, when practicable, maintain an uninterrupted lyttevagt on VHF channel 16. This lyttevagt must be kept on the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

Rule 10 Radio equipment-sea area A1, A2, A3 and A4 (1) in addition to satisfy the requirements laid down in rule 6, any ship engaged in voyages within all marine areas, be equipped with the radio installations and equipment required by regulation 9 (2) (MF/HF), with the exception that the equipment prescribed in regulation 9 (2) (c) (ii) (INMARSAT) cannot be accepted as an alternative to it in rule 9 (2) (c) (i) (406 MHz) required equipment. In rule 9 (2) (c) (i) prescribed equipment must always be provided. In addition, every ship engaged in voyages within all marine areas, comply with the requirements of regulation 9 (3).

New ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres is exempt from the requirement laid down in rule 9 (2) (c) on secondary alerting method.



(2) the Administration may exempt ships constructed before 1. February 1997, when they are engaged in voyages exclusively within sea areas A2, A3 and A4, from the requirements pursuant to rule 6 (1) (a) (i) and 6 (1) (b) on the condition that such ships, when practicable, maintain an uninterrupted lyttevagt on VHF channel 16. This lyttevagt must be kept on the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

Rule 11 Guard teams (1) every ship shall, when it is in the Lake, maintain a continuous guard: (1) (a) on VHF DSC channel 70, if the ship is equipped with a VHF radio installation required by rule 6 (1) (b);

(1) (b) on the distress and safety DSC frequency: 2187.5 kHz, if the ship is equipped with an MF radio installation required pursuant to rule 8 (1) (b) or rule 9 (1) (c);

(1) (c) on the distress and safety DSC frequencies: 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz and also on at least one of the distress and safety DSC frequencies: 4207.5 kHz, 6312 kHz, 12577 kHz or 16804.5 kHz, depending on the time of day and geographic position of the ship, if the ship is equipped with an MF/HF radio installation required by rule 9 (2) (b) or rule 10 (1). This watch can be kept by means of a receiver that can scan.

(1) (d) for the coast-to-ship emergency messages via satellite, if the ship is fitted with an INMARSAT ship earth station required pursuant to rule 9 (1) (a).

(2) every ship shall, when it is in the Lake, maintain a radio watch on the reception of broadcasts of maritime safety information (MSI) on the relevant frequencies, where broadcasting takes place for just that area the ship finds itself in.

(3) every ship shall, when it is in the Lake, maintain uninterrupted lyttevagt on VHF channel 16 in so far as it is practicable. This watch should be kept on the position from which the ship is normally navigated.

Rule 12 Energy sources (1) When the ship is in the Lake must constantly be sufficient electrical energy available for the operation of radio installations as well as to charge all the batteries, which are used as part of one or more reserve energy sources for radio installations.

(2) in the case of the ship's main source of electrical power fails, and there are one or more reserve sources of energy for the operation of radio equipment for distress and safety communications can be undertaken. Reserve energy source or sources should be capable of simultaneously supplying the following equipment: VHF radio installation required by rule 6 (1) (a), and either: MF radio installation required by rule 8 (1) (a); or MF/HF radio installation required by rule 9 (2) (a) or rule 10 (1); or INMARSAT ship earth station required by rule 9 (1) (a); as well as any of those referred to in paragraph (4), (5) and (8) mentioned the extra loads, for a period of at least: (2) (a) on new ships: (2) (a) (i) 3 hours, or (2) (a) (ii) an hour for ships equipped with an emergency source if this fully meets all the relevant requirements of rule IV/17, including the requirements of being able to supply the radio installations for a period of at least 6 hours; and (2) (b) on existing ships: (2) (b) (i) six hours for ships, which are not equipped with an emergency source, which fully meets all the relevant requirements of rule IV/17, including the requirement to provide the radioinstallationerne5), or (2) (b) (ii) three hours, if the emergency source of electrical power fully comply with the relevant provisions of rule IV/17, including the requirements of being able to supply the radio installations or (2) (b) (iii) an hour, if the emergency power supply fully meets the relevant requirements of rule IV/17, including the requirements of being able to supply the radio installations for a period of at least 6 hours.

Reserve energy source or sources need not supply independent HF and MF radio installations at the same time.

(3) Spare electrical power source or sources must be independent of the ship's propulsion products and of the ship's electrical systems.

(4) where, in addition to the VHF radio installation, can be connected to two or more of the other radio installations referred to in paragraph (2), to spare energy source or sources, this or these be able to simultaneously, during the relevant period as specified in paragraph 2 (a) or 2 (b), to supply the VHF radio installation and: (4) (a) all other radio installations which can be connected to the reserve energy source or sources at the same time; or (4) (b) of the other radio installations that use the most energy, if only one of the other radio installations can be connected to the reserve energy source or sources at the same time as VHF radio installation.

(5) electrical power source or Reserve – the sources can be used to supply it in regulation 5 (2) (d) required electrical emergency lighting.

(6) If one or more reserve energy sources consist of one or more rechargeable battery-batteries: (6) (a) must be found equipment for automatic charging of such batteries; ladeudstyret should be able to charge the batteries to the required minimum capacity within 10 hours; and (6) (b) the battery capacity should be checked by using an appropriate method with no more than 12 months apart. Checks must be carried out while the ship is not in the Lake.

(7) accumulator batteries that constitute a reserve energy source must be positioned and installed in such a way as to ensure: (7) (a) the best possible performance;

(7) (b) a reasonable lifetime;

(7) (c) a reasonable security;

(7) (d) a battery temperature, as well as no load during charging, that is within the specified by the manufacturer; and (7) (e) a general period of fully charged batteries, ensuring that they can operate the necessary equipment in the period specified in paragraph 2 under all weather conditions.

(8) If it is necessary for the proper functioning of a prescribed fixed radio that the plant continuously supplied with data from the ship's navigational equipment or from other equipment, there are means to ensure such a data transfer, if the ship's main source of, as well as power fails.

Rule 13 Functional standards (1) All equipment covered by this chapter shall be of a type approved by the administration. Subject to paragraph (2) should such equipment meet appropriate functional standards, which are not inferior to those adopted by the organisation.

(2) equipment installed before the effective dates set out in rule 1, may, in accordance with the Administration's estimates may be exempted from full compliance with these functional standards. A condition for this is that the equipment is compatible with equipment which meets the functional standards, under due consideration of the guiding criteria, which the Organization had to adopt in connection with such standards.

(3) DSC equipment must be of class A or B DSC equipment. However, in new ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres with a shipping area in sea area A1 and A2 shall be of class A, B or D in the case of VHF-DSC equipment and of class (A), (B) or (E) in the case of MF-DSC equipment.

(4)

Radio equipped in this chapter and in Chapter VII, regulation 13 and 14 must meet either the requirements of Council Directive 96/98/EC of 20. December 1998 concerning equipment on ships, or requirements laid down pursuant to Council Directive 99/5/EC of 9. March 1999 concerning radio telecommunications terminal equipment (R&TTE).

Rule 14 Maintenance (1) the equipment must be designed in such a way that the main units can easily be replaced without elaborate recalibration or realignment.

(2) this device must, to the extent possible, be designed and installed in such a way that it is easily accessible for inspection and maintenance on board.

(3) There must be on Board found sufficient technical documentation for the equipment can be operated correctly and maintained taking into account the relevant recommendations from the IMO.

(4) There shall be provided with sufficient spare parts and tools to the equipment can be maintained.

(5) the Administration should take measures to ensure that radio equipment provided for pursuant to this chapter is maintained so that the functional requirements prescribed in rule 4 are fulfilled and thus to the IMO recommended by functional standards for such equipment are met.
(6) in the case of ships engaged in A1 and/or A2 area ensure the achievement of the functional requirements of rule 4 either by using methods such as: duplication of equipment, shore-based maintenance or opportunity for maintenance during navigation, or by a combination of these methods. The selected methods must be approved by the administration. New ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres is exempt from this provision.

(7) in the case of ships engaged in A3 and A4 area ensure achievement of and/or functional requirements of rule 4 by combination of at least two of the following methods: duplication of equipment, shore-based maintenance or opportunity for maintenance during sailing. Radio telex equipment need not be duplicated. In new ships with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing ships with a length of less than 45 metres required only one of the above methods already in use. The selected combination of methods must be approved by the Administration, taking into account the relevant recommendations from the IMO. The Administration may, however, exempt any ship from the requirement to apply two methods and allow the use of one method, taking into account the type of vessel and its navigability area.

(8) it is necessary to take all reasonable precautions to keep the equipment in operational condition so that the functional requirements of rule 4 is satisfied. A malfunction in the in rule 4 (h) required equipment for General radio communication must, however, not considered to make the ship unseaworthy or to justify the delay in ship Harbour, where there is no easy access to carry out repairs, assuming that the vessel is able to satisfy all distress and safety features.

(9)

Satellite EPIRB'er must:



(9) (a)

be tested at intervals of 12 months (-/+ 3 months) for all matters relating to the operational mode of action, with particular emphasis on control of compromising emanations, at operational frequencies, coding and registration. The test may be carried out on board ship or at an approved test or service station; og6) (9) (b)

for servicing at an approved shore-based maintenance provider, at intervals not exceeding 5 years.

Rule 15 Radio staff

Every ship shall have staff on board who is qualified to perform distress and safety communications to the satisfaction of the administration. This personnel must be holders of the appropriate certificates as specified in the radio regulations, where its provisions are applicable. A particular person among this personnel must be designated to have primary responsibility for radio communications in emergency situations.

Rule 16 Radio records

All events in connection with the radio service, which seems to be of importance to safety of life at sea, must be registered. This registration must be done in a way that is approved by the Administration and which are in accordance with the radio regulations. Registration can be made in the logbook, if such should be carried out.

Annex



Overview of equipment requirements for new fishing vessels with a length of less than 24 metres in length and existing fishing vessels with a length of less than 45 metres in this chapter and in Chapter VII, regulation 13 and 14 on the radio life-saving appliances (portable VHF radio installations) and radar transponders (SART):



Havomr

they were eating









VHF-DSC









MF-DSC









HF-DSC









Inmarsat-C









EPIRB





Float-free









SART





(e))









Portable VHF





(a)









NAV-TEX





(b)











A1









1





 

 

 





1









1/R

(c)









1/R









R











A2









1









1





 

 





1









1









1/R









1/R











A3









1









1









1 or 1









1









1









1/R









1

(d)











A4









1









1









1





 





1









1









1/R









1







 









1 = required equipment



R = recommended equipment



(a)









Fishing vessels with a length of less than 24 metres is exempted from the requirement for portable VHF. The portable VHF radio system is also recommended in these vessels suspended in the wheelhouse ready to bring together with spare battery in the raft in a possibly. emergency.











(b)









There is so far no requirement for a NAVTEX receiver in vessels with navigability area in sea area A2 within the lines East of 6 degrees East longitude in the North Sea and South of 58 degrees north latitude in the Baltic Sea.

The acquisition is recommended.
(c)









Existing fishing vessels with a length of less than 24 metres with a shipping area in sea area A1 is exempted from the requirement of SART. SART'en is also recommended in these vessels suspended in the wheelhouse ready to bring in the life raft for location determination in a possibly. emergency.











(d)









In A3 sea areas where there is no NAVTEX coverage, there is also a requirement for an Inmarsat EGC receiver (built-in in the Inmarsat-C facility).











(e)









Besides 1 SART in the wheelhouse must be when operating in northern regions, see. Chapter XI, regulation 7 fitted 1 SART in all lifeboats, man-overboard-boats and rafts.















Chapter X



CHAPTER X the REASSURANCE Rule 1





The scope of the







Rule 2





Definitions







Rule 3





Exemptions and equivalencies







Rule 4





Navigation warnings







Rule 5





Meteorological services and warnings







Rule 6





Ispatruljetjenesten







Rule 7





Search and rescue operations







Rule 8





Rescue signals







Rule 9





Hydrographic services







Rule 10





Ships ' routing systems







Rule 11





Ship reporting systems







Rule 12





Vessel traffic services







Rule 13





The establishment and operation of AIDS to navigation







Rule 14





Manning







Rule 15





Principles relating to bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment, as well as broprocedurer







Rule 16





Maintenance of equipment







Rule 17





Electro-magnetic compatibility







Rule 18





Approval, inspection, and functional standards for navigation systems and equipment as well as Voyage Data Recorder (VDR)







Rule 19





Requirements for ship-based navigational systems and equipment







Rule 20





Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) – Black box







Rule 21





International Signalbog and IAMSAR manual







Rule 22





Visibility from the wheelhouse







Rule 23





Arrangements for the transfer of pilot







Rule 24





Use of control and/or track control systems







Rule 25





Operation of the steering gear







Rule 26





Styremaskineanlæg – testing and exercises







Rule 27





Nautical maps and nautical publications







Rule 28





Registration of nautical activities







Rule 29





Life-saving signals for use by ships, aircraft and people in need







Rule 30





Operational restrictions







Rule 31





Danger messages







Rule 32





Danger meldingernes content







Rule 33





Emergency messages – obligations and procedures







Rule 34





Safe navigation and avoidance of dangerous situations







Rule 35





Abuse of distress alerts









Rule 36









Lanterns, signal shapes and audible warning devices













This chapter builds on chapter V of the International Convention for the safety of life at sea (SOLAS), whose provisions as a general rule, applies to all ships on all voyages. SOLAS numbering of the rules has been retained in order to make it possible to compare the provisions of this chapter with SOLAS chapter v. Rules is also adapted to fishing vessels.

Rule 1 scope 1 unless explicitly specified elsewhere, this chapter shall apply to all fishing vessels covered by this regulation.

Regulation 2 Definitions

For the purposes of this chapter, the following definitions shall apply: (1) ' Vessel ' means a fishing vessel built, for which the contract for the construction or major renovation 1.1 is entered into before, on or after the specified time, 1.2 in the absence of a building contract, the keel is laid; or

construction identifiable with a specific ship begins; or

Assembly has commenced comprising at least 50 tonnes or 1% of the total estimated weight, if the latter is less at the specified time.

2» Nautical map or nautical publication ' is a specially prepared map or book or a specially prepared database from which such a card or book can be drawn which are issued officially by or under the authority of a Government, an authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant government institution, and which is prepared in order to comply with the requirements for maritime navigation. 1) 3 ' All ships ' means any ship or vessel without regard to the type and purpose.

Rule 3 Exceptions and equivalencies 1
(Rule not fishing ship relevant)



2 the Administration may give exemptions or equivalencies of individual ships partial or conditional character, when such ships are operated on a journey, where the ship's maximum distance from the coast, journey length and nature, the absence of General dangers to navigation and other conditions that affect safety, is of such a nature that the full application of this chapter would be unreasonable or unnecessary, provided that the Administration has taken into account the effect which such exemptions and equivalencies may have on all other fishing vessels safety.

3

(Rule not fishing ship relevant)



SOLAS, chapter V, rules 4-14 on the navigational warnings, meteorological services and warnings, ispatruljetjenesten, search-and-rescue operations, rescue signals, hydrographic services, ships ' routing systems, ship reporting systems, vessel traffic services, the establishment and operation of AIDS to navigation and manning directed mainly against Governments, but are included here for informational purposes for writing in petit fishing industry.

Rule 4 Navigation warnings

Each Contracting Government shall take all necessary steps to ensure that when information about any danger arrives from any credible source, so they must as soon as possible be brought to the knowledge of those to whom they relate, and communicated to other interested Governments. 2)

Rule 5 Meteorological Services and warnings 1 the Contracting Governments undertake to encourage ships in the Lake to collect meteorological information and ensure that this information is examined, broadcast and exchanged in such a way that they come to the greatest possible extent shipping to gode3). Administrations shall promote the use of instruments with great accuracy degree and to facilitate access to the request to have such instruments control tried. The national meteorological service can establish mechanisms ensuring that these controls are at no cost to ship.

2 in particular, the Contracting Governments undertake to cooperate to the fullest extent possible, on the implementation of the following measures: 2.1 meteorological To warn ships about Gale, storms and tropical cyclones by the transmission of information in the text and, as far as practicable, in graphic form, by use of appropriate land-based facilities to terrestrial or space radio communications services.

2.2 at least twice daily through the use of appropriate land-based facilities for Earth-or space-based radiokommunikationstjenester4) to broadcast weather reports suitable for shipping, which provides data, analysis, warnings and predictions of weather, sea and ice conditions. This information must be transmitted in text and, as far as practicable, in graphic form, and include meteorological analysis and forecast maps as facsimile or transmitted in digital form to restore on board the ship's data-processing system.

2.3 preparing and outputting such publications as may be necessary in order to ensure an effective execution of meteorological work at sea and, where practicable, to ensure that broadcast daily weather map for notification for departing ships.

2.4 to care for, to a number of selected ships be equipped with tested meteorological instruments for use in this service (such as a barometer, a barograf, a hygrometer and a suitable apparatus for measurement of increasing seawater temperature), and that they make, detects and transmits meteorological observations on normaltids points for synoptic surface observations (at least four times a day when conditions permit) and encourages other ships , in particular when they are in less crowded waters, to perform, record and send out observations in softened form.

2.5 To encourage shipping companies to involve as many of their ships as practicable in the preparation and registration of weather observations; as well as to transmit these observations using ship's ground-or space-based radio communications products for the benefit of the various national meteorological services.

2.6 To the transmission of these weather observations is done at no cost for that ship.

2.7 To ships, where practicable, be invited to take and transmit their observations with more frequent intervals, when they find themselves in or believes to be in the vicinity of a tropical storm, taking into account the fact that the ship's officers during storm conditions can be heavily preoccupied with the navigation tasks.

2.8 To ensure reception and broadcasting of weather information from and to vessels using the appropriate land-based ground-or space-based radio communications services.

2.9 To encourage all masters to inform both ships nearby as coastal stations when they come out for wind speeds of 50 knots or more (wind force 10 after Beauforts scale (25 m/sec)).

2.10 That seek to provide a uniform approach with regard to the mentioned international weather service and as far as possible, to comply with the technical requirements and recommendations, prepared by the World Meteorological Organization, to which the Contracting Governments may refer any meteorological question which may arise in the implementation of these rules, to treat and opinion.

2.11

It may be imposed on any driver of a Danish ship by recording and forwarding of meteorological observations to contribute to the maintenance of the weather service in the extent required for the reassurance of shipping. The statutory reports further conveyed to the Danish authorities at no cost for that ship.

(3) The information referred to in this rule shall be given in the form and order of priority prescribed in the radio regulations. During the broadcast to all stations» «of meteorological reports, weather forecasts and alerts to all vessels observe the provisions of the radio regulations.

4 weather forecasts, early warnings, as well as synoptic and other meteorological data, intended for ships to be broadcast and disseminated by the national meteorological service, which by its location is best suited to serve the different zones and areas, in accordance with the contracting countries ' mutual agreements, in particular as set out by the World Meteorological Organization drew up the system for the production and dissemination of meteorological forecasts and warnings to the sea within the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS).

Rule 6 Ispatruljetjenesten 1 Ispatruljetjenesten contributes to the safety of life at sea, the safe and efficient navigation and the protection of the marine environment in the North Atlantic. Ships passing through the area with ice, as monitored by ispatruljen in issæsonen, must make use of the services that ispatruljen provide.

2 the Contracting Governments undertake to pursue a ispatrulje and a service for the purpose of study and observation of ice conditions in the North Atlantic. Throughout the issæsonen, IE. in the period from 1. February to 1. July each year, the southeastern, southern and South-western borders of isbjergsområdet near the large Newfoundland banks monitored for the purpose of informing passing ships about the extent of the danger zone, investigating ice conditions in General, as well as provide assistance to ships and crews who need help in the patrol ships and aircraft area. The rest of the year, surveys and observations of ice conditions shall be carried out according to the needs.

3 Ships and aircraft used in the patrol service and for study and observation of ice conditions, can be entrusted to other tasks, provided that these do not interfere with service principal purpose or increases the costs of this service.

4 the United States Government agrees to continue the leadership of ispatruljetjenesten, as well as studies and observations of ice conditions, including the broadcast of the provided information.

5 terms and conditions pertaining to the management, operation and financing of ispatruljen are laid down in the rules for the management, operation and financing of the North Atlantic Ispatrulje, attached to this chapter, and which must be considered as an integral part of the chapter.

6 If the United States and/or the Canadian Government at any time you should wish it, they may cease to provide these services, and the Contracting Governments shall decide the issue of the continuation of these services in accordance with their mutual interests. The United States and/or the Canadian Government must give an 18 months ' written notice to all Contracting Governments whose ships entitled to fly their flag, and if the ships are registered in areas to which these Contracting Governments have expanded their control, and which take advantage of these services before they can cease to deliver these services.

Rule 7 search-and-rescue operations 1 any Contracting Government undertakes to ensure that, within its area of responsibility are necessary measures to present to distress communications and coordination and for the rescue of people in distress at sea along the country's coasts. These measures shall include the provision, operation and maintenance of such maritime search and rescue facilities, which are considered feasible and necessary, in the light of the extent of the seagoing traffic and the dangers that consists of shipping, and must as far as possible, ensure sufficient resources to locate and rescue those people. 5)
2 any Contracting Government undertakes to give information about the search and rescue facilities at its disposal, and whether any plans changes therein.

3 passenger ships, which are covered by chapter I, must have a plan for cooperation with relevant search and rescue services on board for use in the event of an emergency. The plan must be drawn up in cooperation between the shipping company, the ship, as defined in regulation IX/1, and search and rescue services. For the purpose of testing efficiency must plan contain guidelines for the holding of periodic exercises. The plan must be drawn up on the basis of the guidelines that your organization has developed.

Rule 8 Rescue signals

Contracting Governments undertake to ensure that life-saving signals used by the search and rescue services, participating in the search-and-rescue operations, when they are communicating with ships or persons in distress.

Rule 9 Hydrographic Services 1 Contracting Governments undertake to ensure the collection and processing of hydrographic data, as well as publishing, dissemination and updating of all nautical information necessary for safe navigation.

2 in particular, takes on Contracting Governments themselves as far as possible to cooperate in the execution of the following nautical and hydrographic services in a way that is most appropriate to help navigation: 2.1 making sure that hydrographic surveying, as far as possible, correspond to the requirements for safe navigation;

2.2 to prepare and issue nautical maps, sailing directions, tide tables, and other nautical fyrlister publications, where they are available, meets the requirements for safe navigation;

2.3 to publish notices to Seafarers in such a way that navigational charts and nautical publications as far as possible can be kept up to date; and 2.4 to provide data management systems that can support these services.

3 Contracting Governments undertake to ensure the greatest possible uniformity in maps and nautical publications and, when possible, to take account of the relevant international resolutions and recommendations. 6) 4 Contracting Governments undertake to coordinate their activities to the greatest possible extent in order to ensure that hydrographic and nautical information is made available worldwide so quickly, credibly and transparently as possible.

Rule 10 ships ' routing systems 1 ships ' routing systems contributes to the safety of human life at sea, the safe and efficient navigation and/or protection of the marine environment. Ships ' routing systems are recommended for use and can be made mandatory for all ships, certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes, when they are adopted and implemented in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by the organization. 7) 2 Organization is recognized as the only international organization that is entitled to develop guidelines, criteria and rules for ships ' routing systems at international level. Contracting Governments shall refer the proposal for the adoption of ship's routing systems for your organization. The Organization will collect and distribute all relevant information regarding any adopted ships ' routing system to the Contracting Governments.

3 Initiative for measures for the establishment of a ship's routing system is concerned, Government or Governments ' responsibility. In the development of such systems, the provisions of the guidelines and criteria developed by Organisationen8) are taken into account.

4 ships ' routing systems should be forwarded to the Organization for adoption. If one or more Governments introduce ships ' routing systems, which it is not the intention to submit to the organization with a view to the adoption, or which have not been adopted by the Organization, encouraged them to, wherever possible, to take account of the guidelines and criteria developed by the organization. 1) 5 where two or more Governments have a common interest in a particular area, they should formulate common guidelines and proposals for the use of a routing system herein on the basis of a mutual agreement. Upon receipt of such a proposal and before they continued consideration of its adoption, the organisation shall ensure that the proposal in details are forwarded to the Governments that have a general interest in the area, including to countries in the vicinity of the proposed ship's routing system.

6 Contracting Governments must comply with the rules for maritime routes, which are adopted by the organization. They must publish all information necessary for the safe and effective use of ships ' routing systems adopted. Concerned Government or Governments can monitor traffic in these systems. Contracting Governments should do everything in their power to ensure the correct use of ships ' routing systems adopted by the organization.

7 A ship shall use a mandatory ships ' routing system adopted by the Organization as required for its category or its occupants and cargo in accordance with applicable precautions, unless there are compelling reasons not to use a particular ship's routing system. Any such reason shall be recorded in the logbook.

8 Mandatory ships ' routing systems need to be reconsidered by the Contracting Government or Governments in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by the organization. 1) 9 all adopted ships ' routing systems and measures taken to enforce compliance with these systems shall be in accordance with international law, including the relevant provisions of the United Nations Convention on the law of 1982.

10 nothing in this rule or its associated guidelines and criteria must be to prevent the Government's exercise of its rights and obligations under international law or the legal regime in straits used for international navigation, and shipping lanes in archipelagic areas. 9)

Rule 11 Skibsmeldesystemer10) 1 ship reporting systems contributes to safety at sea, the safe and efficient navigation and the protection of the marine environment. A ship reporting system should, when it is adopted and implemented in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by Organisationen11) according to this rule, is used by all ships, certain categories of ships or ships carrying cargoes in accordance with the provisions of each approved system.

2 the organization is recognized as the only international organization that is entitled to develop guidelines, criteria and rules for ship reporting systems at the international level. Contracting Governments shall refer the proposal for the adoption of ship reporting systems for your organization. The Organization will collect and distribute all relevant information regarding any adopted ship reporting system to the Contracting Governments.

3 Initiative for measures for the establishment of a reporting system is part of the Government or Governments ' responsibility. In the development of such systems, the provisions of the guidelines and criteria developed by Organisationen12) are taken into account.

4 ship reporting systems that have not been submitted to the Organization for adoption, should not necessarily be in accordance with this rule. The Governments which puts such systems in force, however, is invited to – where possible – to follow the guidelines and criteria developed by the organisation. 13) Contracting Governments may submit such systems for Organisation for recognition.

5 When two or more Governments have a common interest in a particular area, they have to formulate proposals for a coordinated reporting system on the basis of mutual arrangements. Before a proposal for adoption of a ship reporting system are treated, your organization must send out details of the proposal to the Governments that have a common interest in the area covered by the proposed system. Where a coordinated reporting system be adopted and established, it must have uniform procedures and workflows.

6 after the adoption of a ship reporting system in accordance with this rule, the Government or Governments concerned, take the measures necessary to broadcast the information necessary for the appropriate and effective use of the system. Any adopted ship reporting system should have the opportunity to work with and the ability to assist ships with information when it is required. Such systems must operate in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by Organisationen14) in accordance with this rule.

7 the master of a ship must comply with the requirements of the adopted ship reporting systems and shall provide the appropriate authority with the information which is required in accordance with the rules of each system.

8 all adopted ship reporting systems and measures taken to enforce compliance with these systems shall be in accordance with international law, including the relevant provisions of the United Nations Convention.

9 nothing in this rule or its associated guidelines and criteria must be to prevent the Government's exercise of its rights and obligations under international law or the legal regime in straits used for international navigation, and shipping lanes in archipelagic areas.

10 Ships participation in accordance with the provisions of adopted ship reporting systems shall be at no cost to the ships.

11 the organisation shall ensure that adopted ship reporting systems will be reconsidered, taking into account the guidelines and criteria developed by the organization.

Rule 12 vessel traffic services
1 vessel traffic services (Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)) contributes to the safety of human life at sea, the safe and efficient navigation as well as for the protection of the marine environment, adjacent coastal areas, workspaces and off-shoreinstallationer against possible adverse impacts of the maritime traffic.

2 Contracting Governments undertake to create vessel traffic services, where this is based on an assessment of traffic and hazards in the region justifies the establishment of such services.

3 in connection with the planning and introduction of vessel traffic services, Contracting Governments to the greatest possible extent follow those of the organization drew up recommendations. 15) compulsory use of vessel traffic services can only take place in sea areas within the territorial waters of the coastal State.

4 Contracting Governments shall endeavour, to the ships entitled to fly the flag of the State concerned, participate in and comply with the provisions for maritime trafiksystemerne.

5 nothing in this rule or in the guidelines adopted by the Organization must be to prevent the Government's exercise of its rights and obligations under international law or the legal regime in straits used for international navigation, and shipping lanes in archipelagic areas.

Rule 13 the establishment and operation of AIDS to navigation 1 Each Contracting Government undertakes either alone or in cooperation with other Contracting Governments to ensure the provision of such systems to help for maritime traffic, which, in its view, is reasonable and necessary in the light of the traffic volume and the size of the risk.

2 in order to ensure the greatest possible uniformity in systems to help shipping takes on Contracting Governments to take into account the international recommendations and vejledninger16) in connection with the establishment of such systems.

3 Contracting Governments undertake to ensure that information relating to systems for the convenience of shipping shall be made available to all those to whom they relate. Changes of broadcasts in positioning systems, which can have a negative effect on the impact of shipping receive equipment performance, must be avoided as much as possible and only be undertaken when sufficient time has issued a comprehensive communication on the relationship.

Rule 14 Manning Crew ratio in Denmark is regulated in the law on the ships ' crew and associated regulations.



1 Contracting Governments undertake, each for his own country's ships, to maintain or, if necessary, take measures to ensure that all ships from a safety point of view have a sufficiently large and capable crew. 17) 2 every ship covered by SOLAS, chapter I, (i.e. does not apply to fishing vessels) must be fitted with a crew setting (safe manning document) or equivalent issued by the Administration as evidence of the minimum safety crew that is necessary in order to comply with the provisions of paragraph 1.

3 to be on all ships determined a working language to ensure that crew members can carry out the safety concern in the best possible way. Information about the working language shall be entered in the logbook. The shipping company as defined in SOLAS, chapter IX, rule 1, or master of the ship, whichever is most appropriate, shall determine the appropriate working language. All staff on board must be able to understand and, where appropriate, give orders and instructions and feedback in the appropriate language. If the working language is not an official language in the country, which is the ship's flag State, all prescribed rolls, plans and instructions contain a translation into the working language.

4 On ships covered by SOLAS, chapter I, English is used as working languages on the bridge in connection with bridge-to-bridge and bridge-to-coast safety communication as well as for communications on board between the pilot and the officer in charge of personnel at broen18), unless those who are directly involved in the communication speak a common language other than English.

Rule 15 principles of bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment, as well as broprocedurer

All decisions made with a view to implementation of the requirements laid down in rules 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28 of this chapter and which affect bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment on the bridge and broprocedurer19), must be taken into account for the purpose of: 1 to facilitate the tasks that should be performed by the broholdet and the pilot, in order to obtain a full assessment of the situation and navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions;

2 to promote an efficient and secure broressource management;

3 to enable, to broholdet and the pilot have convenient and continuous access to essential information, which is presented in a clear and easily understandable manner, using standardized symbols and code systems to control panels and screens;

4 to indicate the operational status of automated functions and integrated components, systems and/or sub-systems;

5 to enable a rapid, sustained and effective information processing and decision making of broholdet and the pilot;

6 to prevent or reduce excessive entertaining or unnecessary work and any condition or disorder on the bridge, which can cause fatigue or affect brovagtens and Mandy vigilance; and 7 to limit the risk of human error, and if they occur, see such errors by monitoring and alarm systems so early, to broholdet and the pilot can make appropriate interventions.

Rule 16 Maintenance of equipment 1 There must be sufficient measures in place to ensure that performance is maintained for it equipment, as required in this chapter.

2 While all reasonable steps must be taken to keep the equipment as required in this chapter, in an efficient, workable condition, this error can not be considered equipment mean that the vessel is unseaworthy, or as a basis for delaying the ship in ports where repair facilities are not readily available, provided that the master of the ship shall carry out appropriate measures with regard to the ineffective equipment or they are not available information when planning and executing a safe journey to a port where repairs can be made.

Rule 17 electromagnetic compatibility 1 all electrical and electronic equipment on the bridge or near the bridge of ships built on or after 1. January 2005 or later, to be tested for electromagnetic compatibility, taking into account the recommendations developed by the Organization. 20) 2 electrical and electronic equipment must be installed in such a way that electronic interference does not hinder navigation systems and equipment in to work effectively.

3 portable electrical and electronic equipment must not be used on the bridge, if it can prevent the navigation systems and equipment in to work effectively.

Rule 18 the approval, survey and functional standards for navigation systems and equipment as well as Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) 1 The systems and equipment required to comply with the requirements set out in rule 19 and rule 20 shall be of a type approved by the administration.

2 systems and equipment, including associated back-up arrangements, where these are used, installed the 1. January 2005 or later in order to meet the functional requirements set out in rule 19 and 20, shall be in accordance with appropriate functional standards not inferior to those adopted by the organisation. 21) 3 when the systems and equipment to be replaced or added to ships built before 1 July. January 2005, such systems and such equipment must, as far as is reasonable and practicable, be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2.

4 Systems and equipment installed in advance of the Organization's adoption of functional standards, may, in accordance with the Administration's assessment after the following items shall be exempt from fully to meet such a standard, taking sufficient account of the recommended display criteria adopted by the organization. To an electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) may be recognised to meet the equipment requirements for map in rule 19.1.2.4, however, this system must be in accordance with the relevant functional standards, which may not be lower than those adopted by the Organization and applicable on the day of the installation, or, for systems installed before the 1. January 2005, not inferior to the functional standard that was adopted by the Organization on 23. November 1995.22) 5 Producers shall apply a quality system audited by a competent authority in order to ensure sustained compliance with conditions for type approval. Alternatively, the implementation of an end-product control procedure, where compliance with the type-approval certificate shall be verified by a competent authority before the product is being installed on board the ships.

6 Before approval is given to the systems or equipment containing new features which are not covered by this chapter, it shall be ensured that such properties support features that are at least as effective as those prescribed in this chapter.

7 when the ships, in addition to the requirements set out in rule 19 and 20, equipped with equipment for which the Organization has developed standards for functionality, this equipment is subjected to approval and, so far as practicable, comply with the functional standards not inferior to those adopted by the organisation.
8 the black box data recorder (VDR), including all sensors, shall undergo an annual function test. The test must be carried out by an approved test or service institution in order to verify the accuracy, duration and ability to restore the recorded data. In addition, testing and inspections must be carried out in order to determine the status of all protective enclosures and devices to facilitate localization. A copy of the conformity certificate issued by testsinstitutionen, containing the date of compliance and the associated functional standard, shall be kept on board the ship.

Rule 19 requirements for ship-based navigational systems and equipment 1 Application and requirements



1.1 fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2005 or later must be equipped with navigation systems and equipment which meets the requirements of paragraphs 2.1 to paragraphs 2.9 and paragraph 7.

1.2 Fishing ships built before 1 July. January 2005:1.2.1 subject to the provisions of paragraph 1.2.2 and 1.2.3, and unless they fully comply with the requirements of these rules, still equipped with equipment that meets the requirements of the existing Messages from the Danish maritime authority (E);

1.2.2 equipped with equipment or systems, as required in paragraph 2.1.6 no later than the first survey after 1. January 2005, 1.2.3 equipped with the system prescribed in paragraph 2.4, no later than on the dates set out in paragraph 2.4.2 and 2.4.3; and 1.2.4

equipped with a brovagt alarm in accordance with paragraph 7.



2 ship-based navigation equipment and systems



2.1 All fishing vessels covered by this Regulation shall be: 2.1.1 a properly directed, magnetic head compass or equivalent, independent of any power supply is able to determine the fishing ship's heading and display it at the main steering square;

2.1.2 a bearing-dial, a compass bearing device, or equivalent, independent of any power supply can take sounding of a kimingsbue/horisontbue of 360 °;

2.1.3 funding at any time to correct courses and bearings to true;

2.1.4 nautical maps and nautical publications to plan and display the fishing ship's route on the planned voyage and to plot and record positions throughout the journey; an electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) may be recognised to meet the requirements for map in this provision;

2.1.5 a backup arrangement to meet the functional requirements in the paragraph. 4, provided that this function completely or partly met by means of electronic devices; 23) 2.1.6 a receiver for a global navigation satellite system or terrestrial radio navigation system, or equivalent, that is able to automatically determine and update the fishing ship's position at any time throughout the course of the planned trip;

2.1.7 if fishing ship has a length that is less than 24 m, and if practicable, a radar reflector or equivalent to ensure detection on fishing vessels navigating by radar at both 9 and 3 GHz;

2.1.8 when fishing the ship's wheelhouse is completely closed, and unless the Administration decides otherwise, an lydmodtage system, or equivalent, that puts the officer in charge of the navigation officer able to hear sound signals and determine their direction;

2.1.9 a telephone or corresponding to announce rate information to emergency bulls square, if equipped.

2.2 All fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and above shall, in addition to the requirements set out in paragraph 2.1, to be fitted with a spare magnetic compass 2.2.1: replaceable with the magnetic compass required in paragraph 2.1.1, or similar, that can perform the functions in paragraph 2.1.1 of replacing or duplicating equipment;

2.2.2 a signal lamp or equivalent for use in communication by means of light during the day and at night, using an electrical energy source that is not solely dependent on fishing the ship's power supply.

2.3 All fishing vessels with a length of 36 metres in length and over shall, in addition to the requirements set out in paragraph 2.2, equipped with: 2.3. 1 a sonar or other electronic means to measure and display the available depth of water;

2.3.2 a 9 GHz radar or equivalent means to define and display distance and bearing of radar transponders and of other surface craft, obstructions, buoys, shorelines and navigational marks in order to assist in navigation and collision prevention;

2.3.3 an electronic plotting facility or equivalent to electronically plot the distance and bearing of targets to determine collision risk;

2.3.4 a device (a sign) to the speed and distance travelled through the water or equivalent to display speed and distance travelled through the water;

2.3.5 an adequately adjusted rate transmission facilities or equivalent to disclosure of exchange rate information for the equipment referred to in paragraph 2.3.2, 2.3.3 and 2.4.









Messages E, chapter X, rule 19.2.4 about equipment requirements of Automatic Identification System (AIS) in fishing vessels with an overall length exceeding 15 metres is inserted to indicate the total equipment requirements for covered fishing vessels. The requirement for AIS in fishing vessels established by Executive Order No. 1021 of 26. August 2010 concerning the technical regulation on a Community vessel traffic monitoring and information system in Danish waters and ports, which implements the European Parliament and Council Directive 2002/59/EC establishing a Community vessel traffic monitoring and information system for maritime traffic within the community, as amended by European Parliament and Council directive 2009/17/EC in article 6 bis and annex II, section I, point 3.











2.4 All fishing vessels with an overall length exceeding 15 metres must be equipped with automatic identification System (AIS) that meets the functional requirements of the IMO (class A), as follows: 2.4.1 existing fishing vessels with an overall length of 45 metres in length and over;

2.4.2 existing fishing vessels with an overall length of less than 45 metres, but over 15 meters, as well as fishing vessels built the 30. November 2010 or later, as follows;

2.4.2.1 newly built fishing vessels with an overall length exceeding 15 metres must meet the requirement of equipment from the 30. November 2010;

2.4.2.2 existing fishing vessels with an overall length of 24 metres in length or over but less than 45 metres in length, no later than 31 December. may 2012;

2.4.2.3 existing fishing vessels with an overall length of 18 metres or over, but less than 24 metres, at the latest by 31 March. may 2013; and 2.4.2.4 existing fishing vessels with an overall length exceeding 15 metres but less than 18 metres, at the latest by 31 March. may 2014.

2.4.3 AIS should: provide information that includes automatically 2.4.3.1 fishing ship's identity, type, position, course, speed, navigational status and other safety-related information, for trailers equipped country stations, other ships and aircraft;

2.4.3.2 automatically receive such information from similarly fitted ships;

2.4.3.3 monitor and track ships; 2.4.3.4 and Exchange data with shore-based facilities;

2.4.4 the requirements set out in paragraphs 2.4.3 should not apply in cases where international agreements, rules or standards leads to the protection of navigational information; and 2.4.5 AIS shall be used, taking into account the guidance by the organisation vedtaget24). On ships fitted with an AIS, should this system be in operation at all times except while in international agreements, rules or standards exist regulations on the protection of navigational information.

2.5 All fishing vessels with a length of 45 metres in length and over shall, in addition to meeting the requirements set out in paragraph 2.3, with the exception of paragraph 2.3.3 and 2.3.5, and requirements set out in paragraph 2.4, Garden: 2.5.1 a gyro compass or equivalent to determine and display their course using ship-based non-magnetic means and to transmit information to the course equipped in paragraph 2.3.2 , 2.4 and 2.5.5;

2.5.2 a gyro compass heading repeater, or equivalent, which can deliver visual information to the emergency rate bulls square, if one exists;

2.5.3 a gyro compass mirror-repeater or equivalent to taking sounding of the horizon over an arc of 360  using gyrokompasset or similar as mentioned in the paragraph. 1. Fishing vessels with a length less than 70 metres, however, must only be equipped with these funds, to the extent possible;

2.5.4 rudder, screw, press power, the rate and functional indicators or similar means to determine and display the rudder position, screw revolutions, the force and direction of pressure force and, where appropriate, force and direction of trans-propeller as well as rise, and behavior. All these indicators must be able to read directly from the wheelhouse;

2.5.5 an automatic track function or equivalent to automatically plot the distance and bearing to the other targets to determine collision risk.

2.6 On all fishing vessels with a length of 45 metres in length and over have to error on a single instrument does not restrict fishing ship's capability to fulfil the requirements in paragraphs 2.1.1, 2.1.2 and 2.1.4.

2.7 All fishing vessels with a length of 85 m or more shall, in addition to meeting the requirements set out in paragraph 2.5, Garden: 2.7.1 a 3 GHz radar or, where the Administration considers it appropriate, further a 9 GHz radar or equivalent, which is functionally independent of the referenced in paragraph 2.3.2, to determine and show the distance and bearing to the other surface vessels , obstacles, buoys, shorelines and navigational marks in order to assist in navigation and collision prevention; and 2.7.2 further an automatic track function or equivalent to automatically plot the distance and bearing to the other targets to determine collision risk, which is functionally independent of them, referred to in paragraph 2.5.5.

2.8

(rule not fishing ship relevant)



2.9

(rule not fishing ship relevant)
3 When the words ' or equivalent ' are used in this rule, such solutions must be approved by the Danish maritime authority, in accordance with rule 18.

4 The navigation equipment and the systems referred to in this rule shall be installed, tested and maintained in order to limit the malfunction.

5 Navigation equipment and systems, which allows for alternative behavior, should indicate the current mode of operation.

6 Integrated brosystemer25) must be designed in such a way that the officer responsible for the navigation, immediately made aware of the error in the subsystems by sound-and lysalarmer, like such errors must not lead to errors in other subsystems. When an error occurs in a part of an integrated navigationssystem26), it must be possible to apply anything else individually equipment or parts of the system separately.

7

Ships with the wheelhouse shall be equipped with a brovagts alarm, which as a minimum meet the technical and operational requirements in IMO functional standards

27)

. Those ships must be equipped with brovagts the alarm system in accordance with the following timetable: 7.1

ships built on or after 1. March 2003 or later, by the ship's delivery



7.2

ships built before 1 July. March 2003:



7.2.1

ships with a length of 24 meters or less no later than the 1. March 2004,



7.2.2

ships with a length of 45 metres or less, but over 24 metres by 1. March 2005, and



7.2.2.3

all other ships, by 1. March 2006.



7.3

Ships before the 1. March 2002 was equipped with a brovagts alarm that adequately ensures the guard havendes vigilance, but that does not fully comply with Imo standards, can use this function instead of the required alarm brovagts alarm to the 1. March 2006.



7.4

In ships with self control or routing control system must be connected to the alarm brovagts when this equipment is used. In vessels without self control or routing control system must be connected to the alarm brovagts when the ship is situated outside the port or protected anchorage.

Rule 20 Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) — black box 1 to assist in accident investigations to be fishing vessels with a gross tonnage of 3000 and more built the 1. January 2005 or later, when operating on international travel, IE. a voyage from a country to a port outside that country, or vice versa, or travel between Denmark and the Faroe Islands and between Denmark and Greenland as well as travel between the Faroe Islands and Greenland, equipped with a Voyage Data Recorder (VDR).

Rule 21 International Signalbog and IAMSAR manual 1 All ships with a length of 45 metres in length and over, which, within the meaning of this acquis must be fitted with a radio installation must be equipped with the International Signalbog, as it may be amended by the organisation. Signal book must also be found on any other ship, which, according to the Administration's view, the need to apply it.

(2) all ships shall carry an updated edition of volume III of the International Aeronautical and maritime ' Search and Rescue (IAMSAR) Manual '. 28) 3

Ships with a shipping area outside the restricted vessels (vessels in the North Sea to the East of 3 ° Ø. lgd. and South of 61 ° n. br., as well as in the Baltic Sea and intermediate waters) as well as ships with a navigation area on more than 200 nautical miles from the coast of Greenland must be equipped with a copy of the IMO Maritime communication expression.

29) Rule 22 visibility from the wheelhouse 1 fishing vessels of 24 metres in length and above and built the 1. January 2005 or later must meet the following requirements 1.1 Haze to sea level must not be hidden from the command space longer than either two ship lengths or beyond 500 metres in front of the stævnen30), depending on what had to be at least. This applies in an arc from the right for to 10 ° on either side of the fishing vessel under all conditions of draught, trim and deck cargo;

1.2 No blind sectors caused by cargo, cargo handling equipment or other obstacles in front of the cross outside the wheelhouse, which obstructs the visibility to sea level from the command space, must not exceed 10 °. The total arc of blind sectors shall not exceed 20 °. The visible sectors between blind sectors shall not be less than 5 º. However, each individual blind sector of the visible sectors described in paragraph. 1 does not exceed 5 °;

1.3 The horizontal field of vision from the command space shall extend over an arc that is not less than 225 °, d.v.s. from right of at least 22.5 ° abaft the cross on each side of the fishing vessel;

1.4 From the horizontal field of view of each Mærsk shall extend over an arc of at least 225 °, IE. from at least 45 ° on the opposite side of the bow to the right and from the right for the right intention through 180 ° on the same side of the fishing vessel;

1.5 from the main operating site must the horizontal field of view extend over an arc from the right for to at least 60 ° on each side of the fishing vessel;

1.6 the Fishing ship's page should be visible from brovingen;

1.7 the height of the bottom edge of the control store front Windows above the deck should be kept as low as possible. In no case shall the bottom edge to be an obstacle for the Visual field, as described in this rule;

1.8 the top edge of the control store front Windows should allow visibility beyond the horizon, for a person with an eye level at 1800 mm above the deck from the command square when fishing ship duver in severe seas. The Administration may allow a reduction of eye height, if it is satisfied that an eye altitude of 1800 mm is unreasonable and impractical, but in no case to less than 1600 mm;

1.9 Windows must comply with the following requirements: 1.9.1 to avoid reflections must control the House's front Windows pour with the top outward at an angle with the vertical level of between 10 ° and 25 °;

1.9.2 Crossbars between wheelhouse Windows shall be at its narrowest possible and must not be placed immediately in front of a workstation;

1.9.3 There do not mount polarized and tinted Windows;

1.9.4 must always, regardless of weather conditions, be a clear view through at least two front Windows of the wheelhouse. Depending on the bridge device to further a number of Windows bear funds, which ensures clear view.

1a. New fishing vessels with a length of 15 m or more but less than 24 metres, shall comply with the provisions of paragraph 1 of this article or the provisions of Messages from the Danish maritime authority F, chapter X, rule 6 on visibility from the steering station.

2 fishing vessels built before 1 January 1995. January 2005 shall, if practicable, meet the requirements set out in paragraphs 1.1 and 1.2. However, constructive changes or additional equipment not necessarily.

3 On fishing ships of unconventional design, which, according to the Administration's estimates cannot satisfy this rule, must take steps to achieve a degree of visibility, which is as near as practicable by it in this rule required.

Rule 23 Events for the conveyance of pilotage 1 Application



1.1 fishing vessels engaged in trades where there is the possibility that the pilot will be used, shall be provided with arrangements for the transfer of the pilot.

1.2 Equipment and arrangements for the conveyance of pilotage, which installed the 1. January 2005 or subsequently, shall comply with the provisions of this rule, and take due account of standards adopted by the organization. 31) 1.3 Equipment and arrangements for the transfer of the pilot, which is installed in fishing vessels before the 1. January 2005, must at least comply with the provisions of rule 17 of the International Convention for the safety of life at sea, 1974, which was in force prior to that date, and which must take due account of the standards, which were adopted by the organization prior to that date.

1.4 Equipment and events, which are replaced after the 1. January 2005, shall comply with the provisions of this rule, if it is reasonable and practicable.

2 General



2.1 All arrangements used for the conveyance of pilots, must effectively fulfil their purpose, which is to put pilots able to get safely on board and off the vessel. The equipment must be kept clean, properly maintained and stowed, and it must be inspected regularly to ensure that it is safe to use. The equipment must only be used for embarkation and disembarkation of personnel.

2.2 Tilrigningen of events to the conveyance of pilotage and the embarkation and disembarkation of pilots should be supervised by a responsible officer who has the means to communicate with the ship's bridge, and who must ensure that the pilot escorted to and from the bridge at a safe route. Personnel engaged in rigging and operating mechanical equipment shall be instructed in the safe procedures to be followed and the equipment must be tested before use.

3 Transfer arrangements



3.1 there shall be arrangements which puts the pilot able to go safely on board and ashore on both sides of the fishing ship.

3.2 in all fishing vessels, where the distance from the water surface to the access point or the end from fishing the ship exceeds 9 m, and where the intention is to take pilots on board or acknowledge pilots using fall rope, using mechanical pilot hoists or other equally safe and convenient means in conjunction with a pilot ladder, fishing vessel equipped with such equipment on both sides unless the equipment can be transferred to and used on both sides.

3.3 There must be provided secure and convenient access to and exit from the fishing ship by either: 3.3.1 a pilot ladder, which assumes that the distance you have to climb, not shorter than 1.5 m and no longer than 9 m above the surface of the water, and which is so arranged and fastened: 3.3.1.1 it is clear of all discharges from fishing ship;

3.3.1.2 the is placed within the parallel midship party and, as far as possible, within a quarter of a length in front or aft of the fishing ship's agent frame;
3.3.1.3 that each step rests firmly against the ship's side; where constructs like URf.eks. fenders would prevent the implementation of this rule must take special precautions to the satisfaction of the Administration to ensure that people are able to get safely on board and off the vessel;

3.3.1.4 to a single ladder length can reach the water from the place of entry to or exit from the fishing vessel, and who are duly taken into account all fishing vessel loading and trimkonditioner and opposite heeling up to 15 °; tie-down bracket, shackles and surringsreb should at least be as strong as pilotage lejderens side ropes;

3.2 a faldereb in conjunction with a pilot ladder or other equally safe and convenient means, when the distance from the water surface to the access point at the fishing ship is more than 9 metres. Drop the rope must be placed so that it's looking aft. When used, the lower end of the drop the rope rest firmly against the ship's side within the parallel midship party and, as far as possible, within a quarter of a length in front or aft of the fishing ship's medium frame and clear of all discharges; or a mechanical pilot hoist that 3.3 is positioned so that it is within the parallel midship party and, as far as possible, within a quarter of a length in front or aft of the fishing ship's medium frame and clear of all aftømninger.

4 access to the fishing ship's deck



4.1 There shall be means to ensure safe, convenient and unobstructed passage for any person embarking or disembarking, between the top of the pilot ladder, a faldereb or other equipment and fishing ship's deck. Where such passage is established by means of: 4.1 a port in the railing or coaming must be provided adequate hand grips;

4.2 a wage ladder, there must be mounted two sceptre, solidly secured to the ship's structure at or near their fish foot and places higher up. Payroll ladder shall be securely fastened to the fishing ship to prevent it from tipping over.

5 Doors in the ship's side Doors in the ship's side, which is used in connection with the conveyance of pilotage, do not open outwards.

6 Mechanical pilot hoist



6.1 The mechanical pilot hoist and its associated equipment must be of a type approved by the administration. Pilot hejsen must be built to serve as a movable ladder that lifts and lowers a person along the ship's side, or as a platform that lifts and lowers by one or more persons along the ship's side. It must be designed and constructed in such a way as to ensure that the pilot can be taken on board and acknowledged in a secure manner, including the fact that there is a secure adkomstvej from hejsen to the deck and vice versa. Such title shall be obtained directly via a platform, which is probably protected by railings.

6.2 There shall be provided an effective hand drive for lowering or lifting person or persons at hejsen. Hand operated must be kept ready for use in the event of loss of power supply.

6.3 Hejsen must be attached solidly to the fishing vessel's structure. Fastgøringen must not be alone to fish the ship's payroll railing. For the lifting of the portable type shall be on each side of the fishing vessel be proper and strong attachment points.

6.4 If the fenders are in the way of the hoist position, such fenders is reduced sufficiently to that hejsen can run along the ship's side.

6.5 near hejsen, a pilot ladder tilrigges and be ready for immediate use, thus providing access to it from hejsen in any position on his route. Pilot ladder should be able to reach sea level from its own point of access to fishing vessel.

6.6 The position on the ship's side where hejsen be lowered down, must be specified.

6.7 There must exist an adequate protected stowage position for a portable pilot hoist. In very cold weather, a portable hoist should not be rigged to, before immediately before it is to be used, in order to avoid the danger of ice formation.

7 associated equipment



7.1 the following associated equipment must be kept ready for immediate use when persons are transferred: 7.1. 1 two ' man-ropes ', no less than 28 mm in diameter, and which is securely attached to the fishing vessel, if the pilot requires it;

7.1.2 a lifebuoy equipped with lifebuoys lights;

7.1.3 a throwing line.

7.2 where required in paragraph 4, must be found sceptre and a payroll ladder.

8 Lighting 8.1 there shall be sufficient light to illuminate the transfer arrangements over the side, the place on the deck where a person goes on board or disembarked, and the operation of the mechanical pilot hoist.

Rule 24 use of control and/or track control systems 1 in waters with high traffic density, in conditions of reduced term and in all other dangerous situations for the voyage to it when it makes use of self control and/or track control systems, be possible to instantly establish manual control of the fishing ship's management.

2 in circumstances such as those mentioned above, it must be possible for the OOW immediately to be able to make use of a qualified coxswain, who at all times must be ready to take control.

3 Switching from automatic to manual steering and vice versa shall be carried out by or under the supervision of a responsible officer.

4 the manual control must be tested after prolonged use of the automatic control, and before the ship enters fish in areas where navigation demands special caution.

Rule 25 operating the steering gear

In areas where navigation demands special caution, must be more than one drive unit for styremaskineanlægget be started when these aggregates can be used simultaneously.

Rule 26 Styremaskineanlæg – testing and exercises 1 within 12 hours before the departure of the vessel to fish its styremaskineanlæg controlled and tested by the ship's crew. The test shall include, where appropriate, the operation of the following: 1.1 hovedstyremaskineanlægget;

1.2 reservestyremaskineanlægget;

1.3 control-command systems;

1.4 managing positions in the wheelhouse;

1.5 nødenergiforsyningen;

1.6 rorvinkel indicators in relation to the actual position of the rudder;

1.7 alarmers function by failure of energy supply to the control-command systems;

1.8 alarmers function upon failure of the driving aggregates to styremaskineanlæg; and 1.9 automatically-acting devices, and other automatic equipment insulation.

2 Controls and testing should include: 2.1 the rudder full motion in accordance with the required capacity of the styremaskineanlægget;

2.2 Visual inspection of styremaskineanlægget and its liaison; and 2.3 function of means of communication between the wheelhouse and styremaskinerummet.

3.1 Simple operating instructions with a block diagram showing the procedure for switching between control-command systems and drive units at styremaskineanlæg, must be permanently posted in the wheelhouse and in the styremaskinerummet.

3.2 All ship officers who are dealing with the operation and/or maintenance of styremaskineanlæg, must be familiar with the function of the control systems from the fish vessel and with the procedure for switching from one system to another.

4 in addition to the prescribed in paragraphs 1 and 2, routine inspection and testing must be carried out nødstyrings exercises at least once every three months in order to practise nødstyrings procedure. These exercises should include direct control from within the styremaskinerummet, the communication with the wheelhouse and, where appropriate, the use of alternative energy supplies.

5 the Administration may waive the requirement of implementation specified in paragraph 1 and paragraph 2 provided for control and testing for fishing vessels that go in regular speed on short journeys. Fishing vessels that make regular trips of less than 12 hours and with a port stay of less than 12 hours between trips, are exempted from the requirement to carry out the prescribed in paragraphs 1 and 2, control and testing. Such fishing vessels shall carry out such supervision and testing at least once a week.

6 the date of implementation of the inspections provided for in paragraphs 1 and 2 and testing as well as the date for the holding of nødstyrings exercises, in accordance with paragraph 4 shall be recorded.

Rule 27 Nautical maps and nautical publications

Nautical maps and nautical publications, such as sailing manuals, fyrlister, notices to Mariners, tide tables and any other nautical publication, which is necessary for the intended voyage shall be adequate and up to date.

Rule 28 Registration of nautical activities

Reference is made to the notice on ship books and logbook.

All ships employed on international travel, on Board of the ship register nautical activities and events of importance for navigation safety, and this registration must be sufficiently detailed to represent a complete description of the voyage, taking into account the recommendations adopted by the organization. 32) When such information not be entered in the logbook, they must be carried out in a different form approved by the administration.

Rule 29 life-saving signals for use by ships, aircraft and people in need

An illustrated overview that describes redningssignalerne33), must be easily accessible to the officer in charge of officer on every ship covered by this chapter. The signals to be used by ships or persons in distress when communicating with life-saving stations, maritime rescue units and aircraft engaged in search and rescue operations.

Rule 30 Operational restrictions (rule not fishing ship applicable) Rule 31 Hazard reports
1 it is the responsibility of the master of every ship which meets ice or debris of dangerous nature or any other immediate danger to navigation or tropical storm, or exposed to air temperatures below freezing in connection with Gale, which causes severe ice formations on superstructures, or winds of force 10 (24-28 m/sec.) or higher after Beaufort's scale, as there is no received storm warning , to give the message to that effect by using all the means at his disposal to ships in the vicinity, as well as to the competent authorities. The form in which the message is given, is not mandatory. It can broadcast either in clear language (preferably in English) or by the use of the international signalbog.

2 any Contracting Government must take all necessary measures to ensure that a received message about some of the dangers referred to in paragraph 1, shall immediately be brought to correct his or her knowledge and sent to other interested Governments.

3 transmissions of messages about the dangers of going on without cost for the ships concerned.

4 All radio messages broadcast in accordance with paragraph 1 shall be preceded by the safety signal using the procedure prescribed in the radio regulations, as defined in chapter IV, rule 2.

Rule 32 Danger meldingernes content

Danger messages must contain the following information: 1 ice cream, wrecks and other direct dangers to navigation: 1.1 nature of the observed ice, wreck or danger.

1.2 N, wreck or his father's position at the recent observation.

1.3 date and time (Universal Co-ordinated Time) for the last sighting of the danger.

2 Tropical storms: 34) 2.1 a message that you have encountered a tropical storm. The obligation to deliver such a message should be interpreted very widely, and the message should be emitted as soon as the driver has good reason to believe that a tropical storm is under development or occur nearby.

2.2 date and time (Universal Co-ordinated Time) as well as the ship's position at the time of the observation.

2.3 as possible of the following information should be included in the message:

-barometerstand35), preferably corrected (expressed in millibars, millimetres or inches, with an indication of whether the reading is corrected or not);

-barometerets trend (barometer the change during the last three hours);

-wind direction, set true;

-wind strength (Beauforts scale);

-Sea State (bit of SN (smooth), moderate (moderate), high (rough), severe (high));

-swell (call (slight), moderate (moderate), severe (heavy)) and the direction from which it comes, set true. Dønningens period or length (short (short), mean (average), a long (long)) will also be of interest;

-the ship's true course and its speed.

Later observations 3 When a driver has issued announcement of a tropical or other dangerous storm, it is desirable, but not mandatory, that then made and distributed observations, if possible, every hour, but at least with not more than three hours, as long as the ship is under the storm's impact.

4 Winds of force 10 (25 m/sec.) or higher after Beaufort's scale, as there is not received the storm warning for. Examples could include other storms than those referred to in paragraph 2, the tropical storms. When one encounters such a storm, should contain information such as the report under paragraph 2 above, but without the details of sea and swell.

5 Air temperatures below freezing in connection with Gale, which causes severe ice formations at superstructures: 5.1 date and time (Universal Co-ordinated Time).

5.2 Ambient temperature.

5.3 increasing seawater temperature (if possible).

5.4 wind speed and wind direction.

Examples of ice

TTT ICE. LARGE BERG SIGHTED IN 4506N, 4410W, to 0800 UTC. April 24.

Wreck

TTT DERELICT. OBSERVED DERELICT ALMOST SUBMERGED IN 1243 W, N, 4006 to 1630 UTC. APRIL 21.

Danger to navigation

TTT NAVIGATION. ALPHA LIGHTSHIP NOT ON STATION. 1800 UTC. JANUARY 3.

Tropical storm

TTT STORM. 0030 UTC. AUGUST 18. 2004 N E BAROMETER CORRECTED 994 000 11354, BARS, TENDENCY DOWN 6 THOUSAND BARS. WIND NW, FORCE 9, HEAVY SQUALLS. HEAVY EASTERLY SWELL. COURSE 067, 5 KNOTS.

TTT STORM. APPEARENCES INDICATE APPROACH OF HURRICANE. 1300 UTC. SEPTEMBER 14. 2200 N, 7236 w. BAROMETER CORRECTED 29.64 INCHES, TENDENCY DOWN. 015 INCHES. WIND NE, FORCE 8, FREQUENT RAIN SQUALLS. COURSE 035, 9 KNOTS.

TTT STORM. CONDITIONS INDICATE INTENSE CYCLONE HAS FORMED. 0200 UTC. MAY 4. 1620 N 9203 e., BAROMETER UNCORRECTED 753 MILLIMETRES, TENDENCY DOWN 5 000 METRES METRES. WIND W, FORCE 5 CITY S. COURSE 300, 8 KNOTS.

TTT STORM. TYPHOON TWO SOUTHEAST. 0300 UTC. June 12. 1812 N, 12605 e. BAROMETER FALLING RAPIDLY. WIND INCREASING FROM N.

TTT STORM. WIND FORCE 11, NO STORM WARNING RECEIVED. 0300 UTC. MAY 4. 4830 N, 30 w. BAROMETER CORRECTED 983 000 BARS, TENDENCY DOWN 4 MILLION BARS. WIND SW, FORCE 11 VEERING. COURSE 260, 6 KNOTS.

Ice accretion

TTT EXPERIENCING SEVERE ICING. 1400 UTC. MARCH 2. 69 N, 10 w. AIR TEMPERATURE 18 ° f (-7.8 ° c). SEA TEMPERATURE 29 ° f (-1.7 ° c). WIND NE, FORCE 8.

Rule 33 emergency messages – obligations and procedures 1 every master, as in Lake receives a signal from any source that persons are in distress at sea, and is able to provide assistance, is obliged to in the biggest hurry to get them to the rescue and, as far as possible inform them or search-and-rescue service that he does this. If the ship, receiving distress alert, are not able to or even after the special circumstances considers it unreasonable or unnecessary to come to the rescue of persons in distress, they must master in the logbook introduce reason not to go to the rescue and in accordance with the Organization's recommendations to inform the concerned search and rescue service to that effect.

(2) the master of a ship in distress or search and rescue service has the right to, as far as possible after consultations with the masters of the ships, which have responded to the emergency signal, select one or more of the ships, as the master of the ship in distress or search-and-rescue service considers to be best suited to provide aid, and the driver or drivers of it or the ships concerned are obliged to comply with the request by as quickly as possible to get the distressed people to help.

3 masters of ships are released from the obligation incumbent on them pursuant to paragraph 1 of this rule, when they become aware that their ship has not been selected to provide assistance, and to one or more other ships that have been selected to provide help after coming request for help. This position must, as far as possible, be disseminated to the other ships, which are selected to provide assistance, and to search-and-rescue service.

4. The master of a ship is freed from the duty incumbent upon him in accordance with paragraph 1 of this rule, and if the ship has been chosen to provide aid, from the duty incumbent on him pursuant to the provisions in paragraph 2 of this rule, if he of the distressed persons or by search-and-rescue service or by the driver of another ship who have come to these people, get notification of that aid is no longer required.

5 the provisions of this rule shall be without prejudice to the International Convention on the establishment of uniform rules for assistance and salvage at sea, which was signed in Brussels on 23 July. September 1910, in particular with regard to the obligation laid down in the said article 11 of the Convention to provide assistance. 36)

Rule 34 safe navigation and avoidance of dangerous situations 1 Before the journey begins, the driver must ensure that the proposed travel is adequately planned, using the necessary nautical maps and nautical publications for the area in question, taking into account the guidelines and recommendations produced by the organization. 37) 2 Itinerary must describe a route that takes into account any relevant: 2.1 ship's routing system;

2.2 ensures that there is enough space to maneuver, the ship can make secure passenger during the entire journey;

2.3 anticipates all known dangers to navigation and bad weather; and 2.4 takes account of the measures applicable for the protection of the marine environment, and as far as possible avoid actions and activities that can result in damage to the environment.

(3) the owner or shipper or the shipping company as defined in regulation IX/1, which operates the ship, or any other person shall not prevent master from taking or executing any decision which, in the master's professional assessment is necessary for safe navigation and protection of the marine environment.

Rule 35 Abuse of distress alerts

It is prohibited to use an international distress signal, except in order to indicate that a ship, an aircraft or a person is in distress, and the use of a signal, which may be mistaken for an international distress signal.

Rule 36 Lanterns, signal shapes and audible warning devices



1 every ship shall be equipped with lanterns, signal shapes and audible in the extent that it is able to meet the requirements of the international regulations. Signal shapes ' construction and sound signal apparatus efficiency and installation on board must be in accordance with the international regulations as well as with the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative provisions.

2

Ships outside nærfart, ships outside 120 nautical miles from the Faroe Islands and ships outside the 100 nautical miles from Greenland shall be provided with a set of spare lanterns for the top-, side-, and ankerlys, which intends is prescribed for that size of ship. In new ships must be firmly connected to the ship's lanterns reserve source of electrical power.

3

Lanterns and audible warning devices shall be of an approved type and comply with the provisions of the international regulations.
Chapter XI



CHAPTER XI REGIONAL and LOCAL PROVISIONS (A).









Provisions applicable to ' Northern ' regional









1.





The scope of the







2.





Definitions







3.





Regulation III/7, paragraph 1 (operating conditions)







4.





Regulation III/8 (ice accretion)







5.





Regulation VII/5, paragraph 2 (b)), and (3) (b))





 



(Number of survival craft and rescue boats and their-kind)







6.





Regulation VII/9 (immersion suits and thermal protective AIDS)







7.





Regulation VII/14 (vessel's radar transponder)







8.





Regulation VII/25 (immersion suits)







9.





Regulation X/3, paragraph 7 (Radar installations)







10.





Regulation X/5 (signalling equipment)





 

 







(B).









Glædende for ' Southern ' regional provisions 1.





The scope of the







2.





Regulation VII/B19, paragraph. In (Immersion Suits)







3.





Rule IX/1 (Radio communications)











(Annex III) Regional and local provisions (article 3, paragraph 3, and article 4, paragraph 1)

A. provisions applicable to ' Northern ' regional

1. Scope of application

Unless otherwise specified, the waters north of the border as shown on the map in the appendix to this Annex except for the Baltic Sea. The limit is determined by the 62 ° North latitude from Norway's West Coast to 4 ° West longitude, then 4 ° West longitude to 60 ° 30 ' North latitude, then 60 ° 30 ' n to 5 ° West longitude, then 5 ° West longitude of 60 ° North latitude, then 60 ° North latitude to 15 ° West longitude, then 15 ° to 62 ° North latitude West longitude, then 62 ° North latitude to 2 ° West longitude , then 27 ° West longitude to 59 ° North latitude and then 59 ° North latitude on the West.

2. Definitions

By heavy drift ice, drift ice covering means 80% or more of sea level.

3. Regulation III/7, paragraph 1 (operating conditions)

In addition to the specific operating conditions set out in regulation III/7, paragraph 1, there shall also be carried out calculation of the following conditions: 3. e) condition b), c) or (d)), whichever produces the lowest value for the parameters in the stability criteria listed in regulation 2, taking into account the icing as stated in regulation III/8 3. f) for ships to purse-seine fishing : departure from the fishing ground with the fishing gear, no catch and 30% bunkers, taking into consideration the icing as stated in regulation III/8.

4. Regulation III/8 (ice accretion)

The specific requirements of regulation III/8 and the specific guidelines set out in recommendation No. Torremolinos‑konferencens 2 used within the region concerned, i.e. also outside the limits indicated on the attached map of that recommendation.

Notwithstanding the provisions of regulation III/8, paragraph 1, point (a)) and (b)), should the calculation of stability of vessels operating in the area north of 63 ° North latitude and between 28 ° West longitude 11 ° West longitude, and is recognised the following supplements for ice cream: 4. a) 40 kg per square metre on exposed weather decks and serial bridges 4. b) 10 kg/m2 on the projected lateral area of waterline in both sides of the ship.

5. Regulation VII/5, paragraph 2 (b)), and (3) (b)) (number of survival craft and man-overbord‑både and their art)

Notwithstanding the provisions of regulation VII/5, paragraph 2, point (b), paragraph 3, point (b), and paragraph 33, applies to fishing vessels whose hull is built to meet a recognized organization's rules for sailing in waters with heavy drift ice, see. rule 11/1, paragraph 2, of the annex to Torremolinos‑protokollen al 1993, that of regulation VII/5, paragraph 2, point (b), paragraph 3, point (b), and paragraph 3a) ((b) required man-overbord‑både and rescue boats must be at least partially closed (as defined in regulation VII/181) and have sufficient capacity to absorb all of the occupants.

6. Regulation VII/9 (immersion suits and thermal protective AIDS)

Notwithstanding the provisions of Regulation VI/9 for each person on board must be an approved rescue suit of an appropriate size, complying with the provisions of regulation VII/25, including those in connection with this rule listed Add-ons listed in this annex, point 1.8.

7. Regulation VII/14 (vessel's radar transponder)

In addition to the provisions of Chapter VII, part B, all lifeboats, man-overbord‑både and life-rafts shall be equipped with an approved vessel's radar transponder, which must be able to work in 9 GHz‑båndet.

8. Regulation VII/25 (immersion suits)

Notwithstanding the provisions of regulation VII/25 all immersion suits required in section 1.6, on the whole, be made of a material with built-in isolation and also meet the buoyancy requirements of regulation VII/24, paragraph 1, point (c) (3). (i) All other relevant requirements of regulation VII/25 must also be met.

9. Regulation X/3, paragraph 7 (Radar installations)

Notwithstanding the provisions of regulation X/3, paragraph 7, requires all ships with a length of 24 metres and above be equipped with a radar facility that is approved by the administration. The radar installation shall be capable of operating in the 9 GHz‑båndet.

10. Regulation X/5 (signalling equipment)

In addition to the provisions of regulation X/5 requires all ships working in waters where drift ice may occur, be equipped with at least one searchlight with a brightness of at least 1 lux, measured at a distance of 750 m.

B. provisions applicable to ' Southern ' regions

1. Scope of application

The Mediterranean Sea and the coastal areas within 20 nautical miles from the coast of Spain and Portugal in the Atlantic summer zone, as defined in lasteliniezonekortet (Chart of zones and seasonal areas) in Appendix II to the international load line Convention of 19661) with later amendments.

2. Regulation VII/B19, paragraph. In (Immersion Suits)

In view of the provisions of the same Regulation (4) the following sentence shall be added to paragraph 1:

» For vessels with a length of less than 45 m need be only two immersion suits. '

3. Rule IX/1 (Radio communications)

There shall be inserted the following new paragraph 1 bis:

' This chapter shall also apply to new vessels of 24 metres in length and over, provided that their Shipping area is suitable covered by coastal stations operating in accordance with IMO Master Plan. '





Chapter XII



KAPITEL XII

OPHOLDSRUM M.V.1)







 

 







Regel 1









General provisions, equivalences and derogations











Rule 2









Location and construction times and starting conditions











Rule 3









Lighting and heating











Rule 4









Ventilation and air conditioning systems











Rule 5









Bedrooms, floor area, free height, bunks and furniture
Rule 6









Dining, galley-and proviantrum, as well as drinking water plants











Rule 7









Toilets, showers and laundry room, etc.











Rule 8









Sygerum and hoisting stretcher, etc.













This chapter shall apply to new fishing vessels built after 1 July. August 2007. Regulation 4 (4) (a) on air conditioning systems shall apply to all fishing vessels.

Rule 1 General provisions, equivalences and derogations



(1)

Definitions



(1) (a)

» Living room ': Includes sleeping rooms, dining rooms, sygerum, galley, times in accommodation and space for sanitary installations.

(1) (b)

» Officers ': Track men, machine-masters, telegraphers, best men and other members of the overall crew, driver excepted.

(1) (c)

» Shipping services ' or ' crew ': Includes all persons who are employed on board, apart from the driver.

(1) (d) ' steel ': also includes iron and corresponding suitable materials.

(2) Equivalence



The provisions contained in this chapter may be made subject to authorization by the Administration generally, in so far as it negotiated with the fishing industry organizations are satisfied that the proposed deviation offer equivalent benefits, so that the ordinary terms no less favourable than those which would result from the full implementation of the relevant provisions.



(3)

Deviations



(3) (a)

In ships with a length (L) less than 24 m will the Administration, taking into account the individual ship present special circumstances could grant derogations from the provisions of the present regulations, taking into account in particular the ship's size and use.



(3) (b)

On ships, which are usually away from their home for a period of less than 36 hours, and when the crew did not have permanent residence on board when the vessel is in port, there will be accorded to deviations from provisions in rules 5, 6 and 7. In such ships must, however, adequate sanitation and the option for the storage of such supplies as well as for the preparation and consumption of meals, and there must be a relaxation room with the opportunity to lie down.

(3) (c)

On ships of 24 metres in length and over, the Administration may permit derogations from rules 2-5 and 7-8, when it negotiated with the fishing industry employers ' and workers ' organisations, where such exist, is satisfied that the proposed changes offer equivalent benefits, and thus to the ordinary terms no less favourable than those which would result from the full implementation of the provisions. And when conditions taking into account the specific circumstances of the individual ship present, moreover, had to fix this.

(4) approval and survey



(4) (a)

To use for the Administration's approval, etc. must be for all new ships are submitted drawings and information on the ship's navigability area and expected gross tonnage and the number and distribution by categories of crew members. The drawings must show the seating compartments location, size and layout of the site, the use and placement of furniture and accessories as well as arrangement of heating, ventilation, the starting conditions, etc.

(4) (b)

Corresponding drawings and information must be submitted to the Administration first rest rooms in an existing ship change or nyindrettes.



(4) (c)

Carried out a complete vision of the living room, etc., before the ship is put in service.



(4) (d)

Carried out a complete vision or a partial vision, depending on the circumstances after a major repair or renovation, which result in significant changes to the rest rooms.



(4) (e)

The administration or a recognized organization authorized by the Administration may at any time carry out unannounced supervision with rest rooms on board.



(5)

Storage of goods, etc.



(5) (a)

In rest areas must not store toxic, flammable or malodorous substances.



(5) (b)

In rest areas must not be affixed to goods or supplies which are not the personal property of crew members. However, in ships with a length (L) less than 24 metres in length, when it does not result in danger or inconvenience for the crew, in connection with living room decorated for a special room or closet allowed for storage of ship's equipment, with the exception of the in rule 1 (5) (a) referred to in art.

(6)

Paint



Rest rooms, corridors and kabysrum must be kept in bright colors. Surface treatment, which rubs off when touched, do not use Rule 2 location and construction times and starting conditions



(1)

Location, etc.



(1) (a)

Rest rooms shall be situated either below deck or in solid and dense structures, and access to them in relation to other spaces must provide adequate security, protection against weather and sea, as well as insulation against heat and cold, undue noise and fumes from the other room.



(1) (b)

Living room must not be placed in front of the collision bulkhead or its extension. This applies both to rest room located below and above the working deck. If the collision bulkhead is only carried to the working deck must rest room above the working deck does not lie in front of the forrest allowable location of the collision bulkhead.

(1) (c)

In ships with a length (L) of 24 metres and above must not be placed under a deck, living room below the deepest nedlastningsvandlinie. Sleeping quarters should as far as possible be placed amidships or aft.

(1) (d) from the bedroom, galley and dining rooms, there should not be direct access to communal toilets, showers, laundry room, engine room, cargo holds, lamp rooms, spaces for the storage of paints, storerooms, drying rooms or similar spaces.



(1) (e) if from the same time entrance to both bedrooms as the engine room door to the engine room shall be of steel, increased safety and reasonable self-closing.



(1) (f) in ships with a length (L) of 24 metres and above must be provided with sufficient and adequate ventilated wardrobe space for mounting of olietøj outside the sleeping spaces, but easily accessible from these.



(1) (g)

There must, as far as possible, appropriate measures for the protection of non-smokers against discomfort caused by tobacco smoke.



(2)

Times, stairs and doors



(2) (a) the width of times that serves as access to the living room, in General, must not be less than 90 cm measured between constraint Scots.



(2) (b)

Stairs must in general have a width constraint between the Scots at 80 cm and a minimum of 70 cm in clear width of stairs used in means of escape/escape routes. Stairs must have an appropriate increase and a handrail at least on one side.

(2) (c)

Fire cabinets, ventilation ducts, cable cars and the like may be placed on restriction the Scots, when it is estimated that they will not cause inconvenience to the passage. There must be no place be less than 60 cm free passage at a time.

(2) (d) in short, closed times, normally only used by one or two persons, can the banks allowed reduced, since the free passage must not be less than 60 cm.



(2) (e)

Times, which end up blind, must in ships with a length of 60 m or more cannot be longer than 7.00 m and in ships with a length of less than 60 m preferably not more than 2.50 metres and never longer than 5.00 m.

2)



(2) (f)

On fishing vessels built on or after 1. January 2003 or later must doors comply with the following:



(2) (f) (i)

All doorways from the free to sygerum must at least have a free width of 750 mm.



(2) (f) (ii)

Doors that give access to a stairway

3) or escape route/escape route, must have at least a 700 mm in clear width.

(2) (f) (iii)

Doors giving access to the rest room, Chambers etc., should in general have a clear width of 650 mm.



(2) (f) (iv)

Other doors to toilets bathroom etc. must in general have a clear width of 600 mm.



(2) (g)

The height of the doorway must in General be at least 1.88 m above deck plating to the lower edge of the upper sill.



(2) (h)

In ships with a length (L) less than 24 metres in length the Administration, taking into account the ship's size and application, accept deviations from the specified dørbredder.



(2) (i)

All corridors and stairways in and for accommodations must be provided with suitable handrails or handholds, so far as possible, on both sides.



(3)

Starting conditions



(3) (a)

From each outfitting section, there are at least two exits to the outside located as far apart as possible.



(3) (b) one of the exits may be an emergency exit through a hatch/door/window or porthole, which made the following demands:



(3) (b) (i)

A hatch/door to free tires must have a free registration at min. 600 x 600 mm.



(3) (b) (ii)
Hatch/door must be opened from the inside without the use of a key or tool. From the outside must hatch/door also can be opened directly; However, it is permitted to handle or other device is removable and placed in a central location, URf.eks. in the wheelhouse. Hatch/door must not be equipped with permanent padlock bracket.

(3) (b) (iii) A porthole/window, used as emergency exit, must have a min. banns at 450 mm in diameter and 450 mm for side scuttles on the narrow part of Windows.



(3) (b) (iv) if the means of access from the living quarters to ran through separate compartments (the Steering engine room, Chamber, or the like), the doors to such spaces could not be locked unless they are equipped with sparkelem, which can be removed in flight direction.



(3) (b) (v)

To be fitted necessary ladders, steps and hand-grips to facilitate access through ran.



(3) (b) (vi)

Appropriate places, URf.eks. doors, kicking lemme, Windows/portholes, etc., påmærkes ' EMERGENCY EXIT '.



(3) (c)

The exits must further be placed in such a way that a fire on one floor cannot lock people inside on a second floor.



(3) (d)

If a radio station has no direct access to a weather deck, there must be two output options from this. One of these outputs can be a window or porthole, which complies with the requirements of rule 2 (3) (b).

(4)

Construction



(4) (a)

External bulkheads, as well as the part of a bulkhead that separates the bedroom from the toilet cubicles, showers, laundry room, engine room, cargo holds, lamp rooms, spaces for the storage of paints, storerooms, drying rooms or similar spaces, shall be suitably performed by steel or other suitable material and shall be water-and gas-tight.



(4) (b)

If ståldæk or steel bulkheads in accommodation spaces form the top or side of an oil tank, these are coated with a non-combustible material of at least 40 mm thickness. In rest areas must not be affixed manholes or other openings to oil tanks.

(4) (c) if the anchor chains passed through a living room, they must be enclosed in waterproof steel pipe or boxes of ample size, suitably insulated.



(4) (d)

Dørken in crew accommodation spaces shall be made of suitable material and construction and should have a surface that is impervious to moisture and easy to keep clean.



(4) (e) where the floor cladding is of composite material, the join with the walls be rounded to avoid crevices.



(4) (f)

To be mobilized inspection flaps and drains to the underlying deck or drainage system in sufficient quantity.



(4) (g)

There must, to the extent possible, measures should be taken to mean that insects cannot penetrate into the crew rest room.



(5)

Isolation



(5) (a)

External bulkheads, ship's sides and deck etc., demarcating the living room, must be insulated with at least 100 mm approved, non-flammable insulation material. Bulkheads between the living room and machinery spaces or cargo spaces shall be of steel in steel ships. In wooden boats can be built by two layers of wood with two layers of felt or similar in between or by 60 mm wood with clothing of insulation panels.

(5) (b) There must be in order to provide protection from heat effects of steam and/or hot water pipes in the living room. Where rest areas or times, which leads to the living room, adjacent to kabysrum, machinery spaces or casings where the temperature difference between rooms is particularly high, there must be insulated with approved non-flammable insulating material between the spaces.

The mode of isolation shall not contain asbestos.



Rule 3 Lighting and heating



(1)

Lighting



(1) (a)

All accommodation spaces shall be adequately illuminated. The natural lighting in living rooms must at least be of such strength that a person with normal vision on a clear day can read General newspaper font anywhere in rest rooms. Where it is not possible to obtain sufficient daylight, must approach of providing artificial lighting of the same strength.

(1) (b)

To install electric lighting in crew lounges. If there are not two independent sources of electricity for lighting, emergency lighting must be provided URf.eks. by appropriate battery lamps.

(1) (c)

Independent electrical energy sources can be referred to either the ship's normal electrical supply facilities or the reserve-and power, referred to in rule 17 of chapter IV.



(1) (d) in sleeping rooms shall be situated every bunk a reading lamp with switch.



(1) (e) as a guideline for what illumination which can be regarded as appropriate for the artificial lighting shall be determined as follows:



Bedrooms and separate dagrum:





 







General lighting









50 lux











Lighting by tables where reading and writing take place









200 lux











Dining room and recreation room:





 







General lighting









50 lux











Lighting on dining tables









150 lux











Lighting on tables where reading, writing, games, etc. takes place









200 lux











Bathroom and toilets:





 







General lighting









50 lux











By mirrors









200 lux











Corridors and stairways:





 







General lighting









50 lux











(measured in a horizontal plane, 85 cm above the deck level)





 







Sygerum:





 







Working light over the bed









200 lux











(general illumination shall be variable)





 







In the other, did not mention the rm and as equivalence to the above lighting forces may be used by the Danish Standard

4)

recommended lighting forces.







 









4) (Chapter XII). Please refer to DS 700, artificial lighting in working premises.

(2) Heating

5)



(2) (a)

To be in all ships be furnished an adequate heating system to the rest rooms.



(2) (b) heating system must always be operating when the ship is staffed and in operation, or the crew working on board and conditions require its use, when in fact. Capacity must be adequate to ensure that under all conditions can be maintained for an ambient temperature of 20 ° c.

(2) (c)

In ships with a length (L) of 24 metres and over are heating by open flames is not allowed.



(2) (d)
When ildovne is used, they must be of adequate size and be properly placed and secured, and combustible materials shall be protected against ignition. Røgrøret must not be fitted with dampers. Possible cowl must be of appropriate design. Space where ildovne is placed, must be sufficiently ventilated with both approach such as the departure of air.

(2) (e)

Electric radiators shall be of an approved type and must be fixed, and so designed that the fire hazard shall be limited to the minimum.



(2) (f)

Radiators and other heating apparatus shall be so arranged and shielded that they cannot afford the inconvenience or danger that clothing, curtains or other similar materials can be scorched or set on fire by heat from the element.



Rule 4 Ventilation and air conditioning systems



(1) in General



(1) (a)

All rest rooms must be ventilated in General, so that in all circumstances is both sufficient approach as the departure of air, when doors, side scuttles, skylights or similar is closed. The ventilation system must be able to be adjusted so that the air is constantly is satisfactory and sufficient air circulation under all weather and climatic conditions.

(1) (b)

Ventilation openings for both approach such as the departure of air should be placed so that the room will be well ventilated. Inlet opening must be positioned in such a way that there is no risk of intake of harmful fumes.

(1) (c)

Ventilation openings must not lead over or immediately by a bunk.



(1) (d)

Spaces designed for flammable, corrosive or smelly materials must be ventilated separately from the rest of the ventilation system.



(2)

Natural ventilation



(2) (a) in ships with natural ventilation air outlet can happen through the air valve in the door or bulkhead for a time, from which there shall be unnecessary departure to the outside.



(2) (b)

In ships with natural ventilation must as well to-as output channels

the bedrooms have a free flow area of at least 30 cm

2

for each person, the space is designed for.



(2) (c)

By natural ventilation must as well to-as output channels for dining rooms and living exhibition, etc. have a free flow area of at least 7.5 cm

2

for each seating position in hold, however not less than 30 cm

2

. .

(2) (d)

By natural ventilation ducts must be as short as possible with a minimum number of bends.



(3) Mechanical ventilation



(3) (a)

In ships with a length (L) of 45 metres in length and over shall by regulation 4 (1) mentioned ventilation be mechanical.



(3) (b) The mechanical ventilation shall be so dimensioned that air capacity corresponds to an air switch on six times per hour in each of the individual spaces. Toilet rooms, etc., see rule 4 (5).

(3) (c)

The ventilation system must be capable of being adjusted.



(3) (d)

The individual channels must be so large that the air speed in ducts does not exceed 6 m/s.



(3) (e)

Air outlet can happen to times or directly to the open air.



(3) (f)

Recirculation of up to 50% of the air flow may be permitted, provided that the toilet and bathroom are equipped with separate mechanical exhaust ventilation.



(3) (g)

The ventilation system must be in operation during the ship's operation still. Maintenance of the mechanical ventilation must be ensured by necessary spare parts, see. Regulation 4 (4) (f).

(3) (h)

Ships navigation area includes vessels South of 36 ° n. br., shall be provided with a mechanical as well as natural ventilation. However, never use only one of these products in areas where this ensures sufficient ventilation.

(4) air conditioning systems



(4) (a)

Ships with a length (L) of 45 metres in length and over, if aviation area include voyages between 36 ° N and 36 ° S br., shall be equipped with air conditioning in the bedrooms, dining room, recreation room, offices, sygerum, radio rooms and machine room for manoeuvre. The same applies to the navigeringsrum apart from the wheelhouse.

(4) (b)

Air conditioner can be a central plant or consist of separate units and shall be so designed that it at 35 ° C and 70% relative humidity outside can maintain 29 ° C and 50% relative humidity inside. Do not use more than 50% return air.

(4) (c)

The plant's refrigeration machinery and air coolers should be dimensioned to at 28 ° C and 80% relative humidity out to maintain 24 ° C and 50% relative humidity inside. These conditions must be achieved with those in regulation 4 (3) (b) and regulation 4 (3) (f) the said capabilities.

(4) (d)

Ventilation and air conditioning systems must be equipped with appropriate filters at the air intake and be designed taking into account the particular conditions that are characteristic of the operation of the sea, and may not cause annoying noise or vibration.



(4) (e)

Air conditioning system must be in operation during the ship's operation still in it in regulation 4 (4) (a) the said navigation area. The maintenance of the operation must be ensured by necessary spare parts.

(4) ((f)

) These spare parts must at least consist of:



(4) (f) (i) A spare engine for each motor type of ventilation installations;



(4) (f) (ii)

a set of additional bearings for each engine type as well as in air conditioning ventilation in the plant as well as a set of additional bearings of the fan, where this is pulled with belt drive from an engine;



(4) (f) (iii)

100% complement of air filters;



(4) (f) (iv)

a set of belts of each type;



(4) (f) (v)

a spare parts kit with special tools as well as less spare parts and O-rings.



(5) Ventilation in toilet and bathroom



(5) (a)

From toilet and bathroom must be separately ventilated with the departure to the outside.



(5) (b)

In ships with a length (L) of 45 metres in length and over shall be ventilated by a toilet and bathroom separate exhaust system directly to the open air. The exhaust system must be sized to ti air change per hour. Air access to toilet and bathroom can be done through the opening under the door from the adjoining sleeping rooms or time.

(6)

Ventilation of galley



(6) (a) Where there are furnished, must be above this cooktop is a range hood vented to the outside.



(6) (b)

The duct must be fitted in the open air with exhaust hood, where extraction is not done mechanically.



(7)

Ventilation in sygerum/treatment rooms



In ventilation must be so made sygerum to air from there can not penetrate into other accommodations. Doors from sygerum/treatment rooms for the times, from which there is access to the other rest areas, must not be fitted with ventilation opening. Ventilation ducts serving both these as other living room shall be provided with non-return valve or other arrangement to ensure that the air from sygerum/treatment rooms do not penetrate into the other living quarters.

Rule 5 Bedrooms, floor area, free height, bunks and furniture



(1)

General



(1) (a)

Sleeping rooms shall be so arranged and fitted that it is easy to keep order in them, and that they ensure the crew a reasonable comfort.



(2) Person number



(2) (a) the number of persons, each bedroom is designed for, shall not exceed:



for officers:









1











for the rest of the crew:





 







in ships with a length (L) of 45 metres









4











in ships with a length (L) of 45 metres in length and over:









2













(2) (b)

Bedrooms should be påmærkes the number of people the room is intended for, and who it is intended for.



(3)

Floor area and headroom



(3) (a)

Floor area for each person in the sleeping rooms must be in addition to the area occupied by berths and lockers, as well as other solid furnishings, at least be:



In ships with a length (L) less than 24 m









0.75 m

2











In ships with a length (L) of 24 metres in length and over









1.00 m

2













(3) (b)

The free height in all rest rooms and corridors must at least be 1.98 m.



(4)

Bunks



(4) (a)

There must be a bunk for each Member of the crew.



(4) (b) Bunks must not be placed next to each other in such a way that one can only get access to a bunk by going over another.



(4) (c)
There must not be more than two beds one above the other; in the case of berths placed along the ship's side, must not be placed one above the other berths in places where there sits a porthole of a bunk.



(4) (d)

Where bunks are placed one above the other, the lower bunk should be situated at least 30 cm above the dørken, while the upper berth should be placed approximately midway between the bottom of the lower berth and the ceiling.



(4) (e)

Køjernes Interior minimum dimensions must be at least 1.98 x 0.68 m. In ships with a length (L) less than 24 metres in length but at least 0.58 x 1.98 m. Where special conditions prevail, may be a less width in køjernes one end is permitted.

(4) (f)

Each bunk with adjoining bunk equipment must be carried out by suitable materials. Bunk frame and any bunk Board shall be of an approved material, hard, smooth, and stainless and resistant against attacks by pests.

Where, if tubular frames for layout of berths, they should be quite dense and without perforations, which can enable attacks of pests



Each berth shall be provided with a spring mattress of approved material, or with a spring base and a mattress of approved material. Straw or other material is not resistant against attacks of pests, must not be used for fill.

(4) (g)

Where bunks are placed over each other, there needs to be a dust-proof bottom of wood, canvas or other suitable material under the top bunk.



(5)

Fixtures



(5) (a)

Sleeping rooms should be fitted with wardrobes that can be locked and which are equipped with a rod for hanging clothes on hangers. There must also be a closet or similar with drawer space at least 0.056 m3 for each person, the room is intended for. At least a Cabinet or a drawer for each person must be lockable with a separate key.

(5) (b)

To be in each bedroom be a table or desk and an adequate number of seats. There must be at least one seat for each person, the room is intended for.

(5) (c)

The inventory shall be made of a suitable material.



(5) (d) Sleeping rooms shall be fitted with curtains for koøjerne.



(5) (e)

Sleeping rooms or toilet rooms shall be fitted with a mirror, a bookshelf and a sufficient number of coat hooks. In addition, there must be a tiny wall cabinet for toilet requisites for each person, the room is intended for.

Rule 6 dining, galley-and proviantrum, as well as drinking water plants



(1)

Dining rooms



(1) (a) in ships, resulting in a crew of four people or more, must eat the spaces be separated from sleeping rooms.



(1) ((b)

) Dining rooms must be sufficiently large and well equipped for the number of people who at any time are likely to use them, and be equipped with tables and seats in sufficient numbers.



(1) (c)

If the dining room and galley is separated, they must be placed as close to each other as possible.



(1) (d) to dining rooms that are not placed immediately next to the galley, there must be a pantry or dining rooms to be equipped with adequate closet space for eating and dishwashing grejer.



The furnishings in the dining room must be carried out by suitable material. Countertops and chairs seats shall be of a material which is resistant against moisture, without cracks and easy to keep clean.

(2)

Galley



(2) (a) the galley shall be separate from sleeping quarters.



(2) (b)

Galley Room must be suitable and sufficient for the purpose, and there must be good lighting, ventilation and adequate drains. Drains must comply with the requirements of regulation 7 (1) (e).

(2) (c)

Galley Room should be equipped with a stove, cabinets and shelves grejer as necessary, as well as washing and dishwashing racks of stainless material. Drinking water shall be supplied with galley space through pipelines; If the injection is done under pressure, measures must be taken to avoid reflux. Where galley space does not have hot water installation, other option for heating water are provided.

(3) Proviantrum



(3) (a)

There shall be a sufficient proviantrum, which can be kept dry, cool and well-ventilated. In ships with a length (L) of 24 metres in length and over shall be provided refrigerators or other arrangements for the storage of food at low temperature.

(4)

Drinking water plant



(4) (a)

Drinking water tanks



Fixed built-in tanks must have koffer ponds against tanks intended for other liquids. Koffer ponds can be omitted against tanks containing seawater. The ship's side must not serve as a constraint for a ships riveted drinking water tank. The tanks must have the necessary manholes, and they shall as far as possible be available for both the exterior as interior overhaul. Their building and size does not allow access to their home, they must be fitted with a sufficient number of clean holes. Manholes and clean the holes shall be so designed that the build-up of impurities is avoided. Men's covers and clean the lids must be mounted on sills at least 50 mm in height and be marked ' drinking water tank '.

All steel in drinking-water tanks shall be fully welded. All interior surfaces including surfaces in smaller containers and the like, must have a surface treatment that is approved by the administration.

Through drinking water tanks must not be placed on the tubes, which are part of other piping systems, unless such pipe is pulled through a waterproof bøsningsrør with a wall thickness as tank skottets.



Tanks should be emptied completely either by extraction from the lowest point or through the bottom valve. If the plugs are fitted, they must be with a dimension different from the ship's other plugs.

(4) (b) pipe couplings



Feeding tube for tanks that are filled from installations in the country, should be brought up in 400 mm height above the deck and be provided with cover, which must be locked with a padlock and be marked ' drinking water tank '. In smaller ships can, however, be permitted in the circumstances that the feeding tube be performed with a lower height. Filling nozzles made according to ISO 5620 will be approved.

The tanks must be equipped with standpipe or other approved means of orientation device which shall be so arranged that there is not along the path can be supplied with water pollution. Where sounding pipes for pejlstok/tape is mounted, it must close the remedy therefor being locked with lock and could be labeled ' drinking water tank '.

Potable water tanks must, for the sake of ventilation usually bear at least two windpipe, which must be fitted with a fine mesh net.



(4) (c)

Piping, etc.



Drinking water pipe work should not be connected with other pipes in the ship and shall only be used materials and components, which are VA-approved.

6)



Systems carried out in accordance with a recognized standard

7) may be approved, provided that the following conditions are met: (4) (c) (i)

Tubes that can be exposed to frost, shall be adequately insulated.



(4) (c) (ii)

The pumps must all be of centrifugal-membrane or other appropriate type that does not require lubrication of the parts that are in connection with drinking water.



(4) (c) (iii)

Blind ' plug wires on the main wiring harness (for EVS. later the location of tapping options) must be equipped with shut-off means off the main cord.



(4) (c) (iv)

Pipes shall not pass through tanks intended for other liquids with the exception of tanks intended for Lake water, or unless such pipe is led through a waterproof bøsningsrør with a wall thickness as tank skottets.



(4) (c) (v)

Disinfecting appliances shall, if such is installed, be of an approved type.



(4) (d)

Søsugningen from freshwater generators shall be located clear of any drainage from the ship.



(4) (e)

Entry into service of drinking water installations



In ships with a length (L) of 24 metres in length and over, the first hovedsyn, and before the plant is put into use, performed a bacteriological analysis of drinking water samples from the plant. Water samples, of which at least one must be from the galley shall be taken by a recognized laboratory (URf.eks. foodstuffs) and analyzed by this in accordance with the provisions in force. Guide the Administration's approval will be the laboratory analysis report with chemical and bacteriological analysis, and conclusion.

Pollution of drinking water plants found in a disinfection carried out in accordance with the National Board of Health's guidance.

8) Rule 7 Toilets, washrooms and space for laundry, etc.

(1) Toilets and washrooms



On vessels with living quarters, there must be appropriately equipped and installed showers with hot and cold running water, sinks and toilets, and the respective compartment shall be properly ventilated.



(1) (a)

In ships with a length (L) less than 24 metres there shall be installed not less than eight people for each commenced a toilet.



(1) (b)

In ships with a length (L) of 24 metres in length and over shall be for all members of the crew, who do not have bedrooms with independent toilet and bath, constructed the following sanitary installations for each initiated number of persons:



a bath and/or shower for every eight persons



a toilet for every six persons



a washbasin for every four persons.



(1) (c)

In ships with a length (L) of 45 metres in length and over shall be in convenient proximity to the navigating bridge are an additional separate toilet. In ships with a length (L) of 85 m or more in convenient proximity to the engine room there are also an additional separate toilet.

(1) ((d)

) Toilets and washrooms shall meet the following requirements:



(1) (d) (i)

Every toilet must be with water flushing.



(1) (d) (ii)

Any separate toilet rooms shall be provided with a washbasin.



(1) (d) (iii)
Installations of cold and hot fresh water shall be installed separately for each bath and washbasin.



(1) (d) (iv)

Washbasins, showers and bathtubs must be sufficiently large and made of suitable material.



(1) (d) (v)

Dørken shall be of a suitable material and shall be provided with adequate drainage. In separate toilet rooms are not floor drains.

(1) (d) (we

) Bulkheads shall be of suitable material and shall be watertight at least 300 mm above the dørkens level.



(1) (d) (vii)

Toilets shall be affixed in a convenient for bedrooms and laundry room, but separated from them. There must be no direct access from the sleeping rooms intended for more than one person, or other space other than of the closed-times.

(1) (d) (viii)

Doors for toilet and bathroom must be capable of being locked.



(1) (e)

Floor drains shall be of a sufficient dimension and so arranged that the risk of clogging is reduced to a minimum. They must also be easy to keep clean. Drains must not pass through freshwater tanks, and passes through the galley, dining or sleeping quarters, originating from drencher isolated and recovered.

(2) Space for laundry, etc.



(2) (a) in ships with a length (L) of 24 metres in length and over shall be suitable option for washing and drying clothes, taking into account the normal duration of the voyage and the size of the crew.



(2) (b)

Facilities for the washing of clothing must include suitable sinks equipped with drain or washing machine with associated installations. Where it is not practicable to organize a separate space for laundry, can be organized for this purpose in bathing installations or laundry room. There must be an adequate supply of hot and cold fresh water for laundry.

(2) (c)

There must be a possibility of drying clothes in a compartment separate from sleeping rooms and dining rooms. Dry room should be adequately ventilated and heated and equipped with clotheslines or other arrangements for the drying of clothes.

(2) (d)

If the arrangement of special drying room is not possible, it will in regulation 2 (1) (f) referred to space could be used.

Rule 8 Sygerum and hoisting stretcher, etc.

(1) General provisions



(1) (a)

In ships with a length (L) of 45 metres in length and over shall exist separately sygerum. In the sick room, there must exist a bed when crew numbers are 18 or less, and two otherwise.

(1) (b) in ships in which each Member of the crew has a private bedroom with attached toilet and shower, which instead of the required sygerum adapted a single treatment rooms regardless of crew size. The treatment room must be equipped with a single bed and must have a size and décor as a sick room. The treatment room must be suitably equipped, including with washbasin and acute treatment space, and with direct access to a toilet cubicles.

(1) (c)

Sick room/treatment room must be located in a suitable place where the inconvenience from noise and vibrations are minimal, where the sick could have good relations, and where they can be properly cared for in all kinds of weather.



(1) (d)

There must be convenient access from the outside to spaces with a person lying on a stretcher. All doorways from the free to the sick room should be at least 750 mm wide.

(2)

Sygerum



(2) (a) the bed or beds must stand freely, so that they are available from at least three sides, IE. the two long sides and a pediment.



(2) (b) There must be a push button by each bed with little wire to one at an appropriate (usually staffed) place placed Bell.



(2) (c)

To be immediately adjacent to sygerum and with direct access from here is a laundry room with WC and wash basin.



(2) ((d)

) The size of the floor area must be at least 6.5 sygerum/treatment rooms in m. floor area shall be measured as specified in regulation 5 (3) (a), since the area of bed (s) may be included in the area.

(2) (e)

Sygerum/treatment rooms should påmærkes as such and must not be used for any other purpose.



(3) Emergency treatment room



(3) (a)

In connection with sickness/treatment rooms shall be provided an emergency treatment room. This consists of a minimum deck area approximately 2 x 3 m with drain and slip-resistant dørkbelægning, which corresponds to the requirements in the bathroom. Square can possibly. decorated in a less busy time allowed area etc. in the immediate attachment to the treatment room.

(3) (b)

Accessibility to acute treatment space shall be as for sickness/treatment



(3) (c)

The square should be well-lit as a working space with local power on/off feature.)



(3) (d)

Within easy reach of a handler, who kneels by a patient located roughly in the middle of the floor, there shall be the following:



(3) (d) 1. Hand showers with individual sealing and suspension. The water supply (hot and cold fresh water) must be thermostatically controlled, but can be common.

(3) (d) 2. Phone to the ship's internal phone system with hands-free operation and possibly. a "headset". It is recommended that can be made through to the ship's communication system, so that the practitioner can speak directly with Radio disease-Medical.

(3) (d) 3

. A thin waterproof rubber mattress (3) (e) For existing ships, built before 1. August 2007, can a bathtub ækvivalere the specified acute treatment space.



(4) Hoisting stretcher



(4) (a) in ships with a length (L) of 24 metres in length and over shall be placed in a suitable place a hoisting stretcher of a suitable type.



Chapter XIII



CHAPTER XIII CHAPTER is RESERVED Chapter XIV



CHAPTER XIV CHAPTER is RESERVED Chapter XV



CHAPTER XV CHAPTER is RESERVED Chapter XVI



CHAPTER XVI CHAPTER is RESERVED Chapter XVII



Chapter XVII the CHAPTER RESERVED Chapter XVIII



CHAPTER XVIII the CHAPTER RESERVED Chapter IX



CHAPTER XIX the CHAPTER RESERVED Chapter XX



CHAPTER XX CHAPTER is RESERVED Chapter XXI



CHAPTER XXI the PREVENTION OF OIL POLLUTION FROM SHIPS Section in









General provisions







 





Rule 1









Definitions







 



Rule 2





Use







S





Rule 3





Exemption







S





Rule 4





Exemption provisions







S





Rule 5





Equivalence





 

 

 







Section II









Survey and certification









S





Rule 6





Vision







S





Rule 7





The issue and endorsement of certificate







S





Rule 8





The issue and endorsement of certificates for another Government







S





Rule 9





Certificate design







S





Rule 10





The period of validity of the certificate







S





Rule 11





Port State control on operational requirements





 

 

 







Title III









Requirements for machinery spaces on all ships







 





Part A
Construction









S







Rule 12









Tanks for oil residue (sludge)









S





Rule 12A





Protection of tanks for fuel oil







S





Rule 13 Standard clutch





 

 

 



 





Part B









Equipment









S





Rule 14





Equipment for the separation of oil and water





 

 

 



 





Part C









Control of operational discharges of oil









M







Rule 15









Control of discharge of oil









S





Rule 16





Separation of oil and water ballast as well as transport of oil in forepeak tanks







S





Rule 17





Oil journal, Part I – Machinery Space Operations





 

 

 







Title IV









Requirements for cargo spaces of oil tankers







 





Part A









Construction









S





Rule 18





Segregated ballast tanks







S





Rule 19





Requirements for double-hull oil tankers delivered the 6. June 1996 or later







S





Rule 20 requirements for double-hull oil tankers delivered before the 6. July 1996







S





Rule 21 prevention of oil pollution from oil tankers carrying heavy grades of oil







S





Rule 22 Protection of bottom of pump rooms







S





Rule 23





Oil outflow in the event of accidents







S





Rule 24





Accident assumptions







S





Rule 25





Hypothetical outflow of oil







S





Rule 26





Limitation of size and arrangement of cargo tanks







S





Rule 27





Intact stability







S





Rule 28





Watertight subdivision and damage stability







S





Regel 29





Sloptanke







S





Rule 30





Pumps, pipes and discharge systems





 

 

 



 





Part B









Equipment









S





Rule 31





System for the registration and control of oil discharge







S





Rule 32





Oil/water interface detectors







S





Rule 33





Requirements for tank cleaning with petroleum





 

 

 



 





Part C









Control of operational discharge of oil











M









Rule 34









Control of discharge of oil









S





Rule 35





Cleaning of cargo oil tanks of crude oil







S





Rule 36





Oil journal part II (cargo/ballast operations)





 

 

 







Title V









The prevention of pollution from an oil pollution incident
S





Rule 37





The ship's oil pollution members





 

 

 







Title VI









Reception facility









M





Rule 38





Reception facility





 

 

 







Title VII









Particular requirements for fixed or floating platforms









S





Rule 39





Particular requirements for fixed or floating platforms





 

 

 







Appendix





 



 



Appendix I





List of oils 57





 



Appendix 2





IOPP certificate





 



Appendix 3





Oil journal





 

 

 









Introduction



This chapter contains the provisions of annex I to the International Convention for the prevention of pollution from Ships – 1973 MARPOL Convention – with the modifications and additions, which are contained in the 1978 Protocol to MARPOL 73 (MARPOL 73/78) and subsequent amendments.



Rules management is distributed so that the environmental protection agency is responsible for the rules on discharge and the Danish maritime authority is responsible for the rules governing the technical installations on board ships including certificates, records and plans. This responsibility is stated in chapter inventories next to each rule with a'm ' for the environmental protection agency and an's ' for the Danish maritime authority.

Attention is drawn to the fact that in principle this chapter contains requirements for all ships including cargo ships of less than 500, bruttotonage passenger ships engaged in domestic voyages and fishing ships.



In connection with the introduction of the MARPOL Convention in Denmark, in addition to the technical requirements of the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative rule works issued notices by the Ministry of the environment, which also must be followed.

Section I General provisions

Rule 1 Definitions

In this chapter means: 1 – ' oil ' means petroleum in any form including crude oil, fuel oil, sludge, oil refuse and refined products, with the exception of petrochemicals which are subject to the provisions of annex II of the MARPOL Convention. The definition also includes the substances listed in Appendix I, without that this is to be understood as a reduction of the scope of this definition.

2. ' Petroleum ' – any liquid hydrocarbon mixture occurring naturally in the Earth whether it is treated to render it suitable for transportation or not, and includes: 2.1 the crude oil from which certain distillation products can be removed, and 2.2 crude oil to which certain distillation products can be added.

3. ' Oily mix ' – a mixture containing oil.

4. ' fuel ' – any oil used as fuel for propulsion and auxiliary machinery on Board of the ship.

5 – 8 not applicable for ships covered by this acquis



9. ' major craft conversion ': 9.1 a conversion of an existing ship, as a significant extent change the ship's dimensions 9.1.1 or carrying capacity, or the ship's type, or change the 9.1.2 9.1.3 after the Administration's opinion, serves the purpose to extend the ship's service life significantly, or otherwise change the ship, 9.1.4 so that, if it was a new ship, would come under the provisions of this chapter that do not apply to existing ships.

2 not applicable for ships covered by this acquis



10 ' nearest land ' is the baseline from which the territorial waters are laid down in the relevant territory in accordance with international law, however, with the addition that "from the nearest land" off Australia's northeast coast means: from a line drawn

from point 11 ° s parallel, 142 ° 08 ' e

to point 10 ° 35 ' South latitude, 141 ° 55 ' East longitude,

from there to the point 10 ° 00 ' South latitude, 142 ° 00 ' e,

thence to point 9 ° 10 ' South latitude, 143 ° 52 ' e,

thence to point 9 ° 00 ' South latitude, 144 ° 30 ' e,

from there to the point 10 ° 41 ' South latitude, 145 ° 00 ' e,

thence to point 13 ° 00 ' South latitude, 145 ° 00 ' e,

thence to point 15 ° 00 ' South latitude, 146 ° 00 ' e,

from there to the point of 17 ° 30 ' South latitude, 147 ° 00 ' e,

thence to point 21 ° 00 ' South latitude, 152 ° 55 ' East longitude,

thence to point 24 ° 30 ' South latitude, 154 ° 00 ' e,

thence to point 24 ° 42 ' South latitude, 153 ° 15 ' e

on the Australian coast.

11. ' special area '-a marine area, where the recognised technical reasons, taking into account the area's Oceanographic and ecological conditions and its specific traffic, it is necessary to introduce special mandatory methods for the prevention of oil pollution of the sea.

In this chapter, the special areas are defined as follows: 11.1 the Mediterranean-the real Mediterranean with the corresponding gulfs and seas, so that the border between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea, formed by the 41. North latitude and the border to the West of the Straits of Gibraltar at the meridian of 5 ° 36 ' w.

11.2 the Baltic Sea region – the Baltic Sea proper with the Gulf of Bothnia, the Gulf of Finland and the entrance to the Baltic Sea bounded in the Skagerrak at 57 ° latitude of the skagensbanen 44.8 ' North latitude.

11.3 the Black Sea-the real Sortehav, so that the 41. North of latitude forms the border between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea.

11.4 Red Sea area-the real Red Sea with Suezgolfen and Aqaba bounded on the South by the rhumb line between Ras si Ane (12 ° 8.5 ' n, 43 ° 19.6 ' e) and Husn Murad (12 ° 43 ' n, 0.4 ° 30.2 ' e).

11.5 the Gulf region-sea area lying north west of Compass line between Ras al Hadd (22 ° 30 ' North latitude, 59 ° 48 ' e) and Ras al Fasteh (25 ° 0.4 ' n, 61 ° 25 ' e).

11.6 Aden-sea area lying between the Red Sea and the Arabian Sea, which is bounded to the West by the rhumb line between Ras si Ane (12 ° 43 ' n, 28.5 ° 19.6 ' e) and Husn Murad (12 ° 40.4 ' n, 43 ° 30.2 ' e) and to the East by the rhumb line between Ras Asir (11 ° 50 ' North latitude, 51 ° 16.9 ' e) and Ras Fartak (15 ° 35 ' North latitude , the 13.8 ° 52 ' e).

11.7 the Antarctic area-the area south of 60 ° s parallel.

7.3 The North-Western European Sea basins-the North Sea and its tilsejlingsfarvande, the Irish Sea and its tilsejlingsfarvande, the Celtic Sea, the English Channel and its tilsejlingsfarvande and part of the North-East Atlantic sea area in the immediate vicinity of the West of Ireland. The area is bounded by the lines through the following points:

48 ° 27 ' N on the French coast

48 ° 27 'n, 6 ° 25 ' w,

49 ° 52 ' N, 7 ° 44 ' w

50 ° 30 ' N, 12 ° w

56 ° 30 'n, 12 ° w

62 ° N, 3 ° (V)

62 ° N on the Norwegian coast

57 ° 44.8 'n on the Danish and Swedish coast 11.9 Oman area in the Arabian Sea-the sea area bounded by the following coordinates:

22 ° 30.00 ' N, 59 ° 48.00 ' E

23 ° 47.27 'n, 60 ° 35.73 ' E

22 ' N, 62 ° 40.62 ° 25.29 ' E

21 ° N, 63 ° 22.22 47.40 ' ' E

20 ° N, 62 ° 52.41 30.37 ' ' E

19 ° N, 62 ° 25.97 45.90 ' ' E

18 ° 49.92 ' N, 62 ° 02.94 ' E

17 °, 61 ° N 05.53 44.36 ' ' E

16 ° 43.71 'n, 60 ° 25.62 ' E

16 ° N, 59 ° 32.24 03.90 ' ' E

15 ° 15.20 'n, 58 ° 58.52 ' E

14 ° 58 ' N, 36.93 ° 10.23 ' E

14 ° N, 57 ° 27.03 18.93 ' ' E

14 ° 56 ' N, 53.75 ° 11.53 ' E

13 ° N, 56 ° 19.24 ' 53.80 '' E

13 ° N, 55 ° 45.86 ' 54.53 '' E

14 ° 54 ' N, 27.38 ° 51.42 ' E

14 ° N, 54 ° 27.35 40.10 ' ' E

14 ° N, 54 ° 08.56 46.21 ' ' E

20.74 ' N, 53 ° 15 ° 38.33 ' E

15 ° N, 53 ° 32.07 48.69 ' ' E

16 ° 53 ' N, 23.02 ° 14.82 ' E

39.06 acrylic ' N, 16 ° 53 ° 06.52 ' E 11.10 southern South African Sea Sea area bounded by the following coordinates is (valid from 01 March 2008):

31 ° 14 ' S; 017 ° 50 ' E

31 ° 30 ' S; 017 ° 12 ' E

32 ° 00 ' S; 017 ° 06 ' E

32 ° 32 ' S; 016 ° 52 ' E

34 ° 06 ' S; 017 ° 24 ' E

36 ° 58 ' S; 020 ° 54 ' E

36 ° 00 ' S; 022 ° 30 ' E

35 ° 14 ' S; 022 ° 54 ' E

34 ° 30 ' S; 026 ° 00 ' E

33 ° 48 ' S; 027 ° 25 ' E

33 ° 27 ' S; 027 ° 12 ' E
12 ' Instant oil discharge speed ' – the discharge of oil, measured in litres per hour at a given moment divided by the ship's speed in knots in the same moment.

13. ' Tank ' – an enclosed space enclosed by the ship's construction, and which is designed to keep liquids in bulk.

14» Page tank ' – any tank, adjacent to the ship's side shell.

15 ' Center tank ' – any tank within a longitudinal bulkhead.

16 – 18 not applicable for ships covered by this acquis



19 ' Length ' (L) – 96% of the total length on a water line, which is 85% of the minimum depth (moulded) above the keel, or the length from the edge of forstævnens the cutting edge to the waterline at that waterline, if that is greater. In ships designed with a rake of keel, the waterline, the length is measured shall be parallel to the konstruktionsvandlinien. Length (L) measured in meters.

20 ' Front and aft perpendikulærer ' must go through the extremities for fore and aft of the length (L). The forward perpendicular shall pass through the intersection of the front edge of the bow and the waterline on which the length is taken.

21 ' amidships ' – is the middle of the length (L).

22 ' Width ' (w) – the overall width of the ship amidships to spanternes outer edge (molded) in a ship with an outer garment of metal and to the exterior side of a ship hull with plating of other material. Width (w) is measured in meters.

23 ' dead weight ' (DW) – the difference in tonnes between the displacement of a ship in water of a specific gravity 1.025 at the load waterline corresponding to the established Summer freeboard and ship's weight.

24 ' unladen weight ' – a ship's displacement in metric tonnes without cargo, fuel, lubricating oil, ballast water, fresh water and feedwater in tanks, consumable, passengers and crew members and their belongings.

25 ' permeability ' – the relationship between the part of the room's cubic content, which is supposed occupied by water, and the room's total cubic content.

26 ' Capacity and footprint ' are always calculated to outer edge of frames (snagless molded lines).

27 ' anniversary date ' means the day and the month of the year, which corresponds to the expiration date of the international oil pollution prevention certificate.

28.1 ' ship delivered the 31. December 1979 or earlier ' means: 28.1.1 a ship for which the building contract is created on 31 May. December 1975 or earlier; or 28.1.2 If, in the absence of, a ship building contract, the keel of which is laid, or which was at a similar stage of construction, the 30. June 1976 or earlier; 28.1.3 or a ship delivered the 31. December 1979 or earlier; 28.1.4 or a ship which has undergone a major renovation, for which there was created the contract 28.1.4.1 the 31. December 1975 or earlier; or 28.1.4.2 If the contract were not available, if the performance began on 30 November. June 1976 or earlier; or 28.1.4.3 which was finalised on 31. December 1979 or earlier.

17.5 ' ship delivered after 31 December 2006. December 1979 ' means: 28.2.1 a ship for which the building contract is created after 31 December 2006. December 1975; or if not available, the building contract 28.2.2 a ship the keel of which is laid, or which was at a similar stage of construction after 30 June. June 1976; 28.2.3 or a ship, which is delivered after 31 December 2006. December 1979; 28.2.4 or a ship, which has undergone a major refurbishment, 28.2.4.1 for which was created contract after 31 December 2000. December 1975; or if the contract were not available if 28.2.4.2 execution began after 30 June. June 1976; or 28.2.4.3 which was completed after 31 December 2006. December 1979.

28.3-8 not applicable for ships covered by this acquis



28.9 ' ship delivered the 1. August 2010 or later ' means: 28.9.1 a ship for which the building contract is created the 1. August 2007 or later; or if not available, the building contract 28.9.2 a ship the keel of which is laid, or which was at a similar stage of construction, the 1. February 2008; or a ship which delivered the 28.9.3 1. August 2010 or later; 28.9.4 or a ship, which has undergone a major refurbishment, 28.9.4.1 for which a contract was created on 1 January. August 2007 or later; or 28.9.4.2 If the contract were not available, if the performance began on 1 January. February 2008 or later; or 28.9.4.3 which was finalised on 1. August 2010.

29» ppm "(parts per million) – volume relationship between oil and water measured in ml/m3.

30 ' ship built ' – a ship the keel of which is laid, or if construction is at a similar stage 31

» Oil residues (sludge) ' means the remaining waste oil products that are generated during the normal operation of a ship, URf.eks. such as occurs through the cleaning of oil fuel or lubricating oil to the main or auxiliary machinery, excreted waste oil from oil filtering systems, waste oil collected in drip trays and hydraulic oil and lubricant waste oil waste.



32

» Tank for oil residues (sludge) ' means a tank for the storage of oil residues (sludge) from which the sludge can be removed directly through the standard discharge connection or any other means of disposal.



33

» Oily bilge water ' means water that may be contaminated with oil from the URf.eks. leaks or maintenance work in machinery spaces. Any liquid gets into the system, including bilge bilge bilge wells, pipelines, tank tops or tanks for storage of bilge water, are valid as oily bilge water.

34

» Oily bilge water Storage tank ' means a tank for the collection of oily bilge water before it is discharged, transferred or removed.

Rule 2 Application 1 unless otherwise expressly specified, this chapter shall apply to all ships.

2 in vessels that are oil tankers, where cargo spaces used for the carriage of oil in bulk with a total capacity of 200 cubic metres or more, the provisions of rule 16, 26.4, 29, 30, 31, 32, 34 and 36 oil tanker also for the design and use of these spaces, except that in cases where the total capacity is less than 1000 m3 can the provisions of rule 34.6 apply instead of rule 29, 31 and 32.

3-6

Not applicable for ships covered by this acquis S Rule 3 Exemption 1 Special ships as hydrofoil craft, hovercraft, submersibles etc. If constructional conditions make the application of the provisions of sections 3 and 4 concerning the construction and equipment unreasonable or impracticable, the Administration may be exempted from those provisions, provided that the ship's construction and equipment, providing equivalent protection against oil pollution, taking into account the speed the ship is intended.

2 Detailed information about any such exemption granted by the administration shall be specified in the certificate, which is referred to in regulation 7.

3 The Administration, which gives such a derogation, must as soon as possible and no later than ninety days after the sending organisation justified information about it, which the Organization must notify the parties to the Convention for information and possible further action.

4-5 not applicable for ships covered by this acquis S regulation 4 exemptions 1 Rules 15 and 34 shall not apply to: 1.1 the discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixtures which are necessary for the safety of the ship or the need to save lives at sea;

1.2 the discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixture resulting from damage to a ship or its equipment 1.2.1 provided that after the damage or discovery of the discharge have been taken all reasonable measures to avoid emissions or reduce it to a minimum, and with the exception of the cases, 1.2.2 where the shipping company or master has acted with the intention to cause harm or acted carelessly and with knowledge of that would probably occur damage;

1.3 the discharge into the sea of substances containing oil, when this happens with the Administration's approval and with the purpose of combating specific pollution incidents in order to minimize the damage from pollution. Any such discharge shall be subject to approval by the Government, within whose jurisdiction the discharge is intended to be carried out.

S Rule 5 Equivalence 1 Administration may grant permission for the installation of all kinds of equipment, materials, equipment or appliances in a ship as an alternative to that is required pursuant to this chapter, if equipped, materials, facilities or apparatus is at least as effective as that required by this chapter. This authorisation shall not extend to the Administration to replace the design requirements with the operational procedures for the control of discharges of oil, as prescribed in the provisions of this chapter.

2 Administration, which allows installation of equipment, material, device or apparatus as alternatives to the requirements of this chapter, shall inform the organization accordingly for further dissemination to the other Convention countries.

Section II survey and certification

S Rule 6 Surveys 1 every oil tanker of 150 gross tonnage and above and any other ship of 400 gross tonnage and above shall be subjected to the following vision:
1.1 A first survey, before the ship is put in service or before the certificate prescribed in rule 7 shall be issued for the first time, which shall include a complete inspection of its construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices and materials in so far as the ship is covered by this chapter. This vision must be so efficiently that it shall ensure that the ship's construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices and materials fully comply with the provisions of this chapter.

1.2 A renewal survey at intervals, the length of which shall be determined by the Administration, and which shall not exceed five years, except where rule 10.2.2, 10.5, 10.6 or 10.7 shall apply. Renewal vision to be executed, so it may be found that the ship's construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices and materials fully comply with the provisions of this chapter.

1.3 an intermediate survey within 3 months before or after the second anniversary, or within 3 months before or after the 3-year anniversary of the issuance of the certificate. The sight must be carried out simultaneously with the one of the annual surveys specified in paragraph 1.4. The sight must ensure that the equipment and associated pump and piping systems, including systems for registration and control of oil discharge, systems for tank cleaning with petroleum, equipment for separation of oily water and oil filtration plant, fully comply with the relevant prescriptive requirements in this chapter and is in good operational condition. In accordance with the provisions of regulation 7 and 8 the certificate issued shall be provided with the endorsement of such intermediate vision.

1.4 an annual survey within 3 months before or after the anniversary date of the certificate, which includes a general survey of construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices and materials, as referred to in paragraph 1.1, in order to ensure that it has been maintained in accordance with paragraphs 4.1 and 4.2 of this rule, and that it continues to be satisfactory for the speed the ship is intended. The certificate issued in accordance with regulation 7 or 8 shall be supplied with the endorsement of such annual survey.

1.5 Additional surveys to be held either in whole or in part for a repair, which is carried out on the basis of the surveys provided for in paragraph 4.3 of this rule, or when important repairs or renewals are made. The sight must be performed to ensure that the necessary repairs or renewals have been effectively carried out, the materials and the workmanship of such repairs and replacement under all conditions is satisfactory and that the ship is in all circumstances comply with the provisions of this chapter.

2 the Administration must lay down appropriate measures for ships not covered by the provisions of paragraph 1, in order to ensure that the relevant provisions of this chapter are complied with.

3.1 survey carried out for the purposes of the enforcement of the provisions of this chapter must be carried out by Administration officials. However, the Administration may appoint a supervisor or recognised organisations to carry out inspections and survey. Such an organization must comply with the guidelines adopted by the organization by resolution a.739 (18), and the specification adopted by the organization by resolution a. 789 (19), both of which can be amended by the Organization, provided that such amendments are adopted and enter into force in accordance with the provisions of article 16 of the MARPOL Convention concerning the amendment procedure applicable to this chapter.

3.2 an Administration, who shall appoint inspectors or recognised organisations to carry out surveys and inspections as referred to in paragraph 3.1, must, as a minimum, empower any nominated surveyor or recognized organization to: 3.2.1 to require repair of a ship and 3.2.2 to carry out surveys and inspections, if proper authority in a port State has requested.

The administration shall notify the Organization of the specific responsibilities and conditions of the authority assigned to the nominated surveyors or recognized organizations, and this information shall be communicated to the Contracting Parties for information for their officials.

3.3 When a nominated surveyor or recognized organization determines that the ship's position with associated equipment not in essence corresponds to the information contained in the certificate, or that the ship is in such a condition that it is not fit to proceed to sea without presenting a danger to the marine environment, the inspector or organization shall immediately ensure that a rectification of the error and in due course notify the administration. If such corrective action is not carried out, the certificate should be withdrawn and the administration shall be informed immediately; If the ship is in another Convention country, the relevant port authorities in that Convention country shall be informed immediately. When an official of the Administration, a nominated surveyor or recognized organization has notified the appropriate port authorities in that Convention country, the Convention the Government provide the necessary assistance to the appropriate officer, inspector or organization for the performance of their obligations under this rule. In this case, it concerned the Convention Government take measures to ensure that the ship does not sail until it can proceed to sea or leave the port in order to proceed to the nearest repair yard without presenting an unreasonable threat to the marine environment.

3.4 in all cases, the Administration accepts full responsibility for the completeness and efficiency of the tv and undertake to ensure the necessary measures for the fulfilment of this obligation.

4.1 condition of the ship and its equipment shall be maintained so that it is in accordance with the provisions of this chapter in order to ensure that the ship is in all respects will remain fit to proceed to sea without presenting any unreasonable risk to the marine environment.

4.2 When a sight in accordance with paragraph 1 of this rule is implemented, there must not be any modification of the ship's construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices or materials, as covered by sight, without the approval of the Administration except the direct replacement of such equipment and accessories.

4.3 in the event of an accident with a ship, or if an error is detected, which significantly affects the ship's condition or the impact of equipment subject to the provisions of this chapter, shall provide the master or operator at the earliest opportunity to report to the Administration, the recognised organisation or the appointed Inspector, who is responsible for issuing the relevant certificate, which then must ensure carrying out studies to determine whether or not a sight, as required pursuant to this Regulation (1) is necessary. If the ship is in a different Convention country port, the master or owner shall also immediately notify the appropriate authorities of the port State concerned, and the appointed surveyor or recognized organization must satisfy itself that there has been the required report.

S Rule 7 the issue and endorsement of certificate 1 after having been held survey in accordance with regulation 6 shall be issued an international oil pollution prevention certificate for every oil tanker of 150 gross tonnage and above, as well as to any other ship of 400 gross tonnage and above, which goes into service to ports or offshore terminals under the jurisdiction of other Convention countries.

2 such a certificate shall be issued or endorsed by the administration or by any person or Organization duly authorized by it. In all cases the Administration accepts full responsibility for the certificate.

S Rule 8, the issue and endorsement of certificates for another Government 1 A Convention country Government may, at the request of the Administration bear the sight of a ship and, if satisfied that the provisions of this chapter are complied with, may issue or authorize the issuance of an international oil pollution prevention certificate to the ship and, where appropriate, endorse or authorize the endorsement of that certificate in accordance with this chapter.

2 A copy of the certificate and of vision as soon as possible, the report shall be sent to the Administration, who requested the sight.

3 A thus issued certificate must contain an endorsement to the effect that it has been issued in accordance with the Administration's request, and it must have the same validity and enjoy the same recognition as a certificate issued in accordance with rule 7.

4 There may not be issued international oil pollution prevention certificate to a ship entitled to fly a non-Convention country flag.

S Rule 9 Certificate design

The international oil pollution prevention certificate shall be drawn up in accordance with the model set out in Appendix 2 to this chapter 1) and must at least be in English, French or Spanish. Importation in a language that is officially in the country whose flag the ship is entitled to fly, shall prevail in the event of disputes or disagreements.

The period of validity of the certificate rule 10 s 1 an international oil pollution prevention certificate shall be issued for a period of time provided for the Administration, which shall not exceed five years from the date of issue.

2.1 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 1 of this rule, the new certificate, when the renewal set is carried out within 3 months before the expiry date of the existing certificate, be valid from the date that the periodical survey was held to a date not exceeding 5 years from the expiration date of the existing certificate.
2.2 When the sight is performed after the expiration date of the renewal the existing certificate, the new certificate shall be valid from the date on which the renewal the sight was held to a date not exceeding 5 years from the expiration date of the existing certificate.

2.3 When renewal the sight is held more than 3 months before the expiration date of the existing certificate, the new certificate shall be valid from the date on which the renewal the sight was held to a date not exceeding 5 years from the date on which the renewal the sight was held.

3 If a certificate is issued with a maturity, which is less than 5 years, the Administration may extend the period of validity of the certificate to the maximum period specified in paragraph 1 of this rule, provided that the vision, which is referred to in regulation 6.1.3 and 6.1.4 of this chapter be held when certificate is issued with a validity period of 5 years.

4 If the renewal set is held, and a new certificate cannot be issued or placed on board the ship before the existing certificate expires, the person or organization authorized by the Administration, extend the period of the existing certificate. Such a certificate must be recognised as being valid for the specified period, which shall not exceed five months from the expiry date.

5 If a ship is in a port, where vision can not be held and the certificate is expired, the Administration may extend the period of validity of the certificate but this extension shall only be given with the purpose of allowing the ship to complete the journey to the port where the sight can take place and then only in cases where it is considered justifiable and reasonable to do so. No certificate may be extended beyond a period of 3 months , and a ship which has been allowed such an extension shall not by virtue of the extension leave the port where the vision was to take place, without a new certificate. When renewal the sight is held, must the issued certificate's validity period does not exceed five years from the date of the existing certificate before the extension expired, was allowed.

6 a certificate issued to a ship which shall carry out short journeys, and that has not been extended under the former provisions, may be extended by the Administration for a period up to one month from the expiry date as specified. When renewal the sight is made, the new certificate can be valid to a date not exceeding 5 years from the date of the existing certificate before the extension was, had allowed.

7 in exceptional circumstances, as determined by the Administration, a new certificate's validity period does not need to run from the existing certificate expiration period, as required in accordance with paragraph 2.2, (5) or (6) of this rule. In these special cases, the new certificate's validity period does not exceed five years from the date on which the renewal the sight was held.

8 If an annual or intermediate survey is held before the period specified in rule 6, the following shall apply: 8.1 The annual vision date on the certificate shall be amended by endorsement to a date which shall not be more than 3 months later than the date on which the sight was held;

8.2 the subsequent annual and intermediate surveys, as required under rule 8, to be held at intervals, as specified in this rule, and 8.3 the expiry date may remain unchanged provided one or more annual or intermediate survey is held so that the maximum amount of time between surveys, as stated in rule 6.1, are not exceeded.

9 a certificate issued in accordance with regulation 7 or 8, is invalid in any of the following conditions: 9.1 if the required sight is not held within the periods referred to in rule 6.1;

9.2 If the certificate is not endorsed in accordance with rule 6.1.3 and 6.1.4;

9.3 If a ship is transferred to another country's flag. A new certificate shall only be issued when the Government issuing the new certificate is satisfied that the ship fully complies with the requirements of regulation 6.4.1 and 6.4.2. When the case of a transfer between countries, the Convention Government whose flag the ship was formerly entitled to fly, if the request is made within three months after the transfer has taken place, as soon as possible to give the new administration a copy of the certificate, as the ship had before the transfer, and, if available, a copy of that vision report.

S Rule 11 port State control on operational krav2) (1) a ship that is in another Convention country port or terminal, may be subjected to inspection by a person who is duly authorised by the Convention country, when there are clear grounds for believing that the master or crew are not familiar with essential ship procedures in connection with the prevention of pollution by oil.

2 in the light of the circumstances referred to in paragraph 1, the Convention country take such steps that will ensure that the ship does not proceed to sea until the situation is rectified in accordance with the provisions of this chapter.

3 The procedure for port State control, as provided for in article 5 of the MARPOL Convention, to be used in connection with the enforcement of this rule.

4 Nothing in this rule shall be construed as a limitation of the rights and obligations resulting from a Convention country in connection with the performance of the control of operational requirements, as specifically laid down in the MARPOL Convention.

Title III requirements for machinery spaces on all ships

Part A Construction

S Rule 12 tanks for oil residue (sludge) 1

Every ship of 400 gross tonnage or more, taking into account the type and length of the journey, machinery must be fitted with one or more tanks of sufficient capacity to receive the oil residues (sludge), which cannot be dealt with in other ways, which complies with the requirements of this chapter.



2

Oil residues (sludge) can be removed directly from the tank or tanks of oil residues (sludge) through the standard discharge connection referred to in rule 13 or any other means of disposal. The tank or tanks of oil residues (sludge): 2.1

must be equipped with a pump intended for disposal, which can suck from the tank or tanks of oil residues (sludge); and



2.2

must not have any emissions connection to the bilge pumping system, storage tank or tanks for oily bilge water, tank top or the oily water separators; However, the tank or tanks be equipped with drain pipe with hand operated self-closing valves and arrangements for subsequent Visual monitoring of the deposit water, which leads to a storage tank for oily bilge water or bilge wells, or an alternative arrangement, provided that such is not directly connected to the bilge piping system.



3Slamtankes individual pipelines do not have direct connection overboard. The pipelines must only be connected to standard coupling as referred to in regulation 13.

4 ships delivered after 31 December 2006. December 1979, as defined in rule 1.28.2, such tanks be designed and constructed in such a way as to treatment and discharge of residues to reception facilities be facilitated. Ships delivered on 31 December. December 1979 or earlier, as defined in rule 1.28.1 must meet this requirement, so far as is reasonable and practicable.

5

Minimum capacity for slurry tanks.



5.1

For ships that do not carry ballast water in oil fuel tanks, sludge tank capacity is calculated according to the following formula:



(V)

1

= K

1

x C x D (m

3

)



(K)

1

= 0.01 for ships that use heavy fuel oil for propulsion, centrifuge on board or 0.005 for ships that use diesel fuel for propulsion or where the heavy fuel oil not centrifuge on board.



C = Daily oil fuel consumption.



D = the maximum sailing time in days between ports where reception facilities available, if this is not known, at least 30.



5.2

In the case of ships fitted with equipment on board which is recognized by the Danish maritime authority for disposal of oil sludge, sludge tank capacity V1 can be valued at 1 m

3

for vessels of 400 GT and above, and 2 m

3

for ships at 4000 gt and more.



5.3

For ships flying ballast water in oil fuel tanks, sludge tank capacity is calculated according to the following formula:



(V)

2

= V

1

+ K

2

x B (m

3

)



(V)

1

= Sludge tank capacity as specified in 1 or 2.



(K)

2

= 0.01 for ships that use heavy fuel oil, and 0.005 for ships that use diesel oil.



(B) = Capacity of the water ballast tanks, which can also be used for fuel oil.

S Rule 12A Protection of tanks for fuel oil 1 this rule applies to all ships with a total fuel oil capacity of 600 cubic metres or over and which is delivered the 1. August 2010 or later, as defined in rule 1.28.9 of this chapter.

2 the application of this rule for the determination of the location of the tanks used to transfer fuel oil does not override the provisions of rule 19 of this chapter.

3 of this rule, the following definitions apply: 3.1» Fuel oil ' – any oil used as fuel for propulsion and auxiliary machinery on Board of the ship.

3.2 ' load line (ds) ' draught is the vertical distance, measured in metres (molded) from the base line amidships to the summer lastelinjen.

3.3» Lightweight draught ' is the draft amidships (moulded), which corresponds to the vessel's lightweight.

3.4» Partial load line draft (dp) ' is lightweight draft plus 60% of the difference between draft and lightweight load line draft (ds). The partial load line draft (dp) should be measured in meters.
3.5» Water line (dB) ' is the vertical distance, measured in metres (molded) from the base line amidships to the water line corresponding to 30% of the depth Ds.

3.6 ' Width (BS) ' is the ship's maximum width measured in metres (molded) at or below the deepest load line dS.

3.7 ' Width (BB) ' is the ship's maximum width measured in metres (molded) at or below the waterline dB.

3.8» Depth (DS) ' is the depth measured in metres (molded) amidships to the upper deck. " The top deck "means the highest deck to which the transverse watertight bulkheads extending – with the exception of agterpeakskotter.

3.9 ' Length (L) ' – 96% of the total length on a water line, which is 85% of the minimum depth (moulded) above the keel, or the length from the edge of forstævnens the cutting edge to the waterline at that waterline, if that is greater. In ships designed with a rake of keel, the waterline length is measured on must be parallel to the designed waterline. Length (L) measured in meters.

3.10 ' Width (B) ' – the ship's overall width of midship, measured in meters, to spanternes the outer edge (molded) in a ship with an outer garment of metal and to the exterior side of a ship hull with plating of other material.

3.11» fuel oil tanks ' in which fuel oil tanks are kept, but exclude tanks which do not contain oil under normal operations, such as overflow tanks.

3.12» Less fuel oil tanks ' is oil fuel tanks with a maximum individual capacity not exceeding 30 m3.

3.13» C «is the ship's total volume of fuel oil, including the fuel oil in the smaller oil fuel tanks in cubic metres, at 98% filling.

3.14» fuel oil capacity ' is the volume of a tank in m3 at 98% filling.

4 the provisions of this rule shall apply to all fuel oil tanks except less oil fuel tanks, as defined in 3.12 provided that the total volume of the exempted tanks does not exceed 600 m3.

5 individual oil fuel tanks shall not have a volume of more than 2500 m3.

6 For ships not self-raising drilling units, with a total fuel capacity of 600 m3 or more, oil fuel tanks shall be located above the floor are the outer garment (molded) with a distance that is not less than the distance h as described below:

h = B/20 m or

h = 2.0 metres depending on the distance, there are at least.

Minimum value of h = 0.76 m

In the area of the kimingens round surface and places where kimingens round surface is not clearly defined, fuel oil tank boundary line must be parallel to the flat bottom amidships, as shown in Figure 1.



Figure 1 – oil fuel tank boundary lines for purposes of paragraph 6 7 For ships with a total capacity of 600 m3 fuel oil or more but less than 5000 m3, fuel oil tanks must be placed within the ship's bilge (molded) with a distance that is not less than the distance w as described in Figure 2 – measured from any cross-section rectangular on the shell as described below :

w = 2.4 C/20,000 + 0.4 m

Minimum value of w = 1.0. For tanks with a fuel oil capacity of less than 500 cubic metres is the minimum value = 0.76 m.

8 For ships with a total fuel oil capacity of 5000 m3 or more, oil fuel tanks shall be located within the ship's bilge (molded) with a distance that is not less than the distance w as described in Figure 2-measured through any cross section right on the shell as described below:

w = 0.5 + C/20,000 metres or

w = 2.0 m, which is at least.

Minimum value of w = 1.0 m figure 2 – oil fuel tank boundary lines for the use of paragraphs 7 and 8 9 Pipelines that are located a distance of less than h from the ship's bottom as defined in rule 6, or with a distance less than w from the ship's side, as defined in rule 7 and 9, shall be fitted with valves or similar closing devices inside or immediately on the side of the oil fuel tank. These valves shall be capable of being operated from a readily accessible enclosed space, which is accessible from the navigation bridge or from the propulsion machinery control position without having to cross the exposed deck.

Valves shall close in the event of error in remote control system (closed in error mode) and shall be kept closed at sea at any time as long as the tank containing fuel oil. However, it is allowed to open the valves in connection with the transfer of fuel oil.

10 Sugebrønde in oil fuel tanks can stretch into the double bottom under the boundary which is defined by the distance h provided that sugebrøndene is as small as practicable and that the distance between the bottom of the well and ship bottom plating is not less than 0.5 h.

11 as an alternative to paragraph 6 and either paragraph 7 or paragraph 8 must comply with requirements for ships oil outflow in the event of accidents, as specified below: 11.1 the level of protection against contamination by fuel oil in the event of collision or stranding must be assessed on the basis of the parameter for the average oil outflow:

ABOUT 0,0157-1, 14E-6 < · C 600 m3 ≤ C < 5000 m3

C ≥ 0.010 5000 m3 about <

Where:

On = parameter for the average oil outflow;

C = total fuel oil volume.

11.2 the following general assumptions applies by calculating the parameter of the average oil outflow: 11.2.1 Ships are assumed to be loaded to the partial load line draft dp without trim or heeling 11.2.2 All oil fuel tanks shall be assumed to be loaded to 98% of their volume.

11.2.3 Fuel oil's nominal density (ρn) must generally be 1000 kg/m3. If the density of the fuel oil is specifically limited to a lower value, the lower value is used; and 11.2.4 for use in calculating oil outflow, the permeability in each tank be 0.99, unless otherwise approved 11.3 The following provisions shall apply when the parameters of oil outflows are combined: 11.3.1 the average oil outflow must be calculated independently for side damage and for bottom damage, and then combined to form a dimensionless parameter of oil outflows on, as follows:

On = (OMS + 0.4 0.6 OMB)/C

Where:

OMS = average outflow of oil by hand injury in m3.

OMB = average outflow of oil at the bottom damage in m3.

(C) = total quantity of fuel oil.

11.3.2 For bottom damage shall be made independent calculations for the average outflow of oil for tidal conditions at 0 m and at minus 2.5 m, there must be paired as follows:

OMB = 0.7 0.3 OMB OMB (0) + (2.5)

Where:

OMB (0) = average outflow of oil for 0 m tidal conditions, and

OMB (2.5) = average outflow of oil for minus 2.5 m tidal conditions in m3.

11.4 the average outflow of oil by injury in the side OMS, is calculated as follows: Where:

in each oil fuel tank = which are taken into account;

n = the total number of oil fuel tanks;

PS (i) = probability of breakage of the fuel oil tank (in) by injury in the side, calculated in accordance with paragraph 11.6 of this rule;

US (i) = efflux in m3 after injury in the side for fuel oil tank (in), which is assumed to be the total volume of oil fuel tank (in) by 98% filling.

11.5 the average outflow at the bottom damage shall be calculated for each tidal conditions as follows: 11.5.1



Where:

in each oil fuel tank = which are taken into account;

n = the total number of oil fuel tanks;

PB (i) = probability of breakage of the fuel oil tank (in) by damage at the base, calculated in accordance with paragraph 11.7 of this rule;

OB (i) = efflux in m3 after injury in the side of the oil fuel tank (i), calculated in accordance with paragraph 11.5.3; and

CDB (in) = factor for the use of the account of oil conquest as defined in paragraph 11.5.4.

11.5.2 update



Where:

I, n, PB (i), CDB (i) is, as defined in paragraph 11.5.1.

OB (i) = the efflux of m3 from oil fuel tank (i), after the tidal shift.

11.5.3 Oil outflow OB (i) for every oil fuel tank shall be calculated on the basis of the principles of pressure balance in accordance with the following assumptions: 11.5.3.1 ship shall be considered to be stranded, with no trim or heel and with a draught before tidal shift, which is equal to the partial load line draft dp.

11.5.3.2 fuel oil level after injury should be calculated as follows:

HF = {(dP + tC-Zl) (ρS)}/ρn

where:

HF = height of the brændseslolieoverfladen of Z1 in meters;

TC = tidal shift in meters. Reduction of tides must be expressed in negative values;

Z1 = the height of the lowest point in the cargo tank above the base line in meters;

ρs = density of water is calculated as 1.025 kg/m3; and

ρn = fuel oil's nominal density, calculated in accordance with paragraph 11.2.3.

11.5.3.3 Oil outflow OB (i) for tanks near the floor plating should be calculated as no less than the following formula, and not more than tank volume:

OB (i) = HW: (A)

where:

HW = 1.0 m, when YB = 0

HW = BB/50 but not large than 0.4 m, when YB is bigger than BB/5 or 11.5 m, whichever is less.

' HW ' "to be measured upwards from the flat bottom in the middle of the ship. In the area of the kimingens round surface and places where kimingens round surface is not clearly defined to be ' HW ' is measured in a parallel line with the middle of the ship, flat bottom, as shown for the distance h in Figure 1.

By YB values outboard BB/5 or 11.5 m, where it is the lesser of these two values to use, HW linearly interpolated.

YB = the smallest value of YB measured over the length of the fuel oil tank where YB, regardless of location, are seen the lateral distance between the side plating at the waterline dB and the idea at or below the waterline dB.

A = the largest horizontal projection area of oil fuel tank up to HW level from the bottom of the tank.
Figure 3 – dimensions for calculation of minimum oil outflow for use paragraph 11.5.3.3 11.5.3.4 at the bottom damage can a part of the outflow from a fuel oil tank flows into a tank that is not intended for oil. This effect is calculated by approximates factor CDB (i) for each tank, as follows:

CDB (in) = 0.6 for fuel oil tanks, limited from below of spaces not intended for storage of oil.

CDB (in) = 1.0 otherwise.

11.6 the probability PS for bride for a room at the side damage shall be calculated as follows: 11.6.1 PS = PSL * PSV * PST

Where:

PSL = (1-PSf-PSa) = probability that damage will stretch long ship into the area limited by the Xa and Xf;

PSV = (1-PSU-PS1) = probability that damage will stretch vertically into the area limited by the Z1 and ZU; and

PST = (1 – PSy) the likelihood that the injury will stretch transverse across the border defined by y.

11.6.2 PSa, PSf, PSu, and Script must be determined in accordance with the linear interpolation from the probability of injury in side table in paragraph 11.6.3, and PSy to be calculated according to the formulas specified in paragraph 11.6.3, where:

PSA = probability that damage will be totally intend for location Xa/L;

PSF = probability that damage will be completely in front of the location Xf/L;

Ps1 = probability that damage will be completely under the idea;

PSU = probability that damage will be completely over the idea;

Psy = probability that damage will be complete outboard of the tank;

Rumopdelinger Xa, Xf, Z1, Zu and y is calculated as follows:

XA = Distance long ship from the aft section of the L to the aft point of the space measured in meters;

XF = the distance long ship from the aft section of the L to the foremost point of the space measured in meters;

Z1 = the distance vertically from the base line (moulded) to the lowest point in that space, measured in metres;

Zu = Distance vertically from the base line (moulded) to the highest point in that space, measured in meters. Where Zu is bigger than Ds, used Ds; and

y = the smallest horizontal distance measured right on the center line between the space to the side plating measured in meters. 3)

Where the bilge rounds need y not to be taken into account when it is below the distance h above the baseline where h is less than B/10, 3 m or the top of the tank.

11.6.3 Probability table for hand injury.















Xa/L





PSa







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0,000

0.023

0068

0117

0167

0217

0267

0317

0367

0417

0467

0517

0567

0617

0667

0717

0767

0817

0867

0917

0967











 











Xf/L





PSf







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0967

0917

0867

0817

0767

0717

0667

0617

0567

0517

0467

0417

0367

0317

0267

0217

0167

0117

0068

0.023

0,000











 











Zl/ Ds





PSl







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0,000

0,000

0.001

0003

0.007

0013

0.021
0034

0055

0085

0123

0172

0226

0285

0347

0413

0482

0553

0626

0700

0775











 











Zu/ Ds





PSu







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0968

0952

0931

0905

0873

0836

0789

0733

0670

0599

0525

0452

0383

0317

0255

0197

0143

0092

0046

0013

0,000

















Psy should be calculated as follows:

Psy = (24.96 – 199.6 y/BS) (y/BS) for y/BS ≤ 0.05

Psy = 0749 + {5 – 28.9 (y/BS – 0.05)} {(y/BS)-0.05} for 0.05 < y/BS < 0.1

Psy = 0888 + 0.56 (y/BS-0.1) for y/BS ≥ 0.1

Psy cannot be greater than 1.

7.3 probability PB for the bride for a space at the bottom damage shall be calculated as follows: 11.7.1 PB = PBL * PBT * PBV

Where:

PBL = (1 – PBf-PBa) = probability that damage will stretch long ship into the area limited by the Xa and Xf;

PBT = (1 – PBp – PBs) = probability that the damage will extend athwartship into the area limited by the Yp and Ys; and

PBV = (1-PBZ) = probability that damage will stretch vertically across the border defined by z.

11.7.2 the PBa, PBf, PBp and PBs shall be determined in accordance with the linear interpolation from probability table for bottom damage in paragraph 11.7.3 and PBz will be calculated from the formulas specified in 11.7.3, where:

PBA = probability that damage will be totally intend for location Xa/L;

PBF = probability that damage will be completely in front of the location Xf/L;

PBP = probability that damage will be completely port to the tank;

PBS = probability that damage will be complete starboard for the idea;

Pbz = probability that damage will be completely under the idea;

Rumopdelinger Xa, Xf, Yp, Ys and z shall be calculated as follows:

XA and Xf is as defined in paragraph 11.6.2;

YP = The horizontal distance from the point most port in the room located at or below the waterline dB, to a vertical plane located BB/2 starboard of the ship's centre line, measured in metres;

YS = The horizontal distance from the point most starboard in space located at or below the waterline dB, to a vertical plane located BB/2 starboard of the ship's centre line measurement in meters; and

z = the smallest value of z, where z is the vertical distance from the lowest point of the bottom plating to the lowest point in space at any given location in space.

11.7.3 Sandsynlighedstabel for bundskade















Xa/L





PBa







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0,000

0.002

0.008

0,017

0.029

0042

0058

0076

0096

0119

0143

0171

0203

0242

0289

0344

0409

0482

0565

0658

0761











 











Xf/L





PBf







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95
1.00





0969

0953

0936

0916

0894

0870

0842

0810

0775

0734

0687

0630

0563

0489

0413

0333

0252

0170

0089

0.026

0,000











 











Yp/ BB





PBp







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0844

0794

0744

0694

0644

0594

0544

0494

0444

0394

0344

0297

0253

0211

0171

0133

0097

0063

0032

0.009

0,000











 











Ys/ BB





PBs







0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00





0,000

0.009

0032

0063

0097

0133

0171

0211

0253

0297

0344

0394

0444

0494

0544

0594

0644

0694

0744

0794

0844

















Pbz should be calculated as follows:

Pbz = (14.5 – 67 z/DS) (z/DS) for z/DS ≤ 0.1

Pbz = 0.78 + 1.1 {(z/DS-0,1)} for z/DS > 0.1

Pbz must not be greater than 1.

7.3 as regards the maintenance and inspection must all fuel oil tanks that are not adjacent to the shell plating, not be placed closer to the bottom plating than minimum value (h) in paragraph 6 and not closer to the ship's side plating than minimum value w in paragraph 7 or 8.

12 By the drawing approval and construction of ships in accordance with this rule must show adequate regard to the General safety Administrations aspects-including the need for maintenance and inspection of side tanks, dobbeltbunds tanks and spaces.

S Rule 13 Standard clutch

To pipelines from reception facilities to be connected with the ship's pipeline to discharge of waste water from machinery space bilges and sludge tanks, both wires must be fitted with a standard clutch in accordance with the following table:

Standard dimensions of flanges for discharge wires Description





Dimension outside diameter





215 mm







Inside diameter





According to pipe outside diameter







Bolt ring diameter





183 mm







Flange cuts





6 holes, 22 mm in diameter, placed at equal intervals on a bolt ring of the above diameter, carved to the flange circumference. Type of cut width must be 22 mm







Flange thickness





20 mm







Bolts and nuts 6, each of 20 mm in diameter and of appropriate length











The flange must be designed in such a way that there can be used tubes with an inside diameter up to 125 mm and shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material, which has a smooth surface. This flange with associated gasket of oil-resistant material, must be able to keep to a working pressure of 600 kPa.

Part B Equipment

S Rule 14 equipment for separation of oil and water
1 except as specified in paragraph 3, any ship of 400 gross tonnage and above but less than 10000, be provided with equipment for the separation of oil and water in accordance with paragraph 6 of this rule. Any such ship which can emit ballast water stored in an oil fuel tank in accordance with rule 16.2, shall comply with the provisions of paragraph 2.

2 except as specified in paragraph (3), every vessel with a gross tonnage of 10000 or more be provided with equipment for the separation of water and oil in accordance with paragraph 7.

3 It is not required for stationary vessels, storage vessels and ships as a hotel like that only sail if they without transporting cargo to be moved, to be provided with equipment for the separation of water and oil. Such vessels shall be equipped with a storage tank with sufficient capacity for storing all oily bilge water on board, as the satisfaction of the administration. All oily bilge water must be kept on board for subsequent delivery to reception facilities in the country.

4 the Administration must ensure that ships with a gross tonnage of under 400, in so far as is practicable, provided with equipment for the storage of oil or oily mixtures on board or to the depletion of such pursuant to rule 15.6.

Ships with a gross tonnage of under 400 must be equipped with:



4.1

a land connection with pump and an oil/water separation system and possibly. alarm equipment, which makes it possible to treat the oily water from machinery space bilges and jettison this in accordance with the provisions of rule 15, or with



4.2

a storage tank of at least 1 m

3

as well as pump and country connection so that the oily water from the engine room bilges may be retained on board for subsequent delivery to reception facilities in the country, or with



4.3

other systems that may be approved by the Danish maritime authority as well as a land connection with pump.



Ships with a gross tonnage of under 400, which uses centrifuges or similar to treatment of fuel and lubricating oils, sludge tanks shall be provided in accordance with regulation 12, paragraph 1 and 2.



5 the Administration may permit derogations from requirements of paragraph 1 and 2 of every ship, 5.1 as exclusively within special areas, sailing or 5.2 which is certified in accordance with the International Code for safety of high speed craft (or certified in any other way within the framework of this code with regard to size and construction) and which operates in fixed route, where a round trip does not exceed 24 hours and which additionally covers the voyages made by these ships, without the transport of cargo or passengers, 5.3 The following conditions must be met for the purposes of the provisions in paragraphs 5.1 and 5.2:5.3.1 the ship shall be equipped with a storage tank with sufficient capacity for storing all oily bilge water on board, which satisfies all oily bilge water, 5.3.2 Administration retained on board for subsequent delivery to reception facilities in the country , 5.3.3 Administration has judged that adequate reception facilities to receive oily bilge water is present in a sufficient number of ports or terminals, as the ship enters, 5.3.4 in the international oil pollution prevention certificate, when this is required, it is indicated that ship exclusively sails within special areas, or that the ship has been accepted as a high-speed vessel pursuant to this rule where the ship's route is known; and the amount of the oil mixture to 5.3.5 and date and return port must be specified in the oil record book part I.

6 The equipment for the separation of oil and water, which are referred to in paragraph 1, shall be of a design approved by the Administration, and it must ensure that any oily mixture discharged into the sea, which after passing system, have an oil content not exceeding 15 ppm. In the assessment of the design of such equipment must the Administration take into account the specification recommended by the organization. 4) 7 The equipment for the separation of oil and water, which are referred to in paragraph 2 shall comply with the provisions of paragraph 6. It must also be equipped with alarm systems, which specifies when this level cannot be kept. The system must also be equipped with an arrangement which ensures that any discharge of oily mixtures will automatically stop if oil content exceeds 15 ppm. In the assessment of the design of such equipment and event Administration must take account of the specification that is recommended by the organization.

8

Guidance on minimum capacities for oil/water separators for the treatment of bilge water from machinery spaces:



Gross tons (Gt)









Minimum capacity (m

3

/hour)











200-400









0.25











400-1600









0.5











1600-4000









1.0











4000-15000









2.5











15000 or more









5.0













Larger separator capabilities may be required in ships with complex large machinery spaces.



Capacity of oil/water separators, which also is used for the treatment of ballast water, must be approved by the Danish maritime authority in each case.

Part (C) Control of operational discharges of oil

M Rule 15 control of discharges of oil That must be pointed out that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

1 without prejudice to the provisions of this rule and rule 4 paragraphs 2, 3 and 6 is any discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixtures from ships prohibited. 5)

(A) Discharges outside special areas 2 any discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixtures from ships of 400 gross tonnage and above shall be prohibited, unless all of the following conditions is fulfilled: 2.1

The ship must be on travel (en-route).

2.2 the ship uses a filter system, complying with the provisions of rule 14.

2.3 the Oil content of the effluent without dilution does not exceed 15 ppm.

2.4 the bilgewater does not originate from cargo pump-room in oil tankers.

2.5 the bilge water from oil tankers do not contain oil residue derived from the cargo.

(B) Discharge in special areas 3 any discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixtures from ships of 400 gross tonnage and above shall be prohibited, unless all the following conditions are satisfied: 3.1

The ship must be on travel (en-route).

3.2 the ship uses a filter system, complying with the provisions of rule 9.1.

3.3 Oil content of the effluent without dilution does not exceed 15 ppm.

3.4 the bilgewater does not originate from cargo pump-room in oil tankers.

3.5 the bilge water from oil tankers do not contain oil residue derived from the cargo.

4 in the Antarctic area shall oil or oily mixtures not discharged.

5 nothing in this rule shall prevent a ship on a voyage only part of which goes through a special area, from making a discharge outside the special sea area in accordance with paragraph 2.

(C) requirements for ships with a gross tonnage of less than 400 in all sea areas except in the Antarctic area 6 Ships with a gross tonnage of less than 400 must either keep oil or oily mixtures on board for subsequent discharge of them in reception facility or release into the sea in compliance with the following provisions: 6.1

The ship must be on travel (en-route).

6.2 the ship must have installed equipment approved by the administration which ensures that the oil content in expired without being diluted, does not exceed 15 ppm.

6.3 the bilgewater does not originate from cargo pump-room in oil tankers.

6.4 the bilge water from oil tankers do not contain oil residue derived from the cargo.

(D) General requirements
7 anytime observed visible traces of oil at or below sea level in the immediate vicinity of a vessel or its aftermath, should the Convention Governments within reasonable limits shall immediately examine the matter with a view to finding possible violations of this rule. The studies should in particular include wind, sea and currents, the ship's course and speed, about other possible causes for the visible traces are found in the area, as well as relevant registered oil discharges.

8 No discharge into the sea shall contain chemicals or other substances in quantities or concentrations which are harmful to the marine environment or chemicals or other substances which are used in order to circumvent the conditions of discharge specified in this regulation.

(9) the oil residues which cannot be discharged into the sea in compliance with this rule shall remain on board or discharged to reception facilities.

S Rule 16 Separation of oil and water ballast as well as transport of oil in forepeak tanks 1 Apart from the provisions of paragraph 2 shall not be placed in any fuel oil ballast water tank for ships delivered after 31 December 2006. December 1979, as defined in rule 1.28.2, with a gross tonnage of 4000 and more, which are not oil tankers or oil tankers delivered after 31 December 2006. December 1979, as defined in rule 1.28.2 with a gross tonnage of 150 or more.

2 Where the need to transfer large amounts of fuel oil makes it necessary to implement ballast water, which is not pure ballast, in any oil fuel tank, such ballast water discharged into reception facilities or into the sea in accordance with rule 15 by means of the equipment specified in rule 14.2. Information to that effect to be introduced in the petroleum register.

3 in a ship of 400 gross tonnage and above, for which the building contract is created after the 1. January 1982 or, in the absence of a building contract, where the keel is laid or which are at a similar stage of construction after 1. July 1982, oil must not be transported in a forpeaktank or a tank forward of the collision bulkhead.

4 All other ships must comply with the provisions of paragraphs 1 and 3, in so far as is reasonable and practicable.

S Rule 17 Oil journal, part I – machinery space operations 1 every oil tanker of 150 gross tonnage and above and any other ship of 400 gross tonnage and above other than an oil tanker, shall be equipped with an oil journal, part I (machinery space operations). Oil the journal, whether or not it forms part of the ship's diary or presented separately, it shall be as specified in Appendix III to this chapter 6) Records must be conducted in accordance with the instruction in the records.

2 Oil journalens part in must be conducted, if necessary, for each tank individually, each time one of the following machinery space operations performed on the ship: 2.1 Intake of ballast in or cleaning of oil fuel tanks.

2.2 the drainage of dirty ballast or tank cleaning water from oil fuel tanks.

2.3 capture and disposal of oil residues (sludge).

2.4 Discharge overboard or disposal otherwise of bilge water from machinery spaces.

2.5 the Bunkering of fuel or lubricating oil in bulk.

3. if carried out or happens such a discharge of oil or oily mixtures which are referred to in regulation 4, or where, in the event of a discharge of oil as a result of an accident or other unforeseen circumstance which is not excluded by the above rule, must be given an explanation of the register in the circumstances of the discharge and the reasons for them.

4 Each operation described in paragraph 2, shall immediately be entered in the journal's share in oil, so that all entries in the register relating to the Act in question is complete. Each completed operation shall be signed by the person or the person in charge of the officers, and each completed page shall be signed by the master. The entries in the journal's share in oil must, as a minimum, for ships which have an international oil pollution prevention certificate, be drawn up in English, French or Spanish. Where the entries also be drawn up in an official national language of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly, it must override in the event of disputes or disagreements.

5 If the oil filtering equipment fails, it must be noted in the oil of the journal part 1.

6 Oil journalens part 1 shall be stored in such a place, that it is easily accessible for inspection at all reasonable times, and apart from unmanned ships under towing, it must be kept on Board of the ship. It must be kept for a period of 3 years after the last introduction.

7 The competent authority under a Convention country Governments have the right to inspect oil journalens part I on board any ship covered by this chapter, while the ship is in one of its ports or by one of its oil terminals and to make a copy of any entry in the register as well as to require that the master shall certify such accuracy. Any such copy, has been confirmed by the master as being a true copy by the introduction in the ship's oil journal part I should be able to be presented in any legal proceedings as evidence of the facts specified in the introduction. The competent authority inspection of oil journalens part I and the preparation of a certified copy under this paragraph shall be performed as soon as possible and must not cause undue delay to the ship.

8

Oil record book shall be kept clear, and no leaf may burst. What a time is introduced, may not etched, over ironed or otherwise made unreadable. It will be necessary to make the correction in the register, the fix is added as annotation.

Title IV requirements for cargo spaces of oil tankers

Rule 18-36 not applicable for ships covered by this acquis

Title V the prevention of pollution from an oil pollution incident

S Rule 37 ship's oil pollution members 1 every oil tanker of 150 gross tonnage and above and any other ship of 400 gross tonnage and above shall be provided with an emergency plan for oil pollution, as are approved by the administration.

2 such a plan to be carried out in accordance with the guidelines, 7) prepared by the Organization, and must be written in the working language of the master and officers.

The plan shall include at least the following: 2.1 the procedure to be followed by the master or other person who has command over the ship, to be used for the reporting of accidents involving oil pollution, as required in article 8 of the Convention and the Protocol and which is based on the guidelines drawn up by the organisation. 8) 2.2 a list of authorities or persons to be contacted in the event of an oil pollution incident , 2.3 a detailed description of the actions to be taken immediately by persons on board to reduce or control the oil spill after the accident, and 2.4 procedures and contacts on the ship for a coordination of actions on board with national local authorities in connection with the fight against pollution.

3 plan may be combined with marine emergency plan for noxious liquid substances, as is required under rule 17 of Chapter XXII. The combined plan must then be specified by: ' Marine pollution ' by members.

4 Any oil tanker at 5000 tonnes deadweight or more shall have direct access to land-based computer programs that can be used for the calculation of the damage stability and structural strength.

Title VI Reception Facility

M Rule 38 reception facilities should be made aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

(A) reception facilities outside special areas 1 the Government of each country of the Convention are obliged to ensure that oil loading terminals, repair ports and in other ports where ships have oil residue to discharge, for the reception of residues and oily mixtures, there will be a surplus in oil tankers and other ships, provided facilities, there must be sufficient to cover the needs of the ships using them, without causing undue delay to ships. 9) 2 reception facility as referred to in paragraph 1 shall be provided in: 2.1 all ports and terminals, where crude oil being loaded into oil tankers when such tankers immediately prior to arrival has completed a ballast voyage of a maximum of 72 hours or 1200 nautical miles, 2.2 all ports and terminals where oil, apart from crude oil in bulk , loaded with an average amount of more than 1000 metric tons per day, 2.3 all ports that have the repair shipyards or tank treatment plants, 2.4 all ports and terminals serving the ships, equipped with sludge tanks as prescribed in rule 12, 2.5 all ports, with the purpose of reception of oily water from the bilges and other residues which cannot be discharges in accordance with rules 15 and 34 and 2.6 all ports for the loading of bulk shipments, with the purpose of reception of oily residues from combo ships cannot make discharge pursuant to rule 34.

3 Receive plants must have the following capacity: 3.1 Loading terminals for crude oil must have receive plants that are sufficient to receive oil and oily mixtures, which cannot be discharged in accordance with the provisions of rule 34.1, from all oil tankers on travels, as described in paragraph 2.1.

3.2 The loading ports and cargo terminals, referred to in paragraph 2.2, must have receive plants that are sufficient to receive oil and oily mixtures, which cannot be discharged in accordance with the provisions of rule 34.1, from oil tankers, which loads other than petroleum oil in bulk.
3.3 All ports that have the repair shipyards or tank treatment plants must have the reception facility, which is sufficient to receive all residues and oily mixtures, which are kept on board for discharge from ships before they are received by such a yard or plants.

3.4 All facilities provided in ports and terminals in accordance with paragraph 2.4 shall be sufficient to receive all residues retained on board in accordance with rule 12, from all ships, which may reasonably be expected to call at such ports and terminals.

3.5 All installations pursuant to this rule shall be mobilised in ports and terminals, must be sufficient to receive oily water from the bilges and other residues which cannot be discharged in accordance with rule 15.

3.6 the facilities provided in the loading port for bulk shipments, shall, where appropriate, take into account the special problems at kombinationskibe.

(B) reception facilities within special areas 4 Government of each Convention country whose coast line bordering a designated special area, shall ensure that all oil loading terminals and repair ports within the special maritime area is equipped with facilities that are adequate for the reception and processing of all dirty ballast and tank washings from oil tankers. In addition, all ports within the special maritime area be provided with facilities that are adequate to receive other residues and oily mixtures from all ships. 10) such facilities must have adequate capacity to cover the needs of the ships using them, without causing undue delay.

5 Any Convention country's Government, as under its jurisdiction has responsibility for entry into waterways with low depth contour, which may make it necessary to carry out the reduction of the draft deballasting operations, must undertake to arrange for the provision of the facilities referred to in paragraph 4, but with the caveat that the ships have to jettison waste water or dirty ballast , you may be exposed to any delay.

6 With respect to the Red Sea area, Golf fields, the area of the Gulf of Aden and Oman area of the Arabian Sea: 6.1 each Party shall notify the Organization of the measures they have taken in accordance with the provisions given in paragraphs 4 and 5. After having received a sufficient number of messages, the organisation shall establish a date from which the provisions of regulation 15 and 34 with regard to the area concerned must enter into force. The Organization must have at least 12 months before this date will inform all parties of the date fixed therefore.

6.2 in the period between the entry into force of this Convention and the date must be provided for ships during navigation in that particular area to comply with the provisions of rule 15 and rule 34 for discharge outside special areas.

6.3 After this date must oil tankers cargo in ports in the specific areas where such facilities are not yet available, also fully comply with the provisions of rule 15 and 34 for discharges in particular areas. Oil tankers that goes into these special areas for the purpose of loading, however, must take all necessary steps to go into the area with clean ballast on board.

6.4 After the date on which the provisions of that particular area comes into force, every Convention country shall inform the Organization of all cases where plants are alleged to be insufficient, so that it can provide to the parties concerned thereof.

6.5 The reception facility provided for in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, shall be established within one year after this Convention enters into force.

7 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 4, 5 and 6 the following provisions shall apply in the Antarctic area: 7.1 Every Convention national Government that has ports where ships arriving from or going to the Antarctic region, is committed to as soon as possible to ensure that adequate reception facilities are present for the storage of oil residues (sludge), dirty ballast water from tank cleaning and other oil residues and oily mixtures from ships , without causing undue delay to ships and in accordance with the ships ' needs.

7.2 Each Convention country's Government must ensure that all ships flying their flag, is equipped with a tank or tanks of sufficient capacity for storage of all oil sludge, dirty ballast water from tank cleaning and other oil residues and oily mixtures before and during sailing in the Antarctic area and that they have entered into an agreement concerning the discharge of such oil residue to a reception facility after leaving the area.

(C) General requirements 8 Each Party shall notify the Organization of the Convention of all cases in which the installations are provided in accordance with this rule, alleged to be insufficient, so that it can inform the parties concerned accordingly.

Title VII Special requirements to fixed or floating platforms

Rule 39 is not applicable for ships covered by this acquis Chapter XXII



CHAPTER XXII the CHAPTER RESERVED Chapter XXIII



CHAPTER XXIII CHAPTER is RESERVED Chapter XXIV



CHAPTER XXIV the PREVENTION OF POLLUTION by SEWAGE FROM SHIPS Part 1









Handling and storing sewage in great ships







 





Section 1









General









M, S





Rule 1





Definitions







M, S





Rule 2





Use







M, S





Rule 3





Exceptions





 

 

 



 





Section 2









Surveys and certificates









S





Regel 4





Syn







S





Rule 5





Issue or endorsement of certificate







S





Rule 6





Issue or endorsement of certificate by another Government







S





Rule 7





Certificate design







S





Rule 8





The period of validity of the certificate





 

 

 



 





Section 3









Equipment and control of discharge









S





Rule 9





Plants for the treatment of sewage







S





Rule 10





Standard coupling connections









M









Rule 11









Discharge of sewage







 

 

 



 





Section 4
Reception facility









M





Rule 12





Reception facility





 

 

 



 





Section 5









Port State control







 



Rule 13





Port State control of operational requirements





 

 

 







Part 2









Storage of sewage in smaller ships











S









Rule 1









Use











S









Rule 2









Definitions











S









Rule 3









Requirements for new vessels











S









Rule 4









Requirements for existing vessels











M









Rule 5









Use of products for disinfection and other purposes







 

 

 



 

 

 









Introduction to the provisions laid down in chapter XXIV (former chapter XX) are designed on the basis of annex IV to the International Convention for the prevention of pollution from Ships – 1973 MARPOL Convention – with the recent changes, and to annex IV, rule 4 and 5, in the Helsinki Convention.



Rules management is distributed so that the environmental protection agency is responsible for the rules governing the discharge, and the Danish maritime authority is responsible for the rules governing the technical installations on board ships, including records and plans. This Division of responsibilities is set out in the table of contents for each rule with a'm ' for the environmental protection agency and an's ' for the Danish maritime authority.

That is in addition to the technical requirements of the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative rule works issued notices by the Ministry of the environment, which also must be followed.



In the provisions set by the organisation, the IMO MARPOL 73/78 Convention and respectively by the environmental protection agency and the Danish maritime authority by the administration.

Part 1 handling and storing sewage in great ships

Section 1 General

Rule 1 Definitions

In this chapter means: 1. ' new ship ' shall mean a ship for which the building contract was awarded 1.1, or – in the absence of a building contract – the keel of which is laid or which are at a similar stage of construction on the 27th. September 2003 or later; or 1.2 delivered on 27 October. September 2006 or later.

2. ' Existing ship ' means a ship which is not a new ship.

3. ' sewage ' means 3.1 Drainage substances and other wastes from any form of toilets and urinals;

3.2 drain substances from hospitalsrum (pharmacy, sygerum etc.) derived from washbasins, bathtubs and drains fitted in such spaces;

3.3 drainage substances from places where there are live animals; or 3.4 other waste water, when it is mixed with sewage substances, as defined above.

4. ' Storage tank ' means A tank for the collection and storage of sewage.

5. ' nearest land ': the term ' from the nearest land ' means from the baseline from which the territorial waters are laid down in the relevant territory in accordance with international law, in these provisions, however, with the addition that ' from nearest land ' off Australia's northeast coast means: from a line drawn from the Australian coast

from point 11 degrees 00 's, 142 degrees 08 ' s parallel East longitude

to point 10 ° 35 ' South latitude, 141 ° 55 ' East longitude,

from there to the point 10 ° 00 ' South latitude, 142 degrees 00 ' e

thence to point 9 ° 10 ' South latitude, 143 ° 52 ' e

thence to point 9 ° 00 ' South latitude, 144 ° 30 ' e

from there to the point 10 ° 41 ' South latitude, 145 ° 00 ' e

thence to point 13 ° 00 ' South latitude, 145 ° 00 ' e

thence to point 15 ° 00 ' South latitude, 146 ° 00 ' e

from there to the point of 17 ° 30 ' South latitude, 147 ° 00 ' e

thence to point 21 ° 00 ' South latitude, 152 ° 55 ' East longitude

thence to point 24 ° 30 ' South latitude, 154 ° 00 ' e

thence to point 24 ° 42 ' South latitude, 153 degrees 15 ' e on the Australian coast.

6. ' International voyages ' means Vessels from a country covered by this Convention (MARPOL), to a port outside such a country, or vice versa.

7. ' Persons ' shall mean the number of crew members and passengers.

8 ' anniversary date ' means The day and month of each year that corresponds to the expiration date of the international certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage.

Rule 2 Application 1 the provisions of this chapter shall apply to the following ships in national and international1) speed: 1.1 new ships of 400 gross tonnage and above, and 1.2 new ships with a gross tonnage of less than 400, which is licensed to carry more than 15 persons, as well as 1.2 (a)

existing ships that ply the Baltic Sea area and Danish territorial waters, with a gross tonnage of 400 or more



1.2 (b)

existing ships that ply the Baltic Sea area and Danish territorial waters, with a gross tonnage of less than 400, which is licensed to carry more than 15 persons,



1.3 existing ships of 400 gross tonnage and above no later than 27. September 2008; and 1.4 existing ships with a gross tonnage of less than 400, which is licensed to carry more than 15 persons at the latest by 27. September 2008.

(2) the Administration should ensure that existing ships, as referred to in this rule paragraph 1.3 and 1.4, the keel of which is laid or which is at a corresponding stage of construction before the 2. October 1983, so far as is reasonably practicable, is so equipped that they can derive the sewage waste water in accordance with the requirements of rule 11.

Rule 3 Exceptions 1 Rule 11 does not apply to: 1.1 the discharge of sewage from a ship necessary for the sake of a ship or the safety of the occupants or to save human lives; or 1.2 discharge of sewage resulting from damage to a ship or its equipment, provided all reasonable precautions have been taken before and after the occurrence to avoid depletion or limit it to a minimum.

Section 2 survey and certificates

Rule 4 Surveys 1 every ship, which, according to rule 2 shall comply with the provisions of this chapter, shall be subject to surveys listed below: 1.1 an initial survey before the ship is put in service or before the certificate prescribed in regulation 5 shall be issued for the first time, which shall include a complete inspection of its construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices and materials in so far as the ship is covered by this chapter. This vision must be so efficiently that it ensures that the design, equipment, installation, accessory, systems, devices and materials fully comply with the relevant provisions of this chapter.

1.2 A renewal survey at intervals specified by the Administration, the length of which shall not exceed five years, except where rule 8.2, 8.5, 8.6, or 8.7 shall apply. This renewal survey shall be so efficiently that it ensures that the design, equipment, installation, accessory, systems, devices and materials fully comply with the relevant provisions of this chapter.
1.3 An additional survey, either in whole or in part depending on the circumstances, to be held after a repair, which is carried out on the basis of examinations provided for in paragraph 4 of this rule, or by any other major repair or renewal. The sight must be carried out in such a way as to ensure that the necessary repairs or renewals have been effectively carried out, that the materials and workmanship of such repairs or renewals are satisfactory in all conditions, and that the ship complies with the provisions of this chapter under all conditions.

(2) the Administration should put in place appropriate measures for ships not covered by the provisions of this Regulation (1) in order to ensure that the relevant provisions in this chapter are met.

3 survey carried out for the purposes of the enforcement of the provisions of this chapter must be carried out by Administration officials. However, the Administration may entrust surveys to inspectors who are appointed for the purpose or to organizations recognized by it.

4 appoint inspectors or an Administration that recognises organisations to carry out the surveys provided for in paragraph 3, shall, as a minimum, empower any nominated surveyor or recognized organization to: 4.1 to require repair of a ship; and 4.2. to carry out surveys at the request of the appropriate authorities of a port State.

The administration shall notify the Organization of the specific responsibilities and conditions of the authority that have been published to the nominated surveyors or recognized organizations, and this information must be made available to all Contracting Parties to inform their officials.

5 When a surveyor or recognized organization determines that the ship's position with associated equipment not in essence corresponds to the information contained in the certificate or is such that the ship is not fit to proceed to sea without presenting an unreasonable threat of harm to the marine environment, the inspector or organization shall immediately ensure that checks are carried out a rectification of the error , and in due course notify the administration. If such corrective action is not carried out, the certificate should be withdrawn and the Administration promptly informed; If the ship is in a different Convention-party port, the appropriate authorities of the port State shall also be informed immediately. When an official of the Administration, a nominated surveyor or recognized organization has notified the appropriate authorities of the port State, the Government of the port State concerned shall provide the necessary assistance to the appropriate officer, inspector or organization for the performance of his or her obligations under this rule. Where this applies, the Government of the port State concerned take such measures as will ensure that the ship does not sail until it can proceed to sea or leave the port in order to proceed to the nearest repair yard without presenting an unreasonable threat of harm to the marine environment.

6 in all cases, the Administration accepts full responsibility for the completeness and efficiency of the tv and undertakes to take the necessary measures to comply with that.

7 State of the ship and its equipment shall be maintained so that it is in accordance with the provisions of this chapter, in order to ensure that the ship is in all respects will remain fit to proceed to sea without presenting any unreasonable risk of harm to the marine environment.

8 When a sight of the ship in accordance with this rule (1) is completed, it must not without the Administration's approval made no change in construction, equipment, facilities, accessories, devices or materials, as covered by the sight, except the direct replacement of such equipment and accessories.

9 If a ship is subjected to an accident, or if an error is detected, which significantly affects the ship's condition or the efficiency or completeness of the equipment covered by this chapter shall provide the master or operator to report at the first opportunity to the Administration, the recognised organisation or the appointed Inspector, who is responsible for issuing the relevant certificate, which then must launch an investigation that can determine whether a sight under this rule (1) is necessary. If the ship is in another Convention country's port, the master or the shipowner must also immediately notify the appropriate authorities of the port State, the inspector appointed or recognised organisation must satisfy itself that such reporting is submitted.

Rule 5 issue or endorsement of certificate 1 after there has been held a first survey or a renewal survey in accordance with the provisions of rule 4, shall be issued with an international certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage waste water for every ship that goes in the voyages to ports or offshore terminals under the jurisdiction of other Convention countries. In the case of existing ships shall apply this requirement from the 27. September 2008.

2 such a certificate shall be issued or endorsed either by the administration or by any person or organisation, 2) duly empowered by this. In all cases the Administration accepts full responsibility for the certificate.

Regulation 6 issue or endorsement of certificate by another Government 1 A Convention country Government may, at the request of the Administration, conduct surveys on a ship, and, if it is satisfied that the provisions of this chapter are complied with, shall issue or authorize the issuance of an international certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage to the ship in accordance with this chapter , as well as, where appropriate, endorse or give the authority to sign such a certificate.

2 A copy of the certificate and a copy of the report shall be forwarded to the Administration as soon as possible, requesting the sight.

3 A thus issued certificate must contain an endorsement to the effect that it has been issued in accordance with the Administration's request, and it must have the same validity and enjoy the same recognition as a certificate issued in accordance with regulation 5.

4 There may not be issued an international certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage to a ship which is entitled to fly the flag of a non-Contracting State.

Rule 7 Certificate design

The international certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage must be drawn up in accordance with the model set out in annex 1 c to this document. If the language used is neither English, French or Spanish, the text shall include a translation into one of these languages.

Rule 8 the validity period of the Certificate 1 an international certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage shall be issued for a period to be determined by the Administration, which shall not exceed five years from the date of issue.

2.1 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 1 of this rule shall be the new certificate, although renewal vision is carried out within 3 months before the expiry date of the existing certificate, be valid as from the date on which the renewal survey was completed, to a date not exceeding 5 years from the expiry date of the existing certificate.

2.2 When renewal vision is completed after the expiry date of the existing certificate, the new certificate shall be valid from the date on which the renewal vision was completed, to a date not exceeding 5 years from the expiry date of the existing certificate.

2.3 When renewal vision is completed more than three months before the expiry date of the existing certificate, the new certificate shall be valid from the date on which the renewal vision was completed, to a date not exceeding 5 years from the date on which the renewal the sight was completed.

3 If a certificate is issued with a maturity, which is less than 5 years, the Administration may extend the period of validity of the certificate to the maximum period specified in paragraph 1 of this rule.

4 If a renewal survey has been completed and a new certificate cannot be issued or placed on board the ship before the existing certificate expires, the person or organization authorized by the Administration, extend the period of the existing certificate. Such a certificate must be recognised as being valid for the specified period, which shall not exceed five months from the expiry date.

5 If a ship is in a port, where vision can not be held, and the certificate has expired, the Administration may extend the period of validity of the certificate but this extension shall only be permitted with the aim to let the ship complete the journey to the port where the sight can take place, and then only in cases where it is considered justifiable and reasonable to do so. No certificate may be extended beyond a period of 3 months , and a ship which has been allowed such an extension shall not by virtue of the extension leave the port where the vision was to take place, without a new certificate. When the renewal set is completed, must the issued certificate's validity period does not exceed five years from the date on which the existing certificate expired before the extension was allowed.

6 a certificate issued to a ship which shall carry out short journeys, and which have not been extended pursuant to this rule preceding provisions may be extended by the Administration for a period up to one month from the expiry date specified on it. When the renewal set is completed, the new certificate shall be valid to a date not exceeding 5 years from the date where the existing certificate expired before the extension was allowed.
7 in exceptional circumstances, as determined by the Administration, a new certificate's validity period does not need to run from the existing certificate expiration period as required under this rule paragraph 2.2, 5 or 6. In such special circumstances, the new certificate's validity period does not exceed five years from the date on which the renewal the sight was completed.

8 a certificate issued in accordance with rule 5 or 6, will no longer be valid in any of these cases: 8.1 If the mandated surveys are not completed within the periods referred to in rule 4.1.

8.2 when a ship is transferred to another country's flag. A new certificate shall only be issued when the Government issuing the new certificate is satisfied that the ship fully complies with the requirements referred to in rule 4.7 and 4.8. When the transfer occurs between the Convention countries, and a request made within 3 months after the transfer has taken place, the Government whose flag the ship was formerly entitled to fly shall, as soon as possible, submit to the new administration a copy of the certificate, as the ship had before the shipment, as well as a copy of the relevant survey reports, if they are available.

Section 3 Equipment and control of discharge

Rule 9 plants for treating sewage 1 every ship, which, according to rule 2 shall comply with the provisions of this chapter, shall be equipped with one of the following plants for treating sewage: 1.1 a facility for the treatment of sewage of a type approved by the Administration and which meet the organization developed standards and testing methods; 3) or 1.2 a plant for finfordeling and disinfection of sewage approved by the administration. Such a plant must be equipped to the satisfaction of the administration of facilities for the temporary storage of sewage while the ship is less than 3 nautical miles from the nearest land; or 1.3 a storage tank with a capacity that can be applied to the satisfaction of the Administration for the retention of all sewage, having regard to the ship's use, number of persons on board and other relevant factors. 4) Storage tank shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Administration and must be equipped with visual indication of how much it contains.

Rule 10 Standard coupling connections 1 to pipe in reception facilities to be connected with the ship's discharge pipeline to both pipelines, be fitted with a standard coupling option in accordance with the following table:

Standard dimensions of coupling flange Description





Dimension







Outer diameter





210 mm







Internal diameter





In accordance with the pipe outer diameter







Boltrin's diameter





170 mm







Flange cuts 4 holes, 18 mm in diameter, placed at equal intervals on a bolt ring of diameter carved above the flange circumference. Type of cut width must be 18 mm







Flange thickness





16 mm







Bolts and nuts:

the number and diameter





4 each of 16 mm in diameter and of appropriate length







The flange must be designed in such a way that there can be used tubes with an inside diameter up to 100 mm, and must be made of steel or other equivalent material, which has a smooth surface. Flange with associated gasket must be able to keep to a working pressure of 6 kg/cm2.











In ships with a depth (moulded) at 5 meters or less may the internal diameter of the coupling connection be 38 mm.

2 in ships trading on fixed speed, IE. passenger ferries, the ship's discharge pipeline to be equipped with a second coupling option that can be accepted by the Administration, for example, a quick connector.

(M) Regulation 11 discharge of sewage must be aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

1 subject to the provisions of rule 3, the discharge of sewage into the sea take place only if 1.1 ship emits finfordelt and disinfected sewage using an approved plant by the Administration in accordance with rule 9, paragraph 1.2, at a distance of more than 3 nautical miles from the nearest land, or sewage, there is no finfordelt or disinfected at a distance of more than 12 nautical miles from the nearest coast provided that the sewage that has been stored in storage tanks, waste water or sewage from spaces containing living animals, in any case not discharged all at once, but at a moderate speed of expiration, when the ship is underway and shoots a speed of not less than 4 knots; expiration rate must be approved by the Administration on the basis of standards developed by the Organization; or 1.2 ship has an approved facility for the treatment of sewage in use that have been certified by the Administration as being in accordance with the operational requirements referred to in rule 9, section 1.1; and test results of the plant are listed in 1.2.1 certificate for the prevention of pollution by sewage; and 1.2.2 in addition the wastewater must not produce visible traces in the sea or cause discolouration of the surrounding sea.

2 the provisions of paragraph 1 shall not apply to ships sailing in the waters under the jurisdiction of another State, and for visiting ships from other States while they are in such waters, when these ships discharging sewage in accordance with less stringent requirements as may be imposed by such other State.

3 When the sewage is mixed with wastes or waste water spildevandet that are covered in other chapters of this document, must also be fulfilled, the requirements laid down in those chapters.

Section 4 reception facility

(M) Regulation 12 reception facilities should be made aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

1 the Government of each country, as the Convention requires, to ships sailing in the waters under its jurisdiction, and visiting ships while they are within its territorial waters complies with the requirements referred to in rule 11.1, undertakes to ensure that ports and terminals exist at the facility for the reception of sewage in accordance with the needs of the ships using them, without causing unnecessary delays for them.

2 Each Convention country Government must inform the Organization of all cases where plants, established in accordance with this rule, alleged to be inadequate, so that it can inform the other Convention countries Governments accordingly.

Section 5 port State control

Rule 13 port State control of operational krav5) 1. A ship finds itself in another Convention country port or offshore terminal, may be subjected to inspection by a person who is duly authorised by the Convention country in respect of the operational requirements of this annex, where there are good grounds for believing that the master or crew are not familiar with essential procedures on the ship/terminal in connection with prevention of pollution by sewage.

2. If the situation referred to in paragraph 1 of this rule is current, the Convention country may adopt measures that will ensure that the ship does not proceed to sea until the situation is rectified in accordance with the provisions of this annex.

3. Procedures for port State control, as provided for in article 5 of the MARPOL Convention, to be used in connection with the enforcement of this rule.

4. Nothing in this rule shall be construed as a limitation of the rights and obligations of a Convention country in connection with the performance of the control of operational requirements, as specifically laid down in the MARPOL Convention.

Annex A guidelines for type testing and approval of systems for the treatment and storage of sewage, these guidelines have been prepared on the basis of the ' International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973 ', Annex IV (MARPOL 73/78, Annex IV), ' Recommendation on International Effluent standards and guidelines for Performance Tests for Sewage Treatment Plants ' (IMO resolution MEPC. 2 (VI)) and ' Recommendation concerning the Application by the Baltic Sea States of guidelines for Type Testing and Approval of Sewage Treatment System ' (Helcom recommendation Nr. 1/5 adopted on 5 March. May 1980).

CONTENT



1 Application



2 the application for component type-approval



3 Testing for type approval



4 construction requirements



5 Installation description



6 Design requirements for installation



7 Vision



8 explanatory notes



1 Application
These guidelines apply to three different systems, as shown by the following table, where ' yes ' means that the system in question is covered by that section, and ' no ' means that it is not covered.



Section









Effluent treatment plant









Finfordelings and disinfection facilities









Storage tank











2









Yes









Ja, undtagen 2.2.10









Nej











3









Yes, with the exception of 3.7 and 3.8









Yes, except 3.1









No











4









Yes









Yes









No











5









Yes, except 5.7









Yes









Yes, except 5.6











6









Yes, with the exception of 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 6.10 and 6.11









Yes, with the exception of 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 6.10 and 6.11









Yes











7









Yes









Yes, except 7.3.6









Yes, except 7.3.4, 7.3.5 and 7.3.6







 

 

 

 









2 the application for component type-approval



Application with annexes must be sent to the Danish maritime authority in two copies.



2.1

The application must contain the following:



2.1.1

Description of the plant's treatment principle and mode of operation, including schematic drawings.



2.1.2 Material description, including the materials which come into contact with effluent and any chemicals.



2.1.3

. Installation instructions.

2.1.4

. Operating instructions.

2.1.5. Maintenance instructions.

2.1.6. List of the main components in the treatment.

2.1.7

Any documentation of the experience with the plant in operation in ships.



2.1.8

Proposal for a testing program in accordance with these guidelines.



2.1.9

The name of the Department that the applicant proposes to carry out the test.



2.1.10

Name of the laboratory, which the applicant proposes to perform water analyses.



2.2

The instructions, as required in 2.1.3, 2.1.4 and 2.1.5, should be the instructions that usually comes with each plant, and must, among other things. include the following information:



2.2.1 waste water type (black, grey or recirculation).

2.2.2 Skyllevands type (fresh or salt).

2.2.3 the installation's capacity; normal, maximum and minimum (number of persons, flow capacity/plants/hour).

2.2.4 The time, the plant can work with maximum capacity.

2.2.5 Organic design load.

2.2.6 what chemicals are used and in what concentration.

2.2.7 Instructions and warnings in connection with their use.

2.2.8 Diagram of the waste water path through the plant as well as electric chart.

2.2.9 a simple arrangement for control of the treated effluent.

2.2.10 Instruction for storage or treatment of remaining staples.

3 testing and type approval



3.1

The tests must be carried out in accordance with the rules set out in IMO resolution MEPC. 2 (VI).



3.2

The test programme must be approved by the Danish maritime authority.



3.3

Installation installation must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions (section 2.1.3, 2.1.4 and 2.1.5) and to the satisfaction of the Danish maritime authority.



3.4 Testing and analysis must be carried out by a Department and a laboratory which is recognized by the Danish maritime authority.



3.5 All parts of the plant, which will contain or be traversed by waste water, pressure tested in accordance with the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative provisions.



3.6

Where there is good reason to doubt an asset's suitability, after it is installed in a ship, even though it has been tested with satisfactory result pursuant to 3.1, the Danish maritime authority control system after an appropriate operating time of the ship in order to ascertain whether the installation works satisfactorily before the final type approval is issued.



3.7 systems for finfordeling and disinfection of sewage or equivalent installations shall comply with the following standards:



3.7.1

Faecal poor must not exceed 1000 M.P.N. (Most Probable Number) per 100 cm3.

3.7.2

After a set-aside amount on 1 liter has passed through a U.S. Sieve No. 12 (a sieve with mesh size 1.68 mm), the remaining material on the sieve is dried at 103 degrees C in an oven until constant weight. Residual amount must not exceed 10%, but not more than 50 mg of total content of solids.

3.8

Finfordelings and disinfection systems must be tested in accordance with the rules laid down in IMO resolution MEPC. 2 (VI), Annex B, however, with the following changes



3.8.1

The tests must be carried out, as far as possible when the system is installed on a ship.



3.8.2

The test duration must be at least 2 days.



3.8.3

10 analysis samples of departure spildevandet to be taken.



3.8.4

2.5 and 2.8 in the resolution shall not apply.



4 construction requirements



4.1 the installation must be carried out in such a way that it can withstand the mechanical and environmental influences, which it will be exposed to during operation on Board of the ship.



4.2 the plant must operate effectively at an angle of 15 degrees relative to any plan.



4.3

Plant must be equipped for automatic train operation and with alarm, which indicates any errors.



4.4

Plant must be equipped with openings of suitable size for the emptying, cleaning, inspection and maintenance.



4.5 plant must be provided with the windpipe to free tires from all parts, where explosive gases can escape or smelly.



4.6

Analysis samples shall be easily procured.



4.7

The electrical equipment must be carried out in accordance with the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative provisions.



4.8

Plant must be equipped with a durable rating plate affixed to the manufacturer's name, plant type designation, serial number, capacity, manufacturing date and the name of the administration, which has been granted type-approval system.



5 Installation description



5.1 an installation description for each plant must be forwarded to the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative orientation and must include the following:



5.1.1

System type.



5.1.2

The rinse water (fresh or salt).



5.1.3

Capacity (normal, maximum-and minimum load and maximum load in maximum time).



5.1.4 number of persons, as the plant is to be used for.



5.1.5
Drawings of the installation, including schematic drawings of piping systems with all the details that are needed to control the plant.



5.1.6

Make and type designation.



5.1.7

Storage tank capacity.



6 requirements for installation



6.1 Installation must be carried out in such a way that it is fit for purpose and is resistant to the media, it is exposed during the operation of the ship. (To be carried out in accordance with national standards).

6.2

Windpipe must be fitted with wire mesh to prevent a possible ignition of the flammable gases are not spreading to the plant.



6.3

There must be reasonable space by the components on the system that require inspection.



6.4 Storage tank shall be resistant to the media, it is exposed to.



6.5 Storage tank with the associated equipment must be able to operate at an even keel at 15 degrees and a trim at 7 degrees.



6.6 the Storage tank shall be equipped with emergency equipment, which will enter into operation at 3/4 full tank.



6.7

The storage tank shall be constructed that it is resistant to the wastewater.



6.8

The storage tank shall be provided with openings for the emptying, cleaning, inspection and maintenance.



6.9 Storage tank shall be provided with equipment for renskylning and emptying.



6.10 the storage tank shall be equipped with the trachea, which is led to the open air.



6.11

The storage tank shall be designed to allow maximum pressure.



6.12

There shall be a pipeline and pump to the discharge of the sewage waste water to reception facilities in the country. The pipeline must be fitted with a coupling flange with dimensions, as indicated in the technical regulation on the processing and storage of sewage. Other coupling option can be used in ships in fast speed and on domestic voyages.

7 Vision



7.1

Any establishment must pressure tested before it is put into operation, in the presence of a representative from the Danish maritime authority or a person who is authorized by the Danish maritime authority. All parts of the plant, which will occur through the flow of waste water, pressure tested.

7.2

The plant must think before putting into operation, and then every five years by a representative from the Danish maritime authority or by a person who is authorized by the Danish maritime authority.



7.3

The sight must include the following:



7.3.1

Check that the installation is carried out in accordance with the installation plan and to the manufacturer's instructions.



7.3.2 Control of any cathode protections.



7.3.3

Control of alarm functions.



7.3.4

Control of the function of the system's main components in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction (section 2.1.6).



7.3.5

Checking if the dosage of disinfectant liquid is correctly.



7.3.6

Control of any other chemical concentrations.



8 explanatory notes



8.1

The concept of ' sight ', which appears in section 3.6, includes in General not taking samples for analysis.



8.2

When the chlorine used to disinfectant must balance in the treated effluent must be as small as possible and under no circumstances must exceed 0.5 mg/litre.



8.3

Angle 15 degrees as stated in connection with certain tests in sections 4.2 and 6.5 are in accordance with the IMO rules for sewage, but it should be noted, however, that the IMO rules for oil/water separators is 22.5 degrees.



8.4

Permanent ventilation of storage tanks should be considered in the context of future rule changes, but it must be emphasised, however, that storage tanks and associated piping must be bled carefully and atmosphere controlled before people go into the tank.



ANNEX B guidelines for capacity calculation of systems for sewage



These guidelines should be used to calculate the size of systems for the treatment and storage of sewage, so that they comply with the provisions of the Danish maritime authority technical regulation nr. 1 of 15. February 1990. They are based on ' guidelines for Capacity Calculation of Sewage Systems on Board Passenger Ships (Helcom recommendation nr. 11/10 adopted on 14 December. February 1999).

The guidelines contain rules for both black as gray sewage. Black sewage is defined in section 1 of the abovementioned technical regulation. Grey sewage is the term used on drainage water from galleys, laundries, showers, etc., It is only the black sewage, as required in accordance with the prescriptions, but when treated sanitary systems in many ships are arranged so that the black and grey headed for the same plant or sewage tank, indicates the following table also calculation values for such systems.

The most common systems used on board ships, is the conventional system and vacuum system but in individual ships be used however also recirculation systems.



In the following table indicates figures litres per person per day for the three systems.



Systems









Black water









Black/gray water











Conventional









70









230











Vacuum









25









185











Recirculation









2









-







 

 

 









The above-mentioned figures can be waived in connection with any other lavatory systems.



Ships with facilities for finfordeling and disinfection of the sewage waste water must also be equipped with an appropriate storage tank.



Storage tanks must, as a general rule, be large enough to accommodate sewage to 1 day operation.



Ships in dagfart such as fishing vessels can, as appropriate, be provided with a tank capacity of 12 hours.



Passenger ships trading on fixed transport between two ports must have at least a tank capacity for a dobbelttur.



Part 2 the storage of sewage in smaller vessels



Rule 1 Application



These provisions apply to all types of vessels with a gross tonnage of under 400, or who are approved for the carriage of passengers under 15 persons that are equipped with toilet, and which ply the Baltic Sea area and Danish territorial waters.



Regulation 2 Definitions



1

» New vessel ": a vessel the keel of which is laid or which has been produced under the 1. January 2000 or later.

2

» Existing vessel "means a vessel which is not new.

3

' Sewage '-Drain substances and other wastes from toilets and urinals.



4

» Fixed-installed toilet system '. A toilet system, which consists of toilet bowl, storage tank and associated valves and pipes and/or hose connections as well as a land connection.

5

» Portable toilet ': a toilet system, which consists of a toilet bowl with attached portable storage tank without sea inlet, where the tank can be emptied manually by tilt.

6

' Land ' means A connectivity standard connectors through which the storage tank can be emptied via the external pump arrangement.

7

» Sea toilet ': a toilet system, which are not equipped with storage tank, and which have direct access to the Lake.

Rule 3 requirements for new vessels



Fixed and portable toilet systems must comply with the technical requirements in the construction time of the most recent edition of the standard ISO 8099.



Regulation 4 requirements for existing vessels



1

Existing vessels must comply with the requirements of regulation 3 of the 1. January 2005, however, can



1.1

existing portable toilet systems are maintained,



1.2

existing toilet systems are maintained, should be installed if the system is supplied with a land connection according to the standard ISO 8099;



1.3

existing søtoiletter be retained if the toilet is supplied with a storage tank and a land connection in accordance with ISO 8099.



Rule 5 the use of products for disinfection and other purposes



There should be pointed out that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

In any toilet system must be used for the disinfection and other purposes may be used only for products that are not harmful to the marine environment.



Chapter XXV



CHAPTER XXV PREVENTION AGAINST POLLUTION By GARBAGE FROM SHIPS
M, S





Rule 1





Definitions







M, S





Rule 2





Use







M





Rule 3





Disposal of garbage outside special areas







M





Rule 4





Particular requirements for waste disposal







M





Rule 5





Disposal of waste in specific areas







M





Regel 6





Undtagelser







M





Rule 7





Reception facility







S





Rule 8





Port State control on operational requirements







S





Rule 9





Lookup, plans for the treatment of waste and journal entries on waste





 



Appendix 1





Guidance for waste receptacles capabilities





 



Appendix 2





Guidance for lookup on the treatment of waste on board





 

 

 









Introduction provisions of Chapter XXV (former chapter XXIV) is designed on the basis of annex V to the International Convention for the prevention of pollution from Ships – 1973 MARPOL Convention – with the latest changes.



Rules management is distributed so that the environmental protection agency is responsible for the rules governing the discharge, and the Danish maritime authority is responsible for the rules governing the technical installations on board ships, including records and plans. This Division of responsibilities is set out in the table of contents for each rule with a'm ' for the environmental protection agency and an's ' for the Danish maritime authority.

In connection with the introduction of the MARPOL Convention in Denmark, in addition to the technical requirements of the Swedish Maritime Administration's administrative rule works issued notices by the Ministry of the environment, which also must be followed.



In the provisions set by the organisation, the IMO MARPOL 73/78 Convention and respectively by the environmental protection agency and the Danish maritime authority by the administration.

Rule 1 Definitions 1 in this chapter means:

' Waste ' – any kind of food, household and farm waste, with the exception of fresh fish and parts thereof, resulting from the normal operation of the vessel, and as being continuous or periodic disposal. Waste does not include the substances, as defined or specified in the Convention's other annexes.

2. ' nearest land ': the term ' from the nearest land ' means from the baseline from which the territorial waters are laid down in the relevant territory in accordance with international law, in these provisions, however, with the addition that ' from nearest land ' off Australia's northeast coast means: from a line drawn from the Australian coast

from point 11 00 ' s parallel, 142 08 ' e to

point 10 ° 35 ' South latitude, 141 ° 55 ' East longitude, thence to

point 10 ° 00 ' South latitude, 142 ° 00 ' East longitude, thence to

point 9 ° 10 ' South latitude, 143 ° 52 ' East longitude, thence to

point 9 ° 00 ' South latitude, 144 ° 30 ' East longitude, thence to

point 10 ° 41 ' South latitude, 145 ° 00 ' East longitude, thence to

point 13 ° 00 ' South latitude, 145 ° 00 ' East longitude, thence to

point 15 ° 00 ' South latitude, 146 ° 00 ' East longitude, thence to

the point of 17 ° 30 ' South latitude, 147 ° 00 ' East longitude, thence to

point 21 ° 00 ' South latitude, 152 ° 55 ' East longitude, thence to

point 24 ° 30 ' South latitude, 154 ° 00 ' East longitude, thence to

point 24 ° 42 ' South latitude, 153 degrees 15 ' e, on the Australian coast.

3. ' special area ' – a sea area, where the recognised technical reasons, taking into account the area's Oceanographic and ecological conditions and its specific traffic is necessary to make special mandatory rules in order to avoid pollution of the sea by waste. Special areas include those listed in rule 5.

Rule 2 Application

The provisions of this chapter shall, where not otherwise expressly stated, apply to all ships.

(M) Regulation 3 disposal of garbage outside special areas That need to be made aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

1 Apart from what follows from the provisions of regulation 4, 5 and 6:1a) is the disposal into the sea of all items made of plastic substances, inter alia. synthetic ropes, synthetic fishing nets, plastic skraldeposer and incineration ash from plastic products that may contain residues of toxic or heavy metals, prohibited.

1B) of the following types of waste disposal must be done as far as possible from the nearest coastline and is in any event prohibited, if the distance from the nearest land is less than: 1b) 1) 25 nautical miles for dunnage, lining and packing materials, which can float;

1B) 2) 12 nautical miles for food waste and all other wastes, including paper products, rags, glass, metal, bottles, pottery and similar waste;

1 c) can the disposal into the sea of waste, which is specified in this paragraph, paragraph (b)), nr. 2), happen when it has passed through a finfordelings-or grinding plants, and depletion occurs as far as possible from the country, but is in any case forbidden, if the distance from the nearest land is less than 3 miles. Such finfordelt or ground waste must be able to pass through a sieve mesh size is not more than 25 mm.

2 when the waste is mixed with other substances, the discharge of which applies different rules for disposal or discharge, to the strictest rules are followed.

M Rule 4 particular requirements for waste disposal must be made aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

1 Apart from what follows from the provisions of paragraph 2, the disposal of any materials covered by this chapter, prohibited from fixed or floating platforms engaged in investigation, exploitation and related processing of seabed mineral resources, and from all other ships are moored to or located within a distance of 500 m from such a platform.

2 Disposal into the sea of food wastes from such fixed or floating platforms and from ships are moored to or located within a distance of 500 m from such a platform, can, if the platform is at least 12 nautical miles from shore, be permitted when the waste has passed through a size reduction or grinding plants. Such comminuted or ground food wastes must be able to pass through a sieve mesh size is not more than 25 mm.

(M) Regulation 5 disposal of waste in specific areas That need to be made aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation reference is the Ministry of the environment.

1 in this chapter covers the specific areas of the Mediterranean, the Baltic Sea area, the Black Sea area, the Red Sea area, the Gulf region, the North Sea area, the Antarctic Area and The Storcaraibiske Area, which includes the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean, which are defined as follows: 1a) the Mediterranean region means the real Mediterranean with the corresponding gulfs and seas, so that the border between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea, formed by the 41. North latitude and the border to the West of the Straits of Gibraltar at the meridian of 5 ° 36 ' w.

1B) Baltic Sea area means the Baltic Sea proper with the Gulf of Bothnia, the Gulf of Finland and the entrance to the Baltic Sea bounded in the Skagerrak at 57 ° latitude of the skagensbanen 44.8 ' North latitude.

1 c) the Black Sea area means the real Sortehav, so that the 41. North of latitude forms the border between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea.
1 d) Red Sea area means the real Red Sea with Suezgolfen and Aqababugten, bounded on the South by the kompaslinien between Ras si Ane (12 ° 8.5 ' n, 43 ° 19.6 ' e) and Husn Murad (12 ° 40.4 ' n, 43 ° 30.2 ' e).

1E) Gulf region means the sea area to the Northwest of kompaslinien between Ras al Hadd (22 ° 30 ' North latitude, 59 ° 48 ' e) and Ras al Fasteh (25 ° 04 ' n, 61 ° 25 ' e).

1F) the North Sea area means the sea areas: 1f) 1) the North Sea, South of 62 ° North latitude and East of 4 ° West longitude, 1f) 2) Skagerrak limited East of Skagen at 57 ° South 44.8 ' North latitude and 1f) 3) channel and access roads thereto to the East of 5 ° West longitude and North of 48 ° 30 ' North latitude.

1 g) the Antarctic area means the sea area south of 60 ° s parallel.

1 h) The Storcaraibiske area, as defined in article 2, paragraph 1, of the ' Convention of the Wider Caribbean Region (Cartegenea de Indias, 1983) ', means the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea with bays and seas and the part of the Atlantic Ocean within 30 ° North latitude from the Florida border and eastward to 77 ° 30 ' West longitude away a kompaslinie, which crosses the 7 ° 20 ' North latitude and 50 ° West longitude away by a kompaslinie which are drawn to the southwest to the eastern border of French Guiana.

2 Apart from what follows from the provisions of rule 6:2a) disposal into the sea of the following is prohibited: 2a) 1) all items made of plastic substances, inter alia. synthetic ropes, synthetic fishing nets, plastic skraldeposer and incineration ash from plastic products that may contain residues of toxic or heavy metals; and 2a) 2) all other wastes, including paper products, rags, glass, metal, bottles, pottery, dunnage and lining and packing materials;

2B) shall, except as specified in subparagraph (c)) in this paragraph, the disposal of food waste be as far from land as possible, but in no case less than 12 nautical miles from the nearest land.

2 c) to disposal of food waste, which has passed through a finfordelings-or grinding plants, happen as far from land as possible in The Storcaraibiske Area, but in no event at a distance of less than 3 nautical miles from the nearest land, however, only if the disposal not covered by rule 4. Such finfordelt or ground food wastes must be able to pass through a sieve with apertures, which is not greater than 25 mm.

3 when the waste is mixed with other substances, the discharge of which applies different rules for disposal or discharge, to the strictest rules are followed.

4 reception facilities in specific areas: 4a) the Government of each Convention country whose coastline adjacent to a special area undertakes to ensure that as soon as possible in all ports within a special area adequate reception facility in accordance with rule 7, taking into account the special needs of ships sailing to and from these areas.

4B) the Government of each of the countries concerned to inform the organization about the measures they have taken in accordance with paragraph (a)). After having received satisfactory messages, the organisation shall establish a date from which the provisions of this rule with regard to the area concerned must enter into force. The Organization must have at least 12 months before the date you notify all parties of the date fixed therefore.

4 c) After the date specified in such a way to ships calling at ports in these special areas, even where such facilities are not yet available, fully comply with the provisions of this regulation.

5 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 4, the following provisions shall apply for the Antarctic area: 5a) the Government of each country is committed to the Convention in port, as the sender or receiver ships for the ships from the Antarctic area, as soon as possible to ensure adequate reception facilities for wastes from all ships in accordance with the ships ' needs, without causing undue delay.

5B) the Government of each country of the Convention must ensure that all vessels registered in that country before they operate the Antarctic area, has sufficient capacity for storage of all waste during sailing in the area, as well as that there are agreed that the waste can be delivered to a reception facility before leaving the area.

(M) Regulation 6 Exceptions That must be pointed out that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

Rules 3, 4 and 5 shall not apply to: (a) disposal of waste from a ship), when this is necessary for the ship and its occupants safety or for saving life at sea, or b) emissions of waste resulting from damage to a ship or its equipment, provided that before and after the damage intrusion has been observed all reasonable measures in order to prevent the spill or limit it as much as possible , or c) accidental loss of synthetic fishing nets (accidentally) provided that all reasonable precautions have been observed in order to prevent such a loss.

(M) Regulation 7 reception facilities should be made aware that the following rule alone is the DMA translation of MARPOL. For the applicable Danish legislation is referred to the Ministry of the environment.

1 the Government of each country of the Convention undertakes to ensure that there are ports and at the terminals provided facilities for receiving waste in accordance with the needs of the ships using them, without causing unnecessary delays for them.

2 Each Convention country shall notify the Organization of all cases in which the installations are provided in accordance with this rule, alleged to be inadequate, so that it can notify the countries concerned accordingly.

S Rule 8 port State control on operational krav1) (1) a ship in another Convention country port may be subjected to inspection by a person who is duly authorised by the Convention country, when there are clear grounds for believing that the master or crew is not familiar with essential procedures in connection with the prevention of ship pollution with waste.

2 in the light of the circumstances referred to in paragraph 1, the Convention country take such steps that will ensure that the ship does not proceed to sea until the situation is rectified in accordance with the provisions of this annex.

3 The procedure for port State control, as provided for in article 5 of the MARPOL Convention, to be used in connection with the enforcement of this rule.

4 Nothing in this rule shall be construed as a limitation of the rights and obligations resulting from, a Convention country in connection with the performance of the control of operational requirements, as specifically laid down in the MARPOL Convention.

S Rule 9 Lookup, plans for the treatment of waste and journal entries on waste (1) (a) All vessels of 12 metres in overall length and above must have spread, which makes the crew members and passengers aware of the requirements of rule 3 and 5 of this chapter on the disposal of waste. In Appendix 2 to this chapter is an example of one such lookup reproduced.

(1) (b) the research must be written on the ship's staff's working languages. On board vessels sailing on the ports or offshore terminals under the jurisdiction of other Convention countries, must likewise be spreads in English, French or Spanish.

(1) (c)

The lookup must be placed in conspicuous places where passenger and crew members in general move, as well as in the galleys, where stores are being extracted, where waste is sorted, stored and processed and similar places.



(2) All ships with a tonnage of 400 or more and all ships which are certified to carry 15 persons or more, must have a plan for the treatment of waste, which the crew must follow. This plan must include written procedures on the collection, storage, treatment and disposal of waste, including procedures for the use of the equipment for waste treatment. It must also specify the person (s) responsible for the procedures in the plan are implemented. Such a plan must be carried out in accordance with the guidelines drawn up by Organisationen2), and be written in the working language of the crew.

(3) All ships with a tonnage of 400 or more and all ships which are certified to carry 15 persons or more and who are sailing to ports or terminals under the jurisdiction of another Convention country, and all fixed or floating platforms engaged in exploration or exploitation of the seabed resources, must be fitted with a garbage. Waste register should, regardless of whether it is part of the ship's official ship's diary or a part of another journal, be in the form specified in the appendix to annex V of the MARPOL Convention (not included here).

(3) (a) Each discharge or complete incineration of the waste shall be entered in the register, and the responsible officer must with its signature respond therefor at the time of incineration of waste or emissions. Each printed page in the waste register shall be signed by the master. The records in the waste register should at least be in English, French or Spanish. Where the records are also on the flag State's official language, such records have priority in the event of disputes or disagreements;

(3) (b) the record of each waste incineration or discharge must be specified with date, time, the ship's position, description of the waste and the estimated quantity is burned or discharged.
(3) (c) Waste register shall be kept on board the ship and in a place where it is available for inspection within a reasonable time. The register must be stored safely in a period of two years after the last entry.

(3) (d) in the case of discharges, spills or accidental, as referred to in regulation 6 of this chapter, the circumstances, the reason and the loss around the incident introduced in the waste register.

(3) (e)

Waste register must be kept clear, and no leaf may burst. What a time is introduced, may not etched, as appropriate or otherwise made unreadable. It will be necessary to make corrections in the register, the fix is added as annotation.

(4) the Administration may waive the requirement of garbage for: (4) (i) vessels that are engaged on voyages of a duration of one hour or less, and who is authorized to carry 15 persons or more (the Danish maritime authority waives general requirement referred to in paragraph (i)), or (4) (ii) fixed or floating platforms engaged in exploration or exploitation of resources påhavbunden.

(5) Member country's competent administration must review the waste register on all ships covered by the provisions of this chapter when such ships lie in its ports or at its terminals. The Administration must take a copy of any entry in the register and must demand that the driver shall certify the copy. Any such copy, which has been certified by the master as a true copy of an entry in the register of waste, must be accepted in any legal sense, as proof of the facts specified in the record. The competent administrative review of waste journal as well as copying and certification of the copy must be carried out as quickly as possible without causing undue delay.

(6) For ships built before 1. This provision shall apply from 1 July 1997. July 1998.

(7) (a)

All ships shall be provided with storage facilities with capacities that are sufficient for the storage of solid waste on board as well as food waste, taking into account for the particular ship sailing area and sailing to the port, which is able to receive waste. The ships shall, as a minimum, be equipped with storage facilities with capacities as specified in Appendix 1.

(7) (b)

In all passenger ships must be in accommodation spaces and on open deck be keen litter bins at appropriate places and with the appropriate distance.



(8)

On ships built after 1. January 1997 must comply with the provisions of resolution MEPC incinerators. 59 (33)» Standard specification for shipboard incinerators '.

Appendix 1

Guidance for waste receptacles capabilities gross tonnage and number of persons









Waste receptacles





minimum capacity (m

3

)











< 400 with up to 10 people









0.1











with up to 50 people < 400









0.5











400-1600









0.4











1600-4000









1.2











4000-10000









2.5











10000 and above









5.0











Ships carrying more than 50 people









1.0 m

3

per 100 persons per day













Ships must be equipped with three waste containers according to the three categories of waste, as listed in the ' guidelines for the implementation of Annex V of MARPOL 73/78 '. Garbage can in General be expected to consist of 50% glass, cardboard, paper, etc., 25% plastic and 25% foods.

Waste containers capacity can be reduced for ships sailing to and from only two ports, or who have short sailing time or who is provided with waste incineration furnaces or compactor and grinding plants.

Appendix 2

Guidance for lookup on the treatment of waste on board example of it in rule 9, paragraph 1, required the lookup on waste:



Waste from ships should be sorted according to the following table and shall be stored in containers on board.

All waste from the ship shall, as far as possible, be delivered to port reception facilities in the country.

Legal waste disposal from ships in sea may only be carried out in accordance with the following table and in accordance with the permission of the ship's captain or officers.

Illegal disposal of waste at sea will be punished









Waste









Outside special areas









Special areas









All types of plastic including synthetic ropes and fishing nets and garbage bags





Prohibited





Prohibited







Dunnage lining and wrapping material which can flow





25 nautical miles from

nearest coastal





Prohibited







Paper, rags, glass, metal, bottles, pottery and similar materials





12 nautical miles from the

nearest coastal





Prohibited







Food waste





12 nautical miles from the

nearest coastal





12 nautical miles from the

nearest coastal













Chapter XXVI



CHAPTER XXVI the PREVENTION of AIR POLLUTION FROM SHIPS (1)









General provisions







 





Rule 1









Use







 





Rule 2









Definitions







 





Rule 3









General exceptions











S









Rule 4









Equivalence







 

 
 



 





Section II









Surveys, certificates and control measures











S









Rule 5









Vision











S









Rule 6









Issue or endorsement of certificate











S









Rule 7









Issue or endorsement of certificate by another Government











S









Rule 8









The certificate form











S